A Dance With Dragons

Posted originally on the Archive of Our Own at http://archiveofourown.org/works/46825153.

Rating: Teen And Up Audiences

Archive Warning: Creator Chose Not To Use Archive Warnings
Category: M/M
Fandom: Avatar: The Last Airbender
Relationship: Sokka/Zuko (Avatar)
Characters: Zuko (Avatar), Sokka (Avatar), Ozai (Avatar), Azula (Avatar), Iroh
(Avatar)
Additional Tags: Alternate Universe - Arranged Marriage, Alternate Universe - Canon
Divergence, Fire Nation politics, Bad Parent Ozai (Avatar), Iroh is a
Good Uncle (Avatar), Hurt/Comfort, Emotional Hurt/Comfort, Angst,
Hurt Zuko (Avatar), Protective Zuko (Avatar), Protective Sokka (Avatar),
Enemies to Friends to Lovers, Slow Burn, as in 'Zuko's progress in
learning firebending'-slow, Canon-Typical Violence, Zuko is an
Awkward Turtleduck, Will be canon-compliant at some point, Mentions
of Character Death
Language: English
Collections: Sawdust Trove
Stats: Published: 2023-04-29 Updated: 2024-01-26 Words: 141,790 Chapters:
30/?
 A Dance With Dragons
by KimWarris

Summary

“You should be grateful, that we finally found something, that you can contribute to this
nation and this family. You will marry Hakoda’s son and bind him to us. Having his son
married to Fire Nation Royalty will ail him deeply. And by doing so you will officially resign
from the title of the Crown Prince and Azula will be announced my successor.”

Zuko feels numb. He can’t believe this is happening to him. Everything he’s worked for, all the
efforts, all the hours he put into becoming a worthy successor, all for nothing. This has
nothing to do with kindness. His father found a way of killing two birds with one stone. He’s
gaining a leverage over the Water Tribe Chief and the opportunity to install his favorite child
as his heir.

Or: As if Zuko's life isn't already difficult enough, his father puts yet another burden on him.

Notes

This is my first shot at an Avatar-fanfic as I only got back into the fandom currently.
I plan to update at least once a week.

In this fanfiction Zuko is already seventeen, when he gets his scar, Sokka is sixteen. The
Avatar hasn't returned yet and the Royal Palace is really just a snake, uh, dragon pit.
 A task for the Prince

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 1: A task for the Prince

Zuko stares at the canopy above his bed. It’s what he’s been doing for the last few days. By
now, he has memorized every fold in the scarlet fabric, every twist of the intricate golden
pattern and every shadow the nearby fire casts.

The burning and itching under the bandages on the left side of his face drives him crazy. The
pain is ever so slowly subsiding, but it still hurts. In more ways than one.

He balls his hands into fists and tries to breathe evenly, but the anger is burning inside him.

It’s been only five days since the Agni Kai, but neither his father nor his sister have come to
visit him. Zuko is not surprised. In fact, he’d be more surprised if one of them would’ve been
here. The only family member to come and check in on him is his uncle. He tries his best to
keep him company and though Zuko’s first impulse had been to send him away, he is actually
grateful for Iroh’s comforting words and the occasional encouraging ruffles through his hair.

It doesn’t really help to take his mind of his father.

There is a bitter tug around his mouth and Zuko is overwhelmed by the mixture of anger,
frustration and confusion, that has settled on him ever since he came back to consciousness.

He had spent his entire life trying to live up to his father’s expectations, but no matter how
hard he tried, he always fell short. Zuko had never been the powerful bender the Fire Sages
had predicted he would be and that was something his father couldn’t forgive.

The young prince tried his best. Despite the dedication to his training and studies, almost
borderlining on obsession, his father continued to see him as a disappointment. It was
something that had started already in his childhood, when his younger sister managed to
ignite a flame before he did. And ever since then, things have only gotten worse.

But Zuko did never expect to find himself in the arena, facing his own father and being
scarred for life. Only now the young prince realizes how deep the Fire Lord’s hatred towards
him must run. Had he really failed his father so completely by telling the truth, that he
deserved to be publicly punished in such a cruel and permanent way?

Despite his anger and pain, Zuko feels a sense of clarity. He knows, that what he said was
right. Sacrificing a whole battalion of young soldiers, who were eager to fight for their
country, to contribute to their nation’s success in an endless war, and betraying them by
sending them into their certain death was just wrong. Even if there was some political or
economic gain, it did not justify the sacrifice. He had to say something. And he paid the
price.

Zuko has yet to look into a mirror, but from how it feels like, his face must look horrible. He
knows that he will never be the same, not after what happened. And not only on the outside.

His father’s words still ring in his ears and he balls his fists so hard, that his finger nails dig
into the palm of his hand.

“Rise and fight, Prince Zuko. You will learn respect and suffering will be your teacher.”

It hadn’t been just an empty phrase. It had been a promise.

And Zuko knows that it’s not over.

He had always hoped that one day he would be able to earn his father’s approval, but now the
young prince realizes that this is never going to happen. His face would be a constant
reminder of his own failure and it dawns on him, that probably he failed himself even more
than the Fire Lord. In pursuit of an unattainable goal he had been sacrificing his own wishes
and his own happiness.

A knock on his door interrupts his train of thoughts and Zuko looks up.

“The Fire Lord requests your presence in the Throne Room, Prince Zuko.”

Zuko flinches. This can’t be good news.

His father just showed the world what he thought of his son and a dark presentiment takes a
hold of the Fire Prince. What if there is another punishment waiting for him? What if his
father came to the decision that Zuko should be send as one of those soldiers to the Earth
Kingdom? He knows that his father holds no love for him, but surely he wouldn’t send him
away to be killed in battle? Panic rises within him and his body shakes, when he sits up
slowly.

Zuko feels a little dizzy, but he won’t excuse himself because of it. He’s stronger than that.

The servant helps him dress and Zuko tries to look unbothered when he follows him to the
Throne Room. Hushed whispers from nobility, guards and staff alike follow him through the
palace, some pitiful, others full of spite and scoff. The grim line around his mouth might give
his feelings away, but Zuko holds his head up high as he’s been taught.

He knows that it is not a coincidence that the Fire Lord chose such a busy hour for him to
walk through the Palace. It’s to show the power and mercilessness he possesses and to further
humiliate the young prince.

Zuko tries to ignore all of the spectators and he is actually relieved, when they arrive at their
destination. The feeling last exactly until the moment he enters.

The fire in front of the throne burns high as ever and behind it, he makes out the two
silhouettes of his father and his sister, Azula. She is sitting to their father’s right, in his place,
the place that is reserved for the crown prince or princess of the Fire Nation and Zuko feels
his heart sink.

It’s a calculated move, he realizes, another small but effective way to show him that Azula is
his father’s favorite. He tries to keep his expression neutral, when he kneels in front of them,
but inside he’s seething with rage. The injustice of it all is almost too much to bear and he
can’t help but wonder, if he will ever be able to win back his father’s trust and respect.
Maybe he never had it in the first place. He was always just second best to his own sister.

“Father”, he acknowledges the Fire Lord after a moment of keeping his head down.

The flames diminish by a wave of his father’s hand and Zuko glimpses up.

Fire Lord Ozai watches him with open disgust, while Azula next to him seems far too pleased
for Zuko’s liking. A wicked smile is on her lips, while she looks down on him.

“You have brought shame to our family, Prince Zuko, by questioning my judgement in
council. I must say, I was surprised to witness such a lack of loyalty to your father and your
nation. Especially, as you are always so eager to gain my respect. But what does it matter?”

Ozai makes a dismissive gesture with his hand and Zuko flinches, expecting a flame to erupt
from his father’s hand. The Fire Lord must notice, because he snorts disparagingly.

“Weakness”, he continues, emphasizing the word and putting as much despise into it as
possible. “When I asked you to stand and fight, you refused. Lacking obedience to me. Or so
one could think, if there hadn’t been those tears. Weakness. What a shameful representative
of the great Fire Nation. But that is all I have ever gotten from you, is it not?”

Zuko’s eyes go wide and he doesn’t dare to answer. His heart is thrumming in his chest,
because he knows that there is more to come and he is terrified of what it might be.

“I had such high hopes for you, my son. The Fire Sages prophesied that you would be one of
the strongest firebenders of our time. But what have you accomplished? Nothing. Your
bending is mediocre at best. I have given you the opportunity to prove yourself time and time
again. Yet, here we are. What a disappointment.”

Zuko bites his lip so hard, that he tastes blood. He doesn’t dare make any traitorous noise.
His father’s words are like daggers into his very core and he actually feels worse than during
the last few days.

Azula’s smile gets even wider. His father sighs.

“I admit, that I was ready to send you to join the 41st division. It seemed like a fitting
consequence for your actions.”

So he did want to send Zuko to die. The young prince gasps and Ozai gives him a sharp look
of discontentment.

“But I changed my mind. You will be surprised to hear that it was Admiral Zhao, the very
admiral you insulted during the council, who reminded me that an act of kindness would be a
demonstration of true greatness.”

Even though he is still fighting down the panic that threatens to overwhelm him, Zuko frowns
in confusion. ‘Kindness’ is literally the last word that comes to mind, when thinking of
Admiral Zhao. This can only mean, that something terrible awaits him.

As his father makes a meaningful pause, Zuko realizes that he should say something.

“I do not deserve your kindness, father. I have done you wrong”, he croaks out hastily and his
father nods.

“You may not deserve it, but you will do as I say. Tell me, Prince Zuko. Do you know, who
Chief Hakoda is?”

Zuko’s frown gets deeper at the sudden change of subject, which causes a sting of pain on his
face. He hisses slightly.

“I do”, he says weakly, before gathering himself. “He is the Chief of the Southern Water
Tribe and their fleet. He has been responsible for many losses on our side, ships and men
alike.”

“Indeed”, Ozai agrees grimly. “Hakoda has been causing way too much trouble lately. He has
a long history with our nation and after his wife had been killed a few years ago, he hadn’t
been the same. Actually, we thought he had given up. That turned out to be a false
assumption and during the last few months the Southern Water Tribe has been a constant
nuisance for our troops. It seems like the death of his wife has taught him nothing. It makes
sense in a way. What’s gone is gone. A dead person is no leverage.”

Zuko listens to his father’s words in stunned silence and a cold shiver runs down his spine by
the nonchalance in his voice. One could think that he was talking about the weather and not
about war and death.

“You will be thrilled to hear, that Admiral Zhao managed to capture one of Hakoda’s
children. It seems the Chief was too sure of himself and he became careless. There was
almost no resistance, when Zhao attacked the village. And now, we have Hakoda’s son under
our control to do with him as we please. That is where you come into the picture.”

The Fire Lord's cold eyes focus on him and Zuko’s mind is absolutely blank. He has no idea,
what his father is getting at.

“You should be grateful, that we finally found something, that you can contribute to this
nation and this family. You will marry Hakoda’s son and bind him to us. Having his son
married to Fire Nation Royalty will ail him deeply.”

Zuko blinks. His mind races as he tries to process the words. He stares at his father at a
complete loss for words.

That is not, what he expected. He knew that his father had plans to use him as a pawn, but
this is a whole new level. Zuko had always known that he would have no freedom in his
choice of partner, but this is beyond what he could have imagined. The shame and dishonor
of marrying a Water Tribe peasant, a male Water Tribe peasant, would be unbearable. Why
would his father do that? Did he really only see Zuko as nothing more than a bargaining chip
in this war?

Fire Lord Ozai raises an eyebrow expectantly, but Zuko is still too shocked. He is only
seventeen. The prospect of spending the rest of his life in a loveless marriage with a stranger
makes him feel sick to his stomach. But he knows better than to show any sign of weakness.

His father shifts impatiently on his throne. Azula must notice it too, because she suddenly
speaks up, her clear voice echoing loudly through the room.

“You must forgive his speechlessness, Father. I assume Zuko is too overwhelmed by your
graciousness of gifting him a husband, when his actions should have brought him banishment
or worse. I am sure he is beyond grateful.”

„Is that so, Prince Zuko? Are you grateful?”

Still staring at him in horror, Zuko nods, because he doesn’t want to think about what will
happen if he doesn’t.

“Of… of course, Father. Words fail to describe how… strongly I feel about your decision.”

He doesn’t miss the raise of an eyebrow on his father’s face, because that statement could
literally mean everything. But Zuko is not only terrified, he’s confused. It doesn’t really make
sense. Sure, his father wants him humiliated. But how would marrying his son to the enemy
would benefit him?

Azula answers that question for him.

“Father. Zuko is the Crown Prince. He is your successor. But how can the line of succession
be kept intact if he is to marry a boy?”

“That is an excellent question, Princess Azula.”

He says it, as if he just thought of it, and only now does Zuko realize what this really is. This
is not only a punishment, but also a way to strip him of his status as the Crown Prince.

He glares at his sister, who looks back at him coldly.

“Hmm, I would say he can’t fulfill that task. By disqualifying himself from the line of
succession, Prince Zuko will be free of the burden of leadership weighing him down.”

“Father?”

Zuko feels numb. He can’t believe this is happening to him. Everything he’s worked for, all
the efforts, all the hours he put into becoming a worthy successor, all for nothing. This has
nothing to do with kindness. His father has found a way of killing two birds with one stone.
He’s gaining a leverage over the Water Tribe Chief and the opportunity to install his favorite
child as his heir.
Zuko will be pushed aside to serve as a tile in their game of Pai Sho and he knows, that they
will find a way to make him miserable.

But it’s not as if he has a choice, has he?

“I understand”, Zuko says weakly, defeated.

Azula smirks at him and a surge of anger towards his sister rises within him. She’s always
been the perfect daughter, the prodigy, the one who never disappoints. And she’s clearly
enjoying his pain.

“Excellent”, his father agrees and it ails Zuko to hear him sound so pleased at the prospect of
causing him misery. “You will officially resign the title on the day of the wedding and Azula
will be announced Crown Princess and my successor.”

She bows deeply before him and Zuko feels nauseas. “Thank you, Father.”

She throws an evil look at Zuko, who shrinks under her glare.

“Perhaps this marriage will teach you obedience and loyalty to your family and nation”, the
Fire Lord says. “You will be informed about the details, but you may go now.”

Zuko bows his head, hiding the turmoil inside him. He gets up without another word and
turns to leave. Anger and rage are boiling in his stomach. He has been robbed of any chance
to fulfill his duty to the Fire Nation, only to be looked down upon by society and possibly
even ostracized for marrying a man from the Water Tribe. The young prince knows that he
has no choice, but to obey his father’s order.

He’s going to pay for stepping out of line for the rest of his life.
 The Wedding
Chapter Notes

Thank you all so much for your comments, kudos and bookmarks! I am so happy about
them and I appreciate your feedback.
I have decided to not post on a fixed schedule, but as I go.
Alas, here comes the new chapter. Enjoy!

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 2: The Wedding

The little wooden figure of a dragon spins out of Zuko’s hand accompanied by an agitated
roar. It’s not the first object hitting the wall since he got back to his room. The young prince
is pacing back and forth, outraged by his father’s latest decision.

When his door opens and Uncle Iroh steps into the chamber, the old man is almost hit by
another decorative item that comes flying through the room.

“Leave me alone!”, Zuko yells. He is not in the mood for one of his uncle’s lections right
now.

Iroh, however, seems rather unimpressed by his outburst. He enters and a servant carrying a
pot of tea as well as two cups follows him. Zuko glares at both of them out of his unbandaged
eye and he manages to make at least the servant flinch uncomfortable. The skinny man places
the pot on the table hastily and pours the tea into the two cups, before he excuses himself and
hurries out of the room.

His uncle waits until the servant is gone, before he sits down at the tea table and looks at
Zuko.

“It is good to finally see you out of bed, nephew.”

Zuko snaps. “Yeah, I have never been better. Thank you very much.”

“You shouldn’t let the tea go cold.”

“I don’t care about your stupid tea, Uncle. What are you doing here, anyway? I don’t need
your pity or wisdom or whatever. Just leave me alone!”

Iroh sips his tea calmly, watching him with a measured expression.
“I understand that this is a difficult situation, but you mustn’t let your anger control you.”

Zuko whirls around and glares at him, his fists clenched at his sides.

“How can I not be angry?!”, he yells. “This is ridiculous. I can’t believe this is really
happening! My own father stripped me of my title, my birthright and now he’s forcing me
into a marriage with a Water Tribe peasant. And you ask me to not be angry about it?! It’s
just not fair!”

Iroh hums in agreement. “Life is hardly ever fair, Prince Zuko. But we must make the best of
the cards that we are dealt.”

Zuko stops his pacing and looks at his uncle in disbelief.

“I don’t know, if you understand this. I am going to be stuck in this marriage, a prisoner in
my own life. How could I ever restore my honor or gain father’s respect now?”

“You are not necessarily stuck”, his uncle says calmly, taking another sip of his tea. “You
may not have chosen this marriage, but you can choose how you approach it. You can choose
to not see the boy as a burden, but as a partner. Together, the two of you could create a life
that is fulfilling and meaningful.”

Scoffing, Zuko starts pacing again.

“Sure. He will be thrilled to have me and we will live happily ever after.” Sarcasm drips from
his words. “This is not some grand, romantic epos, Uncle. This is the real world. He will
probably hate me – and rightfully so - just like everyone else in this family.”

Iroh’s expression softens and Zuko regrets his words immediately.

“Not everyone in your family, Prince Zuko”, his uncle reminds him gently. “To me you are
like a son. I have faith in you. Just think about it: Sokka is in the same situation as you are,
forced into something he never wanted. You two might find some common ground in this.
And who’s to say this won’t turn out better than you think?”

Letting out a frustrated sigh, Zuko sits down on the opposite side of the tea table and takes
the cup into his hands.

“I don’t know if I can do this, Uncle”, he admits, voice barely above a whisper. “I am so tired
of being a pawn in my father’s games.”

Iroh closes his eyes for a moment, before he reaches out and lays a hand on Zuko’s shoulder,
feeling the tension the young man’s muscles.

“Ah, I’m afraid you must see it through. But you are strong, Zuko. You must never forget,
that in the darkest of times, hope is something you give yourself. That is the meaning of inner
strength. And you are not alone. I will always be here for you, no matter what happens.”

Zuko’s anger simmers down, making space for resignation. He takes a sip of his tea, noticing
that it’s his favorite flavor of Jasmine and Orange. It’s a small comfort, but he’s grateful
nevertheless. His mind is still running a mile a minute and he feels simply overwhelmed.
After a few minutes of silence, he glances up at his uncle again, curiously.

“You say his name is Sokka?”

Sokka's heart is pounding in his chest as he is led through the crowd flanked by four Fire
Nation soldiers, each one of them towering over him, reminding him that there is no escape.
It's unnecessary, because the Water Tribe boy knows that he can't get away, but that doesn't
diminish the desperate urge to run, to fight back against his captors.

A by now well-known feeling of panic threatens to get a hold of him once again, but Sokka
tries to keep his composure. He’s cried enough throughout the last days in the darkness of his
cell. They must not know how terrified he is.

Sokka can't tell how long he has been on the ship that took him away from home. There had
been a storm, that had everybody of the crew tense and anxious. Knowing how unpredictable
the weather in the South could be, that didn't ease his fear. Sitting in the dark, cold cell and
hearing the water crash against the metal wall of the ship, being tossed around by the tide has
been everything but pleasant. Not knowing where they would take him, what they would do
with him and if he would ever see home again was worse.

But the storm proved to be the single reason for the crew not to turn around as soon as they
noticed that they had the wrong person. And that's the good thing: It's him walking up these
stairs to meet this fate instead of his little sister and that is exactly what Sokka tried to
achieve.

His plan had been perfect and it worked and that is worth every tear and all the fear and pain.
It doesn’t matter what becomes of him as long as the tribe is safe.

Sokka clenches his teeth and raises his chin, trying to put on a proud expression instead of
letting desperation get a hold of him.

People are staring at him and Sokka feels uncomfortably warm, not only due to the
unfamiliar heat. The sun has reached its highest point, it’s almost literally burning down on
him and the Water Tribe boy is just not used to such brightness and temperature. He can feel
the eyes of the Fire Nation noblemen- and women following his every move. Some of them
glare at him with open hostility, while others simply look at him with disdain or plain
amusement.

He must make a ridiculous picture, dressed in those Fire Nation robes, that can't fool anyone.

For a moment Sokka seriously considers to make a run for it, even though he knows that he
cannot possibly get away from here. He doesn't stand a chance against all those firebenders.
It’s too late to run and with everybody’s eyes on him he feels small and powerless.

No, he can't run. He has to face this. The captain of the Fire Nation ship made it very clear
that should he misbehave or make a scene they would go back and destroy what little is left
of the Southern Water Tribe and that their well-being depends solely on Sokka.

Thinking of them hurts and Sokka is sick with worry. He hopes that Katara is safe, back
home. She must be so worried and he actually feels guilty for causing her sorrow. He thinks
about father, wherever he may be, and wonders if he knows what is about to happen to him.
Sokka allows himself a moment of self-pity, as he remembers the smell of the sea, the sound
of the waves, the icy wind in his face. He thinks of snow and ice and penguins, of GranGran
and the few children back in the village and he wonders if he will ever see any of them
again.He knows that he has to go through with this, no matter how much it scares him. He
has to protect his people.

Sokka still doesn’t understand why the way to go about this is a marriage to some dubious
prince. What could the Fire Nation probably gain by doing that? From the guards’ comments
and snarky remarks, their morbid amusement on his behalf Sokka expects the worst. He
understood that they don’t hold Prince Zuko in high regards either and he wonders what kind
of person that man must be. But then again, what kind of people would marry a sixteen-year-
old prisoner to their royalty? Sokka tried not to think about what might await him, but he’s
sure that torture and abuse will be a part of it.

He shoves the thought as far away as possible.

Sokka has been so caught up in his reflections, that he’s a little surprised to find that they
made it to the top of the stairs. His heart is pounding and Sokka takes a deep breath and
readies himself, then stands tall, facing his fate with as much courage as he can muster.

In front of him stands a boy that must be about the same age as him, dressed in festive red
and gold robes. His dark hair is pulled back into a topknot, fixed with a golden hairpiece, but
what stands out the most about him is the big scar that covers the bigger part of the prince’s
left side of his face. Sokka can’t help but stare at it. For a brief moment he wonders, how the
prince has gotten that mark. It must have been a horrible accident that happened not too long
ago, as the skin is still red and pink and looks awfully delicate.

Sokka’s eyes meet Prince Zuko’s and there is a tense set to the prince’s jaw, he looks
uncomfortable and uneasy, as if he doesn’t want to be here any more than Sokka does.
Actually, the prince looks like he has been through hell and back and Sokka wonders, what
had led him to this moment, if it was duty or something more sinister, a way to solidify the
Fire Nation’s hold over the Southern Water Tribe.

The young Water Tribe’s man has absolutely no idea what to expect and the thought of being
bound to the Fire Nation for the rest of his life is daunting.

When he takes his place beside Zuko, his heart is pounding so hard, he thinks it might burst
out of his chest. He can’t imagine spending the rest of his life in this place, in this role, with
this man. He’s not just marrying a stranger, he’s marrying a member of the nation that
destroyed his family and brought nothing but pain and destruction into the world. It’s ironic
that this marriage is Sokka’s only chance to protect Katara and the other women and children
of the Tribe. And anyway, it’s too late now.

Sokka can feel the weight of the situation settling on his shoulders, when the ceremony
begins as the Fire Sages begin to chant and the High Sage motions for them to hold hands.

Sokka’s palms are sweaty, his nerves are getting the best of him and his fingers shake, when
he reaches out hesitantly to grasp Zuko’s hands.

The first thing he notices is the roughness of Zuko’s skin. It’s calloused from years of training
with swords and his bending. He feels a jolt of discomfort as he imagines how many people
Zuko may have fought and hurt with those hands. A sudden wave of horror washes over
Sokka, when he wonders what those hands must be capable of doing.

And then, as if to compound his fears, the High Sage casts a rope of fire out of nowhere,
which wraps itself around their joined hands. What’s it with firebenders and their obvious
need to brand themselves? He always knew that they are crazy pyromaniacs, but being forced
to follow their strange customs makes the hairs on his body stand up.

Sokka feels a sharp pang of pain, when the fire touches him and he fights the urge to pull
away from the fiery rope. The heat is intense, the smell of burning flesh makes his stomach
turn. He feels like he’s being trapped, being branded like a piece of cattle. His heart beats
faster and he can feel sweat bead on his forehead. He knows, that everybody is watching him,
judging him like he’s some kind of spectacle for their amusement. Sokka just hopes that he
won’t pass out and he desperately tries to stand his ground and not pull back.

Then, he feels Zuko’s grip on his hands tighten. Despite the roughness, there is a sense of
warmth and strength in it, that Sokka finds oddly reassuring. It’s like he’s being grounded,
anchored to the present moment by this physical connection.

His eyes wander from their joined hands up to meet Zuko’s gaze.

The realization hits him, that they are both in this together and that Zuko is just as miserable
and powerless in this situation as he is. As he looks at him now, he realizes that there is more
to this prince than meets the eye. There is a vulnerability and a deep dwell of pain and anger
there, that Sokka can sense, even if he can’t fully understand it.

It’s a strange comfort, but Sokka holds onto it tightly as the Fire Sages complete the
ceremony and their chanting comes to an end.

Sokka takes a deep breath, looking at the marks around his wrist, that show that he’s now
married to Zuko.

The High Sage steps forward.

“I present to you, Prince Zuko and Prince Consort Sokka!”

Polite applause spreads in the courtyard, but there is also immediate chatter and laughter. He
can feel the people’s eyes on him, judging and mocking and his eyes search for Zuko’s again.
There is a moment of tense silence, before Zuko speaks first.

“So, uhm… welcome”, he says quietly, his eyes downcast.

Sokka nods, not trusting himself to speak. He still has to wrap his head around the fact, that
this really just happened and that he is now married to the enemy prince.

They walk down the stairs, side by side, and he glances over to Zuko ever so often. The
prince looks even more uncomfortable than before and Sokka is one hundred percent sure,
that he is not the only one who has been forced into this marriage against his will. They may
be enemies, but for now, they are united in their awkwardness and discomfort, that only
multiplies as they make their way through the crowd to the Grand Hall.

“Well, that was… something”, Sokka manages to say, but he doesn’t sound half as cool as he
intents. Instead his voice shakes a little.

Zuko looks up and for a moment Sokka thinks, he sees a flicker of something in his eyes.
Regret, maybe, or even a hint of amusement.

“Yeah”, Zuko agrees, then hesitates. “This isn’t the ideal situation.”

At least, they can agree on that.

The reception is an ordeal and that has nothing to do with the boy next to him.

Zuko had been impressed by his appearance at the ceremony. He doesn’t know what he
expected, maybe fear and misery – and he had seen both of those in Sokka’s blue eyes – but
certainly not this expression of defiance and the willingness to stand up to his captors, even
though he was clearly outmatched. No, Sokka stood his ground only showing so little of his
discomfort. It had been more present, when the rope of fire was wrapped around their hands,
but the Water Tribe boy fought against his fear and held onto him.

Zuko respects him for that and though he felt a certain sting, when Sokka had stared at his
scar, he grants him that it wasn’t the usual look of disgust that showed on his face, but one of
genuine confusion. Almost as if Sokka was trying to make sense of it and couldn’t quite
believe, what he was seeing.

All in all, Zuko is still surprised, that he doesn’t immediately dislike the other boy. That is
actually more than what he hoped for.

But now he is forced to sit at the banquet table, feeling like the whole world is laughing at
him, while guests and dignitaries approach them one by one, offering their congratulations to
his marriage. His father seems pleased by the spectacle of his humiliation and Azula is
practically glowing with delight. She seems to be enjoying the situation far more than anyone
else.

And Zuko can do nothing but sit there and endure the false congratulations and mocking
comments, that are thrown at them.

“Congratulations, Prince Consort Sokka. You must be thrilled to be joining such a noble and
powerful family”, one older nobleman tells them, his voice dripping with sarcasm.

“Prince Zuko, our congratulations on your new husband. Let’s just hope he doesn’t turn out
to be a spy or something, right?”

“Congratulations to marrying our beautiful prince, Consort Sokka.”

Zuko glares at them all. He has no idea, how Sokka manages to put on something that is
probably supposed to be a smile. But the longer the reception goes on, the more it turns into a
grimace.

Zuko can’t blame him. Every word that falls from their lips feels like a fresh wound, a
twisting of the knife. They congratulate him on his new ‘accomplishment’, his ‘marriage’ to
someone he barely knows. They make vulgar jokes at his expense (‘Looks like you would do
anything for a bit of water, eh Prince Zuko?’), some even go so far as to question his
masculinity.

Zuko balls his hands into fists. He wants nothing more than to stand up and lash out at these
people, who think they are better than him. He wants to set them on fire, make them see the
pain they’re causing him. But he knows he can’t. He has to keep up appearances, has to
endure this torture for his own sake.

The worst congratulations, however, come from Azula.

His sister waits until the cue subsides to step in and loudly shares her thoughts.

“Congratulations, dear brother. Prince Consort”, she nods at Sokka, who seems at a loss how
to react. Everybody’s eyes are on them and she continues. “I am delighted to see you married,
Zuzu. Isn’t it just lovely that Father has allowed you to pursue your… unique tastes.”

She lets out a small laugh and some people chuckle along.

Zuko’s eyes narrow and he wants to rip that cursed smile off her face.

“We are pleased to see you settling down. And who knows? Maybe marrying a peasant of the
Water Tribe will bring some much-needed prosperity to our great nation. Of course, I will do
everything in my power to support you both, as befits a loving sister.”

That’s it! Zuko jolts up. At least he tries to, but there is suddenly a surprisingly strong hand
on his thigh, holding him in place.

While the crowd applauds Azula’s ‘kind’ words, Zuko is a little baffled and he stares at
Sokka, whose hand is still on his leg.
Sokka’s eyes are fixed on his sister.

“Thank you, Azula. Crown Princess Azula”, he corrects himself quickly and gives her a
genuine smile. “We appreciate that.”

The expression of victory on Azula’s face freezes for the blink of a moment, before she gets a
hold of herself again. She nods at Sokka, before she turns to leave.

Zuko stares at his new husband and he is completely shocked. He’ll be damned, but it seems
Sokka is already so much better at playing these games than he is. The hand on his leg
disappears and he is still confused when, finally, Uncle Iroh steps forward, his eyes kind and
warm.

“Congratulations, my dear nephew”, he says and it sounds heartfelt. He pats Zuko on the
shoulder, before he turns to Sokka.

“And welcome to the family, Sokka. We are glad to have you.”

The Water Tribe boy smiles back at Iroh and Zuko feels oddly touched.

“Thank you, Uncle”, he says, his voice strained.

It is hard to believe, that there is literally only one person, who is offering their true support
for what is about to come at them. Strangely, it is that confirmation of support, that makes
Zuko feel even more like a failure, a disappointment to his family and his nation.

Obviously, Uncle Iroh notices the tension in Zuko’s body and leans in closer.

“This may not be what you wanted, Prince Zuko”, he says softly. “But sometimes life takes
us on unexpected paths. And I hope that you can find some happiness in this marriage.”

A lump forms in his throat at his uncle’s words and Zuko looks up to him. For a moment he
wants to hug him, hold onto him like a lifeline, but he can’t show any weakness in front of
his father and sister. Not now. Not ever.

Unable to say anything, Zuko just nods.

Iroh turns to motion for a servant to come closer.

“I have something for you and I hope you might enjoy it.”

The servant carries two books and Iroh hands the first one to Sokka.

“This is for you, Sokka. I think you will find it very interesting and valuable.”

Zuko catches a glimpse onto the title and for a moment he thinks his uncle must be joking.
He doesn’t know the book, but he can hardly imagine that Sokka will enjoy lecture about
‘Great Personalities of the Fire Nation’. This seems more like a mockery that would befit
Azula, rather than his uncle. Only that his uncle would never mock them regarding their
situation.
Sokka seems just as confused as he is, but he thanks Iroh nevertheless.

The second book is handed to him and Zuko finds that it is a beautifully illustrated copy of
‘Love amongst the dragons’. He smiles up to his uncle.

“Thank you”, he says again, voice barely above a whisper. But he knows that Uncle Iroh
understands.

He winks at them, before he turns to leave.

Zuko’s gaze falls onto the cue of guests, that is still waiting to acknowledge them and he
sighs.

The food is incredibly delicious and under normal circumstances Sokka would stuff himself
until he couldn’t move anymore. Unfortunately, nothing is normal about this day. In fact, he’s
on the edge ever since he has been led in front of his now husband. The little comfort he had
felt by Zuko’s presence throughout the ceremony has quickly vanished during the reception.

There’s a knot in his stomach, when he thinks about how the wedding guests sneered and
jeered at Prince Zuko. It had been confusing and after a while he couldn’t help but feel a
surge of anger on his behalf. The constant snickering and jabs from the dignitaries and
noblemen made it clear that they didn’t see Zuko as an equal, let alone a superior, but as an
inferior to be laughed at and ridiculed. And as a matter of fact being married to Sokka
probably only added to that.

The most shocking realization had been the way Zuko’s father and sister treated him. Sokka
couldn’t help but notice the hint of malice in every single word Azula said. It is obvious that
she relishes in the fact, that Zuko is married to him.

At some point throughout the reception it dawned on Sokka, that their marriage was far from
a political maneuver. It was a punishment meant for Zuko and a sense of dread washed over
Sokka, when he realized that this made him a target as well.

Sokka wonders how Zuko feels about all this. The prince has barely touched his food and
now that the reception is over and the celebration is in full swing, the anger that has been
radiating off him has been replaced by resignation.

They haven’t shared a word for hours and Sokka is close to the point of simply laughing at
how bizarre this whole day is.

It’s a relief that apparently no one wants them to dance, though the middle of the hall is
already crowded by lots of dancing couples. Sokka tries to distract himself by watching them
and commenting their dancing in his head. It’s a petty source of amusement.

He notices, that Zuko’s gaze wanders to the Fire Lord more and more frequently and he
almost jumps, when Zuko shoves his seat back harshly and stands, looking at him
expectantly.

Obviously Fire Lord Ozai gave his approval that they could leave and a sigh of relief comes
over Sokka’s lips as he hurries to stand up as well.

Of course this doesn’t go unnoticed by the crowd and even over the music the giggles,
laughter and muffled conversations can hardly be overheard. The people stare at them, not
bothering to hide their disrespect of their union and Sokka wishes for the ground to open up
and swallow him whole.

Instead, he follows Zuko as they have to make their way through the crowd again and
seriously, who was the architect of this hall? Sokka is sure that there must be a backdoor
somewhere, but maybe they are just not allowed to slip away unseen.

He doesn’t understand, why the Fire Lord allows those jeers and outright insults, because no
matter what happened, these people are still making fun of his son and thus, the Royal
Family. But Ozai doesn’t seem to care. Sokka finds that a sadistic smile plays around his lips,
when he looks back at him. What a jerk.

He grits his teeth and holds his head down, his fists clenched at his sides, trying his best to
ignore the crowd, but the comments are like a constant barrage of arrows aimed at them.

Zuko, on the other hand, walks with his head held high, his face a mask of stoicism. Sokka
can see the tension in his shoulders, the clenching of his jaw and he knows, that Zuko is
feeling the weight of the humiliation as much as he is.

They are calling Sokka the Fire Nation’s plaything, they call Zuko a failure and shame for the
whole nation and things get really awkward, when Sokka catches snippets of lewd comments
and jokes about their wedding night. He feels his cheeks flush with embarrassment. Until
now he didn’t even dare to think about it, but having their comments thrown in his face is…
he can’t handle it.

When they finally reach Zuko’s chamber, a sense of relief washes over Sokka and he quickly
closes the door behind them to lean against it, his breathing heavy.

Zuko is standing in the center of the room, his eyes closed, shoulders hunched and his head
bowed. He looks like he is in serious pain.

“Hey”, Sokka says softly. “Are you okay?”

Zuko looks up at him, hurt lingering in his amber eyes.

“No”, he says hoarsely. “But I will be. I have to be.”

Sokka nods in understanding. He is also a bit shaken by what just happened and the
comments about them sharing a bed still ring in his ears. He shifts uncomfortably, when Zuko
walks over to the bed and opens the lid of a bowl on his night stand, that contains some kind
of liquid.
He has no idea, what is expected of him, but his heart sinks, when Zuko orders him to “Come
here”.

Sokka takes a deep breath and then a few steps forwards. He stops and looks hesitantly at
Zuko.

“Uh, I guess I should, uhm… do you want me to… undress?”

His voice shakes far too much for his liking and Zuko’s head shots up.

“What are you- oh! No!”

A deep blush appears on the prince’s cheeks, he looks shocked and quickly shakes his head.

“This is for your wrists. It helps the healing”, he explains holding out the pot with the liquid.

“Oh.”

Now Sokka feels like an idiot. He grimaces awkwardly and dips his fingers into the pot,
before he applies the salve on his branded wrists. The effect is immediate and a sigh of relief
comes over his lips, when the cool paste touches his skin.

Zuko applies it on his wrists too, and also on his face.

Uncomfortable silence spreads between them and Sokka can’t help but think that he is
supposed to do something. However, the pictures that the people’s comments painted into his
mind are still omnipresent and everything but pleasant.

Maybe his face shows his discomfort, because Zuko shakes his head.

“Forget what they said. You don’t have to do anything you don’t want to, Sokka. I won’t
force you.”

It’s the first time that Zuko says his name and it feels strangely comforting. Sokka doesn’t
focus on it though, because a wave of gratefulness washes over him.

“Thanks. I… I appreciate that.”

Zuko nods sharply and looks around the room.

“You can take the bed. I’ll sleep on the floor.”

They are supposed to be a married couple and if Sokka is not mistaken that means that they
have to spend many, many years together. He somehow doubts that the Fire Lord will allow
them separate rooms (or beds even) and it feels wrong to force the prince out of his own bed.
They have to make do somehow.

“Don’t be ridiculous. The bed’s big enough. We can share.”

Zuko just looks at him and hesitates.

Sokka sighs. “See, that I don’t want to, you know, now… it doesn’t mean that I will never… I
mean… urgh, this is embarrassing.”

“I get it”, Zuko says quickly and his cheeks still show a bright red.

They avoid each other’s gaze while they get out of their festive robes and climb into the bed,
only to lay there next to each other, stiff and uncomfortable. It’s weird, Sokka thinks, sharing
a bed with the Prince of the Fire Nation. But it could probably be a lot worse.

Zuko shifts beside him and he can feel the heat radiating off his body. Sokka tries not to think
about how close they are and how easy it would be to reach out and touch him. Again, silence
stretches between them as they lay there awkwardly.

After a few minutes, Sokka just has to break the silence, because sleep isn’t going to come
for him anytime soon.

“So, do you want to talk about anything? I mean, we’re stuck together, we might as well get
to know each other.”

At first, he thinks Zuko is ignoring him, because it takes him a while to answer. When he
finally does, it’s not much either.

“There isn’t much to know. I’m a prince of the Fire Nation, disgrace of this family, I have a
scar on my face and I’m married to someone I don’t love.”

Sokka winces at the last part and for some reason it upsets him. “Yeah, sorry about that. I
didn’t exactly ask to be here with you either.”

Now it’s Zuko letting out a sigh. “I know. Sorry. It’s not your fault. I just… it’s been a rough
couple of weeks. Years, actually. And this is just the cherry on top of the cake.”

“You have lived like this for years?!”, Sokka blurts out in shock and stares at him.

He is glad, that he somehow made it through one day. If this is how it’s always going to be…

“Not exactly like this. But, well… you heard what they said about me.”

“Wow.”

“Yeah.”

Sokka lingers in his thoughts for a moment and he senses sadness coming off Zuko. He
somehow can’t let it stand like that.

“You did pretty well today. It couldn’t have been easy.”

Zuko looks at him in astonishment, before he shrugs.

“It’s not the worst thing I’ve been through”, he says not without a hint of bitterness in his
voice.
“For what it’s worth, I’m proud of how you handled things today”, Sokka says sincerely. He
means it.

The look Zuko throws at him is upsetting in a way that Sokka can’t describe. It’s like the
prince has never heard any of those words before and that is just another disturbing thought.

“You’re pretty tough, for a firebender”, he adds to lighten the mood.

That actually coaxes an amused snort from the prince and Sokka grins contently.

“Good night, Sokka.”

“Good night, Zuko.”

 Overcoming
Chapter Summary

In which Iroh is a good uncle and Zuko and Sokka talk.

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 3: Overcoming

With a sigh Sokka sits down under the large pomegrenade tree at the pond in the Palace
gardens and watches the turtleducks swim by. They are funny little creatures, with their fluffy
feathers, large beaks and tiny shells. But Sokka spent hours watching them during the last
few days, ever since he arrived at the Palace, that by now they have lost some of their appeal.

He still can't believe, that he is the Prince Consort of the Fire Nation. It's not something he
had ever thought possible, let alone asked for and so far he doesn't like it. He doubts that he
ever will.

Despite the summer heat, that he still has to get used to, this place feels incredibly cold. It's
the people, he supposes. Sokka didn't get to interact with anyone so far, apart from the
nightmare that has been his wedding. But being pointed and laughed at can hardly be
considered interaction. Otherwise, people avoid him like the plague, whenever he walks
through the halls of the palace or they ignore him altogether.

It's better than mocking or insults, he figures, but Sokka can't help feeling lonely.

Worst of it is that Zuko always seems in a hurry to get away from him. Their conversations
consist basically of 'Good morning' and 'Good night' with nothing but awkward silence in
between.

He gets it in a way. This marriage has been forced upon both of them and it's understandable
that Zuko is not comfortable around him. Sokka doesn't care for the Fire Nation, they could
all drop dead for all that he cares and he wouldn't want to be friends with a firebender if he
had the choice. Not after everything that they had done.

But as it is, he had been carefully optimistic that Zuko and him could at least get along
somehow. It has been so obvious that Zuko is an outsider within the Palace walls just like
Sokka is. But maybe he had been too quick with this first impression of the prince.

Leaning back against the tree, Sokka sighs again.

He misses home. He misses Katara. He misses her lashing out at him for not doing the
chores, for overcooking the stew or ripping his pants or whatever else he found to annoy his
little sister with. He even misses her failed attempts at waterbending that always end up with
him being soaked to the skin. He misses his dad and his tribe and he wonders if everyone is
doing okay.

Sokka knows that things could be worse. He could be rotting in a cell somewhere, instead of
roaming the palace as he pleases, eat whatever and whenever he wants, take a nap every so
often and so on. It really could be a lot worse. But that doesn’t mean that he’s good. Maybe
he just needs more time to accept that this is how is life is going to be from now on.

Sokka snaps from his thoughts, when he hears soft footsteps and a hummed melody behind
him. He quickly turns around to see who is approaching him and finds that it is Iroh, the
prince's uncle.

The old man slowly comes over to him.

"May I join you, young friend?", he asks and gestures to the space next to Sokka.

"Sure", Sokka nods, grateful for some company.

In fact, Iroh has been the only one being genuinely nice to him throughout the wedding and
he believed him, when the old man said, that he was happy to have Sokka as a member of the
Fire Nation Royal Family. That is still such an absurd thought, that it makes Sokka grimace.

Iroh sits down next to him and takes a few deep breaths as if he is inhaling the scent of
summer around him and he looks strangely pleased, while he watches the turtleducks swim
around happily.

"It's a lovely day, isn't it?", he says, smiling at Sokka.

The Water Tribe boy nods again.

"It is. The weather here is quite different from where I come from."

"I imagine it must be. I have never been to the South Pole", Uncle Iroh says. "But during my
travels I found that there is beauty to be found in all seasons and in all places. One just has to
be open to it."

Sokka smiles sadly.

"I know this must be difficult for you", Iroh continues gently. "Being so far away from your
home and your family in a strange place with people who do not appreciate you."

Sokka gulps against the lump in his throat, quite touched by Uncle Iroh's perceptiveness.

"Yes", he admits quietly. "It's not easy."

"I am afraid things are never easy around here. But you are not alone. You have Zuko. And
for my part, I can offer you my support and my friendship."
A warm feeling spreads in Sokka's chest as he hears Iroh's words and sees the earnest
expression on the elder man's face. But the feeling is quickly gone, when he thinks of his
husband. The smile falls from his face and Iroh hums.

"My nephew is a complicated young man, Sokka", he says out of nowhere.

"I've noticed."

That actually makes Uncle Iroh chuckle and even Sokka feels a tug at his lips.

"Zuko has many burdens to bear. Just recently he has lost his position as crown prince. His
mind is troubled and he is convinced that he has failed his family, his nation and most of all
himself."

Sokka listens carefully to Uncle Iroh's words and looks onto the grass at his feet.

"Maybe they failed him", he says quietly, wrapping his arms around his knees.

"Ah", Iroh says and closes his eyes for a second. He nods and looks very pleased with
Sokka's response.

"You must know, my dear boy, that Zuko's mind and his actions do not always go hand in
hand. He is in a very difficult situation. He is struggling. You both are. Give him time to sort
things out."

Sokka nods. After all, there not much else that he can do.

For a moment Iroh watches him with an incredulous look.

"You wouldn’t be interested in playing the wonderful game of Pai Sho?"

Zuko gnarls as he spins around to throw another ball of fire into the air. For a second it seems
rather impressive, bigger than what Zuko usually manages to conjure. The heat is intense and
sparks erupt from the center of the fire ball. The next moment the fire vanishes into thin air as
it burns far too hot and Zuko’s shoulders drop. A surge of pain runs through them and the
young prince knows that he is too tense to continue his training.

It only adds to his frustration.

Everything is just not fair.

He tries to keep up his appearance, but he has only so much patience and endurance left. To
know that basically everyone he comes across is laughing at him behind his back takes its toll
on him.
Zuko clenches his jaw and sighs deeply.

He didn’t ask for any of this. All he knows is that he has to figure out a way to get his status
as Crown Prince back. As soon as possible. He doesn’t want to be the disgraced prince for the
rest of his life. He is more than that.

He has to focus on his training, even though his father assigned his teachers to Azula and thus
left Zuko with nothing to do. For the first few days it had been nice to dwell in self-pity and
ponder about how unfair his situation is, but Zuko can’t just sit around and wait for what is to
happen next.

He doesn’t want to slip into meaninglessness like his uncle had. Zuko loves his uncle, he
really does. After all, he’s the only one looking after him ever since his mother has
disappeared. But Iroh’s days consist of drinking tea, playing Pai Sho and attending council
meetings every now and then. But even during those meetings, his uncle usually only sits and
listens, instead of contributing something to the plans the Fire Lord makes. It’s
understandable, as Uncle Iroh’s political philosophy consists to a good amount of
appeasement towards the other nations and that is something the Fire Lord absolutely can’t
stand.

No, Zuko cannot be a silent spectator and watch his life go by. He may be married to a Water
Tribesman now, but he refuses to let that be the end of it. Zuko needs to focus on the bigger
picture. Sure, being married to Sokka is a disadvantage when it comes to regaining the Fire
Nation’s respect towards him. But he’ll have to make do.

He feels a little pang of guilt, that he shoves away quickly.

Zuko is well aware that he is not exactly treating Sokka well. But the thought of being seen
with him, of being associated with the Water Tribe boy only weakens his position further. It’s
already difficult enough, without having to worry about the added scrutiny that would come
if people thought he preferred Sokka’s company over his own people’s.

Again, it’s not fair.

Sokka did nothing wrong. With everything he knows about him, it would have been perfectly
understandable if the other boy showed outright hatred towards him or worse, tried to murder
him in his sleep. Zuko couldn’t blame him if he did. Instead, the Water Tribe boy watched
him as if he wanted Zuko to say something. After the Walk of Shame, as Zuko secretly calls
the walk from the wedding banquet to their room, Sokka had seemed genuinely concerned
about his well-being and even tried to lighten the mood with a joke. When he said that he had
been proud of Zuko’s composure, the prince didn’t have the slightest idea how to handle it.

Sokka seems to be a good person. That actually makes all this a lot worse.

Zuko shakes his head with a resignated sigh and leaves the training yard. This is getting him
nowhere today and besides, his uncle invited him for tea like he has done every day since the
wedding. Today Zuko accepted the invitation, if only to have something to do to pass the
time.
When Zuko steps out onto the beautiful pergola just outside of Uncle Iroh’s quarters, he finds
him sitting on one of the cushions at the low table. A Pai Sho board is already set up on it and
Zuko sighs internally until he realizes, that the tiles are not in their starting position, but on
different spots all over the board. It seems as if his uncle already had a visitor this afternoon
and the old man is watching the board thoughtfully.

To Zuko’s surprise the tea has not yet been served.

Zuko clears his throat to announce his presence and his uncle looks up.

“Ah, Zuko. There you are. I thought we could have our tea here today. It is too lovely a day
to stay inside.”

Even though Zuko doesn’t usually care about where to drink his tea, he must admit that his
uncle is right.

Vibrant flowers bloom in large terra cotta pots in every corner of the wooden pergola. A
fragrant jasmine plant winds its way up one of the columns, its sweet scent perfuming the air.
Soft rustling sounds can be heard as a gentle breeze stirs the leaves of the plants and flowers
and birds sing their sweet songs into the afternoon air. Nearby the sound of running water can
be heard as a small fountain trickles only a few feet away.

It’s such a tranquil and peaceful spot, that Zuko can feel some of the tension in his shoulders
fade away.

Nevertheless, he follows his uncle inside to prepare the hot beverage, before they sit down on
the cushions outside to enjoy the calm atmosphere.

Zuko didn’t think it possible, but he manages to just be in the moment for once, free of any
thoughts only listening to the birds, the flowing water and enjoy the warmth inside and out.
They drink their first cup of tea in silence, before his uncle pours them another cup and looks
at Zuko meaningfully as he sits down again.

“You have a fine young man as your partner, nephew”, he remarks, taking a sip of his tea.

Zuko groans. Just when he finally finds a moment of peace for himself…

“Yeah, he’s fine, I guess.”

He knows that his words hold a harsh tone, but he can’t say that he feels sorry about that.
Uncle Iroh raises an eyebrow.

“You guess? From what I have seen, he is a brave boy, resourceful and has a good heart. And
he seems to enjoy playing Pai Sho.”

He motions at the board in front of them and Zuko rolls his eyes.

“I don’t really care about Pai Sho, Uncle.”

“It’s not just about the game, Zuko”, his uncle says insistently. “It’s about learning to
understand people, to see beyond their appearance.”

Zuko sighs and looks down at his tea.

“I don’t need to understand Sokka. He’s… just a means to an end.”

Iroh’s eyes narrow slightly and Zuko can feel his uncle’s scrutinizing look on him.

“Is that all he is to you? A means to an end?”

Shifting uncomfortably on his cushion, Zuko sighs again. If only it would be that easy. They
are trapped in this situation together, but Zuko just doesn’t know what to make of it and that
only adds to the anger he still feels towards his father, his sister and the whole world. It’s not
fair for neither of them and it’s certainly not Sokka’s fault.

“No”, he admits after a moment of consideration. “It’s just… I… I don’t know what to do.”

Uncle nods in understanding. “Yes, yes. Your situation is incredibly difficult. It is always
difficult, when two different cultures collide and even more so in times of war. But you must
try, Zuko. Have you talked to him about his life, his experiences?”

Zuko shakes his head. “Not really. We haven’t talked much at all, to be honest.”

“Well, then perhaps it’s time to start”, Iroh says and Zuko is a little surprised by the
vehemence in his voice. “I know you are struggling, nephew, with your own thoughts and
your own emotions, but you must not forget your duty.”

Confused, Zuko looks up to his uncle.

“You have to protect Sokka. You know that this palace is a dangerous place, especially for a
stranger. Are you going to wait until someone tries to use him against you? You must not let
him wander around without guidance, without knowing who is friend or foe.”

Zuko’s eyes widen in shock. Uncle is right, he realizes. Of course Uncle is right. Zuko has
allowed himself to get so caught up in his own turmoil, that he didn’t even think about how
or who might gain an advantage by turning Sokka against him. Now that his uncle spells it
out for him, Zuko becomes painfully aware how dangerous distancing himself from Sokka
could’ve turned out to be. His thoughts jump immediately to Azula. Hopefully she hasn’t had
a chance to approach the young Water Tribesman yet.

Zuko curses himself for his ignorance. He knows better than taking unnecessary risks in this
already fragile position he is in.

Looking down, he mumbles a few words.

“I should be grateful that he turned to you.”

Iroh nods, before a sigh leaves the old man’s lips.

“He is alone in a foreign country, held hostage by his enemies and he is being thrown into
this nest of serpents. Since he arrived, he had been shown distrust, insults and mockery. Of
course he would turn to any source of friendly company. That is why it is so important that he
knows who can be trusted.”

Zuko’s hands tighten around his teacup.

“Just talk to him, Zuko. Sokka may surprise you with his understanding.”

Thoughtfully, Zuko nods and his gaze falls onto the Pai Sho board in front of them.

He frowns, because even though he doesn’t like the game, he recognizes the unusual pattern,
in which the white tiles of his uncle and the red tiles Sokka must have used, are laid out on
the board. Zuko cannot decipher the strategy behind it, in fact it seems a little chaotic, but his
eyes widen in disbelief, when he realizes that it’s a tie.

His head shots up to his uncle, who only smiles back at him meaningfully.

Zuko hesitates, when he comes to stand in front of the door to his own room and actually
considers knocking. The last few days it has always been so late when he came back, that he
could be sure, that Sokka was if not asleep at least trying to sleep already. His avoidance
maneuver had proofed to be practical, but after the talk with his uncle Zuko knows that he
must not continue like that.

However, the prospect of actually spending time and talking with Sokka makes him feel a
little queasy, not that he would ever admit that.

This is ridiculous, he decides, before he does knock and enters the room.

Just like the days before, dinner has been served here in their private quarters. Sokka sits
alone at the table with slumped shoulders and a sad expression on his face, listlessly shoving
the food on his plate around.

His jolts up as soon as he recognizes Zuko and he straightens on his seat, his expression
equally surprised and wary.

Zuko doesn’t know what to make of it. He doesn’t know what kind of reaction he hoped for,
but somehow the way Sokka looks at him makes him feel like an intruder in his own room.
Zuko has never been good with people his age, or people in general and he doesn’t know
what to say.

He scratches his neck and holds his hand up in greeting.

“Hello.”
Well, it’s something, he figures.

“Hey”, Sokka answers, obviously just as unsure of what to say.

They look at each other a little helplessly, before Zuko points at the food on the table.

“Do you mind, if I join you for dinner?”

It’s strange, Sokka thinks, sharing a meal with the Fire Prince. This is only the second meal
they have together if one counts the wedding banquet at which both of them hardly touched
any of the food as a meal. Ever since then, Zuko has excused himself at the break of dawn
and came back to the room in the middle of the night.

He looks tired, and troubled somehow, while they eat in silence.

Sokka might have hoped for some company, but right now he is not sure if this is actually
better than eating alone. It’s not a comfortable silence, so he decides to break it.

“So, uhm. How was your day?”, he asks and Zuko looks at him as if the sheer idea of having
an actual conversation is completely foreign to him.

But after a moment, the prince clears his throat and puts his spoon aside.

“It was okay, I guess. I had tea with uncle.”

That coaxes a smile out of Sokka. “He seems to drink lots of tea, your uncle. I have been
there today, too.”

“I’ve heard.”

After that the conversation comes to a halt again and Sokka is not sure, how to keep it going.
Asking what else Zuko has done all day seems like prying and he doesn’t want to do that. For
a moment, Zuko watches him thoughtfully, then he shakes his head and rubs the back of his
nose. A frustrated expression settles on his face.

“I should’ve handled our situation this week better than I did”, he finally says and Sokka
blinks at him.

Calling it a situation is probably more fitting than the term marriage and Zuko’s choice of
words actually amuses him greatly. He waves it off, however, because he didn’t really make
an effort to search for Zuko’s company either. There’s really no one to blame.

“It’s fine”, he says.

“No, it’s not fine”, Zuko insists and Sokka raises an eyebrow.

A frustrated sigh comes over Zuko’s lips as he leans back in his chair, before he continues.

“I should have explained a few things about this place and the society to you”, he begins,
before he looks at Sokka with a haunted expression in his eyes. “You have to be careful at all
times, Sokka. The Royal Palace is a snake pit.”

“What, not a dragon pit?”, Sokka jokes, because the sudden intensity of Zuko’s tone and the
warning make him uncomfortable.

Zuko stares blankly at back at him.

“Firebenders? Dragons? Dragon pit? Get it?” When Zuko continues to stare, he waves his
hand. “Nevermind. Go on.”

“You must know, that every single person here has their own agenda. You have to be careful
at all times, who you talk to and what you talk about. Best thing is, you always keep your
guard up and let nobody close, because otherwise people will use it against you for their own
advantage. Do you understand?”

Sokka’s first impulse is to make another joke, because the insistent and increasingly dramatic
tone in Zuko’s voice seems a little unfitting for the stoic prince. But the haunted look in
Zuko’s eyes tells him that he is serious. Sokka has been aware that his stay in the Fire Nation
wouldn’t be a walk in the park, but it seems to be more complicated and maybe even
dangerous than he thought.

“I think, I get it”, he says slowly.

“Have you talked to anyone?”, Zuko demands and Sokka shakes his head.

“Only your uncle.”

A relieved sigh comes over Zuko’s lips. He nods.

“Good. But you cannot trust anyone else.”

Raising his eyebrow again, Sokka tilts his head. “Not even you?”

That question obviously catches Zuko off-guard. The prince watches him with wide eyes and
doesn’t know what to say. Quickly, Sokka shakes his head. There are more pressing things to
think about.

“So, what is your agenda? What is your plan?”

He crosses his arms and watches Zuko warily. The Fire Prince narrows his amber eyes and it
is obvious that he is calculating if he can take the risk and trust Sokka. This conversation
really is a surprising turn of events after the silence and neglect over the last few days, but
Sokka is strangely grateful for it. Instead of exchanging meaningless pleasantries, they dive
right into it.
Zuko exhales noisily and his eyes are fixed on Sokka’s when he finally talks.

“I have to restore my honor and my reputation, so that I can get my title back.”

For a moment Sokka thinks he must have misheard. He stares at Zuko before a puzzled look
of confusion settles on his face. Zuko wants to do what?

“Wait a minute. Are you telling me, your objective is to become the next Fire Lord?”

Zuko stands up with a sigh and starts pacing the room.

“It’s not only my objective. It’s my destiny.”

At that, Sokka snorts and crosses his arms. “I don’t believe in destiny or any of that spirit
mumbo-jumbo. I can hardly imagine that it is my destiny to end up here. And if that has been
destiny, then destiny has a shitty sense of humor.”

Zuko doesn’t answer, but the frustrated look on his face is back.

Sokka thinks about his words and frankly, they just do not make sense. After what he has
experienced so far ever since he has been brought to the Fire Nation Capital, he absolutely
can’t see Zuko becoming the Fire Lord. That sounds like nothing but wishful thinking. And
for some reason to Sokka it does not even seem desirable.

“Zuko, no offense, but why would you want to become the leader of those people? Do you
really think they would follow you after how they treated you at the wedding? Why would
you want to be their leader? Is it about revenge?”

“You don’t understand!”, Zuko bursts out and the fire that crackles calmly in the fire place
suddenly flares up. Sokka watches it with concern and flinches slightly.

“The Fire Nation believes in power. Who holds the most power leads the nation. When I
become a more powerful bender than Azula, they will follow me.”

Considering the comments the people have thrown at them, it’s more likely that they would
install a government of people’s choice instead of putting Zuko on the throne. Sokka can’t
ban the expression of doubt neither from his face nor his voice.

“So that is your plan? Train until you can wipe the floor with your sister’s face and then
become Fire Lord after your father?”

When Zuko nods, Sokka’s expression darkens.

His first impression of Zuko has been, that he was miserable, unhappy and disliked by
everyone in this palace except for his uncle. And Sokka also has had the impression that the
feeling was mutual, that Zuko hated the people here, including his father, the Fire Lord. That
he wants to follow in his footsteps and on his throne is a surprise, but definitely not a good
one. Sokka is totally not up for that.

For a moment they glare at each other.

“Well, what’s yours, huh?”, Zuko all but yells at him and Sokka narrows his eyes.

It is obvious that he managed to upset Sokka and Zuko curses himself that he shared his
ambition with the other boy, now that he shows such obvious disapproval. In hindsight, he
could’ve expected that. Why would Sokka be supportive of his desire to become the Fire
Lord one day? He is basically held hostage in the Fire Nation.

“Will you try to escape?”, he dares him, only to get a dry snort as a response at first.

“The odds for that are not exactly in my favor, are they? I have no weapons, no allies and
even if I could manage to get out of the Palace, how far do you think I’d come?”

Sokka’s voice contains a bitterness that Zuko is very familiar with. Nevertheless, it surprises
him. Until now, Sokka did not complain about his situation, at least not to him. He actually
bears his fate with remarkable composure. But suddenly it is very obvious that Sokka is
struggling too and Zuko feels a little ashamed for his outburst.

His expression softens a little as does his voice.

“Do you think your dad will come to liberate you?”

A deep sigh comes over Sokka’s lips. He stands and walks over to his side of the bed to sit
down on it. He looks discouraged and it’s an oddly touching sight.

“I like to believe that they will come. But we’re in the middle of a war. My dad has been the
leader of our tribe for so many years. He is responsible for all those people and he has been
fighting in this war for so long. He can’t… no, he must not risk his men’s lives for a rescue
mission. There are bigger things at stake here.”

Zuko gulps and his voice sounds laden, when he speaks. “Not even for his son?”

Sokka grimaces.

“I know a little something about strategy. This wouldn’t be wise. They have to end this war.
And if that means, that I have to stay here, so be it.”

The words hang heavily in the air and Zuko finds himself unable to say something.

Sokka seems so collected when he talks about the war, so righteous and sure. He is convinced
to be on the right side. Immediately Zuko thinks back to the young men his father sacrificed
in the Earth Kingdom and he feels his heart sink. He still can’t think of any reason, why this
should have been the right thing to do. His scar itches uncomfortably. Burning his son
couldn’t have been the right thing to do neither. Zuko’s fingers shake a little, when a rush of
anger surges through his body and he quickly balls his hands into fists.
He must not question his father. The Fire Lord always has the upper hand and he usually gets
what he wants.

Not always though, Zuko thinks with grim satisfaction and he can’t prevent the wicked smile
that slowly spreads on his lips.

Sokka looks at him questioningly.

“The Fire Lord is convinced that your dad will surrender because of you.”

It has the wanted effect. Sokka chuckles quietly.

“Yeah, well. Then he is about to get disappointed. Water Tribesman don’t go down so easily.”
 Of Prophecies
Chapter Summary

In which Sokka gets a tour through the temple and learns about the prophecies. Oh, and
there's a family dinner.

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 4: Of Prophecies

Despite the rather disturbing conversation the night before, Sokka feels better. He still doesn’t
understand, why Zuko would want his title as Crown Prince back. If he’d be Zuko, he would
be furious for having been basically disowned and married against his will. Actually, Sokka
thinks that Zuko is right out crazy for still feeling some kind of loyalty to his father and
trying to gain his approval. It makes him question Zuko’s sanity a little, but at least they are
talking now and he remembers Iroh’s words of his nephew being a complicated young man.

On the positive side, it seems that Zuko’s list of allies is about as long as Sokka’s, which
means he probably won’t get anywhere anytime soon despite his best ambitions. That’s why
Sokka doesn’t try to think too hard about the prince’s goal to regain his honor and status.

That proves to be easy enough, as he learns during breakfast that Zuko is apparently a
remarkable sword-fighter and when he asks him, if they would be allowed to practice
together, Zuko figures that it should be possible. Sokka smiles widely at that and he is
actually excited to spar with Zuko and see how long the firebender can hold himself in a fight
without bending involved. He bets, that he’ll have him surrender within five minutes. Six
maximum.

So it really is a downer, when a servant enters and presents him a letter on a wooden plate.

He looks at Zuko questioningly, but the prince just shrugs.

Hesitantly Sokka takes up the scroll and reads over it.

It turns out to come from Iroh. Zuko’s uncle has arranged for him to meet one of the Fire
Sages to give him a tour through their temple. Sullenly he looks at the scroll. His last
encounter with the Fire Sages has been rather unpleasant and he glances at the scars on his
wrists with disdain.

“What is it?”, Zuko asks.

“An invitation or rather a request to meet a Fire Sage for a tour through the temple. You don’t
happen to want to come along?”, he asks hopefully, because Sokka is not exactly eager to go
there alone, not knowing what awaits him.

“Absolutely not”, Zuko says and shrugs. “I do not set foot in that place if I don’t absolutely
have to.”

Sighing, Sokka puts the scroll away.

“This is so not going to be fun.”

Sokka takes a deep breath before he steps through the big stony arch that separates the Hari
Bulkan, the private palace area reserved for the Royal Family with its gardens, quarters and a
private library from the public part of the Palace for the first time since his wedding.

He looks around nervously and fidgets a little in his new clothes. He still has to get used to
them. The sleeveless red tunic feels too tight, the maroon pants too wide and he doesn’t know
what to think of the collar that covers his neck and shoulders. It’s probably a practical
protection against the sun, but Sokka somehow gets the impression that he looks silly in it.

Who is he going to fool anyway? The foreign attire can’t hide the fact, that he is obviously an
outsider and he feels the eyes of the people on him as he walks through the yards and shaded
corridors of the palace.

He knows that he’s being judged and Sokka wonders, what they might actually think about
him. But he won’t give them the satisfaction of showing any discomfort. Taking another deep
breath he squares his shoulders and ignores the people that are still looking at him.

The closer he gets to the temple, the less busy the Palace becomes.

Well, that wasn’t so bad after all he thinks, as he approaches the sanctuary.

In front of the huge, ebony doors a man is already waiting for him. He is wearing the typical
hat and robe of the Fire Sages and when he sees Sokka approaching, he stands tall, only to
press his fist against the palm of his left hand and bows deeply. Sokka stops dead in his track
and stares at him.

“Prince Consort Sokka, it is my pleasure to meet you.”

The Sage straightens up again and Sokka blinks. He certainly did not expect to be shown any
sign of respect, let alone be acknowledged with his new title.

“Uhm, hello?”, he answers and the man seems actually amused.

“My name is Shyu. I have been informed that you wanted to learn about the Fire Nation’s
ways and traditions.”

Again, Sokka blinks because he hasn’t been aware of that, but he nods quickly.

“Sure. Seems useful, as I am going to stay a while”, he says, trying to sound light-hearted
even though he feels a little resignated.

Shyu doesn’t comment on that. He smiles indulgently and motions to the doors.

“Shall we begin?”

The doors open as if on command and Sokka can’t help the astonishment and fascination that
is clearly written on his face as he sets foot into the temple.

The air is thick with the scent of incense, but sunlight is streaming in from high windows and
illuminates the golden murals on the walls that show depictions of firebending. All the light
around him creates an almost ethereal atmosphere and it feels as if this place consists of pure
light.

In the center of the room is a large circular altar, made of polished obsidian that casts a stark
contrast to all the brightness surrounding it. Intricate carvings of flames and dragons are
etched into its surface and Sokka has to admit that the beautiful craftsmanship of this
building is unlike anything he has ever seen before.

The young Water Tribe man can’t help but feel small and insignificant in the grandeur of the
temple and he has to admit that this place sparks curiosity within him.

Shyu lets him take in the view for a few minutes, before he begins to speak.

“This temple is the oldest building in the Fire Nation. It has been a home for those who study
the will of Agni since the Avatars of old, the Fire Sages.”

Astonished, Sokka turns around and looks at him.

“Yes, the Fire Sages originally served the Avatar. We did so until Avatar Roku vanished and
the cycle has come to an end.”

Shyu looks up to an empty pedestal that must once have hold a statue. The Fire Sage frowns
and for a second Sokka thinks that he sees a smile flash over his lips, before the man turns
serious again.

“Now we serve the spiritual needs of the Fire Nation.”

“They don’t seem very spiritual to me”, Sokka says.

“Indeed”, Shyu admits with another frown. “And yet it is us, who they turn to, when in need
of guidance, when lives come into this world, are joined or taken.”
When Sokka looks at him in confusion, Shyu explains: “Light and warmth can be healing, a
fire that burns down might be ignited again. This place is a sanctuary in any sense of the way.
Those in need of healing or advice, might find it here.”

It sounds rather mysterious and Sokka, who has always been a little skeptic about spirits,
magic and bending, raises an eyebrow. Shyu obviously decides not to acknowledge it.

“We also officiate funerals and weddings”, he goes on.

“I’m aware”, Sokka says and grimaces when he thinks back to how he had been branded as
Zuko’s husband out there on top of the stairs of the Ceremonial Plaza.

Shyu glances to the scars on his wrists, but he doesn’t comment.

“The most important part of our duty is, however, to read the constellations of the sun and the
stars to predict Agni’s will”, the Fire Sage explains, leading Sokka into a smaller room on the
side.

It is quite surprising that the dominating color in the room is a deep, dark blue accentuated by
golden highlights, that should probably represent the stars and the night sky. It’s not what
Sokka would have expected from a nation that worships the sun.

Weird and fragile looking devices are standing in front of closed windows and Sokka
supposes that they are used for looking into the sky. When his gaze falls to the floor he finds
that he is standing on an impressive mosaic of the sun. So there it is.

On a large, marble table scrolls with astrological charts and sketches are scattered around.
The Sages seem to have been busy lately. Sokka raises an eyebrow.

“So that is how you predict Agni’s will? You look into the sky and make a sketch?”, he asks.

“Yes. And no. Sometimes the visions come to us during meditation. It is one of life’s
mysteries. One tradition of the Fire Nation is, that every newborn of the Royal Family is
presented to Agni to receive their prophecy.”

“I’m sorry? You hold a baby into the sunrise and from that you can say what will happen to
them?”

It sounds far-fetched and also a little crazy, even for Fire Nation people.

“I mean, do you really think that what you see shortly after someone’s birth is set in stone?”

Shyu smiles indulgently. “Destiny is a mysterious thing, Sokka. Nothing is ever set in stone.
But evidence has shown that these prophecies turn out to be remarkably accurate.”

He leads Sokka over to a shrine that holds a large, leather-bound tome.

“This book contains the prophecies for the Royal Family since the beginning of this Nation.”

Hesitantly, Sokka steps closer. He looks at Shyu questioningly.

“May I?”

The Sage nods and Sokka opens the book, quickly flipping to the last written pages.

He comes across Fire Lord Sozin’s page and stops.

“His prophecy foretold that a great leader would emerge and expand the Fire Nations borders.
It said that his powers could not be outmatched by anyone during his reign.”

Sokka snorts condescendingly. “He started the war and brought nothing but pain and
destruction into the world.”

Shyu looks at him and there is a sudden sadness in his eyes. Sokka turns back to the book and
flips further through the pages until he stumbles across Iroh.

“The Dragon of the West”, Shyu says. “Or so he has been called after his travels. Iroh’s fate
is a tragic one. He was predicted to be a powerful bender, but that his life would be tainted by
loss and grief and that he had to face a lot of pain until he would eventually find peace.
Though it is said, that his fire would never waver. The majority of the prophecy has already
turned out to be true.”

Sokka looks down onto the page. Iroh is one of the kindest people he has ever met, despite
being Fire Nation or not, and to learn that he has been prophesized such a tragic fate, makes
him feel sorry for the old man.

The turns the page.

Fire Lord Ozai’s prophecy actually makes his stomach turn, because it says that the war will
end during his reign when the source of Sozin’s power will also strengthen him.

Sokka doesn’t understand what exactly that source of power is, but it is discouraging that the
Fire Sages obviously saw Ozai end the war.

He feels his shoulders slump. Shyu puts a hand on his shoulder and smiles at him, while he
skips a page.

“You will find the next prophecy very interesting. It’s about Prince Zuko.”

“What does it say?”

“See for yourself.”

Sokka flips the page and his eyes widen. The prophecy speaks of a powerful bender, the
strongest in generations. It speaks of bravery and endurance and paints the picture of a
wonderful man. Sokka doesn’t even notice the sad smile that settles on his lips.

It sounds like a great and promising life is ahead of him. It sounds too good to be true, and
unfortunately not very probable.
Sokka catches a glimpse onto Azula’s page which says something of the personification of
lightning and actually, he really doesn’t want to know and closes the book.

It takes him a moment to gather himself before he looks up to Shyu to find the Fire Sage look
back at him with a stern expression.

“All these prophecies seem so fitting. Except for Zuko’s. How is that possible?”

“You are not the first one to ask that question, Sokka. All we know is that the vision of the
First Sunrise is hardly ever wrong.”

Sokka nods weakly. Usually he doesn’t believe in mystical shenanigans, but something about
this experience makes him feel uneasy and he shifts uncomfortably. Shyu guides him out of
the chamber and back through the Hall to the entrance.

“Sokka, do you know what an Agni Kai is?”

The young Water Tribe man shakes his head and Shyu sighs.

“It is a duel between two firebenders. It’s to determine who is more powerful and thus…
right. It is often demanded to defend one’s honor if accused of being dishonored or
disrespectful.”

The Fire Sages voice is laden with sadness and something about how he emphasizes the
‘honor’, makes Sokka look up to him with wide eyes, when it dawns on him. The way Zuko
insists on regaining his honor and how everybody keeps pointing out how Zuko is a disgrace,
a shame for his family...

“He’s lost an Agni Kai?!”

Shyu nods grimly.

“Is… is that where he got that scar from?”

Again, the Fire Sage nods and Sokka is at a complete loss for words. After a moment it
breaks out of him.

“That is barbaric!”

“You should keep that opinion to yourself.”

Sokka grimaces, but Shyu’s comment reminds him of his conversation with Zuko. You cannot
trust anyone.

Yet somehow Sokka can’t help but think, that Shyu is quite alright. At least, it was Iroh’s idea
to have him give Sokka a tour through the temple. If he’s completely honest, Sokka has no
idea what to make of it.

They arrive at the entrance.

“Thanks for your explications”, Sokka says.

“You are very welcome, Sokka. I hope it has been informative.”

“Certainly”, he replies with a vague smile.

For a moment Shyu seems to be deep in thought and as he doesn’t say anything, Sokka turns
to go.

“Wait!”, the Fire Sage says suddenly and when Sokka looks back to him questioningly, he
actually seems pained, as if he immediately regrets that he said something in the first place.
He motions for Sokka to come closer and though nobody is in sight, he lowers his voice.

“You must promise me, that no one will learn of what I am telling you now”, he says
insistently.

Sokka gulps, because that sounds exactly like a situation he should avoid. Zuko told him not
to get involved in any of the complex secrecies around the Palace. For a moment, he
considers to just excuse himself and make a run for it, but Shyu looks at him so meaningfully,
that he can’t help it.

“I promise.”

The Fire Sage seems equally relieved and stressed at once.

“The day before your wedding to Prince Zuko I have studied the sun and stars”, he begins
and something about his tone tells Sokka that he is not going to like, whatever Shyu is about
to tell him.

“What I saw…”, Shyu pauses and gazes off into the distance, before he looks at Sokka again.

“The path that lies ahead of you is… complex. There is both light and darkness, hope and
despair. It is not for me to say which will prevail. It depends on which path Prince Zuko and
you decide to take. Stray but a little and it may lead to your downfall. But if you stay true to
your course you may find a light, that will guide you through the darkness.”

The meaningful words are underlined by Shyu’s heavy voice and it is pretty impressive.
Sokka stares at him, brows furrowed in shock and confusion, before it blurts out of him.

“What does that even mean?”

Shyu sighs, before he shakes his head.

“It means, Prince Consort Sokka, that as you said earlier, the future is not set in stone. It is up
to you and Prince Zuko to shape it. Choose wisely.”
Zuko feels Sokka’s gaze on him and it grates on his nerves like sandpaper. Ever since Sokka
has gotten back from the temple, the Water Tribe boy is staring at his scar with a strange
look, that Zuko can’t decipher. Sokka’s eyes are basically glued to the left side of his face and
it is just irritating. So far, Sokka didn’t seem bothered by it, being one of the few people who
looked him in the eyes instead of just seeing the scarred skin.

The young prince wonders what the Fire Sages told him, because to add to his staring, Sokka
is awfully quiet. Zuko wonders, what he might be thinking and he can’t shake off the nagging
feeling that maybe he should have accompanied Sokka to the temple. Maybe then he could
have controlled the narrative of what was told to Sokka.

It’s just that he detests the place and also he didn’t want to expose himself to the looks and
mockery of the Fire Nation citizens. It’s a petty excuse and actually Zuko is not quite sure if
he’s angrier at Sokka and his staring or at himself for being a fool.

But that doesn’t hinder him from lashing out at Sokka.

“What? Do I have something on my face?”

The other boy’s blue eyes widen in shock and he quickly looks away, while an expression of
shame crosses his features.

“I’m sorry. It’s nothing”, Sokka mumbles.

“Then stop staring at me like that.”

“It’s just… what the Fire Sage told me… it was a little upsetting to be honest.”

Zuko snorts, while he puts on his vest.

“Don’t pay too much attention to whatever they tell you or you’ll be in more trouble than you
would’ve been without their consultation. They act like they have that mystical knowledge of
the world, but they are just a bunch of old men making up stories.”

He can’t ban the bitterness in his voice and Zuko knows that he lets that topic get to him
more than he should. But the Fire Sages are at least partially responsible for his misery.

“I thought so too, but what they said about us…”

He turns around quickly and glares at Sokka.

“I don’t want to hear it! Okay?! Believe me, Sokka. Don’t let them get to you and don’t go
down that road of taking their words for the truth. You’ll get lost in it.”

Sokka shrugs. “I don’t know. Shyu, he seemed reasonable and-“

“Don’t.”
Zuko puts as much emphasis as he can muster into the word and luckily for him, Sokka shuts
his mouth.

He ties the knot of his belt and turns to the mirror again.

“By the way, you should get changed. We must not be late for dinner tonight”, he reminds
Sokka.

The Water Tribe boy sighs, but he gets up and does as he’s told.

“Is that why you are so tense?”

Zuko’s response is an unfriendly look in his direction. Unfortunately, Sokka is right. He is

tense, because family dinner hasn’t been a delight before and certainly it won’t get any better
now that Sokka is there as well.

“Any warning on what to expect?”, Sokka asks and Zuko looks up.

He thinks about it for a moment, before he sighs.

“You can expect my father to criticize everything I do or say, while Azula tries to provoke or
one-up me in every possible way.”

Zuko should probably be worried about how emotionless and resignated his voice sounds
when he says that. Sokka raises his eyebrows.

“Just try to avoid drawing attention to yourself. If they ask you anything, just answer politely
and try not to give them any reason for wanting to set you on fire.”

“You’re joking right?”, Sokka says, but his voice shakes a little, while he changes from a
simple into a patterned red tunic and puts a yellow belt around his middle.

Zuko wishes he would be joking, but he’s got a bad feeling about the dinner and Sokka gulps
audibly, when he doesn’t answer.

“I’ll do my best to get them off you, but please be careful?”

At that, the strange look from before settles on Sokka’s face again and it dawns on Zuko, that
it is concern that he sees there. But it is quickly replaced by determination and Sokka nods
decidedly.

The dining room is smaller and a lot cozier than Sokka expected, but still impressive. The
walls are lined with elaborate tapestries for once not showing great battles and triumphs of
the Fire Nation, but instead calming scenes of sunsets in the nature, exotic birds and flowers.
The room is lit by a chandelier hanging from the ceiling, bathing the room in soft light.

A large ebony table, polished to a high shine stands in the center of the room. Five sets of
dishes have been arranged symmetrically on the table, the plates decorated with intricate
designs of flames and dragons. The chairs look incredibly comfortable with their deep red
velvet cushions; the one at the head of the table, reserved for Fire Lord Ozai, is the most
ornate of all with carved dragon heads on each armrest and a gilded crest on the backrest.

Sokka couldn’t help but feel a bit intimidated by the opulence of the room. He is used to a
simpler life and this level of luxury is still foreign to him.

Zuko guides him to the two chairs on the left side from the head of the table and he motions
for Sokka to stand behind the chair that is furthest away from Fire Lord Ozai. Obviously they
have to wait for the other family members to arrive. It only takes a minute until Iroh steps
into the room, a wide smile on his face when his eyes fall onto them.

He walks to the seat opposite from Sokka and winks at him encouragingly, while Azula steps
in. She glances them up and down and raises an eyebrow.

“Uncle, brother, consort”, she greets them and stands behind the chair to Ozai’s right.

While Sokka nods at her respectfully, Zuko narrows his eyes.

Then, Fire Lord Ozai strides in. His tall and imposing frame and the piercing gaze on his
face, make a shiver run down his spine. He’s a creepy guy and Sokka can’t help but feel
intimidated by him as well.

At first, Ozai acknowledges neither of them as he walks to his seat, that is quickly pulled
back by servants, so that he can sit down. Only once he has done so he motions with a seat of
his hand, that his family may sit too and their chairs are pulled back for them as well.

Sokka shifts uncomfortably in his seat, feeling the weight of Azula’s stare at him and he can
tell that Zuko next to him is tense as a bow string.

Azula doesn’t waste any time and breaks the silence, her voice laced with a mocking tone.

“So, how has your first week as newlyweds been? I have heard you haven’t left the Hari
Bulkan all week. I guess you have been otherwise occupied. How romantic.”

Her smile might be sweet, but the malicious glint in her eyes gives her away. She looks at
Sokka and he can’t help but turn beet-red at her implications and he stiffens, unsure of how to
respond. Zuko clenches his fists under the table, while the servants bring in the food.

It distracts him for a moment, but not completely and Sokka wonders what’s with her, that
Azula has to provoke Zuko every time she opens her mouth. He looks searchingly to his
right.

“It’s none of your business”, Zuko bites back and Sokka is a little surprised, because really?
This is Zuko’s approach of being careful? Jumping right at Azula’s first provocation?
“Calm down, Zuzu. I’m just saying. One could think the marriage was rather a reward, not a
punishment. No offense, Sokka.”

“None taken”, he says as calmly as he can muster and her grin gets a little wider.

“So do you enjoy my brother’s company? Enjoy his burning passion?”

Zuko’s knuckles crack loudly and Sokka is actually relieved, when the Fire Lord steps in.

“Now, now Azula. Give them a break. It is not the consort’s fault that Zuko has no ambitions
and can be satisfied with simpler things.”

So much for his relief. One the list of things he never expected, the Fire Lord making fun of
their union was probably far on the top. Sokka sighs internally.

“Is it really necessary to make fun of them like this?”, Iroh speaks up and Azula rolls her
eyes.

“Calm down, Uncle. This is just some mockery between siblings and family. Is it not, Zuko?”

“Sure.”

For a moment silence settles over the table and Sokka tries to concentrate on the food. The
dishes are elaborate and exotic, with flavors that are foreign to him. He’s amazed by the
variety of spices and the richness of the sauces. Despite his dislike for any kind of Fire
Nation culture, Sokka can’t help but appreciate the culinary skills of the chef’s.

They somehow make it through the courses, thanks to Azula prodding about how easy the
studies and daily duties of a Crown Princess are and how baffled she is, that it always seemed
so daunting and exhausting when Zuko was doing them. Zuko only reacts to that by throwing
dark looks at her, while his father reminds Azula that despite her remarkable progress she has
yet to learn a lot. Then Iroh entertains them (or mostly himself, honestly) with a story about a
fire ferret that managed to get into his room and, looking for something edible, caused quite
some chaos in his private tea storage.

The story is actually quite hilarious, especially the part when the servants tried to catch it, but
Sokka is too tense to really laugh about it. The rest of the Royal Family only has so much as
a polite smirk for Iroh’s story.

When the dessert is over, Sokka relaxes a little, because that has been not too bad. He waits
for them to be dismissed, when the Fire Lord turns to him directly.

“Sokka”, he begins and Sokka’s eyes dart around the room, searching for an escape. “I was
wondering, are all Water Tribe people so rude or is it just your father?”

Sokka stares blankly back at him. “Uh…?”

“He must have long but received the good news. But we have yet to hear from him. I must
say, I am disappointed. Does he love you so little, that he’s not even sending simple
congratulations on his own son’s marriage?”
The words are supposed to hurt and maybe that would have worked with Zuko, if their roles
were reversed, but Sokka feels relieved. That there is no reaction from his dad means that he
is approaching this situation in a measured and tactical fashion, putting aside his own
emotions and planning for a great revenge probably.

That thought is so uplifting, that the words are out of Sokka’s mouth before he can think
about them.

“It probably just got lost in the mail.”

Zuko looks at him in horror, while Azula seems genuinely surprised and even the Fire Lord
looks a little baffled by Sokka’s response, while Iroh bursts into laughter.

“A sense of humor is a major defense against minor troubles. Very good, Sokka!”

Obviously, Fire Lord Ozai doesn’t see it that way. His expression darkens, but for some
reason, he lets go of Sokka and turns to Zuko instead.

“Prince Zuko. As you have nothing better to do, you will hold a speech for the return of a
division from the Earth Kingdom.”

Zuko looks at his father in disbelief, but then he nods, a little too eager for Sokka’s liking.

“Of course. Do you want me to write something myself or…?”

“No. The speech will be written for you. As the scribes are so busy, I am afraid you will only
get it on the day itself, but I expect you to deliver it satisfyingly. Can you do that?”

“Sure. Thank you, Father.”

Sokka can’t explain where the tight feeling in his chest is suddenly coming from, maybe from
the hopeful tone in Zuko’s voice. He can put his finger on it, but he can tell that something is
wrong. His suspicion feels even more valid, when he sees the concerned expression on Iroh’s
face and Azula’s sadistic smile.
 The Speech
Chapter Summary

Zuko's excited for his speech. Sokka is not.

Chapter Notes

Thank you so much for your feedback in all forms for this story. I really appreciate it!
This is why I apologize already that the next chapter will only go online next week. I'll
go back to my home country for a trip with my mom and thus I won't find the time to
write.
However, I hope you will enjoy the new chapter. Let me know what you think / like /
don't like.
Best wishes, Kim

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 5: The Speech

The family dinner went better than Sokka expected. He had been a little terrified beforehand,
but apart from Azula’s mockery of them being a romantic couple, which they were clearly
not, it had been quite alright. Except for a few stinging comments about his father, Fire Lord
Ozai basically ignored Sokka and he was definitely okay with that.

Nevertheless, the dinner is still nagging at him and that is because of Zuko.

The change in him has been everything but subtle. Ever since the dinner ended, Zuko seems
awfully determined and brimming with energy.

Which is how Sokka ended up here, watching him practice his firebending on the training
yard. Zuko has obviously forgotten their plans for sword practice altogether. It hasn’t been
mentioned ever since that breakfast before Sokka has visited the temple and it bothers him
more than he would admit if somebody asked him. All he can do is sit and watch how Zuko
casts one flame after another and throws them at the targets on the training yard.

Zuko is all worked up, sweat is covering his face and arms and there is a grim expression on
his face. Maybe that is just him trying to concentrate. Maybe firebending is incredibly
strenuous. It looks like it anyway. It’s nothing like Katara’s smooth sways of her arms and
body. It’s all kicks and punches and brute force, to which Zuko makes all kinds of noises. The
prince moves through his katas and he growls and snarls and roars, while he hits the targets
with his fire.

Brute force and destruction. Sokka sighs a little. That is all that firebending consists of. He
knows that. All his experiences with the element have been painful and cost him greatly.

He watches Zuko jump into the air, spin around himself only to kick a large ball of fire onto
one of the targets, that lights up in flames immediately. He lands with a look of grim
satisfaction on his face.

Then he comes over to where Sokka is sitting, to wipe his sweaty face with a towel and take a
sip of water from the canteen, looking very satisfied with himself.

“Are you going to practice your bending all day?”, Sokka asks and he can’t ban the annoyed
tone in his voice.

Zuko nods. “I have to.”

“Says who?”

“Says me. I know that you don’t understand this.”

“Right. I don’t.”

Sokka crosses his arms over his chest and he doesn’t even try to suppress the bitterness in his
voice. He looks away decidedly, when Zuko gives him a look.

“I have to do this”, is all he says and Sokka exhales noisily.

They already had that talk yesterday and he is not eager to do it all again.

Frankly, Sokka thinks Zuko is an idiot for thinking that assigning him to hold a speech for the
returning war heroes is the Fire Lord’s way of showing him that he still has a chance to
become a respectable prince. Zuko sees it as the first step to regain his honor and reputation.
If he fulfills the tasks he’s given to his father’s satisfaction, then he will slowly win back his
favor.

It makes Sokka anxious to see that Zuko holds such high hopes after Fire Lord Ozai has
shown the whole world how much he disparaged his own son by forcing him to marry Sokka
and exposing him to the people’s mockery only a little over a week ago. Why would he
suddenly see it fit to let Zuko, who has no experience on the battlefield whatsoever, speak to
the soldiers and generals coming back from war?

Sokka can’t forget the concerned look on uncle Iroh’s face and he hopes he is wrong, but he
doesn’t think he is.

On their way to the training yard they have come across Azula and she patted Zuko on the
shoulder, telling him, that she would have loved to be in his place tomorrow and that he
should be grateful for the opportunity. Zuko had seemed surprised, a little skeptical, but then
after a moment he looked a little too pleased and too excited and…

Sokka actually liked miserable Zuko better, though that is probably a terrible thing to even
think. But at least the misery about their situation was something they had in common and
Sokka found some solace in that. But ever since the Fire Lord announced the speech, Zuko
doesn’t seem half as miserable as before. And the closer it approaches, the more confident he
is. It seems as if he moved on, as if Sokka is only a minor inconvenience that can be easily
tolerated.

It’s disheartening, if Sokka is completely honest, while he watches Zuko get into stance and
prepare for another set of katas. He looks down onto his wrists and remembers the reassuring
grip and the warmth of Zuko’s hands. He seemed understanding, caring even throughout the
wedding ceremony.

Zuko shifts one leg to the side and opens his arms. As he does, the largest fire ball Sokka has
seen so far, appears between his hands. Then Zuko lunges and pushes his arms forward and
the giant ball of fire seers over the yard and knocks over three targets at once, turning each of
them into ash that falls to the ground gently like the first snow of the year.

Sokka looks away wistfully.

When Zuko open his eyes on the day of the speech he feels a rush of excitement run through
his body. He is aware that this day will be crucial for his future and his esteem in the eyes of
his father and the Fire Nation. He must not fail.

He is a little anxious because he doesn’t know what exactly awaits him. His father has been
rather secretive about it. Zuko only knows that the speech will be held on the Ceremonial
Plaza, which means that there will be lots of people.

Today, he can really redeem himself. This is his chance to show his respect for his ancestor’s
war, that he betrayed when he spoke out of turn during the war council. He hopes, that the
speech can convey the message of gratitude and honor that the returning soldiers deserve. It’s
time for him to prove himself.

Silently, he slips out of the bed as to not wake Sokka, who is still sound asleep next to him.
He has gotten used to the other boy’s company by now. He is still a stranger to Zuko and
actually, the young prince is not sure if they will ever be more than that. Their talks are still
mostly superficial, because if they address any topic that comes close to the war or to the
differences of their nations it always causes an uncomfortable tension and thus keeping things
superficial seems like a good solution.
If today goes fine, Zuko will be assigned more tasks and probably they won’t spend much
time together anyway. It’s probably a rather dull prospect for the Water Tribe boy, but Zuko
has to focus on the bigger picture.

He crosses the room and sits cross-legged in front of the little shrine on the right side of the
wall. Four candles sit on a large tray and he ignites them with a small flicker of his hand.

Then, Zuko closes his eyes and focuses on his breathing, the candles in front of him
mirroring the flame inside himself. With every intake of air, the flames burn a little higher
and they diminish as he breathes out. The exercise helps him get rid of some of the
nervousness and it helps him channel his thoughts. But he doesn’t allow himself to get lost in
the meditation neither.

A bath is already waiting for him as he steps into the bathing chamber and Zuko makes a
quick use of it. When he gets back to the room, Sokka is finally awake, already sitting at the
table, while servants hurry around the room, making the bed, setting up the breakfast and
bringing in the formal attire. Zuko can’t help a little smile, because it actually looks like
Sokka doesn’t want to be in the way of the servants.

Once the last plate is set on the table, the servants leave the room with a bow in his direction
and Zuko sits down in his spot.

Sokka doesn’t look at him. He is not a morning person in general, but Zuko knows that his
silence is not what this is all about. He is still wearing this expression of worry and reproach
on his face and Zuko knows, that Sokka can’t see why this is so important for him. He tried
to explain it to him, but all he got was a worried frown and a look full of doubt. But in the
end Sokka doesn’t have to like the tasks that are given to Zuko, he only has to accompany
him. Though Zuko must admit that he’d rather Sokka being less reluctant and more
supportive about that.

When their eyes meet, he tries to look at him encouragingly.

“It’ll be fine.”

Sokka only nods and reaches for one of the breakfast muffins without saying anything.

As Sokka stands in front of the mirror, he can't help but stare at his reflection. He recognizes
himself, but what he sees could as well be stranger to him. Dressed in the formal Fire Nation
attire he looks completely different from his usual self.

If it wasn't for his wolftail and his blue eyes, he could really be mistaken for a Fire Nation
prince. The long-sleeved maroon undershirt paired with the red high-neck tunic with gold set-
off hemlines gives him a regal appearance and the flame embroidered on the middle piece
just underlines that impression. The broad goldish-yellow sash belt around his middle adds
another level of detail to his outfit, while the boots and wrist bands add a military touch. The
outfit makes him look taller and more imposing.

Sokka can't help but feel like this is just a costume, like he's putting on a performance. He's
acting the part of the Prince Consort. But nevertheless seeing himself like this feels like he is
betraying his roots. The discomfort is clearly showing and he tugs at the wrist bands, which
feel a little too tight and rub on his scars.

He hears steps behind him and looks up to meet Zuko’s eyes through the mirror.

For a moment, they just look at each other, before Zuko clears his throat. Sokka flinches
awkwardly at the prolonged silence.

“You look good”, Zuko says in a neutral tone and shrugs.

It’s probably supposed to cheer him up, but Sokka looks at himself doubtfully.

“I look like you”, he points out.

It’s true. Apart from the decorated armor on Zuko’s shoulders and the fact that Zuko’s tunic is
longer and also embroidered on the sides, their outfits are basically identical.

“Uhm. Sure. I mean, we’re… married and it is kind of expected that we dress similarly for
formal events.”

Sokka grimaces at that, but he nods, still feeling uncomfortable.

“We don’t look too bad together”, Zuko says and Sokka cannot figure out, if he is trying to
lighten the mood or if he is just as astonished by the fact that they do, as Sokka himself. That
doesn’t make him feel better at all.

When there is a knock on the door, Sokka sighs and turns around to look at Zuko directly.

“It’s time, isn’t it?”

The servant, that guides them from their quarters to the Ceremonial Plaza, chooses a rather
unusual way through the Palace, but Zuko does not complain. Apparently he leads them to
the backside of the very platform on which they have been married only such a short time
ago.

He takes a look at Sokka, who must have the same thought, because he grimaces though he
doesn’t say anything. Zuko can tell that the other boy is tense and he can’t deny that he feels
his nerves as well. This is their first public event since the wedding and he doesn’t know how
much hostility they will be shown this time around.

Anyway, Zuko has decided that he will face them proud and strong, a display of royalty and
he hopes that Sokka manages to make a decent impression in his new attire as well.

A scribe awaits them at the bottom of the stairs that lead onto the platform.

“Prince Zuko”, he acknowledges him, taking a deep bow and holding out the scroll with the
speech he is going to give.

There is no time to look it over, as one of the officials motions for them to get up onto the
platform.

There is still a little frown on Sokka’s face, but he manages to look at least a little supportive
by now.

“Are you ready?”, he asks, a little grimly.

“As I’ll ever be”, Zuko says. He exhales a shaky breath, squares his shoulders and puts on a
confident look.

Side by side, they walk up the stairs.

When he catches a glimpse of the Plaza, Zuko’s breath hitches and he stops dead in his track.

Side by side, row upon row, the place is covered with unlit pyres. On top of each of them lies
the body of a fallen soldier. Zuko’s eyes widen in horror, his heart beats heavily in his chest.
The silence presses onto his ears and he shakes his head unconsciously.

No. No, no, no, no. This can’t be true. This is not a homecoming. This is a funeral.

Next to him, Sokka stops just as abruptly.

“Spirits!”, he hisses under his breath, but Zuko doesn’t pay any attention to him.

He can hardly tear his eyes away from the pyres, it’s like he feels the weight of every fallen
soldier on his shoulders. It’s hard to breath and when he looks over the solemn eyes of their
families, gathered behind a barricade, despair threatens to take him over.

Suddenly he feels small and powerless and still so shocked. The gravity of the situation is
slowly sinking in and he knows who those soldiers are. Still in disbelief, he shakes his head
and looks over to where his family is sitting. There is a plea in his eyes, Zuko knows it and he
knows what his father must think of him, but he can’t. He can’t do this.

The Fire Lord narrows his eyes.

“We have been waiting for you, Prince Zuko. You may begin.”
He motions to the pult in the middle of the platform. There is an underlying threat in his
voice, something dark and powerful and fear settles in Zuko’s heart.

He doesn’t know how he manages to set one foot in front of the other until he stands there
and unrolls the scroll with shaking fingers.

His instinct has been right, Sokka thinks, when he takes his seat between Azula and Iroh and
looks over to Zuko, who is standing behind the pult with a look of sheer horror on his face.
His fingers shake visibly and he holds onto the pult so tightly that his knuckles turn white. He
looks completely shaken and haunted. Terrified.

Sokka hopes that his own face doesn’t give away his disgust and anger. It’s not directed at
Zuko, even though he is staring at the prince.

Whatever this is, it is marcaber, morbid and barbaric.

Sokka still only knows so little about Fire Nation traditions and though he doesn’t understand
what is actually happening he is certain that this is by no means normal. Otherwise Iroh
wouldn’t look so pained and ashamed.

“People…”, Zuko begins with a quiet and shaky voice. He stops.

His shoulders are heaving and he closes his eyes and this is painful to watch. Sokka’s fingers
curl into the fabric of his tunic. His mind is racing and he just hopes that this will not take
long.

Zuko breathes through his nose and tries to gather himself and Sokka holds his breath.

“People of the Fire Nation. Mothers, fathers, brothers and sisters”, Zuko goes on. “We all
have gathered here today to honor the brave soldiers of the 41st division.”

Next to him uncle Iroh exhales noisily.

“These brave men and women gave their life for our nation. They gave… they gave it
willingly, voluntarily. Their loss weighs heavily. It wasn’t a fair fight… It was… It was…”

Sokka’s eyes are fixed on Zuko and the hairs on his body stand up, when Zuko almost chokes
on the words.

“It was a dastardly ambush, an act of cruelty and they paid for it with their very lives.”

He sees a tear roll over Zuko’s cheek and Sokka doesn’t know what it is, but he understands
that this is more than a regular funeral speech, when he sees the expression of hardly
suppressed anger on Iroh’s face.

He glances at the Fire Lord and Azula, who watch the scene unmoved.
The sound of mournful sobs from the crowd echoes over the plaza and Zuko’s voice hitches,
before he goes on. He sounds pained and Sokka watches frozen in shock.

“I am standing here in front of you today, when I should lay beside them. I… I…”

Zuko’s whole body is shaking, his voice more of a sob than anything else, so close to
breaking.

“I should have been a part of this division, if I hadn’t been severly injured.”

Unconsciously Zuko’s fingers wander to the scar on his left side and Sokka’s mouth stands
slightly agape. This is… this is… he doesn’t have words. He absolutely has no words for
what is happening in front of his eyes.

“I should lie there with your sons and daughters instead of remembering them.”

A murmur goes through the crowd, followed by an outcry and suddenly words like ‘coward’,
‘disgrace’ and ‘shame’ echo up to them. Sokka is horrified, when he realizes that those
people are not only shocked by this revelation. They are angry. Angry at Zuko, because he
lives and their children died.

Zuko flinches, as if he is physically hit by their words and Sokka looks around, wondering
why nobody is doing anything. Iroh’s eyes are closed in pain, tears run over his cheeks, but
he doesn’t stand up. There are so many people with them on the platform, guards and Fire
Sages and Sokka spots Shyu, but the priest only looks up into the afternoon sky as if he
wishes to be a million miles away.

Why is nobody stepping in?

He looks to his side, to Azula and Ozai and when he sees the sadistic glint in Azula’s eyes, he
knows why. People are afraid of them.

They are monsters.

Suddenly Sokka remembers Zuko’s words that everybody in the Palace has their own agenda
and with a shocking certainty he comes to the realization what Azula’s agenda is: to break
Zuko, to destroy him beyond repair.

There is no single sign of sympathy or care neither in her, nor in her father’s eyes.

Somebody needs to do something.

The crowd is still calling Zuko names, getting more aggrevated by the minute and it’s just not
right to blame Zuko for not being dead. It’s cruel that the Fire Lord put him up there and
Sokka knows exactly what his intention is.

First he made Zuko a laughingstock for the nobility, now he is turning the citizens against
him.
An anger unlike he has ever known starts to boil in his stomach. This is unjust, it is cruel and
it is just inhuman.

Sokka closes his eyes for a moment. He has to make a decision.

Until now he has been hardly acknowledged by anyone and he planned to keep it that way.
Sokka knows, that by going over to Zuko, by showing his support, he will paint a big target
on his own back. But this – he cannot stand by and watch how Zuko is being abused,
humiliated and hurt over and over and over again. Sokka is disgusted by what he sees.

And then it hits him: Zuko is right.

Azula must not keep the title of the Crown Princess, because she will be even worse than her
father. Being so sadistic at such a young age holds the promise of a reign of true tyranny.

It is in that moment, that Sokka knows what his agenda will be: to make sure that this tyranny
will never happen.

They can’t just sit by and endure. They have to do something, show them that they won’t go
down without a fight.

A grim look of determination settles on Sokka’s face when he gets up and stands beside
Zuko. The disbelieving look on Ozai’s and Azula’s faces is only a small satisfaction.

Carefully, gently, Sokka puts his hand onto Zuko’s back, just below his shoulder blade. He
feels Zuko’s body stiffen, feels the trembling under his fingertips and Zuko looks at him for a
short moment, his expression somewhere between shock, a plea and gratefulness.

Sokka glares at the people behind the barricade, who only get louder and angrier as Sokka is
standing next to his husband.

Zuko gulps and somehow he manages to deliver the last words, almost shouting them in his
despair.

“They won’t ever be forgotten. May their fires continue to burn in our hearts.”

And with that the Fire Sages light the pyres. Soon the air is thick with the smell of smoke,
burning wood and flesh, a smell that will haunt Sokka for years to come. The roar of the fire
drowns the cries of the crowd. He doesn’t flinch despite how disgusting the whole thing is.
Through it all, he keeps his hand firmly on Zuko’s back, impressed that the prince still stands
upright. But his eyes look empty and it seems as if a blow of the wind could knock him over.

After a few minutes, Sokka nudges him gently.

“Come on. Let’s get out of here.”

When they turn to leave the platform, his eyes meet Azula’s and they glare at each other with
equal hatred and intensity. The fight is on.
Sokka almost has to drag Zuko back to their quarters. The prince doesn’t make any effort to
move on his own, he is like a puppet with cut strings and once they enter their chamber, Zuko
collapses down onto his knees in the middle of the room, covers his head with his hands and
then he starts to scream. It’s a sound that goes through Sokka’s mark and bones.

It’s agonizing and painful to watch and Sokka has no idea how Zuko must feel. He doesn’t
know how to help him, how to comfort someone he barely knows or make this any better.
The display of cruelty that he just witnessed takes his breath away. His heart clenches at the
sight in front of him and Zuko’s outbreak is so intense, that Sokka has to look away.

He still doesn’t understand all the details of what just happened, but he doesn’t need to. He
gets the intention behind it and that is enough already.

It seems like Zuko’s cries turn into a full blown panic attack. He sobs and cries and screams,
digs his fingers into his thighs, then covers his ears and the intensity of his breakdown is
concerning. Sokka feels pathetic, when he kneels down next to him and pats his back, telling
Zuko that everything will be alright. Even in his own ears that sounds like an empty lie.

At some point, after what feels like hours, Zuko stands up on shaky legs only to walk over to
the bed, lay down and curl into a ball. Sokka watches him helplessly, still unsure what to do.

He is just about to sit down next to him, when there is a knock on the door.

A servant stands in front of it and looks at him expectantly.

“The Fire Lord demands Prince Zuko’s and your presence.”

Sokka’s anger flares up just by the mention of the Fire Lord and he is in no mood to meet
with that bastard.

“Prince Zuko’s condition doesn’t allow him to attend to any meetings right now. Not even
with the Fire Lord.”

The servant raises his eyebrows.

“Are you resisting the Fire Lord’s order?”

“I am stating the facts”, Sokka bites back.

“Very well”, the man responds and looks a little taken aback. “Then you will follow me.”

“I will not”, Sokka declares, getting more aggravated by the minute. “I won’t leave him
alone.”

The servant’s eyes narrow.

“Prince Consort, with all due respect”, he says it is a manner that makes it obvious that he
holds absolutely no respect for Sokka. “Your place is where the Fire Lord orders you to be.”
“My place is with my husband!”, Sokka yells, not sure where these words are suddenly
coming from.

He slams the door into the servant’s face. Maybe he will regret that later, but right now he has
more important things to do. Like sitting next to Zuko, continuing to pat his shoulder
awkwardly and making a plan about what to do next.
 Aftermath
Chapter Summary

The aftermath of the speech. It's not easy for anybody.

Chapter Notes

Thank you guys so much for your amazing feedback on the last chapter! I was so happy
to see that you liked it <3
This chapter is still pretty heavy, but we'll make our way up, I promise.
Let me know what you think and enjoy!

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 6: Aftermath

Zuko looks troubled, even in his sleep. The frown on his forehead won't subside, his fingers
are clinging to the bedsheet. Dried tears cover his cheeks, the salty white lines clearly visible
on the scarred, red skin. It's a heart-breaking sight and Sokka can't help but pity the young
man next to him.

It's only when the ragged sniffs slowly fade to stable, deep breaths that he allows himself to
let a shaky exhale of his own slip over his lips.

Spirits...

Sokka is still shocked by what he just witnessed.

His eyes are fixed on the boy next to him, who has turned his back to him and Sokka doesn't
dare move, afraid that he will startle him awake.

Zuko looks awfully delicate in this moment. His screams and cries still echo in Sokka's ears
even though the room is completely silent.

The young Water Tribe man shakes his head in disbelief.

He doesn't understand why this is happening, why Zuko's family shows so much hatred
towards him. Sokka never would have thought that such hatred between family members was
even possible.

Unconsciously, he chews on his lip and he thinks back to their very first conversation. Zuko
had said that he had a rough couple of years and a queasy feeling settles in Sokka's stomach,
when he wonders if this is just the normal way of life in the palace. He has no idea what
exactly Zuko has been through.

All he knows is that within weeks Zuko got scarred, married against his will and now forced
to hold a speech, that literally brought him to his knees. It is obvious that this was not a usual
funeral speech, there was more to it - something personal. But whatever the Fire Lord's
reason might have been to make his son hold this speech, Sokka can tell without a doubt that
this is a strategy of psychological warfare.

This is just crazy. He is surrounded by mad people. They are surrounded by mad people,
because - spirits be praised - Zuko seems like the most normal person in this family despite
what he has and had to endure.

A rough couple of years…

Sokka huffs and shakes his head again.

Zuko sighs in his sleep and his grip on the sheets tightens. Sokka watches him carefully, but
the prince does not wake up.

Technically, Sokka is the prisoner, the hostage of the Fire Nation, but actually it seems that he
is better off than Zuko. Well, maybe he just spoiled that, by slamming the door into the
servant's face and disobeying the Fire Lord's direct orders. That thought is unsettling at the
prospect of punishment that surely awaits him, but right then, Sokka couldn't find himself to
care. He had to protect Zuko.

It's just what people do, where he comes from. You don't leave your family or your tribe
hanging. You do what you can to protect them. If he likes it or not, Sokka cannot be sure that
he will ever see his own family again (it's a painful thought that he shoves away quickly) and
here in this place Zuko is the closest thing to a family that he has. And even if they weren't
married, he couldn't just sit by and watch how Zuko's family tears the young man apart.

It was just wrong.

Sokka has been raised to protect, he is a warrior at heart, and he simply can't look away and
ignore the injustice that is happening around him.

His thoughts wander to Azula and to the challenging, malicious look on her face. Sokka
knows that this hasn't been the end. It has probably just been the beginning. That girl is out
for Zuko's blood (and now certainly for Sokka's too, but that is something he doesn't want to
think about either).

Nobody stood up for Zuko out there, not even his uncle. Iroh just closed his eyes and let it
happen. Sokka doesn't understand it.
The old man seems so supportive of Zuko, so why would he let this happen? Why would he
turn away? Is he so afraid of his own brother, the Fire Lord? How can he just sit there and
watch how they hurt his nephew? Did he also look away when Zuko got the scar?

Sokka’s hands ball into fists and there is a bitter tug around his mouth.

Iroh's words of wisdom and reassurance might be all well and good, but of what use are they,
when they cannot protect Zuko?

It seems, they have to protect themselves.

For a moment the tempting thought of escaping from the Palace runs through Sokka’s mind.
He can fight with a sword and Zuko is a firebender. And he still is the prince. So maybe... but
Sokka dismisses the thought as quickly as it comes.

Despite everything he cannot even be sure that Zuko would want to get away from here. And
even if, what Sokka understood from everyone around him is that Zuko's bending is not
exactly super strong. Also, running away would have them being chased by Azula and
probably the whole Fire Nation Army. They wouldn't stand a chance.

What they need is a plan, how to get through the next... days, months, years?... time mostly
unscathed.

He knows it'll be quite a challenge, because Azula doesn't seem like a person who does things
half-heartedly. But Sokka has never been one to shy away from a challenge. Actually, it gives
him some kind of purpose, now that he’s stuck at this palace. They have to be prepared for
whatever Azula plans to throw at them. Sokka worries a lot more about what the Princess is
planning, because he is almost certain that Fire Lord Ozai doesn't really care about what
Zuko is doing, now that he has him resigned from the title of his successor.

Azula, on the other hand…

No, they need to be prepared. And they need to develop a plan to get her out of the picture.

Who holds the most power leads the nation. When I become a more powerful bender than
Azula, they will follow me.

Zuko's words sounded ridiculous when he said them before, but if that is really how things
work around here, than they have to make do. It's at least somewhere to start.

He needs a teacher though. At least, that is something that Iroh can do.

With a sudden rush of determination Sokka gets up quietly. No time better than the present.

He watches Zuko for a moment, but the Prince doesn't move. He still looks so utterly lost,
now even more, lying all alone in this big bed. Seeing Zuko like that causes a sudden wave of
affection to wash over Sokka. It is by no means cold in their room, but Sokka still can't help
it and puts a blanket over Zuko, more for the comfort than for the warmth, before he slips out
of the room.
It is impossible to move through the palace sight unseen. Even in the area that is reserved for
the Royal Family there are always guards posted throughout the corridors and Sokka is well
aware of the skeptical glances that follow him. They must have heard what happened, that he
refused to take orders from the Fire Lord himself, but no one makes an attempt to stop him,
while Sokka hurries over one of the yards to Iroh’s quarters.

The sun is almost completely set, a deep red hue slowly fading into black and blue and Sokka
shivers. Even the sky looks intimidating around here.

Actually, Sokka is not sure how to approach Iroh. Zuko’s uncle had been very friendly ever
since they first met and Sokka likes him somehow. But he let Zuko down today, when the
prince would have needed his support and it just doesn’t sit right with him, that Iroh didn’t
stand up for his nephew. He’s called the Dragon of the West and from what he’s learned in
the temple Iroh is a great firebender and Sokka knows that he is a kind and wise man. He
surely could have protected Zuko.

Instead, Sokka had to do the job. A sixteen-year-old Water Tribe boy, held hostage by the
Fire Nation, who doesn’t know anything about the palace’s shenanigans.

A grim frown settles on Sokka’s face and he can’t help the anger, that rises within him. It is a
very different kind of anger than what he feels for Azula or Ozai, but still.

It makes him knock on Iroh’s door a tad too hard to be considered polite and he doesn’t
bother waiting to be asked inside. He just shoves the door open and steps into Iroh’s quarters.

Sokka stops dead in his track, because the room is dark safe for two candles framing the
portrait of a young man. In the low light he faintly resembles Zuko, at least from afar. A bowl
with dried flowers is placed by the portrait. Incense sticks exude their heavy fragrance in the
room. All in all, the scenery looks like a shrine.

Iroh is kneeling before it, his head down and Sokka can’t make out his face. The old man
trembles and Sokka hears a quiet sob. An uneasy feeling settles in his stomach and he
definitely shouldn’t be here.

He hasn’t been prepared to find Iroh like this, devastated and grieving. Sokka feels like an
intruder and yet, there is a part of him that is too stubborn to turn around and come back later.
Awkwardly he clears his throat.

“Why did you sit by and let this happen?!”, Sokka asks reproachfully, but not as sharp as he
originally intended.

Iroh flinches, but he doesn’t answer.

“Zuko – he is your family. You should have protected him.”

There is still no visible reaction apart from a noise that sounds awfully like another sob and
somehow it is Iroh’s impassiveness that makes Sokka snap.

“They are using him! They are abusing him! They hurt him! And you sit by and just
watch?!”, he yells.

At once, all the tension that kept building ever since he set foot into the Fire Nation, his
anger, the worry for his sister back home, for his father at sea, for Zuko suddenly breaks out
of him. All the malice and viciousness, all the mean words and actions, the cruelty he has
witnessed simply becomes too much. He doesn’t know how to handle it, he is overwhelmed,
because he is still just a teenager, a boy in a foreign land, an outsider, a hostage.

Sokka knows in his heart that it’s wrong to project his anger on Iroh, but for now he just can’t
help it. Iroh is the only person he knows that would consider helping Zuko and him and he
didn’t. He just didn’t.

“Does he mean so little to you?! Does he mean so little that you would turn your back and
hide in here? You should have protected him!”

Iroh still hasn’t turned to Sokka yet, but he shakes his head.

“He means everything to me. But it was not my place to intervene.”

Iroh says it slowy, dragging the words as if every single one of them causes him great pain.
His voice is full of tears and even though there is a pang of pity in his chest, Sokka is not
willing to let it go.

“Not your place?! Whose place was it then?”

His words are met with silence, before Iroh turns around ever so slowly and looks at Sokka
pointedly.

Tears are still running over his cheeks and into his beard, his eyes are red. For once, there is
not even the slightest hint of an encouraging smile or a mysterious wisdom on his face. Iroh
looks beaten, but he looks meaningfully at Sokka, causing him to take a step back in shock.

Decidedly, Sokka shakes his head.

“That is nonsense. I can’t help him. You could have and you should have. You say he means
everything to you? Then why wouldn’t you do something?”

Iroh closes his eyes and takes a deep breath.

“Today was not an easy day for any of us. It reminded me of the son I lost. The war took him
away and the sheer idea of losing Zuko to that same fate… Desperation and grief took me
over. You must forgive an old man for that, Sokka. Zuko is like a son to me. I can’t lose him.”

Gulping heavily at Iroh’s words, Sokka tears his eyes away from him, too ashamed to keep
looking Iroh in the eyes. He finds the portrait of the young man and he feels like he is
twisting the knife in Iroh’s chest even more, but it’s the truth and someone has to say it.
“You will lose him”, his voice is rough and gravely and Sokka’s eyes flicker back to Iroh,
who watches him carefully. Zuko’s uncle doesn’t flinch. The only visible sign of the impact
of Sokka’s words are his eyes, that widen in fear.

“You will lose him”, Sokka repeats, “If this keeps going on. She wants him dead. I saw it in
her eyes. She wants him dead and the Fire Lord will let her have her way. Sooner or later,
Azula will challenge him to an Agni Kai and you know how this would end. Zuko must be
ready when it comes to that. He needs you. He needs your guidance and he needs a
firebending master.”

Gently, Iroh shakes his head.

“I see why you would come to me for that. But Sokka… it is not that I don’t want to help
him. But the more openly I support Zuko, the more they will try to keep me away from him.
Do you want that?”

“No, but he needs a teacher”, Sokka says stubbornly.

“I have tried to teach him before, but he is not ready. Zuko has so much anger and pain inside
of him and until he learns to let go of it, he will never be able to truly master firebending.”

Unnerved, Sokka runs a hand over his head.

“He doesn’t need to master it, he just needs to be able to stand his ground against Azula.”

Iroh looks at him with an expression that Sokka cannot decipher. He doesn’t understand
Iroh’s hesitation.

“Please. If Zuko really is like a son to you, teach him.”

The old man just keeps looking at Sokka, before he hums and lets out a deep sigh. Then, he
says something, that almost knocks Sokka of his feet, because it is nothing that he ever
thought he would (let alone wanted) to hear.

“You carry yourself like a true Prince of the Fire Nation, Sokka. I see the determination in
your eyes, like a fire burning inside of you. You are a brave young man. My son was too”,
Iroh says and throws a longing look at the portrait. “I see so much of him in Zuko and in
yourself.”

For a moment, Sokka doesn’t know how to react. He is more than a little dumbstruck and he
tries not to focus on why anyone would think that he’s a true Prince of the Fire Nation. He
rather not to be such. But somehow Iroh’s words manage to get through to him and he takes a
step forward and puts his hand on Iroh’s shoulder.

The old man looks up to him.

“Then be brave for him, too. Zuko can’t do this on his own and I am not a bender. He needs
you.”

He squeezes Iroh’s shoulder and after a long moment, Iroh finally nods.
Zuko’s eyes flutter open, greeted by the dimly lit room. The soft glow of a flickering candle
dances on the walls, casting an eerie shadow that matches the turmoil within him. The young
prince feels defeated, exhausted and incredibly tired. He shifts slightly on the bed and feels
the weight of a blanket draped over his body.

His eyes widen, when he realizes that Sokka must have tucked him in, in a simple act of care
that strikes a chord in Zuko’s heart. Turning around quickly, he searches for Sokka, but the
space next to him is empty and the Water Tribe boy is nowhere to be seen.

Zuko tries not to worry, but he keeps staring at the door, unable to deny the fear of what
might happen next. Where did they take him? Did they punish him? Will they come and get
Zuko next? He shivers involuntarily and wraps the blanket tighter around his body in a petty
attempt of hiding away.

He knows he can’t hide. He knows, that there is nowhere to run to.

Zuko tries to fight down the emotions that threaten to take a hold of him again and he fails.
Of course he does. Because failing is the only thing he’s good at.

He starts to spiral, unable to escape the thoughts that gnaw at him.

Why had everything fallen apart? How could he have been so foolish to get his hopes up?
Had he really been so desperate for his father’s approval that he thought holding a speech
would earn him respect and be a chance to prove himself? Why was he like this?

His father’s intentions became painfully clear. The realization has hit Zuko like a wave
crashing against the shore leaving him battered and broken. He knows that every word of the
speech had been true. Fire Lord Ozai revealed the cruel thruth: he would have sent Zuko, his
own son, with the 41st division to become just another name among the fallen soldiers.

The revelation crushes him, suffocates his spirit and Zuko gasps for air, trying not to
hyperventilate.

His own father wants him dead. His own father doesn’t deem him worthy of living.

And for a moment Zuko wishes that he would be dead. It would be easier. For him. For
everyone. Nobody would have to deal with his perceived weakness, his inability to meet
expectations. Nobody would have to face the scars that marred his face and soul. The doubts
haunting Zuko’s mind grow louder, drown any remnants of self-confidence he still clings to.
He was, is and always will be a disappointment.

He is weak. His father has been right about that all along.
The weight of Zuko’s failures presses down on him, suffocating him further. Lying there on
the bed he feels so small and insignificant, a broken vessel incapable of fulfilling his duty as
a prince and a son. The flickering candlelight mirrors the wavering flame within him,
threatening to be extinguished.

Zuko buries his face in the pillow, his body trembling with a mixture of anger, self-loathing
and grief. The turmoil within him seems insurmountable and he wonders, if he will ever find
the strength to rise above it.

Why had everything fallen apart? When did everything fall apart?

Zuko knows it and he doesn’t even have the dignity to feel ashamed, that he is almost a
grown man curled up in his bed wishing for his mom to be there and protect him. Everything
fell apart from the moment she left.

“Why?”, he whispers into the silence, his voice filled with anguish.

Why did she leave him here? Why does his father hate him so much? Why is he like this,
always a failure, always falling for lies and always losing in their cruel little games? Why
does he have to endure all this? Why is nobody standing up for him? Why-

It is not true though.

Through the haze of his despair he remembers the touch of a caring hand on his back.
Confusion mingles with his pain as Zuko tries to make sense of his emotions.

How could Sokka, the only one who had every reason to hate him, show such concern? Zuko
is a member of the Fire Nation, the very nation that had captured Sokka, torn him away from
his family and everyone he knew and forced him into this farce. If anyone has reason to
resent him, it is Sokka. Instead, he has been there, by Zuko’s side, offering comfort and
support and Zuko just doesn’t understand.

Nothing seems right anymore.

With a heavy sigh, Zuko closes his eyes, willing sleep to embrace him, if only for a brief
moment.

Instead he jolts up when he hears the door crack, expecting an attack, and summons large
flames to erupt from his open palms.

“Get away!”, he yells. His voice comes out croaked, more in panic than in anger.

The fire is so bright that Zuko can’t even see, who stepped into his chambers, but that doesn’t
stop him from fueling his flames, almost setting the bed on fire in the process.

“Whoa, easy!”, Sokka yells back. “It’s just me. It’s me, Zuko. Calm down. Calm down,
please.”

Zuko’s shoulders are heaving, he pants and his mind is completely blank. Still somehow it
gets through to him, that it is Sokka and that he is no danger, but Zuko only lets go of his fire
reluctantly.

“Easy”, Sokka repeats and only now does Zuko see him.

The other boy is still wearing the formal Fire Nation robes. He has raised his arms in front of
him soothingly and approaches him slowly, just like he would with a wounded animal. There
is a concerned frown on his face and he watches Zuko warily.

The young prince lets the flame go out and with a heavy sigh, he sinks down onto the bed
again and buries his face in his hands.

His heart races and his breathing remains erratic. Zuko feels the weight of shame pressing
upon him as he realizes what scene he just created in his panic. It comes with an
overwhelming sense of embarrassment.

He peaks through his fingers, his eyes locking with Sokka’s worried gaze tinged with
understanding. Zuko wishes he could hide his vulnerability, his weakness from the other boy,
but it’s too late. He wants to disappear, to escape the judgement that is surely directed at him.
Ever since he arrived, Sokka has only seen him at his worst, witnessed his breakdowns and
inner turmoil and now this outburst of instability.

The room is heavy with a sick silence, broken only by Zuko’s labored breaths. He wants to
say something, wants to apologize but the words are stuck in his throat.

How can Sokka still look at him with this expression of sympathy? He, Zuko, is the epitome
of weakness and failure and he wonders what Sokka must truly think of him.

Whatever it may be, it surely doesn’t show. Sokka just stands there, assessing the situation.
He doesn’t address Zuko’s fragile state. Instead he slowly walks over to the nearby dresser,
opens a drawer and retrieves a pair of his own sleep clothes.

Silently, he changes with his back turned to Zuko and gives him the space he needs to gather
himself.

Zuko draws a few deep breaths and tries to calm down, which is a lot easier said than done.

Once Sokka is ready, he moves towards the bed and sits down on his side of it, closer than
usual but not intrusively so.

His voice is filled with genuine concern, when he finally breaks the silence.

“It’s okay, Zuko. I’m here now. You can go back to sleep.”

He places a comforting hand on Zuko’s arm, offering a gentle touch of reassurance, but
somehow it confuses Zuko even more. Sokka’s presence alone feels like an anchor amidst the
storm of his emotions, but Zuko doesn’t know what to make of it.

He just looks at the Water Tribe boy with wide eyes and it’s only when Sokka gives him a
short encouraging nod, that Zuko allows himself to lie back down again.
He closes his eyes and listens to Sokka’s breathing until sleep finally pulls him away.
 Friend
Chapter Summary

There's a little insight into Sokka, a little bonding and oh, a confrontation with the Fire
Lord.

Chapter Notes

Thanks for your feedback everyone. It makes me so happy to see!

I wonder what you might say to this chapter.
Enjoy!

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 7: Friend

Sokka huffs and leans back against the headboard of the bed, once he is sure that Zuko is
asleep. He wipes a hand over his face, before he undoes his hair tie that holds his wolftail. It
does nothing to ease the tension in his shoulders or diminish the dull headache that has settled
behind his temples. Sokka is tired. And overwhelmed. And at a loss despite that he is
convinced that he did everything he could do in the given situation.

He should probably go to sleep as well or at least get some rest, but Sokka isn't sure if he
could sleep, even if he tried. His shoulders hurt and he feels simply drained. The events of the
day are clearly taking their toll on him. First the tension and wariness before Zuko's speech,
then the horrible scene at the Ceremonial Plaza only to be followed by Zuko's breakdown and
him confronting Iroh. It's... a lot.

He glances at the sleeping prince next to him and simply doesn't know what to think.

Sokka is still upset by Zuko's reaction, when he got back to their room.

The other boy had jumped up immediately, snapping like a bowstring. A haunted expression
of panic showed in his eyes and he had been ready to attack, casting bright flames in the
palms of his hands. Sokka had to shield his face from the heat and brightness, but when he
glanced at Zuko through squinted eyes, he seemed on the brink of losing control, the
flickering flames licking up his arms.
It had been painfully obvious, what Zuko thought was happening in that moment and Sokka
feels a little nauseous, when he slowly begins to understand that there are people in Zuko's
own family, in his own home, who want him dead.

This is Zuko's home. This should be his safe haven. Instead Zuko is afraid for his life.

This is not what home should be like, Sokka thinks and he is not prepared for the wave of
homesickness that crushes over him at the thought.

He misses his family and his tribe so much. He tries to not to let it show, but right in that
moment in the middle of the night he has to blink back the tears. It hurts so much to be away
from home. He doesn't belong here. This place is too hot and too narrow, all the opulence
surrounding him is suffocating, lacking the simplicity and genuine warmth that he is used to.
For a nation that cherishes fire, this place and the people feel so cold.

Sokka misses their igloo, their cozy refuge, which could probably fit into this room. He
misses the laughter and camaraderie that flourished around the campfire. He misses the icy
chill of the westwind, misses wearing three layers of clothing and sleeping under thick furs
that provided comfort and protection against the harsh elements. He misses the long nights,
painted with the ethereal dance of the aurora. He misses the open skies of the South Pole,
where the vastness above served as a reminder of a freedom he yearned so dearly.

He misses Katara. He misses his little sister and he wonders if she's okay, if she is lying in
her bed unable to sleep just like he is and if she is missing him just as much. Too know that
she is all alone now, causes his chest to ache. He tries to comfort himself with the certainty
that in fact Katara is not all alone. Gran-Gran and the other women of the tribe will take care
of her and maybe father will come back or send some of his men to protect what is left of the
tribe.

Sokka bites his lip and stubbornly blinks away the tears that rise in his eyes. Enough tears
have been shed today and he needs to stay strong. He can’t give in to the feeling of despair
and anger that he shoves into the very corner of his mind. The rational part of Sokka knows
why he hasn’t heard from father and yet he wonders, how his dad is dealing with all this.

He wonders if his father is mad at him that he got caught, sad that he lost his only son to the
enemy or proud because Sokka did the right thing to protect his little sister like he was
supposed to do.

Sokka feels like crying in that moment. His family has been torn apart, each of them
struggling on their own. But at least Katara is safe. She is not alone.

Katara is not alone. And neither is he.

Sokka throws a sad look at Zuko, who curled into a ball next to him.

The sound of his breathing reminds Sokka of Katara's, though it is deeper and slower, and the
thought is at the same time comforting and upsetting.

Katara is home and she is safe.

Zuko... Zuko is home and he is terrified. Mistreated and used like a punching bag. It's not
right.

Sokka doesn't know if Zuko's fear of being attacked and killed in his own room is justified,
but after everything he has seen so far, it surely isn't impossible. He gulps and it feels like the
headache is getting worse and all Sokka wants to do is sleep and just forget everything.

He must not cry.

But he will, if he doesn’t find a distraction. Quickly, Sokka gets up and crosses the room on
silent feet to fetch the book Iroh gave to Zuko on the day of their wedding.

Love amongst the Dragons, the title says and though it sounds like an awful romance, he
takes it with him to the bed. It’s surely better than the history book of great Fire Nation
personalities.

Though the story turns out to be intriguing enough, his eyelids grow heavier as the hours
pass, but Sokka doesn’t allow himself to sleep. The only reason is that he doesn’t want
nightmares to haunt him and not that he feels the need to keep watch over Zuko.

Zuko groans, when he slowly stirs from his sleep. He blinks his eyes open, his limbs feel
heavy and he doesn’t feel refreshed at all. Not that he expected to be. The young prince feels
numb, as if he has no despair, anger or tears left. He turns around and finds Sokka sitting next
to him, leaning against the headboard, fast asleep with a book resting on his lap. The position
doesn’t look very comfortable and Zuko is sure that the other boy will regret sleeping like
this, when he wakes up.

The room is filled with a warm morning glow, that doesn’t mirror the mixed emotions
swirling within him, a blend of gratitude for Sokka’s support and the lingering sense of
shame for his own weakness. He still doesn’t understand why Sokka stood up for him, but his
considerations are cut short at the sudden knock on the door.

Zuko tenses immediately and turns his gaze towards the entrance and his eyes widen, when
the servants enter, carrying trays laden with a lavish breakfast.

The aroma of freshly baked chocolate-filled breadrolls and the sweet scent of fruits fills the
air. There are kiwi-figs, strawberries and a stack of fluffy pancakes on the plates, basically all
of Zuko’s favorites. He has been so distracted by his turmoil of emotions, that it didn’t even
occur to him to be hungry, but Zuko’s mouth waters at the sight and his stomach grumbles.

However, Zuko has not the slightest idea, why such a feast would be served. It is such a stark
contrast to the usual Spartan meals, especially given his father’s disapproval of such
pleasures. Yet, here it is.
Next to him, Sokka stirs at the sudden presence of noise. The Water Tribe boy yawns and
stretches, only to hiss when he raises his arms above his head. Then he rubs his eyes and
takes in the scene of the servants setting up the table.

“Nice, breakfast”, he says, his voice drenched with sleepiness.

His tired eyes meet Zuko’s and there is a tiny smile on his lips.

Zuko still doesn’t know what is actually happening and his confusion deepens, when one of
the servants, a girl that can’t be much older than them, approaches them. She bows
respectfully, first to him, then to Sokka and maybe this is just a weird dream, because things
get even more strange when she addresses the Water Tribe boy.

“Is there anything else you require, Prince Consort?”, she asks, using the official title and
Zuko doesn’t even realize that his mouth stands open and he must probably look silly.

Sokka shakes his head. “That would be all. Thank you, Jin.”

The girl smiles and bows again, before she and her colleague, leave them alone.

Zuko wonders how long he’s been asleep, because apparently some things must have
happened and he missed them. While Sokka gets out of the bed only to throw himself onto
one of the cushions in front of the low breakfast table, looking eager to try the food, Zuko is
still frozen in his spot.

“I… don’t understand”, he admits, his voice barely audible.

He glances at the extravagant breakfast, then at Sokka, searching for answers, but the other
boy isn’t even looking at him. He is eyeing a fruit skeptically, as if he is not sure if it’s edible.
Suddenly, Zuko becomes aware that Sokka probably hasn’t had a lot of exotic fruits given
where he comes from. Nevertheless, the expression on his face amuses him.

“That’s a kiwi-fig. They are my favorite”, he explains.

Sokka looks at him and raises an eyebrow before he shrugs and opens his mouth.

“You should peel it first.”

“Right”, Sokka says and looks at the rough skin of the fruit like he should have come up with
that by himself. It coaxes a smile out of Zuko and slowly he gets up and walks over to sit
next to Sokka.

“What is all this?”, he asks, reaching for the bowl with the kiwi-figs as well.

Sokka shrugs. “I kinda ran into her last night, when I got back.”

“And?”

Sokka is done peeling the fruit and hesitantly he takes a bite. His eyes widen in surprise and
Zuko smiles again.
“This is good!”, he exclaims and Zuko shrugs.

“Told you, it’s my favorite”, he takes a bite as well and the rich taste of sweetness
interspersed only with light acidity fills his mouth. He hums contently.

“So?”, he repeats his question, looking carefully at Sokka, who looks back at him
thoughtfully.

After a moment, Sokka sighs.

“Not everybody in this place hates you, Zuko.”

The prince stops midway through reaching for one of the breadrolls and his eyes widen,
while his heartbeat speeds up again as he is painfully reminded of yesterday’s outcome. He
can’t help that his fingers start to shake visibly.

“Jin asked me, what they could do to help and well”, he shrugs again, “I told her to spoil you
a little.”

“Spoil me?”, Zuko repeats dumbly. It just sounds so bizarre, that he can’t believe that anyone
would even consider this.

“Yeah, you know”, Sokka makes a vague gesture, while putting a pancake onto his plate,
“Prepare your favorite food and such things.”

Zuko blankly stares at him and when Sokka notices, he shifts uncomfortably on his cushion.

“What? Can’t a guy spoil another guy?”

“Uhm. I guess.”

Nevertheless, a confused frown settles on Zuko’s face. The unexpected kindness of the
servants, combined with Sokka’s obvious care began to seep into him and he feels a glimmer
of something warm replace the numbness in his chest. It’s a fragile ember, but it is there.

He still has no explication on how Sokka can offer his support, when he should despise him
and he just wants to understand.

“Why did you protect me?” The question is out of his mouth, before he can help it.

Sokka doesn’t look at him, but a serious expression settles on his face.

“It’s what I do. It’s what lead me here. Where I come from, you protect your family and your
tribe.”

That answer only leads to another dozens of questions and even more confusion, but Zuko
can’t focus on them, because Sokka goes on.

“I mean, we both know that this is not a real marriage, but here we are. As I see it, we either
make do or we will go down.”
Sokka’s voice sounds strangely strain and he looks actually hurt.

“I can’t really explain, but when nobody was intervening, I just had to. I… this is not a real
marriage, but as we can’t change it, maybe we can at least be friends. And friends protect
each other.”

Again, Zuko stares at him.

“Only if you want to”, Sokka adds quickly.

His mind is reeling with Sokka’s words, his heart skipping a beat and Zuko’s mouth goes dry
as he absorbs the weight of what he has just been offered. Friendship. It’s a concept that has
eluded him for so long. He had grown accustomed to being alone and isolated due to the
expectations and pressures of his role as the Fire Nation crown prince.

He is at a complete loss for words, because why would anyone want to be his friend?

Zuko gazes at Sokka and he sees the sincerity in his eyes, but also a vulnerability that mirrors
his own. Sokka understands the pain and struggles that lie ahead of them and yet, he suggests
to not face those demons alone. He wants to share the burdens and Zuko gulps, because there
are suddenly so many emotions welling up inside of him.

The events of the day before are still too close, too present, his wounds too fresh and too raw,
and again he feels like a fool, when he can’t fight the sudden feeling of hope pressing down
on them. He shouldn’t hope. That never ends well for him, but this time the feeling is
different and Zuko dares to believe that with Sokka they can navigate the treacherous waters
ahead.

Weakly, he nods.

“I… I want to be friends”, he whispers, not trusting own voice not to break.

Sokka smiles faintly at him and puts another kiwi-fig into his mouth.

For a few minutes they continue their breakfast in the quietude of the room. There is still a
look of disbelief and wonder on Zuko’s face and Sokka lets him have a moment to process
their conversation, while he savors the flavors of the food in front of them. He is actually
surprised that Zuko seems to have a sweet tooth. It somehow doesn’t seem to fit the sad and
quiet young man, but Sokka can totally get on board with that.

He wonders, what his father would say, if he knew that he just suggested becoming friends
with his actual enemy. Once again, Sokka shoves the thought away, because he doesn’t want
to deal with it and his words were true. They are married, so they might just as well be
friends even though there is no romantic component whatsoever.
Zuko still hasn’t said something and Sokka can sense the weight of his internal struggle, his
mind seemingly preoccupied with a lot of things.

“Would you like to do some sword practice after breakfast?”, he asks.

He still hasn’t forgotten that Zuko mentioned being a skilled fighter and Sokka is still curious
to see him in action. Plus, it provides a distraction from the recent events, which is probably
what they both need most right now.

Zuko looks at him and instead of answering, he asks: “Why don’t you hate me?”

Sokka blinks, because that question seems to come out of nowhere and at first he doesn’t
know how to respond. He thinks about it and he knows that most people would in their given
situation. But Sokka sees the bigger picture and Zuko is just… unjustified. He doesn’t have a
better word for it. He takes a deep breath before responding, his words chosen carefully.

“I understand where your question is coming from. But Zuko, it wasn’t you, who raided my
village or killed my mother or tried to capture my sister.”

He tries to keep his voice neutral, but he can’t ban the pain completely. Zuko’s eyes widen in
horror and he puts the breadroll in his hand down onto his plate.

“What?”, the prince asks and Sokka nods sadly, before he snorts dryly.

It seems as if Zuko is genuinely surprised by the Fire Nation’s actions. Sokka wonders if this
comes from naivety or denial. Either way, their countries are at war. Violence and crimes are
just what comes with that.

“Is that how… how you ended up here?”

Again, Sokka nods.

“The Fire Nation has been after Katara for as long as I can think. In the South we never had a
lot of benders, but she is one. We were still little kids when the first raid happened. They
were looking for the last waterbender in the South. My mom… she… she claimed it was
her.”

Sokka gulps against the lump in his throat. Zuko watches him with a look full of sympathy
and maybe he really can understand his pain.

“Dad hasn’t been the same after she was gone for a very long time. But eventually he
recovered and the Southern Fleet joined the war three years ago. He left me the task to
protect Katara and that’s what I did. We knew that the Fire Nation was coming, when the
black snow started to fall. We knew who they wanted. So I came up with a plan.”

His fingers shake when he reaches for the teacup and takes it into his hands.

“We switched our clothes. I let my hair down and she cut hers so it was the same length.
Katara put the warpaint on and took my sword and when the ship arrived, I ran off so they
could see me, thinking I was her. It worked. They were not the brightest guys. They were
looking for a waterbender and I had to fool them. But I know that place. I know where to put
my feet to make the ice crack or how to throw a boomerang to make the icicles in that cave
fall down. They bought it. They thought I was waterbending.”

“And they didn’t realize you were a boy?”

“I didn’t take off my hood and I refused to speak. They only realized their mistake, when we
were already at the sea and there was this huge storm coming up. That admiral was outraged,
I thought he was about to kill me or go back and destroy the whole village. I told him I would
do everything they wanted if they left the tribe and Katara alone.”

Again, Sokka shrugs. “It’s safe to say that Katara would have put up more of a fight. But I
did what I was told to do. I protected her. That’s what counts.”

Zuko looks at him with a dumbstruck expression on his face and Sokka takes a sip of his tea.

“It takes a lot of courage to do what you did”, the prince says after a while and Sokka huffs.

“She is my sister. There is nothing I wouldn’t do for her.”

At that, Zuko nods, though there is a flash of hurt in his eyes.

“Sorry”, Sokka mumbles under his breath. The relationship with their siblings couldn’t be
more different.

“It’s fine. I get it.”

They don’t make it to the training yard. As soon as they step out of the door, guards surround
them and lead them directly to the throne room, where the Fire Lord is already awaiting
them.

Sokka glares at Ozai when they kneel down in front of the throne and he hopes his gaze holds
as much hatred as the Fire Lord is directing at Zuko. Kneeling in front of that man goes
against everything he feels, but he won't make the situation worse by showing pointless
defiance. The situation is already tense as it is and Sokka knows that this is due to his refusal
to show up the night before.

He throws a sideway glance at Zuko, but the prince has his eyes closed and his face directing
at the floor. From the outside he looks perfectly calm, but maybe he is just frozen by fear. It's
really hard to tell.

"Once more I had to witness a shameful representation of yours as a Prince of the Fire
Nation. Once more I was connected to your weakness. Is there anything you have to say in
your defense?"
"No, Father", Zuko's voice sounds rough and Sokka presses his lips tightly together.

"And then, you had the nerve to not show up, when I demanded you to. It seems you still
didn't learn your lesson, Prince Zuko. What am I supposed to do with such a disgrace?"

The Fire Lord rises from his throne and stands tall above Zuko. Sokka sees the other boy
shiver violently.

"I shouldn't have listened to those who insisted to keep you around and really sent you with
the division. It would have spared our family a lot of shame."

He sounds so bored, as if he was talking about the weather and not about his son's life and a
gasp escapes Zuko. The hairs on Sokka's arms stand up. He can't even imagine what it must
feel like to hear those words out of his father's mouth. The cruelty is beyond compare and he
just hopes, that Zuko won't break.

Stay strong, he thinks.

"Instead I forced you into this marriage. I thought I have made myself clear, what I wanted to
achieve with that. Have you forgotten, what this union is supposed to be?"

"No, father. It's supposed to be a punishment."

"And what should that punishment teach you?"

"Obedience and loyalty." Zuko's voice is shaking, but he bravely holds on to it. His eyes are
still tightly pressed shut, but there are no tears, which Sokka takes as a good sign.

"Obedience and loyalty, indeed", the Fire Lord confirms. "Only you could have been stupid
enough to misunderstand this simple order. I didn't mean obedience and loyalty to your
husband."

He spits the word out and Sokka throws a grim look at him. Their eyes meet for a moment,
and though Ozai's eyes are cold as ice despite the amber color and make a shiver run down
his spine, Sokka doesn't even think about giving in and looking away. This might be the Fire
Lord and he could end him right then and there, but Sokka refuses to let him stare him down.

Finally, the Fire Lord snorts.

"Though he seems to have quite a hold over you. I should have seen this coming. You're not
even strong enough to subdue a boy as old as you. Maybe Princess Azula is right. You
cherish the company of that peasant. You enjoy his presence. You submit to him."

Ozai turns away from his son with disgust showing on his face and turns to Sokka.

"And now to you, Sokka. This marriage was supposed to break you, to ail you. Yet here you
are. Still proud, still strong, openly defying my direct orders. You care about that misfit that I
have the misfortune to call a son. It pains me to say so, but you seem to have more guts than
he ever had. I have to grant you that. You seem to have inherited this from your father."
Sokka's head shots up and his eyes widen.

"Yes, there is news from Hakoda. It looks like I hit a nerve, when I gave you to Zuko. It looks
like he wants revenge. The Water Tribes are becoming fiercer in their attacks. Sooner or later
your father will make a mistake when his rage will blind him. I make sure to feed him with
false information about your royal treatment. Or maybe not so false information.

Which leads me to my next point. I have long but thought about an adequate punishment.
After that touching display of affection that you two demonstrated yesterday, my first idea
was to send you separate ways, to lock you away from each other. But I won't. It would be
too easy to obey to such an order, even for Zuko. No, I came up with a more fitting idea. Tell
me, son, is there still honor left within you? Loyalty? Do you still serve your country and
your father?"

"I do."

"Good. Then you will do as I say."

"What is your order?" Zuko’s voice lacks any emotion.

"Isn't that obvious? He is far too unscathed for the many days he is living among us, don't
you think? He forgot that he is first of all our prisoner. He defied me. I think he could do with
a touch of fire."

Fear rises within Sokka. They are going to burn him. And he knows it's not going to be a
small burn like the ones around his wrists. No, it will be a burn like the one on Zuko's face
and he remembers the scent of burning flesh and his stomach threatens to turn.

The Fire Lord turns back to Zuko.

"He is your prisoner. So it will be you-"

The side door of the throne room bursts open with a loud bang and a young Fire Sage,
completely out of breath, stumbles into the room. He looks pale and terrified and Sokka
would too, if the outraged expression on Fire Lord Ozai's face was directed at him.

"HOW DARE YOU?", the Fire Lord roars.

The flames in front of the throne jolt up and with a few steps Ozai crosses the distance to the
Fire Sage and grabs him by his collar, a ball of fire already casted in his hand to let it crush
onto the poor man.

"Fire Lord Ozai, forgive me! I have a message of utmost importance."

"Then I hope the message is worth your life."

The Fire Sage gulps and takes a deep breath. Zuko and Sokka share a curious look before
turning their looks back at him.

"The Avatar... he has returned."

 Reasons to hope
Chapter Summary

There is some angst, some mixed feelings about the Avatar, some sparring and maybe
things aren't so bad after all

Chapter Notes

Thank you again for your amazing feedback! I love how invested you are in this story
and I really appreciate you taking the time to read this story.
This chapter might not be the most exciting but it's time for a little brighter times after
the heavy angst in the last one's.
Have fun!

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 8: Reasons to hope

"The Avatar... he has returned."

The words echo through the Throne Room and Zuko holds his breath. For a moment the fury
falls from his father's face, leaving the Fire Lord with a blank expression of shock.

Zuko's heart is pounding in his chest. For a moment the flame in his father's hand grows
bigger and Zuko hopes that he will spare the Fire Sage's life. A relieved, silent sigh leaves his
lips, when the Fire Lord closes his palm decidedly and the flame dies down.

"Jiju!", he yells for his secretary and the skinny man enters with silent steps. "Assemble the
generals here at once. Everyone else, leave!"

He doesn't need to tell them twice. Sokka gets up immediately and Zuko is right behind him
as they hurry out of the Throne Room. The young prince presses his lips tightly together,
though he feels himself relax as soon as the dark red curtains close behind him.

Nevertheless, his thoughts are racing and Zuko doesn't know what to think.

The Avatar is nothing but a legend, something to read about in history books. He existed in
the memories of old people, but for his generation the Avatar is not more than an idea, an
abstract construct. But if the news are really true, Zuko doesn't know what that means for
him. Probably nothing good. The Avatar must have planned his return carefully and he
certainly won't go easy on the Fire Nation Royal Family. He will want revenge.

Great, Zuko thinks, just another person, who wants his blood.

He huffs unconsciously when he thinks back to his father's words. It hurts to be told that his
father would prefer him dead - the ache in his chest only subsides slowly and makes place for
resignation as Zuko came to that conclusion by himself already. But at least the Fire Lord
finally said it right to his face and not through more or less subtle actions. Deep in his heart
Zuko knows that the relationship with his father is a lost cause, though a part of him is not
quite ready to accept that yet.

He throws a look at Sokka, who can barely contain his excitement. There is a bounce in his
steps - not much more and he would be jumping up and down. A wide grin is plastered on his
face.

"The Avatar! I can't believe it!", he exclaims happily and turns to Zuko with bright blue eyes.

"Can you imagine how powerful he must be? He's had a hundred years to master the
elements and perfect his skills. Do you know what that means? If he makes himself known
now, he is ready to face the Fire Lord. The war will be over soon!"

Sokka practically beams at him and a queasy feeling settles in Zuko’s stomach. The Water
Tribe boy seems overjoyed and he has reason to. For Zuko, however, the situation is not so
easy.

"Good for you", he says, his voice sounding a little rough around the edges.

Sokka gives him a strange look.

"It's good for you too", he points out and Zuko shrugs.

"I'm not so sure about that. It's my family that started this war."

"Yeah and you suffered under their hands too. Don't worry, Zuko. If it comes to that, I'll
vouch for you."

Zuko looks at the other boy with wide eyes and his heart flatters a little. Sokka seems
completely sincere saying those words and once again, Zuko doesn't know how to handle his
genuine positivity.

"We shouldn't get our hopes up too soon. You don't know my father. He is a powerful bender
himself and we don't even know what this new Avatar is capable of."

"Wow, aren't you optimistic?", Sokka snorts sarcastically.

"After recently I think it's best to expect the worst."

Sokka sighs and Zuko doesn't expect the encouraging clap onto his shoulder. It catches him
off-guard and he flinches, earning a clearly amused look from Sokka.

"Well, for my part, I don't really care what kind of guy this new Avatar is. All I know is that
he just bailed us out of your dad's punishment. If that ain't something, I don't know what is."

Zuko shivers involuntarily at the mentioning of the punishment and he realizes just how close
a call this was. His stomach churns at the thought of what his father had planned for them,
when he talked about a touch of fire. He stops abruptly and gasps when the realization hits
him, that his father wanted him to burn Sokka just like he had been burned by Ozai.

His eyes widen and his body starts to tremble uncontrollably. Zuko balls his hands into fists
and he doesn't even recognize the worried look on Sokka's face.

He is back in the fighting pit, looking up to his Father with pleading eyes. His breath starts to
quicken, his hand unconsciously covers his scar and Zuko remembers the pain. It had been
merciless and all-consuming, reducing his whole being to the left side of his face. He
screamed, but Father didn’t let go, he kept pushing his hand onto his face, the intense heat
melting the smooth skin and Zuko had been unable to move, unable to even look away. And
suddenly, his vision blurs, the scene changes and it is his hand on Sokka’s face and blue eyes
full of horror, fear and a silent plea to stop look up to him.

Zuko’s knees give in, but he never hits the ground, because Sokka has excellent reflexes. He
hooks an arm under Zuko’s and then there is a strong hand on his chest, keeping him upright.

“Zuko! Woah, you alright, buddy?”, he asks, but the words sound warped to him, as if Zuko
would be under water. He grabs Sokka’s arm and tries to get his breathing under control. It
takes him a minute, before he trusts his feet to carry him again and with a huff he straightens
back up. Sokka lets go of him reluctantly, concern written all over his face.

“You okay?”, he asks again and Zuko nods.

“I’m fine.” It sounds harsher than he intended, but Zuko is a little embarrassed that he almost
had a breakdown again. He really needs to get a grip on himself.

The Water Tribe boy raises an eyebrow, clearly not convinced, but Zuko can’t explain to him
what just happened. It’s too much. He wonders how it is possible that he still manages to be
shocked by the cruelties his father comes up with to torment him.

Sokka’s eyes are still on him and when Zuko looks up to him, he knows that he could never
do it.

“I won’t burn you”, he says decidedly and Sokka looks genuinely confused.

Zuko rolls his eyes and grabs Sokka by the shoulders, looking at him intensely. He has to
understand this. “Sokka, I promise you, I will never burn you. I will never do this to you.
Never.”
The blue eyes go wide as if this is the last thing Sokka expected him to say and the
expression on Sokka’s face is something between shock and sympathy. He nods weakly when
he obviously understands what Zuko is telling him.

“Okay”, is all he says and how he manages to send a little smile in his direction is beyond
Zuko. The young prince nods sharply, to confirm his statement.

“Hey”, Sokka says to get his attention. “Don’t worry, okay?”

“How can you tell me not to worry? Haven’t you heard what he wanted to make me do? You
have been in there too!”

Sokka sighs and it looks as if he tries not to roll his eyes.

“I know. But I get a feeling that this Avatar business might got us off the hook, if we go on
about this the right way. In fact, this couldn’t have gone any better. Your father just got
something more important to focus on than those little games he’s playing with you. Or us.
Whatever. The Avatar is back. And if we keep making allies at that rate than we might get
through this mess somehow. I mean, we already got a handful of servants, a Fire Sage and
your uncle on our side. We just got out of there unscathed. I don’t know about you, but to me
it looks like the tides are slowly turning in our favor.”

Zuko stares at Sokka as if he’s lost his mind, but he can see that the other boy means every
single word he says. Not everything of it makes sense to Zuko. He has no idea what allies
Sokka is talking about, but he seems sure of himself and somehow Zuko wants to believe
him. The feeling of gratefulness for Sokka, that is slowly becoming a familiar thing, settles
on him again and he hopes that it shows on his face even though he doesn’t manage a smile.

“What are we going to do now?”

“We could still do some sparing. Unless you’re afraid to get your butt kicked”, Sokka grins
and bumps his shoulder gently against Zuko, when he passes him by.

The prince crosses his arms and raises an eyebrow. “If somebody is going to get his butt
kicked, it’s you.”

The grin doesn’t leave his lips, but there is a glint in Sokka’s eyes. “Way to find out.”

He's excited and there is an itching under his skin, urging him to do something.

The Avatar.

It looks like not all hope is lost and though there is probably little he could do from here, the
wheels in the back of Sokka's mind are already turning, contemplating how the appearing of
the Avatar might work in their advantage. The shocked expression on Fire Lord Ozai's face
had been a satisfying sight and Sokka wonders how long it will take until the Avatar will
bring him down. At least, this puts the Fire Lord in a situation that probably hasn't happened
for a long time. The strategic advantage is no longer necessarily on the Fire Nation's side
anymore. They probably don't know what to expect in terms of tactics and power of the
Avatar. For the first time in ages the Fire Nation has to pull off a defensive strategy.

Hopefully they don't know how to do this the right way.

It could be a chance, not only for the Avatar but also for the other nations. The men of the
Water Tribe where excellent hunters. They have the patience and the skills to wait for exactly
the right moment to strike. Maybe they could sail under the Avatar's command. Maybe, the
new Avatar would set up an army and this war would be over soon, the occupied lands and
cities in the Earth Kingdom would be liberated and all those many prisoners, Sokka included,
would be free.

He understands Zuko's worry, but he is convinced, that the Avatar would spare the prince.
After all, the Avatar was supposed to be wise and just. And Zuko just happens to be
unfortunate enough to be born into a family of complete maniacs. It's not his fault.

Strange as it is, he trusts Zuko. He trusts the prince's promise not to burn him. At least, not
willingly. They don't know what the Fire Lord might come up with and if Zuko would even
have a choice. For now, it's probably best to avoid all attention and try to get as much
information as they can, before making a plan.

Sokka looks up into the sky when another messenger hawk rushes over their heads. It's not
the only one. The sky is teeming with the birds criss-crossing over the palace, hectically
departing to deliver their messages.

Sokka stops and a frown settles on his face. Then he looks questioningly at Zuko.

"How far can these hawks travel across the sea?"

Zuko watches him for a long moment with sad understanding on his face before he shakes his
head.

"The South Pole is too far away", he answers the question, that Sokka didn't dare ask.

Despite having expected that answer, his heart sinks a little. He wanted to share the news
with Katara and his father and also let them know that he is doing considerably fine, that he
is not in fact suffering under Zuko's companionship. He isn't sure if he wants to tell them that
Zuko and he basically agreed to be friends, because he can't be sure if they would even
believe it or think that someone forced him to write those lines. But Sokka wants to let them
know that his spirit hasn't been broken.

In fact, it got quite a boost today. Knowing that the Avatar is back, that there is a chance, that
there is hope makes him all the more eager to do his part in ending this war.

He can still feel Zuko's eyes on him and sends a crooked smile at his direction.
“Too bad.”

They leave it at that, each of them lingering in their thoughts.

Their first match doesn't even last a minute. Zuko rushes at him, his blades swirling around
him gracefully, his body moving quick and effortlessly. Sokka is so busy staring at him that
he only manages to raise his sword in time to block the hit, but his grip slips and his sword
lands on the floor with a clattering noise.

His eyes go wide when Zuko stops right in front of him, the tip of his right sword pointing at
Sokka's chest.

The prince crooks a smile and Sokka's heart pounds in his chest. There is something in
Zuko's eyes that hasn't been there before, like a literal fire that has been ignited and he can't
deny that he's impressed by Zuko's display of strength, control and determination. It suits
him.

Zuko lowers the blade and looks at him, the doubtful expression is back on his face.

"Have you ever held a sword in your life?"

At that, Sokka snaps out of his admiration for the other boy's skills and shakes his head
begrudgingly.

"I know how to wield a club knife."

Zuko blinks, before he nods, and again it is visible on his face that he tries not to laugh.
Sokka would be annoyed by that, if he wasn't thinking that a laugh would probably suit him
too.

It has been more than obvious that Sokka had no idea, what he was doing. The stance was off
and the Water Tribe boy hold the sword with a somewhat uncertain grip, which told Zuko
everything he needed to know. The only thing that he seemed to possess fitting to a warrior
was his self-confidence. However, it has been too tempting to show Sokka that it is a little
inappropriate judging by his level of skill.

Nevertheless, the weak attempt of defense has surprised Zuko.

Taking a few steps back, he puts one of his Dao swords away. Everything else would be
unfair. Zuko wants to give Sokka a chance to improve and learn without feeling
overwhelmed right from the start. He knows what that feels like and though it is a kind of
effective approach, he doesn't want to taint the amicable air that settled between them.

Sokka takes up his sword again and gets into a position and Zuko holds himself back from
shaking his head.

"You need to adjust your stance", Zuko says and points at Sokka's feet. "Your feet are too far
apart. You won't be able to raise them quick enough without falling over, if I would attack
your legs. They can't be too close either, because that would make you fall like a tree should
an opponent tackle you. Find a comfortable balance, not too wide and not too close."

For a moment the blue eyes watch him slightly puzzled, before Sokka shuffles his feet closer
together, obviously willing to learn.

"Like this?"

Zuko nods.

They begin their practice anew, slower this time and soon the clash of steel fills the air as
they exchange blows. Zuko observes Sokka's movements and offers occasional guidance.

"Remember to keep your grip firm, but not too tight", he advises, parrying one of Sokka's
strikes. "You need flexibility in your wrists for precise movements. And don't forget to follow
through with your strikes. It adds power and momentum. And you're not going to break me."

Sokka nods, a concentrated frown showing on his face.

Despite his lack of experience, Sokka shows improvement with each passing exchange and
soon they get the tempo up. A smile is spreading on Zuko's lips. He is having fun. It has been
so long that he felt that sensation, that when he finally realizes what it is, he stops for a
moment almost allowing Sokka to land a hit.

Zuko loves his swords, but it's been so long since he has had an opportunity for sparring. He
has been too occupied with improving his firebending even though he had never been as
good at it as he is with the swords. His father thinks mastering a non-bending technique is a
complete waste of time and Zuko of course gave in to the Fire Lord’s dislike of the art of
sword-fighting and neglected it.

But he genuinely enjoys the opportunity to train with Sokka now. Especially when he sees the
effort and willingness in the other boy's eyes.

Soon, they are both out of breath and breaking a sweat and when Zuko finally raises his hand
to signal that the session is over, a relieved groan comes over Sokka's lips. Zuko chuckles
when the other boy leans forward and steadies himself with his hands over his knees, trying
to catch a breath. All the while he is looking at Zuko with an unreadable expression.

Not knowing what to make of it, curiosity gets the best of him.

"What is it?", he asks.

Sokka shrugs and a small smile tugs at the corner of his lips. "You make a good teacher."

His eyes widen slightly in surprise and an odd feeling settles in his chest. He didn't expect a
praise from Sokka. And when Zuko realizes that the odd feeling is pride, he blushes a little,
because it just feels so unfamiliar to be proud of himself and he isn't sure if he really deserves
the praise.

"Thank you", he mutters looking onto his feet.

Sokka walks over to him and throws an arm around his shoulders. They are both sweating
and it's kinda gross, but Zuko can't bring himself to care. Not when Sokka grins at him
happily.

"Thank you, buddy."

And when Sokka lets go off him and makes his way to depose his sword in the weaponry,
Zuko can't help but wonder if the tides are really turning and what that means for him.

“What are you doing over there?”, Sokka asks, when he steps out of the bathing chamber
dressed in the comfortable linen trousers, still drying his wet hair with a towel.

Looking up from his parchment Zuko notices once more how skinny the other boy is. It
probably makes sense, because he can’t imagine that there is a lot of edible things at the
South Pole. Sokka is strong though, as their training session showed. He managed to stand
his ground quite well against Zuko, who possesses more muscle and is generally built
broader.

“What does it look like?”, Zuko asks back sarcastically and turns back to the parchment.

“I’m writing a letter”, he adds, a little friendlier.

As if on cue there is a knock on the door.

“I’ll take it”, Sokka says.

He casually drops the towel over the back of a chair and walks over to the door. Zuko doesn’t
bother telling him that his state of dressing is considered inappropriate for a member of the
Royal Family, because he doesn’t really care and because he is only wearing a light robe
himself and put his hair into a loose topknot. They are both teenage boys after all and that
should be enough justification to not run around dressed for formal events at any given time.

He regrets not having said something, when the servant that stands in front of the door is one
of the snobbish olders and he glances Sokka up and down, before his gaze finds Zuko and a
scandalized look settles on him. After a moment of confusion, Zuko becomes shockingly
aware of what this must look like. He turns beet-red and coughs, trying to look everywhere
but at the servant or Sokka. Agni…

“A message for the Prince Consort.”

He spits the word out like an insult, but Sokka doesn’t seem to bother. He just accepts the
parchment, thanks the man and closes the door.

But as soon as that is done, he breaks the seal hastily and unwraps the parchment.

Zuko doesn’t even realize that he is watching him instead of finishing his letter. He has hoped
to do so before Sokka finished cleaning himself up. After everything that happened the last
few days, Zuko feels like he owes him something and Sokka’s earlier question has given him
an idea, even though it comes with a risk.

Before he can tear his eyes away from Sokka, the Water Tribe boy breaks into a wide grin.

“Yes!”, he exclaims, obviously happy about whatever he is reading.

Then he folds the parchment and holds it out to Zuko.

“Could you lend me some fire?”, he asks and waves the parchment in his hands.

Zuko stares at him, not having expected this at all, especially knowing Sokka’s dislike of
everything that is even remotely related to firebending.

“Uh, sure”, he says nevertheless and motions for Sokka to hold the parchment over a metal
bowl on his desk, before he casts a tiny flame with his index and middle finger. Sokka’s only
reaction is a short grimace, but maybe he is just imagining this.

Zuko watches the burning parchment fall into the bowl and turn to ash.

He wonders, what message it contained. He won’t ask, because he doesn’t want to disturb
Sokka’s privacy and if the Water Tribe boy wants to tell him, he surely will do. But Zuko
can’t help but worry, because he must have a very good reason to burn it right after reading it.
It can only mean that the message is dangerous should it fall into the wrong hands and that
just doesn’t sit right with Zuko, because they are not exactly in a position that allows them to
make mistakes.

He is just about to warn Sokka again and tell him to be careful, but the words catch in his
throat when he looks down onto his own letter. That would only make him a hypocrite.

Zuko turns around, when he hears Sokka let himself fall back onto their bed with a loud,
satisfied sigh.

“This day just keeps getting better”, he says, looking up to the canopy.

“Care to enlighten me?” It sounds a little annoyed. Zuko is not annoyed by Sokka, not much
at least, but with himself because curiosity gets the better of him.
A grin spreads on Sokka’s lips.

“We shouldn’t stay up too late tonight as we are going to do some activity tomorrow.”

Zuko looks at him blankly. “An activity?”

“Yep.” He sounds way to self-satisfied and Zuko won’t give him more satisfaction by
demanding more information. Instead, he turns back to his letter, knowing that Sokka is
watching him.

For a few moments there is silence, before Sokka sighs again.

“Fine. It was meant to be a surprise, but here you go. Your firebending training starts
tomorrow at dawn.”

Zuko turns around so quickly, that there is a sharp pain in his neck. He hisses, but quickly
focuses on Sokka.

“My what? That’s not possible. My father reassigned all my teachers to Azula.”

Sokka shrugs, still grinning. “Well, that’s her problem, isn’t it? I found you a new one, so…”

“You found me a firebending teacher?”

“Yep.”

“But, how...? I mean… how?”

It feels a little hard to believe, because by now Zuko is a complete outsider within the palace
and probably the whole city of Caldera. Who would be willing to teach him and how could
Sokka have possibly arranged that? He’s only living in the Fire Nation for two weeks, but it
seems like he is navigating his way through the obscure political terrain effortlessly. Zuko
thinks about how Sokka has mentioned their allies earlier, without really knowing what he
was talking about. It is a little unsettling and Zuko has to trust that Sokka knows what he is
doing without putting them in danger by looking for the false source of help.

“You’ll see”, Sokka’s grin faded into a soft smile. Maybe he has noticed that Zuko wasn’t at
ease with the announcement. “It’ll be fine.”

Zuko nods and tries to shove his growing anxiety aside. It is probably good news that there is
a new teacher waiting for him. It’s just that he isn’t a great student and he isn’t exactly
looking forward to being told that he should have mastered a lot more katas at his age and
that he’s not trying hard enough. But if the new master accepted a request coming from
Sokka he might be not so bad.

Looking back onto his letter Zuko becomes aware that he has all the more reason to be
grateful. Decidedly he picks up the brush again and adds another paragraph before rolling the
scroll up and putting his seal onto it.
 Meeting the Master
Chapter Summary

Zuko's training begins.

Chapter Notes

I didn't forget about you or about this story. Somehow this chapter was difficult to write,
probably because there really isn't a lot happening, but I thought it was important to
include it so we get an impression of Zuko's bending abilities. I also realized how
annoying teenagers can be. Kinda forgot about that, when I started writing about
teenagers LOL.

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 9: Meeting the Master

The fog in front of his eyes clears and Zuko finds himself standing in one of the yards of the
Royal Palace. At first he thinks he is alone, but a flapping noise from above makes him look
up and his eyes go wide, while his heart pounds in his chest. He stumbles backwards, his
hands reaching unconsciously for his swords, but when the giant red dragon lands right in
front of him, Zuko finds himself unable to move. He stares at the mighty creature that
watches him through its intense, glowing eyes. His breath comes in short pants and the young
prince is terrified.

An old man with a long white beard jumps down from the dragon’s back with surprising
grace considering his age. Zuko has no idea, who he is. His long, red robes make him look
regal, but Zuko can’t remember having ever seen his portrait on the walls of the palace. An
aura of power surrounds him, but also a sense of kindness. He looks at Zuko with an
expression of reconnaissance, sympathy and sadness.

Maybe it is the sadness in those kind, ember eyes that reminds Zuko strangely of his mother.
Before he can linger on this thought, the man and the dragon vanish in front of his eyes. He
finds himself in the same spot, but his mother is standing there. She looks at him and Zuko
sees the tears glistening in her eyes. He wants to run over to her, hold her hand and protect
her, but when he steps forward, guards block his way. He can’t see their faces, but he can’t
make it past them.
“Mom!”, he yells, feeling lost and confused and he tries to shove the guards away, but they
might as well be made of stone and suddenly he feels like a little boy again, powerless and
unable to protect anybody.

He catches a last glimpse at his mother, when she puts the hood up and smiles at him.

“Mom!”, Zuko screams, trying to push the guards away. He has to protect her. He can’t let
her go. He can’t let her be taken away.

Her eyes are full of love and forgiveness.

A moment later, her pale skin turns dark, the golden eyes turn blue and Sokka is standing
right in front of him.

Zuko jolts awake, his heart beating fast and hard.

Next to him, Sokka is still sound asleep, snoring quietly and sprawled out over at least two
thirds of the large bed. It is not the first time that Zuko wakes up basically lying on the very
edge of his side of the bed. Sokka moves a lot in his sleep.

He thought about complaining, but Zuko doubts that it would change anything and right now
he is too caught up by the strange dream and too antsy by the prospect of meeting his new
firebending teacher.

It is almost time to get up and so he wakes Sokka up rather roughly, by nudging

unceremoniously against his shoulder several times. The Water Tribe boy groans and
grumbles some incoherent words, before turning his back and pulling the blanket over him.

“Come on. Stop whining. We have to get ready”, Zuko points out, while he gets dressed.

More mumbling from under the blanket reaches his ears and he shakes his head.

“This was your idea”, he says.

After a moment, Sokka’s head peaks out of the blanket and he blinks sleepily.

“I didn’t think this through”, he admits, before he yawns widely and gets up ever so slowly.

Sokka is definitely not a morning person, Zuko realizes. Even though he was the one, who set
up the training at an early hour, he doesn’t seem happy about it at all. For once, Sokka barely
talks and he almost falls asleep over his bowl of granola and fruit. Jin only brought them a
light breakfast, obviously informed about the upcoming practice.

As curious as he is, Zuko is also a little antsy and worried.

Technically, his father didn’t forbid him his training. He just took all his teachers away, but
Zuko is sure that he wouldn’t approve of Zuko taking the initiative to do things on his own.
The fewer people know it, the better.
“Are you done yet?”, he asks, a little impatiently, watching Sokka shovel the food into his
mouth in slow motion.

The other boy just groans, but hurries up anyway.

Sokka still doesn’t seem wide awake, when he follows Zuko through the palace. Actually, the
prince wonders why the Water Tribe boy wants to come along in the first place. It’s not like
there will be anything to learn for him and he could just have given Zuko the information
about when and where to meet his new master. But at least, he doesn’t complain.

But Sokka surprises him, when he grabs his wrist as Zuko is about to turn into the direction
of the training grounds.

“Uh-uh”, he says and shakes his head. “This way.”

With that, he pulls Zuko into the entirely different direction, out of the palace instead of
further into it and Zuko follows him reluctantly, wondering where they might be going. He
frees his hand from Sokka’s grip and his eyes fall onto the scars on the pale skin. The weird
dream pops up in thoughts again, but Zuko figures it holds no importance. He doesn’t even
know, who that man was. His mother is gone for good and well, Sokka is there, so it is not
that strange that his unconscious deals with him.

Zuko concentrates on following him further and for a moment he thinks, they might even
walk down into the city. But when they take another turn and Sokka heads decidedly in
direction of the temple, Zuko stops.

“Hang on. What is this? Where are we going?”, he asks, even though he knows the answer
already.

There is reproachful undertone in his voice and when Sokka turns around to look at him, he
seems to be a little astonished.

“Uhm, I think that is kinda obvious, isn’t it?”

“You told me there would be a firebending practice”, Zuko gnarls. He is met with a shrug.

“Yeah. And there is.”

He says it in that carefree tone of his, although there is a slight hint of ridicule in his voice.
Zuko glares, first at him, then up to the towering building in front of him. He clenches his
teeth.

He made it clear to Sokka, that he wants nothing to do with this place, that he detests the
thought of setting foot into it. But obviously Sokka simply decided to ignore it. Anger boils
up inside of him.

“Forget it!”, he hisses and turns around on the spot.

Before he can walk away, there is a hand on his shoulder and Zuko swirls around angrily.
Seeing Sokka flinch is a little satisfaction for the emotions that rise within him.

“Zuko, wait. It can’t be that bad.”

“What would you know?”

Sokka knows nothing. He has no idea, what the temple represents for Zuko. It’s the root of
his misery. Zuko still doesn’t know what went wrong that day and he’s long but given up
upon finding an answer to that question, that the Fire Sages proclaimed him a powerful
bender, when it was so obviously wrong. Their prophecy had brought him nothing but pain,
hate and resentment.

Zuko clenches his fists, his nails digging into his palms, when he looks up at the temple’s
ornate façade. The anger burns in his chest, fueled by the betrayal he feels towards those old
men. Probably they just told, what they thought the Fire Lord wanted to hear when his heir
was born, hoping it would turn out to be true. Maybe they just wanted to avoid his father’s
fury. Maybe they only wanted to maintain their own standing within the Fire Nation. Their
motives didn’t matter, because the outcome was the same: Zuko never lived up to the
expectations and hopes projected onto him and was made to bear the weight of his father’s
disappointment.

At first, when Azula started bending before he did, his father was worried and sent him to the
temple to get him examined if his Chi was somehow blocked or damaged. Zuko spent hours
in the temple, meditating, practicing ancient rituals to gain Agni’s favor. And when he finally
managed to ignite a flame at ten years old, it was only ever so good. What came natural to
Azula meant hard work, fear, sweat and tears for him. Even now he has only mastered a few
intermediate forms, while Azula is almost a full master. There had been days, when Zuko
wished to be a nonbender, even though he knows that his father probably wouldn’t have
bothered and get rid of him right away in one way or another.

“I told you, I don’t go to the temple!”

Sokka still seems rather unimpressed by his refusal, but confusion settles on him.

“Well, you have to if you want to attend to your practice.”

“I can’t believe you talked a Fire Sage into becoming my master! They don’t know shit about
the bending forms I need to learn. They use it only for their rituals and spiritual crap. This is
nothing but a waste of time!”

“Who said that a Fire Sage would be your master?”

Zuko is a little taken aback by that response, but is doesn’t help him calm his anger.
“It’s just a cover. Your master is in there and he is willing to teach you all that fighting stuff.
Nobody will know, because people will think we are there to find healing.”

Zuko’s mouth stands open, his eyes go wide and he stares at Sokka with a horrified look on
his face.

“What?”

Sokka nods, obviously excited to share his plan.

“That Sage, who showed me around, he explained to me that one of the sage’s tasks is
healing and so I figured it would be a good excuse for you to go, because…”

Zuko interrupts him, his voice dangerously low.

“Do you have any idea what this will look like?”

“Uhm? I don’t see anything wrong about it. I mean, it’s a valid reason to go to the temple”,
Sokka shrugs, before he scratches his neck nervously at Zuko’s murderous glare. “Obviously
I missed something. Care to enlighten me?”

“Going to them for one session is already bad enough for anyone’s reputation. But going for
regular sessions is… it’ll make me… You don’t understand!”, Zuko yells and threads a hand
through his hair with a frustrated groan, almost loosening his ponytail while doing so.
“’Weakness’ won’t even begin to cover it. The shame that comes with it… what where you
even thinking?!”

“Your master thinks it’s a brilliant idea.”

“Then he’s a fool!”

Sokka chuckles lightly at those words and Zuko has no idea, what’s so funny about it. He’s
furious, because even though it might be a believable cover it will only be seen as proof for
his complete failure as a prince of the Fire Nation.

“The shame…”, he begins again, but then stops and shakes his head, because he doubts that
Sokka would understand. He’s right about that.

“What about it? Let the people think what they want. They’ll do it anyway. You might as well
just get on with it. But we need a cover. Everybody involved in this is taking risks. Unless
you come up with a better idea, it’s either this or no training at all.”

Zuko clenches his fists even tighter, barely able to contain his frustration. The words hang in
the air, challenging his pride. He knows Sokka is right, but it’s hard to accept the bitter truth.
With another unfriendly look at Sokka and a heavy sigh, he passes him by and strides
towards the portals of the temple.
Sokka follows Zuko into the temple, a little unhappy about his reaction to revealing the new
training site he came up with. He knew that Zuko wouldn't exactly be thrilled about choosing
the temple as the place to practice his bending, but the vehemence of Zuko's protest and his
anger surprised him nonetheless. That doesn't change his mind though. Sokka is convinced
that the temple provides the perfect cover story. After all, it is absolutely believable: Zuko has
been through enough that he could need healing, even though that’s not the true reason for
why they are here.

The temple is no less impressive than it has been the first time and Sokka can’t help but take
in the stunning view once more. The light of the sunrise is not as bright as in the middle of
the day, but it makes the golden ornaments on the walls shine in a deep orange. It’s a breath-
taking sight, that will probably never get old.

Nevertheless, the atmosphere is different than on Sokka’s first visit. Aggravated voices and
shouting can be heard coming from the upper floors and he hopes that it’s not because of
them.

Sokka relaxes a little, when he finds Shyu standing at the end of the hall, waiting for them as
agreed beforehand. The Fire Sage bows deeply before them and Sokka greets him with a bow
of his own and the Fire Nation gesture of respect. Zuko only has a small nod for the man and
raises his chin defiantly. Actually, he glares at Shyu as if he has been personally offended by
him.

Behind his back Sokka rolls his eyes and shakes his head. Zuko is an idiot, if he can't
appreciate the risk they are taking by training him behind the Fire Lord's back. He still
doesn't get, what's it with the Fire Nation and this whole 'strength and weakness'-issues they
seem to have. Sokka totally understands that it's not cool to have people look down at him or
deem him unworthy. But Zuko's reputation is already pretty bad, so it probably won't have a
great impact, if people were to know that he was undergoing 'healing sessions'.

Sokka only hopes, that the Fire Lord wouldn't forbid them, once he learns about it.

While Shyu gestures for them to follow him, Zuko looks as if he wants to burn the whole
place down to its grounds. The prince really needs to set his priorities straight.

Shyu leads them away from the entry hall into a quieter part of the temple, the arguing of the
other Fire Sages becoming more distant. They walk down a corridor that has several doors to
each side and Sokka wonders, what might be behind them, but another question comes to his
mind.

"What are they fighting about? Is it about the new Avatar? You said that the Fire Sages
originally served the Avatar. Are you going to abandon the Fire Lord and join his side?"

"Sokka!" Zuko stares at him with a mixture of disbelief and anger.

The Water Tribe boy just shrugs. "Relax. Shyu's on our side or else he wouldn't be here."
Shyu however throws a reproachful look at him as well.

“If the wrong people were to hear these words, we all could be killed. You have to be more
careful, Sokka. There is too much at stake."

The intensity of his eyes makes Sokka flinch uncomfortably and he raises his hands in
defense.

"Sorry."

Shyu sighs and continues to lead them down the corridor.

"It is about the new Avatar. We watched the stars last night and now they are debating how to
interpret the signs."

Sokka frowns. "Then how come you are not with them?"

"I made my point very clear and I don't see why repeating myself would change anything.
They seemed relieved that I have been requested to serve our prince and approved of my
absence during the council."

Zuko opens his mouth to protest, but before Sokka can hit him against his shoulder to make
him shut up, Shyu stops in front of a dark, ornamented door. He knocks in a melodically
sequence, before turning around and giving them a meaningful look. Then, the Fire Sage
opens the door and motions for them to enter.

Curious as he is, Sokka steps into the room first and looks around. Sunlight filters through the
windows on top of the high walls, casting faint rays of illumination that dance upon the stony
floor. The walls are made of a light lime stone as well and the reliefs show the original
purpose of this room: faceless people sitting cross-legged in a meditation position. Fire
dances around them, making them look like the center of a flame.

The air inside the room feels tranquil and serene, fitting for a sanctuary for inner reflection.

The room can probably host at least thirty participants, Sokka estimates, but for an actual
firebending practice it seems a tad too small. Zuko seems to think the same thing. His eyes
scan the surroundings with a mix of skepticism and resignation. At least it’s fire-proof with
the stony floor and walls around them.

"When will the master join us?", Prince Zuko asks, still sounding tense, but otherwise his
voice is bare of any emotion.

"I am already here", a familiar voice to their left answers.

Even though Sokka knew who to expect, he almost jumps a little, because Iroh has been
hidden in the shadow.

Zuko's eyes go wide, when his uncle steps forward and he stares speechlessly at him.

Iroh bows. "Good morning, Princes."

Sokka is a little perplexed, when he returns the bow and this time Zuko returns it as well.
Usually, Iroh acknowledges him just by his name or if he uses a title, then it is always 'Prince
Consort'. Obviously, calling the old man out has made a lasting impression and while he is a
little ashamed of how mean he had been that night after Zuko's breakdown, Sokka also feels
some kind of pride.

"Uncle, you? I don't understand. You always said you weren't a teacher."

Iroh closes his eyes and nods, while Shyu closes the door behind them and locks it.

"I am not, Prince Zuko. But I have been made aware, that we all have to play our part in this
game. That is, if you accept me as your teacher."

"Of course", Zuko says hastily.

He looks confused, but also excited and touched. It's kind of adorable, Sokka thinks and can't
help a little smirk.

"Very well. But before we begin, I would like to make sure, that your Chi is intact. You have
been through a lot recently, nephew, and I don't want to force you to do more than your body
is capable of handling."

"I'm fine", Zuko says insistently. "We can start."

Iroh raises a hand.

"Will you allow Shyu to be the judge of that?", Iroh asks and Sokka raises an eyebrow, not
knowing what the old man is talking about.

Zuko looks as if he has bitten into a lemon and he balls his hands into fists.

"Is that really necessary? I am fine. See?!"

He gets into a stance and quickly punches two balls of fire into the air, growling as he does
so. Iroh seems unimpressed. Shyu just watches them silently and Sokka is unable to say, what
the Sage might be thinking.

"That you seem to be fine on the surface does not mean you’re fine all the way through", Iroh
says wisely and Zuko glares at him now. But this look is still friendly compared to the look
he throws at the Fire Sage.

The prince closes his eyes and lowers his head. After what seems like minutes he finally lets
out a sigh, that is so deep that Sokka wouldn't be surprised to see sparks come out of his
mouth. He has no idea what to make of it, other than coming to the conclusion that Zuko can
be quite dramatic.

"Fine", the prince spits out bitterly.

Iroh seems content with the answer and gestures to a mat on the floor. Zuko lies down on it
and Shyu comes over to kneel down next to him.
"Relax, Prince Zuko. It won't take long", the Fire Sage reassures him and Sokka watches
curiously, what is about to happen.

Zuko snorts and presses his eyes tightly shut. His whole body goes stiff and he is the
complete opposite of relaxed.

Shyu casts two little balls of flames into his hands and holds them over Zuko's stomach,
before he begins to motion his arms in circular movements over the prince's body. It looks
like waterbending, only with fire and it is kind of impressive, but also kind of intimidating.

Zuko must think the same and obviously the treatment is uncomfortable, because his body
starts to tremble and a bead of sweat trickles down his temple.

Sokka throws a quick look at Iroh and finds a worried frown on his forehead.

“Does it hurt?”, Sokka asks in a low voice and Iroh shakes his head.

“No”, he says. At the same moment, Zuko jolts up and slaps Shyu’s hands away violently.
They have been over his throat, the Fire Sage about to motion them to Zuko’s head and while
Shyu stumbles backwards, there is an expression of sheer horror in Zuko’s eyes.

“ENOUGH! I’m FINE! Don’t you dare go there!”, he yells.

“I apologise, Prince Zuko. I didn’t mean to frighten you. For a complete judgement of your
energy paths I need to also examine the pathways leading up and down your head.”

“Did you find anything to worry about so far?”, Zuko bellows at him and Shyu stays
surprisingly calm, when he stands up.

“No.”

“Then you won’t find anything up there neither.”

Next to Sokka, Iroh clears his throat.

“I recommend that you let Shyu finish, Prince Zuko.”

Zuko makes a noise that reminds Sokka of a growling polar-bear-dog and maybe Iroh comes
to the same conclusion, because he turns to Shyu.

“No blocks? No disconnections?”

“The Fire Sage shakes his head. “Your Chi is strong, Prince Zuko. You have everything it
takes to become a powerful firebender just like your sister.”

A heavy, queasy feeling settles in his stomach and Sokka cringes. He hasn’t been here for
long, but even he knows, that this is probably the worst thing one could say to Zuko.
Realizing that, Sokka moves into action, before he can even think about it and he is proven
right to do so.
Zuko launches forward, a flame appearing in his hand. He looks absolutely furious and
frankly Sokka thinks, he has every right to be. While Shyu quickly jumps back, surprisingly
agile for a man his age, Sokka moves in and his body crashes against Zuko, fighting to hold
him back.

“Stop that!”, he yells.

“How DARE you?!”, Zuko roars, his eyes fixed on Shyu and his firebending completely
forgotten. Instead he tries to wriggle out of Sokka’s grip to throw a punch at the Fire Sage.

Sokka wants to tell him to calm down, but holding Zuko takes all his effort. Damn, Zuko’s
body is all muscle and he is incredibly strong. He squirms in Sokka’s arms, trying to free
himself and it’s a little as if trying to wrestle a turtle-seal. Which is nothing to recommend.

From the corner of his eye, Sokka sees that Iroh shakes his head, a hand over his eyes and
obviously this is not going like they planned.

“Zuko!”, Sokka manages to croak out. “He. Didn’t. Mean. It.”

“And how would you know?!”, the prince hisses back.

The next moment, for some reason, however Zuko lets go off him and Sokka tries to catch his
breath.

When he looks at Shyu, a look of deep concern and regret is written all over the Fire Sage’s
face. He bows in front of Zuko.

“Prince Zuko, I sincerely apologize. I didn’t think of how my words could be interpreted and
I assure you, I didn’t want to cause any harm or insult. Forgive me for being so thoughtless.”

For a moment Zuko looks at him as if he is about to refuse the apology. His shoulders are still
heaving, he still seems ready to attack. But to Sokka’s and probably everyone’s relief, the
prince finally nods.

“Fine. We will never mention it again.”

Shyu bows again and Zuko turns to his uncle.

“I’m ready.”

Iroh looks at his nephew and doubt is written all over his face. But he doesn’t argue. Instead
he motions for Zuko to get into the middle of the room. Sokka and Shyu retreat to the side to
watch.

“I need to get an impression of your skills. Would you please be so kind and present some of
your forms?”

Zuko nods sharply.

Then he closes his eyes and takes a deep breath. When he opens them again there is a
determined expression on his face and he goes through some motions, punching and kicking
and shooting fire from his hands and feet. Every movement is accompanied by some sort of
groan or roar. It looks impressive and the heat reflecting from the walls makes Sokka flinch
uncomfortably. But maybe that is more due to the display of aggression that comes with
firebending. It’s nothing like the soft, flowy motions Katara goes through, when she
waterbends.

For a moment he wonders, why he is doing that – helping a firebender become more
powerful and more destructive. But if they want to get away from the Fire Nation someday,
they need to be prepared and unfortunately that means Zuko must master this element of
destruction.

The Fire Prince swirls and kicks another ball of flame into the air with an angry yell, almost
losing his balance while doing so and Iroh raises his hand.

“That should be sufficient”, he says, looking everything but pleased.

Zuko turns to him, watching him expectantly, obviously waiting for his uncle’s feedback.
Iroh sighs and it looks a little as if he doesn’t know, what to say – or how to say it.

“It is a shame, that none of your former masters was capable or willing to teach how it is
done correctly.”

“What is that supposed to mean?”, Zuko crosses his arms over his chest and he looks
frustrated.

Iroh sighs again. “It means, that we have to get back to the start.”

“The start? What do you mean, ‘the start’?!”

“Where does the power in firebending come from?”, Iroh asks.

“The breath”, Zuko answers shortly.

“Then why are you trying to force it out of your muscles?”

Zuko throws an unfriendly look at him and raises his chin, not granting his uncle an answer.

“Your breath becomes energy within your body, that you can release in the form of your fire”,
Iroh explains. When Zuko looks decidedly away, he turns to Sokka. “Firebending is not about
rage, hatred and destruction. It comes from the breath for which one must master inner calm,
discipline and emotional stability.”

Now, that explains, why it is obviously so hard for Zuko. Not that Sokka blames him. With
all the crazy things that happened to him, emotional stability and inner calm don’t seem like
something that would come easy.

The prince looks like he’s biting his tongue to prevent himself from saying something he’ll
regret later.
“I know that!”, he barks.

“I know that you know that”, Iroh says patiently. “But it does not translate to your bending. If
you cast a flame into you hand, you don’t use your muscles. You just use your breath. And it
has to be like that for your forms as well. You only guide the fire with your motions and your
muscle power, but you don’t source it from there.”

“What do you want me to do?”

Sokka grimaces at the sharp tone in Zuko’s voice. He is clearly trying to suppress his anger
and frustration, but it doesn’t work very well. Actually, the Water Tribe boy is expecting him
to throw a tantrum any minute now.

“I want you to even your breathing and channel your energy. Once you think, you have
accomplished that, I want you to do a punch. But do it from your breath.”

“A punch?”, Zuko echoes, staring at his uncle.

“You want me to do a punch? That’s a beginner’s form. By now I should have long but
mastered the immediate forms and you want me to do a beginner’s?!”

Uncle Iroh nods.

“Alright, that’s it”, Zuko says and turns around. “This has been a stupid idea. I appreciate
your effort, Sokka, but that is not going to work.”

“You haven’t even tried, yet!”, Sokka protests and instead of letting Zuko go, he steps in front
of the door and glares at the prince.

Zuko narrows his eyes.

“Get out of my way.”

“No!”, Sokka insists stubbornly.

Iroh comes over to them and puts a hand on Zuko’s shoulder, who tenses immediately and
shoots him an angry look. The old man’s eyes are full of sympathy.

“It is much harder to un- and relearn something than learning it correctly in the first place”,
he says. “You have been unfortunate that your former teachers didn’t insist on a solid and
correct examination of your forms and pressured and urged you to progress, when you
weren’t ready for it.”

Zuko looks away, clearly ashamed.

“Do not be ashamed, Prince Zuko. Everyone progresses in their own pace. I do not have a
single doubt that you will become a master one day. Yes, we will start from the beginnings
and you won’t like it. But on a positive side, you already know the motions. We just have to
get you to use the proper source for your fire to perform them.”
Sokka has already seen the expression, that settles on Zuko’s face: defeat. The prince slumps
his shoulders.

“When I saw you, I thought that you would teach me all that cool and powerful stuff that
made you become the Dragon of the West”, he admits.

Iroh chuckles.

“I promise to teach you everything I know, nephew. Once you’re ready for it. So, what do
you say? Shall we begin?”
 Sisters and Mothers
Chapter Summary

Zuko makes some progress, Azula is being mean and the boys talk about their mothers.

Chapter Notes

So much feedback on the last chapter! I really did not expect that. Thank you so much
everyone! It really pushed my motivation and I know that I can't post a new chapter
every other day and this one is going to be short, but I really like it and squeezing in
some more content just for the sake of it, doesn't feel right either. So I thought why not
just post it as it is. I hope you like it too. Have fun!

=====================================================

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 10: Sisters and Mothers

Over the course of the following weeks it seems that Zuko and Sokka become invisible for
everyone else at the palace. It is a welcome development, at least in Sokka's opinion. There is
only one topic around the palace: the return of the Avatar. Among all the rumors it is hard to
tell, what is real and what is just the product of fantasy, but there are some confirmed
information:

The Avatar is an airbender, a young boy and unfortunately he has only mastered his original
element so far. That news has been quite a bummer, because Sokka hoped for someone
powerful and ready to kick the Fire Lord's ass. But somehow the boy manages to keep the
search parties led by Admiral Zhao on their toes. If the few information Iroh shares with
them are true, then the kid just managed to escape from another attempt of catching him on
Kyoshi Island, supposedly with the help of the famous Kyoshi Warriors. It makes sense, that
they would support him, given that Kyoshi was the Avatar two lifetimes ago.

It is easy to tell that Fire Lord Ozai is not happy, that the Avatar keeps avoiding being
captured. Sokka and Zuko make sure to stay out of his line of sight, but it is hard to overhear
the yelling when they pass by the Throne Room some days. What is more worrying, is the
fact that the Fire Lord reinforces his troops and attacks onto the Earth Kingdom. The strategy
is obvious and reasonable, Sokka has to admit. Ozai wants the Earth Kingdom to surrender
before the new Avatar can gather allies or win their army over for himself.

Nevertheless, it is obvious that the Fire Lord's patience is running thin and they do their best
to avoid him. They do not see or hear much from Azula either, as she seems to be busy as
well, accompanying the Fire Lord to meetings or councils, or practicing her firebending in
the training yard.

In fact, everything is rather uneventful and Sokka slowly settles into his life at the Royal
Palace. He has to admit, that it is not entirely bad: the food is amazing, he can sleep as long
as he wants and spend his days as he wishes. But after a few weeks this leisure is becoming
boredom and Sokka doesn't know how to handle the lack of a task and drifting into
meaninglessness.

Back at home at the South Pole there had always been things to be done: hunting, fishing,
building and repairing igloos, teaching the young boys how to fight, making clothes and
weapons, meal-preparations... the list goes on endlessly and Sokka has never been out of
things to do.

Here it is entirely different. There is no task for him, not even some stupid representational
work, that Sokka is sure he would hate, but at least it would be something. As it is, he spends
his days in the library (though the Fire Nation history and propaganda really gets boring at
some point), the gardens (he only can take so much naps a day) and for a few hours on the
training grounds, sparring with Zuko (which really is the highlight of his days).

Sokka is still surprised by how well they get along. When he was first brought before him at
the altar, the Water Tribe boy didn't think that he would ever enjoy Zuko's company. But as a
matter of fact he does and though he wouldn't say that he is glad that they are married, he is
not upset about it anymore. To be honest, he doesn't think about it a lot. It's just when
somebody throws a belittling comment at them, that Sokka starts to think that it bothers the
people more than it bothers them. Which is strangely amusing.

Sokka has never had a friend his age back at the Southern Water Tribe. There has only ever
been his sister. He likes the easy comraderie Zuko and he have developed since his arrival.
Zuko might be impatient and stubborn and easily frustrated, which regularly shows after the
practices with his uncle and translates into their sword practice, because Zuko is also not very
good at containing his frustration. On the positive side, it helps Sokka getting better.

But Zuko is also kind and thoughtful. He's never pushing too far and he possesses a kind of
dry humour, that Sokka can easily get on board with, especially when the prince comments
on some of the gossip around the Palace and makes him laugh.

When it comes to their sword practice, Zuko is very cautious with praise, but over time their
sparring becomes more leveled and Sokka enjoys the late afternoons on the training fields.

Regarding his firebending training Zuko keeps mostly to himself. So far, their cover of
‘healing sessions’ hasn’t been blown and Sokka hopes they can keep it that way for a while
longer. He can only guess by the amount of frustration that the prince shows, if a lesson has
been a good or a bad one.
Today Zuko seems to be in a good mood and he surprises Sokka after their practice, when he
puts his swords away and asks: “Wanna see something cool?”

There is a hint of a smile tugging around his mouth. It’s an unsual sight, but a welcome one
and Sokka nods easily.

Zuko takes a few steps back and turns to one of the training targets. He takes a deep breath,
before he gets into attack position. For once, the tension in his body looks like an appropriate
posture and not like the usual uptightness. Then, he starts to move.

Taking one step forward he shoots two punches of fire directed at the target. Then Zuko
swirls around himself and kicks a ball of fire with his right foot, followed by another punch
from his left hand. This time the fire ball that erupts from his hand is bigger and sears over
the wooden target, making it glow and the wood crackle.

They both watch how little clouds of smoke rise up into the air and Zuko looks actually
proud of himself, when he turns to Sokka.

“You did it!”, Sokka exclaims happily and laughs. “That was great!”

And it really was. The form did not look forced and the only noises Zuko made, while
shooting his flames around, were little huffs instead of his growling and yelling. It’s a great
progress and the prince has every reason to be proud of himself.

Sokka throws an arm around him and tries to tousle Zuko’s hair, but the other boy shoves him
away, grinning from ear to ear. He is about to say something, when behind them the noise of
bored clapping sounds over the training yard.

Turning around, Sokka lets go of Zuko, only to find Azula leaning against one of the targets
on the other side of the training area. Once she is sure of their attention, she stops the
clapping and walks over to them.

“Congratulations, brother”, she says in that dismissive and belittling tone, that is so typical
for her and Sokka’s eyes narrow. “It took you only seven years to master this form. Keep it
up and you’ll be able to do the fire whips when you’re forty.”

The expression of pride and happiness at his accomplishment falls from Zuko’s face
immediately and Sokka just can’t help the flash of anger that jolts through him. Azula really
knows how to ruin every good moment that happens to her brother and she is just infuriating.

Zuko presses his lips tightly together and looks to the ground.

“What do you want?”, he asks, but his voice doesn’t sound nearly as biting as it does when he
is annoyed by either Sokka or his uncle. It sounds wary, almost shy, and it is just not fair how
Azula can cause such an effect on him with only a few words.

However, Sokka bites his lip, because he doesn’t want to make things worse.

“I’m afraid, your practice is over. Father is going to send me on a mission soon and we have
to prepare.”
She waves to someone in the tunnel behind her and two girls step onto the training yard. One
is dressed in light, pink clothes and has a long braid – she is glancing curiously at them. The
other is dressed in all black and looks very unfriendly.

Azula doesn’t waste any time with introductions, but Zuko’s face darkens at the sight of the
two girls. The crown princess waits until her friends catch up to them and grins at the two
boys with a challenging look on her face.

“Although training would be so much more interesting with moving targets.”

“I’ll pass”, Zuko says and the edge in his voice is back. It’s a good thing given the situation,
Sokka figures. “Come on.”

He doesn’t have to tell him twice. A triumphant smile lingers on Azula’s lips and Sokka
glares at her, when they pass her by.

“What did I tell you, ladies? They’re inseparable. Zuko has completely fallen under the
savage’s charm.”

Zuko stops to glare back at his sister and his knuckles crack threateningly. Azula’s yellow
eyes glisten with satisfaction. She is playing with Zuko, like she always does. Sokka just rolls
his eyes and tugs at the prince’s arm. Her provocations don’t hit like they did in the first few
days and he knows better than to get riled up about someone calling him peasant or mocking
them for being married to each other. Zuko however, doesn’t seem to see it that way.

“Don’t. She wants you to lose your temper and attack. It’s not worth it.”

Zuko looks at him, clearly annoyed and maybe even hurt, so Sokka insists.

“You did great, Zuko. You can be proud of yourself. Don’t let her comments taint your
progress.”

There is a moment of hesitation, before Zuko nods sharply and turns his back to the girls.
Sokka looks back at them and raises an eyebrow, because he doesn’t dare sticking out his
tongue. But from the way Azula glares at him, she got the message. Good, Sokka thinks,
before he follows Zuko to leave the training area.

Zuko doesn’t even realize, where he is going. He feels… disappointed. The word doesn’t
seem entirely fitting for his feelings, but it’s the closest thing he can think of. Why does his
little sister have so much power over him? And why does she have to ruin everything?

He had been so happy, when he managed to do the form during his practice using only his
breath to cast the flames. Uncle had been so proud and Zuko had been so eager to show
Sokka that the lessons did work, even though it took him weeks to properly perform this
attack. It was nothing extra-ordinary. Zuko knows that and he knows that most children
master this form before the age of nine years old, but for him it was special and he wanted to
share it with Sokka. After all, the Water Tribe boy is the one, who talked his uncle into
teaching Zuko and who lets him rant when the lessons don’t go well without lashing back out
at him. Zuko just wanted to show him that it’s worth it.

Of course, Azula had to be there. It is just Zuko’s luck and she managed to make all the
insecurities bubble up inside of him again.

Maybe that is why he ends up at the turtle-duck pond, sitting down on the soft grass and
watch the ducklings hurry over to him, expecting him to feed them with a few crumps of
bread like he usually does. It’s his safe space and it has always been.

Today his pockets are empty, but one of the ducklings jumps into his lap nevertheless and it is
impossible to fight the smile appearing on his lips, when he pets it carefully.

Zuko startles a little, when Sokka sits down next to him and throws him a look.

There is an expression of slight amusement and fondness on the other boy’s face and in the
back of his mind Zuko knows, that he must look ridiculous. He’s almost a man and yet, he
sits here after a fight with his sister and plays with the ducklings.

But neither does Sokka mock nor make fun of him. He just watches Zuko, which is a little
unnerving, before he turns his gaze onto the water.

“Was she always like this?”, he asks after a while.

At first Zuko doesn’t answer. He gently takes the duckling into his hands and puts it down in
the water just right next to where its siblings are swimming around.

“Azula? Yeah. We never had much in common, unfortunately. Even when we were kids, she
was obsessed with power, with being a princess and telling other people what to do. My
father encouraged that. My mom tried to keep it down, but…”

His voice trails off and Zuko looks away.

“What happened to her?” Sokka’s voice is low and soft.

Zuko pulls his knees to his chest and wraps his arms around them. Still watching the turtle-
ducks, he whispers: “I don’t know.”

Sokka’s eyes widen. “You don’t know?”

Zuko shakes his head.

“The morning after my grandfather, Fire Lord Azulon, died, she was gone. My father doesn’t
talk about it. Maybe he doesn’t know either, maybe he just doesn’t want to tell me. The
weeks after were… hard. Things weren’t brilliant when she was still here, but afterwards
everything really started going south. I… I only realized then, how much she protected me.”
Zuko swallows against the lump in his throat and he blinks several times to make the burning
feeling in his eyes go away. Sokka looks at him.

“Sounds like an amazing person.”

“She was the best. We always sat here together to feed the turtle-ducks or to read stories. She
always encouraged me, she always believed in me, even when I didn’t. She was convinced,
that I would become a great Fire Lord one day and that it was okay to need more time than
everybody else. She always tried to make me see the opportunities and not the flaws.”

Beautiful memories come to him and it is painful to know that these days are gone and never
going to come back to him. Zuko doesn’t cry, but he also can’t deny the wetness in his eyes.
It must have been years since he last talked about his mother. He misses it, he realizes. It’s
bittersweet, but somehow he feels closer to her in this moment than he has in a long time.

“I think she would have liked you.” Zuko doesn’t really know, why he says that.

In fact, he realizes that the majority of things he just said also apply to Sokka and it makes a
weird feeling rise in his chest. His eyes widen a little in shock and disbelief, but he is quickly
distracted when Sokka smiles at him. It is a sad smile and Zuko understands why, when the
Water Tribe boy begins to talk.

“I’m gonna tell you something crazy. I never told this to anyone before, but honestly, I’m not
sure I can remember what my mother looked like.”

Zuko stares at him in horror and Sokka looks away, almost seeming ashamed.

“After she was… It was a lot. For all of us. My dad, he… it was as if he was simply existing
instead of living and we were so young and I didn’t know what to do or how to hold our
family together. It was as if both of our parents were gone and I should have handled it better,
but in fact it was Katara, who’s been the one looking out for me. She did everything. She’s
always been the one that’s there, and now, when I try to remember my mom, Katara’s is the
only face I can picture.”

Zuko tears his eyes away from Sokka and looks onto the ground. He blinks a few times,
trying to process what he just heard. It’s incredibly sad and that means something coming
from him, because Zuko’s life is nothing but a sequence of sad moments. But not
remembering the face of his own mother… It dawns to Zuko that Sokka must have been
incredibly young, when this happened and to think that his sister has been even younger, yet
forced to grow up so fast… They all had to. It’s what war and losing a parent does to
children, but that doesn’t make Sokka’s loss any less significant.

No words of comfort come to Zuko’s mind. He just doesn’t know, what to say. Instead, he
reaches out to take Sokka’s hand into his.

When Sokka’s head jolts up and he looks at him curiously, Zuko is about to let go, suddenly
ashamed of his rash gesture. But he doesn’t get far, when Sokka intertwines their fingers and
squeezes gently. Gratefulness is written all over his face and Zuko manages something that
should be a smile, but ends up being a grimace. He feels himself blush, but Sokka doesn’t
mention it. He just keeps looking at Zuko as if he is searching for something in his eyes and
suddenly, it becomes too much.

Zuko looks down onto their joined hands. Sokka’s skin is dark against his own. The patterns
of the scars around their wrists merge together where they touch. It looks elegant, beautiful
even and like it’s meant to be. His heartbeat quickens and he feels a little overwhelmed.

“I miss her”, Sokka admits.

Zuko looks back up at him again and he doesn’t know if Sokka is talking about his mother or
his sister. Either way, it doesn’t change anything about the decision he has made.

They are still holding hands. Zuko gives Sokka’s a gentle squeeze.

“If you want to send a message to the South Pole, I can make that happen.”
 You deserve better
Chapter Summary

There's some bonding, another family dinner and an escalation.

Chapter Notes

So many comments! You guys are amazing!

I am not quite sure what happened in this chapter, this is not at all what I had planned
out (well at least the last part anyway). Somehow the boys just took over, but I think it
turned out alright. Enjoy!

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 11: You deserve better

"Are you sure, that this won’t backfire?”

“Sokka, I swear to Agni, if you are going to ask once more…”

The Water Tribe boy raises his hands defensively and sighs. “Okay, okay. Calm down, will
you?”

His last sentence could be directed at either of them. Sokka is nervous and he’s having mixed
emotions, while they walk side by side to the Palace’s aviary.

He appreciates that Zuko offered to get a letter to be send home for Sokka. He really does and
he is still touched, when he thinks back to that moment at the pond, when Zuko took his hand
and looked at him, the prince’s ember eyes so sincere and open and full of compassion.
Sokka has been beyond grateful. He still is. Letting his family know that he’s doing okay is
such a big thing for him, but in the end it has been quite difficult to find the right words to
write onto the parchment.

Zuko carries the container with the parchment inside in his hand to make it look like he wants
to send a letter, because technically, Sokka isn’t allowed to. Which is the reason why he kept
the letter rather short and neutral and didn’t even sign it. Katara will know that it’s from him
anyway and they have to be cautious, in case the letter falls into the wrong hands.
Sokka wanted to say so much more, he wanted to tell her about everything that happened
since he has been captured: about the Fire Nation, most importantly about Zuko and that she
mustn’t feel guilty or bad for him, that he loves her and would do anything to see her again
and it hurt, that he couldn’t. Sokka isn’t really happy with what he wrote down, but it will
have to do.

Dear sister,

It’s been a while, but I found a way to write to you. First of all, let me reassure you that I am
fine. No harm has come to me and I intend to keep it that way. You must have heard what
happened when I arrived. I found that not everybody here is a bad person. He definitely isn’t.
Actually, I think I like him.

I miss you so, so much. You can’t even imagine. Well, probably you can. But please don’t
blame yourself on my behalf – it’s fine, really. I don’t know if I can write again anytime soon,
but I think about you and dad every single day. I miss you both. Don’t worry too much - I’ll
manage.

Do we still have some seal-jerky?

Love, Your brother

The line about the seal-jerky wouldn’t make sense for anybody else, but it was something
Katara would understand. Things weren’t always easy between them and being the only
children their age, it was sometimes hard to speak about feelings or what was bothering them.
Sokka doesn’t remember how exactly it came into being, but whenever they didn’t want to
talk about something and yet reassure the other that everything was okay, they used that
phrase. Even if Katara wouldn’t believe any other word of the letter, this would make her
understand, that he was telling the truth.

Sokka really wanted the message to get to the South Pole and there was a warm, fuzzy
feeling in his belly, that Zuko was willing to take the risk to arrange it. At the same time, that
was exactly, what made his heart sink: Zuko was willing to take the risk to arrange that.

It didn’t feel right to ask that of him (Sokka decidedly ignored, that it was Zuko, who
offered). Sokka has been around the Palace long enough to know, what could possibly
happen and even though he lacks creativity for cruel punishments, Azula and Fire Lord Ozai
surely don’t. He’s worried about Zuko and he doesn’t want the prince to get hurt on his
behalf.

Which is why he asked the question, if Zuko was sure he wanted to do that, at least a
thousand times and Zuko was becoming more and more annoyed.

Sokka feels strangely torn about the letter. His family is his priority, otherwise he wouldn’t
even be here. But somehow he also feels that it’s his job to protect Zuko and trying to send a
letter to the South Pole is putting him in danger and that doesn’t sit well with him. On the
other hand, how could he not take the opportunity to ease Katara’s sorrows when he’s got the
chance to do so?

The young man sighs heavily and Zuko stops at the entrance of the aviary and looks at him.

“It will be alright”, the prince says, sending a small, encouraging smile his direction.

Sokka looks back. He notices a change in Zuko’s posture. Not just in this moment, already
over the last few weeks since he started training with Iroh. He stands taller and shows the
first blossomings of a confidence that hasn’t been there, when they first met. It sounds stupid,
even in Sokka’s own mind, but it seems like a fire has been ignited within him. Zuko looks
good like that, the large scar on his face notwithstanding.

The thought makes him frown for a moment, but Sokka shrugs it off. It’s true, so what’s the
use in denying?

He follows Zuko into the aviary. It is a building with three large walls and a high roof.
Through the side of the open wall sunlight shines onto the cobblestone floor. It’s obviously
enough light to have several bushes grow around the area and there are lots of bars for the
messenger hawks to sit on, as well as dozens of nesting boxes on the walls.

When they enter, some of the birds begin to caw. The hawks watch them warily as if one
false movement will make them attack and Sokka unconsciously takes a step closer to Zuko.
The prince doesn’t notice. He looks around and a grim smile settles on his face, when he
obviously finds, what he’s looking for. Zuko whistles and from one of the upper nesting
boxes a large, maroon hawk starts to circle down to them, landing on one of the bars in reach.

“Man, that is so cool”, Sokka says, impressed by the tamed animal. “What’s its name?”

Zuko gives him an incredulous look.

“It’s a messenger hawk. It doesn’t have a name.”

“What do you mean, it doesn’t have a name?! This little birdy travels the world at your orders
and you don’t even have the decency to grant it a name?”

There is nothing little about the messenger hawk and the sharp, yellow eyes of the creature
look viciously at Sokka.

Zuko just rolls his eyes and puts the harness for carrying the message container onto the
hawk. When the bird allows it, remaining perfectly still and composed, Sokka takes it as a
sign to step closer and watches it thoughtfully.

“Hm, you know what little guy? I will call you Hawky. Ain’t that something?”

“You are going to name a hawk Hawky?!”, Zuko blurts out and stares at him in disbelief.
Sokka shrugs.
“What? Do you have a better idea? Obviously not or it would already have a name. Plus, he
likes it. Ain’t that right, buddy?”

He reaches out to scratch Hawky under the beak. The bird makes a surprised noise.

“I know. Who’s a good little hawk? Who’s a… ouch!”

Hawky has a very sharp beak and Sokka pulls his hand back with a yell.

“Bad Hawky! Bad…”

He doesn’t come further, because Zuko starts to laugh. Sokka turns to him with wide,
surprised eyes, his bleeding finger completely forgotten.

Zuko laughs.

It’s the first time that Sokka hears him laugh, the first time that there is more than just a smile
or a quickly fading grin on his face. It’s an endearing sound and maybe it’s because he’s so
surprised, but after another second of overcoming his shock, that Zuko is actually capable of
laughing, Sokka finds himself chuckling along.

“That was stupid”, he admits, looking first at Hawky, then at his finger.

“It was”, Zuko agrees, a grin still plastered on his.

Then, he reaches his arm out for Hawky to hop onto it and walks to the open side of the
building. Sokka watches him and somehow he is grateful that Zuko takes the decision off
him, when the prince whispers something to the bird before he launches it into the air.

He still doesn’t know, what Zuko arranged to get the message to the South Pole, but neither
will the prince tell him nor does it matter.

For a moment, Zuko watches Hawky disappear into the sky, before he turns around and looks
at Sokka warmly. Suddenly there is the odd urge within him to just walk over to Zuko and
hug him tightly. Sokka ignores that sentiment and just nods at his husband.

“Thank you.” He means it.

Zuko nods back at him, smiling. “Anytime.”

Ever since the return of the Avatar the family dinners have become rarer, but that doesn’t
mean that they’ve become any more comfortable.
Uncle tries his best to maintain light conversation while Zuko’s father remains silent, his gaze
wandering between Azula and Zuko in a calculating manner. It makes Zuko flinch
uncomfortably. Azula only responds to Uncle’s questions with bored and belittling answers,
clearly showing that she doesn’t care about anything he says. He senses that Sokka would
like to engage in the conversation and hear more about Uncle’s adventures from when he was
still a young man, but he obviously doesn’t want to attract the Fire Lord’s attention, which
leads to a stiff conversation full of awkward and wary glances and hesitant, short answers.

After the first two courses of the dinner the conversation dies down completely and the Royal
Family sits in uncomfortable silence.

Zuko sighs internally. This is nothing new, but it shows him every time how dysfunctional his
family is. He actually feels sorry for Sokka for having been thrown into this, because from
what he told him about his life at the South Pole, Sokka’s family is the complete opposite.
Nevertheless, Zuko is grateful for the Water Tribe boy’s presence by his side.

To distract himself he thinks about the latest training sessions with his uncle. Iroh insisted
that even though Zuko was more interested into learning new forms to attack, it was also of
great importance that he could defend himself. Zuko had always been better at defending than
attacking and he was pleased when his uncle told him that they would soon progress to some
more advanced forms of combat. Who would have thought that having a teacher that worked
with positive reinforcement and reassurance would lead to better results than pressure, yelling
and fear?

Zuko fights back the ironic little smile that is about to settle on his face.

His father leans back in his chair and lets his gaze wander over them.

“Do the preparations for your departure go as planned?”, he asks, turning to Azula.

Zuko looks up curiously, while Azula nods.

“I shall leave in ten days.”

“Are you going on a vacation, Princess Azula?”, Uncle asks joyfully and she rolls her eyes.

“No uncle. I can’t afford to waste my time sitting around and playing Pai Sho. I’ve got a job
to do.”

“Azula is going to Ba Sing Se. It is about time to conquer the city, before the Avatar will
make himself at home there. We almost had it surrender once before, if you remember.”

Zuko’s eyes widen and he swallows, when he sees the flash of pain, grief and sadness wash
over his uncle’s face at his father’s words.

“I remember, brother.”

Zuko has rarely ever heard bitterness in Uncle Iroh’s voice, but right now it’s more than
justified. The prince himself tries not to think too much of Lu Ten, because the memory of his
cousin is a reminder of much better days. They had been close - closer than him and Azula
ever were. Lu’s death almost tore Uncle Iroh apart, making him give up the siege of Ba Sing
Se. It’s disgusting how his father reproaches him for it.

Sokka throws a questioning look at him, but Zuko subtly shakes his head.

“I hope you have more luck than I did”, Iroh says to Azula, his voice still laden with grief.

“I won’t need any luck, Uncle. The Earth King is a ridiculous representation of a monarch.
He’s weak and kooky and I’d be surprised if it took me six-hundred days to make him
surrender.”

His uncle glares at her. His gaze is sharp and there is a dangerous flicker in the usually warm
eyes, but Iroh doesn’t say anything. Zuko feels tense. He wonders what Azula leaving will
mean for him personally. During the last two months she has been busy sitting in on different
meetings and councils with their father’s generals, noblemen and ministers. His little sister
even led some of those meetings in the Fire Lord’s absence.

Despite everything, Zuko assumes that this could be an opportunity to get a part of his old
life back. He is not even sure, if he wants it, but… at least, it’s something that he knows.
Right now his future is so uncertain, his position unclear and even though he isn’t miserable
anymore, he longs for some recognition, some meaning. This could be his chance.

“Have you already decided, who will take over Azula’s tasks while she’s gone?”, Zuko asks
and four surprised pairs of eyes turn to him: two in disbelief, one in disappointment and one
in anger.

Immediately, Zuko feels like he made a huge mistake and his father’s answer doesn’t make it
any better.

“No, but certainly not you”, he says coldly and Azula doesn’t even try to hide her chuckle,
when he continues. “Do you expect me to insult my ministers and generals by putting you in
command? No, you can continue to focus on your healing.”

The words are like a slap to his face and Zuko grits his teeth. If only his father knew, what he
really is doing in the temple. If only he knew, that Zuko is getting better at firebending. There
is no more disappointment in the Fire Lord’s voice, just plain spite. It seems as if he has
definitely given up any hope on him and Zuko didn’t think that it would bother him as much
as it does.

Uncle Iroh hums disapprovingly.

“It is a sign of wisdom to realize when healing is needed and even more to act on it. I am
sure, Prince Zuko is making great progress and it will make him better.”

His eyes turn to Zuko fondly and though it doesn’t make the prince smile, it eases some of
the tension in his shoulders.

“Wisdom?”, Fire Lord Ozai spits out. “It’s weakness.”

He turns to glare at Zuko again.

“You are the Fire Prince! Aren’t you ashamed of yourself? How long has this been going on
now? I assume that there is no ‘progress’ whatsoever, am I right? You’re naïve, if you’re still
thinking that the sages can do something for you. Face it, Zuko. The prophecy has been
wrong. You will never be a master and you will never be Fire Lord. You are a weakling and
you should be grateful that I still allow you to be part of this family.”

His father’s words hurt like they always do. But for once Zuko doesn’t turn his gaze to the
ground, trying to hide from them. He looks straight into the Fire Lord’s eyes and anger burns
in his chest. It feels different from the constant simmering anger he felt towards anything and
everything. It feels more focused, more intense. It feels like a real physical thing and when
Zuko lets out a long, deep breath, it’s hot.

He flinches, his eyes widen in surprise and even Sokka next to him shots him a look of
bewilderment and gasps. Uncle and Azula turn to them immediately. While Azula narrows
her eyes suspiciously, Uncle looks worried and thoughtful. His father doesn’t even notice it,
because he has already turned his attention to Azula.

“I agree that we have yet to find a task for you, Prince Zuko. But I am sure my advisors will
come up with something. Azula, however, is aiming for greater achievements. Ba Sing Se
will be ours in no time.”

The doors open and the main course is served.

Again, silence settles over the table. Next to him, Sokka sighs, but at least he seems to enjoy
the food. Uncle Iroh still has that thoughtful look on his face, but after a few minutes, he
looks up to the Fire Lord.

“How would you like a little party to acknowledge the princess’s departure on her first
military mission?”

Fire Lord Ozai throws a look at him, clearly disapproving of the suggestion. Zuko isn’t sure
what he thinks about it either. Sure, Azula leaving the Capital is probably good for him
personally, but he absolutely doesn’t feel the need to pass time with the Fire Nation nobility,
that looks down on him while celebrating his younger sister.

“I’d rather celebrate her successful return.”

“Of course”, Uncle agrees quickly. “But I have sensed, that the people have grown nervous
ever since the news of the Avatar have reached the public. It would be a sign of confidence
and reassurance, that our nation won’t be threatened by a boy younger than your own
daughter. It would be a show of superiority. And I am sure, the nobility would like to show
praise and their support for the Crown Princess.”

Zuko frowns. It’s no secret that Uncle is not exactly very fond of Azula and trying to
convince his father to organize a celebration for her doesn’t seem like something Iroh would
do. The prince wonders, what the old man is up to.

Azula and his father share look and she seems to actually consider it.
Shrugging, Azula says: “I like a party. And I’m sure Mai and Ty Lee wouldn’t object to some
fun either.”

“Very well”, Fire Lord Ozai agrees and waves it off. Then he looks at Iroh. “You may
organize it.”

“Father! You wouldn’t have Uncle organize my party, would you?”

“It would be my pleasure, Princess”, Uncle chimes in and Zuko raises his eyebrows, as does
Sokka.

“You can organize it yourself if you find the time apart from your other tasks”, father says.

Azula’s excitement seems to waver. Then she looks at Uncle skeptically.

“Don’t embarrass me. I’ll have Ty Lee help you.”

“Wonderful!”, he exclaims, obviously satisfied that his suggestion has been accepted.

Sokka and Zuko share a doubtful look.

When they are on the way back to their chamber Sokka voices what Zuko has been thinking
all through the dessert.

“Is it just me or was this even more strange than usual?”

“Indeed”, he agrees.

“What do you think it’ll mean for us, when she’s away?”

Sokka sounds worried and Zuko frowns, because he thought that Sokka would be relieved to
have her gone, even just for a little while. A part of Zuko definitely is. It means one less
source of humiliation and judgement.

He throws a questioning look at Sokka, who shrugs.

“I mean, do you think your father will leave us alone or do you think he’ll pay more attention
to you?”

Zuko didn’t think about that, but now that Sokka says it, that is definitely an option. For a
moment Zuko wonders, how his father would react, if he was to learn that his bending is
getting stronger, even though it’s still far from what Azula is capable of. A familiar feeling of
hope and the urge to proof himself rises up within him. Maybe he could ‘accidently’ show
some of the things he’s learned from his uncle and maybe it would convince his father to
assign him to a mission as well and-
Zuko’s gaze falls onto Sokka. The Water Tribe boy leans against the wooden balustrade of
their balcony and watches him expectantly. He crosses his arms and Zuko isn’t sure how to
interpret his expression. It’s weird mixture between offense and disappointment and at first
Zuko has no idea, where it’s coming from. Then, Sokka sighs deeply.

“You haven’t given up on it yet, have you?”, Sokka asks quietly, looking away from him.

“What-?”

“You still want to win his respect and favor, don’t you? You still want to please him.”

Zuko’s eyes go wide and for a moment he doesn’t know what to say. Then he shrugs
helplessly.

“You don’t understand. He’s still my father.”

“He’s cruel and he’s evil and he doesn’t care about you. You heard him. Why would you want
to please someone like him?!”

Sokka’s words sound like an accusation and they are. Neither did he expect to be accused by
Sokka, nor is Zuko prepared for it. How is he supposed to explain this to him? How could an
outsider possibly understand? How could someone, who grew up with a loving, caring family
possibly understand? He is the Prince of the Fire Nation, the firstborn and he shouldn’t be in
the position he’s in now. He has to proof that he’s worthy of the throne, he has to proof that
he’s better than Azula.

“I have to, if I want to become Fire Lord.”

Sokka snorts and shakes his head. “And that is what you want? Becoming the next Fire Lord?
And what then? Continue this tyranny? End the war if it’s not over by then?”

Zuko stares at him.

“I’m sorry, Zuko. But you are nothing like your father or like Azula. And that’s a good thing.
Bloody hell, she’s fourteen and she’s being send to conquer the capital of the Earth Kingdom
and she’s happy about it. How fucked up is that? Do you want to be like that?!”

Sokka stands up abruptly and walks back into their chamber, only to pace around there. Zuko
follows him, but he has still no idea, what is currently happening and why Sokka is so upset
all of a sudden. This afternoon everything seemed alright and the prince thought that they
really bonded over the last few weeks. He’s happy to have found a friend in his husband and
so far he thought that they saw eye to eye, but maybe he has been wrong about it all. This
wouldn’t exactly be new.

Zuko doesn’t want to be like Azula and no, he also doesn’t want to be like his father. But how
else is he supposed to fulfill his destiny? And why is Sokka even complaining?

“It was your idea to find me a firebending teacher! Why bother, when you don’t want me to
become more powerful?”, he yells at Sokka.
“I thought you were different! I thought- no, I think – that you’re a good person. That you’re
better than them. That you want to fight them as much as I do.”

“I never said, that I want to fight them”, Zuko yells back angrily, his hands clenched into
fists.

His words hang in the air and Sokka only looks at him. It takes a moment, before a deep sigh
comes over Sokka’s lips and he wipes a hand over his face.

“I know”, he whispers. “I know.”

He shrugs and Zuko isn’t sure if it’s the flicker of the candles or if there are unshed tears in
the other boy’s eyes.

“But I hoped.”

The words hit him like a punch and Zuko swallows heavily.

“After everything they put you through, I thought you wouldn’t want to be on their side
anymore.”

“Sokka, it’s not that easy. I… I am not a traitor. The Fire Nation-“

“I am not talking about the Fire Nation. I am talking about your family. Why would you look
up to a man that abuses and insults you? He is your father. He’s supposed to love you,
unconditionally. You shouldn’t have to earn his love.”

“Not everyone is as lucky as you are”, Zuko snaps.

“Guess not.”

The prince throws him a dark look. When neither of them says anything for a while, Zuko’s
anger dies down and is replaced by insecurity. Sokka’s outburst has been unexpected and he
doesn’t know what to do about it. Out of nowhere another thought shots through his head and
it makes him feel anxious and uncomfortable. It’s such a terrible prospect, that the prince
can’t just shove it away.

“Does… does this mean, we’re done being friends?”

Sokka stares at him, his mouth a little agape. He seems to be at a loss and after a few
moments a helpless chuckle comes over his lips.

“You’re so damaged”, he sighs and Zuko flinches uncomfortably, turning the scarred side of
his face away.

With a few quick steps Sokka is standing in front of him and places a hand on his left cheek,
gently making Zuko look back at him, even if he only does so reluctantly.

“Hey. Hey, look at me. I didn’t mean your scar. Not your scar. I… I’m sorry that I snapped. I
shouldn’t have. It’s just… I sometimes forget how damaged you are, Zuko. But honestly?
You turned out much more normal than you could possibly have, after everything.”

Zuko isn’t sure how much of Sokka’s speech is comforting and how much is an insult. He is a
little distracted by the hands that hold his face and the blue eyes that look at him insistently.

“Of course I am still your friend. And because I’m your friend I will continue to tell you ugly
truths even though you don’t want to hear them. I do so, because I want to protect you. I hate
that you’re looking for his approval. I don’t want you to get hurt through false hopes and I
don’t want you to look up to a man, who keeps looking down on you. You deserve better.”

Zuko stares at Sokka and his lips part slightly. The words hit him hard, resonating deeply
within him and the prince feels overwhelmed by the intensity in both Sokka’s eyes and
words.

You deserve better.

It echoes in his mind and makes him speechless. Sokka’s words cause a whirlwind of
conflicting emotions. There is a rush of gratitude, a comforting warmth that envelops him,
but also a pang of sadness and pain, because deep in his heart Zuko knows that he’s right. He
has always longed for his father’s recognition and acceptance, that always seemed just out of
reach and now Sokka is standing before him, offering both freely.

Lost in his thoughts, he barely registers the shift in Sokka’s proximity. The Water Tribe boy is
still holding his face and Zuko’s heart races when he thinks for the brink of a moment, that
he’s leaning in for a kiss. Instead, Sokka lets go only to pull him into a tight embrace, that
puts Zuko into a world of raw emotions and comfort.

Sokka’s arms encircle him, offering solace and strength. Zuko feels the warmth of Sokka’s
body pressed against his own and a shaky sigh leaves his lips, when he puts his arms around
the other boy and buries his face against the crook of his neck.

It’s been so long since someone held him like that, that Zuko barely remembers what a hug
feels like. He relishes in the mixture of tenderness, understanding and solace. He inhales
Sokka’s scent, a blend of earthy notes with a hint of the ocean breeze. There’s a subtle tinge
of sweat caused by the late summer heat, but Zuko finds that he doesn’t mind. It’s a scent that
calms his nerves and wraps him in a sense of warmth and safety and Zuko feels a little
pathetic, when he thinks that he doesn’t want to let go.

One of Sokka’s hands finds the back of his head, holding it reassuringly.

“I hate that you’re still trying to gain his respect”, Sokka whispers.

“I can’t help it”, he murmurs back.

“We can work on that”, Sokka says stubbornly, when he lets go off him, his cheeks a little
red.

Zuko huffs, but he nods anyway. Sokka sends a tiny smile his way.

“Are we okay?”
He nods again, still a little overwhelmed by his emotions and the confusion that comes with
them.

You deserve better.

 Assault
Chapter Summary

Sokka reflects, there is a party and shit hits the fan.

Chapter Notes

I have been waiting to write this chapter since I started this story. It has been soooo
much fun, especially the part with Ty Lee but also the more serious parts later. I wrote
this in one go and even though I posted a chapter yesterday, I just can't wait to share it
with you. Your comments really make my day and I am super excited to see what you
think about this.
Next chapter will take a little longer, but I hope you don't mind. Have fun!

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 12: Assault

That night Sokka lies awake long after Zuko has fallen asleep and stares into the darkness.
His mind is in disarray and he is trying to sort things out with himself.

Sokka is still troubled by the fact, that Zuko can’t let go of wanting to impress his father and
live up to some kind of expectations he has for himself (because Sokka highly doubts that
Fire Lord Ozai has any expectations for his son left by now). They had that fight already the
first night they talked to each other, but Sokka thought Zuko had moved on since then.
Maybe that has been naïve. It definitely has been too optimistic.

And to some extend he understands him, because he is asking no less of Zuko than giving up
on his own family. Well, not his entire family, because Iroh is on their side, but anyway.
Sokka thought that all the abuse he witnessed – and the Water Tribe boy is sure that it has
been going on long before, even if Zuko doesn’t talk about it – would make Zuko want to
fight back instead of appease the Fire Lord.

He’s so damaged.

Sokka meant it, when he said those words. It doesn’t mean that he blames Zuko. His anger
just got the better of him and he has probably been a little too harsh. Yelling and reproaching
Zuko does never lead to anything, Sokka knows that by now, but it was just too frustrating to
watch the hope rise in Zuko’s eyes when he implied that he could take over some of Azula’s
duties and thus redeem himself. Zuko doesn’t need any redemption. He’s just fine as he is.

Sokka exhales noisily and turns to lie on his side, watching Zuko’s silhouette next to him. In
the darkness he can’t make out the scar. He remembers the feeling of the uneven, delicate
skin under his fingertips, when he held Zuko’s face. Sokka is not entirely sure what came
over him, but it turns out that affection and care caught the prince completely off-guard, as if
it was completely foreign to him and that’s yet another sign of how damaged the young man
is. His wide eyes looked at Sokka in awe and he basically clung to him, when Sokka just
pulled him into a hug.

A shiver ran down his spine, when he felt Zuko’s breath against the back of his neck. Holding
him felt good.

Sokka has no idea, what he’s supposed to do. He likes to think that he knows Zuko. But then
there are moments like this evening, when he wonders if Zuko even knows himself or what
he wants and why he wants it.

He remembers Iroh’s words, that his nephew is a complicated young man and Sokka can only
agree. Zuko’s actions aren’t coherent at all and Sokka still doesn’t understand why it is so
important for Zuko to win his father’s respect.

Sure, he agreed to help Zuko win his title as Crown Prince back, but only to prevent Azula
from becoming Ozai’s successor. Sokka is not convinced, that Zuko really wants to become
Fire Lord one day. But sometimes he seems so determined to fulfill the expectations and what
he calls his destiny, that he doesn’t seem to question his motivation.

Somehow with the return of the Avatar and discovering that Zuko is a caring and thoughtful
person, he just assumed that the prince was completely on board with fighting his father,
when the time would come.

Maybe Zuko is right and it’s not that easy. Who knows what Sokka would do if their roles
were reversed? He thinks of his own father and he is not sure, if he would be able to fight
Hakoda, even if he knew that he did something wrong.

With another sigh, Sokka rolls onto his back.

He’s not mad or disappointed. Not anymore, that is. Earlier he would have liked to smack
some sense into the prince, but right now he is really just worried.

When he tells Iroh that over a game of Pai Sho the next day, the old man hums thoughtfully.
His face shows that he shares the sentiment.

Iroh places a tile on the board and sighs.

“I’m just afraid, that if the Fire Lord realizes that Zuko still wants to prove his worth to him,
he will use him and no good will come out of that”, Sokka says.

“You are an intelligent young man, my friend.”

Sokka huffs. “It isn’t so hard to figure that out. If only there was a way to get out of here.”

Iroh doesn’t say anything to this, but watches Sokka thoughtfully.

“Has it occurred to you that Prince Zuko is afraid?”

Sokka looks at him, while he places a tile, and thinks about it. “I mean, probably. I would be
afraid too, if my dad was a tyrant. But isn’t that all the more reason to fight back instead of
wanting to gain his approval?”

“Is it? You must not forget, that Prince Zuko can’t just abandon his father. It would be seen as
treason. He is not free to go wherever he pleases, even though he’s the prince. He has to
choose between what he thinks is the easy way – trying to please my brother – or the hard
way – defying him. Actually, there is no easy way, though Prince Zuko decides to ignore
that.”

Iroh’s words are discouraging.

“Do you think the Fire Lord holds any love for him?”

A deep sigh comes over Iroh’s lips. “My brother has never been a loving person. I doubt that
he has ever loved anyone besides himself.”

“What about Azula?”

“Do you think the way he treats her is a way of showing his love?”

The ‘yes’ lies on his tongue, but Iroh probably wouldn’t ask the question, if it was obvious
and Sokka frowns.

“Fire Lord Ozai has always made his children compete for his affection. Even now, as Prince
Zuko clearly lost that competition, Ozai is still instrumentalizing Princess Azula. She is as
much a victim of his parenting as Zuko. It might not look like it, but do you think she has
been born evil?”

“I don’t know.”

Under Iroh’s disapproving glare, Sokka coughs and mumbles: “Probably not.”

He looks onto the board.

“Is that why you wanted to throw her a party? To have her have something nice?”

Iroh hesitates, before he nods. “Amongst other reasons.”

He obviously doesn’t want to share and Sokka doesn’t push it.

Zuko and him don’t speak about the dinner or their fight and Sokka is actually fine with it.
He keeps a close eye on Zuko, but nothing seems to have changed neither in his daily routine
nor between them and he is happy to leave it at that.

Neither of them is eager for the celebration of Azula’s departure to the Earth Kingdom, but as
part of the Royal Family they can hardly miss it.

The last time Sokka had to wear the formal Fire Nation attire, it has made him feel like he
was wearing a costume. He is still not used to it, especially due to the unpleasant memories
that come with it, but he has always been a little vain and the clothes make him look regal.
Under other circumstances he might just come to like the clothing.

Zuko seems a lot more uncomfortable, while he’s getting ready. Probably this event isn’t
going to be any more enjoyable than the last public spectacle they had to attend. After all,
this is a celebration for Azula, his little sister, who took his rightful place.

At least, there will be good food, Sokka thinks, trying to focus on the positive. They would
try to keep to themselves, not attracting any attention from the other party guests. It should be
fine. Scrutinizing looks and comments from strangers don’t bother him anymore. He just has
to make sure, that Zuko keeps his calm and doesn’t snap at people. That should keep him
busy enough.

And once the celebration is over, Azula will leave for Ba Sing Se and they will be rid of her,
even if only for a limited amount of time. Sokka has yet to come up with a plan, what to do
next, but first things first.

The Palace is buzzing with excitement as nobles and dignitaries gather to honor his sister’s
imminent military mission.

The party is not so bad actually. Sure, there are lots of boring speeches from generals, Azula’s
teachers and other people that are deemed important enough to praise the Crown Princess for
her determination and courage to contribute to the Fire Nation’s victory at such a young age.

Zuko is not really paying attention, while he sips on his drink. Next to him Sokka sighs, a
clear sign that he’s bored as well. They are standing a little further away from the crowd, not
wanting to draw attention. It works just fine. Apart from sneering glances, the people give
them a wide berth and Zuko is fine with it. He has never been a small-talker and knowing
that they make fun about him behind their backs doesn’t raise his interest in engaging with
them.
There have been some hushed whispers and giggling, when they entered the Great Hall side
by side, but it was nothing unexpected. A tiny part of him even felt a grim satisfaction at the
scandalized looks, when Sokka and him shared a look and smiled at each other. Zuko
wonders how many of them would have fainted if they knew that they had hugged or that he
held Sokka’s hand the other day. The thought alone coaxes another smile out of him and
Sokka throws him a curious look.

Applause spreads through the crowd and obviously the set of speeches is over, because the
people start to chatter and walk over to the buffet.

“You want something?”, he asks, but to his surprise Sokka shakes his head.

“Later, when there’s less people. I don’t feel like being commented or insulted right now.”

“Right. But I need another drink. I’ll be right back.”

Sokka nods and Zuko walks over to one of the servants and grabs two glasses of sparkling
wine from the tablet. When he turns around, he finds that Sokka has company.

Ty Lee looks excited while she seems to talk Sokka down, which is actually quite remarkably
given how much the Water Tribe boy talks himself. Nevertheless, a sigh leaves Zuko’s lips,
because Azula’s friends are probably the last people he wants to talk to right now. Especially
not to-

“Mai!”, he exclaims and almost lets the glasses drop, when she appears seemingly out of
nowhere right in front of him.

Zuko flinches, while she just raises an eyebrow and takes one of the glasses from his hands.

“Zuko. It’s been a while”, is all she says and he gulps, not knowing what he should say to her.

So far, he has been capable to avoid her and maybe that makes this whole situation even more
awkward. How do you talk to someone, who you thought you would marry someday, after
having completely abandoned them and having married someone else in the meantime? His
life really is fucked up, Zuko realizes. Even if marrying Sokka hasn’t been his choice and
even if Mai and him haven’t really been together, they still have been… something. Each
other’s prospect. That sounds just wrong and Zuko grimaces.

“Relax, Zuko”, Mai says, sounding as bored as usual. “We’re good. I just want to chat a
little.”

Now, that doesn’t make him relax at all.

Nevertheless, he follows Mai a few steps to the side, so that they are not in anyone’s way.

Her eyes trail over his face and for a moment her indifferent expression flickers, when she
looks at his scar. Quickly, he turns his face away and looks to the ground.

“You shouldn’t be ashamed of it. Makes you look tough”, she says.
Zuko looks at her doubtfully, but Mai seems serious. But she always seems serious, though it
is hard to tell.

They sip on their drinks and Zuko knows that he should probably say something.

“So, uhm. How are you doing?”

“Fine”, comes her reply. He grimaces.

“Listen, Mai. I’m sorry that things turned out the way they did. I…”

“From what I’ve heard you didn’t have much choice. And there hadn’t been any real
agreement. It’s fine.”

There is a tiny, reassuring smile on her lips and Zuko lets out a relieved sigh. He thought that
this would be much more difficult. He was afraid that Mai would hold hard feelings against
him, because the prospect of marrying the Crown Prince had been taken from her, but she
seems indeed fine. Zuko wonders if she’s actually happy about it. They were friends, but they
have not really been in love. Not that he was in love with Sokka, but nevermind. Mai still has
the chance to find someone she really loves, instead of being married to him. That’s good for
her.

“Are you happy?”, she asks and Zuko chuckles dryly.

“I’m never happy.”

They smile at each other. Probably they would have gotten along just fine.

“I’m not miserable”, he admits, which causes her to look at him for a long moment.

“That’s something”, she says gently.

They turn to watch Ty Lee and Sokka. It’s an amusing sight, because Ty Lee is being her
usual, over-excited, happy-go-lucky sef and Sokka seems quite embarrassed. It’s nice seeing
him like that for a change, because ever since they live together it seems to Zuko that he is
always the one to embarrass himself.

It takes a moment until he realizes that Mai is watching him instead of the other teens and she
seems surprised, as far as one can tell from her expression.

“You like him.” It is not a question.

Zuko shrugs. “We have become friends, I guess.”

Mai raises an eyebrow, but she doesn’t comment.

“So, uhm. Are you looking forward to going to Ba Sing Se?”, he asks her.

“I am looking forward to being away from this boring place and my parents. Ba Sing Se
looks promising on that behalf.”
Zuko smiles to himself. That’s Mai.

“Come on, introduce me to your husband”, she says mockingly and nudges him with her
elbow. Zuko sighs, but leads her over to him anyways.

Ty Lee is far too nice to be friends with Azula, Sokka thinks. She doesn’t make fun of him or
mock him and she is obviously excited to meet him (for whatever reason), genuinely curious
and absolutely not intimidating. But her question, if he thinks Zuko is cute catches him a little
off-guard.

“Uhm.”

Sokka wouldn’t exactly call Zuko cute in a classical sense. There are undeniably some
adorable quirks about him, like his fondness for the turtle-ducks or his excitement about
stupid romantic novels, that seem a little unfitting of him. But Sokka likes him and he is
ninety-nine percent sure that he would like Zuko even if they weren’t forced to be married.

He thinks of an eloquent way to phrase that, so that it won’t be embarrassing, but obviously
he’s taking too long, because Ty Lee giggles and elbows him.

“I think you two make such a cute couple, I don’t care what everybody else says. He seems to
be doing a lot better. You’re good for him”, she says cheerfully. “Who would have thought?”

Feeling his cheeks heat up, Sokka opens his mouth, but it occurs to him that telling her that
they are not really a couple despite their marriage probably isn’t a great idea. So instead of an
answer he just hums, but Ty Lee doesn’t seem to mind anyway, continuing the conversation
on her own.

“He’s a lucky guy, if you ask me. I mean, look at you. If you weren’t already taken, I’d surely
give it a shot.”

“What?!” Sokka stares at her with bewilderment.

Ty Lee laughs and nods enthusiastically. “Oh, definitely. And I wouldn’t be the only one. You
would be turning a lot of girls’ and guys’s heads if it weren’t for Prince Zuko.”

“Uhm.” His cheeks are burning.

Ty Lee throws her braid back over her shoulder and gives him a disbelieving look.

“Oh, c’mon”, she hits him against his upper arm, “Don’t tell me you are not used to
compliments. The girls of the Water Tribe must have been after you.”
“The only girl my age back at home was my sister.”

“Oh!”

Now Ty Lee sounds really surprised and also a little confused. A tiny frown settles on her
front, she tilts her head to the side and watches him out of her big, brown eyes as if she is
wondering about something.

“And the guys?”

“The only other guys were about five years old.”

She stares at him.

“Spirits! I had no idea.”

The shock didn’t last for long and is quickly replaced by more excitement and that girl is a
lot.

“So that means that Zuko has been your first boyfriend, your first kiss, your first everything?”

She is almost bouncing up and down, while Sokka’s face must be bright red even through his
tan and he downs the drink in his hand in one go.

“This is so romantic!”

He caughs and now it is his turn to stare at her and frown.

“Uhm”, he says again. “I have literally been kidnapped, sent to the Nation my Tribe has been
at war with since forever and forced to the altar to marry a stranger.”

“I know, right?”, she says happily and Sokka comes to the conclusion, that Ty Lee is crazy.
“And now you’re here at Zuko’s side, looking like a prince of your own right and you’re
happy. So romantic.”

Sokka blinks and though he is flattered by her compliment on his looks, he wonders if she is
living completely on this planet. He doesn’t get to correct her, because Zuko and that other,
grim looking girl are joining them.

Zuko looks uncomfortable, but that could have a lot of reasons. He keeps his back turned to
the crowd and Sokka withstands the urge to tell him to relax. The girl with the black hair
watches him warily, her gaze scanning him up and down, clearly unimpressed. Ty Lee’s gaze
wanders between Zuko and him as if she’s expecting some grand romantic gesture and the
whole situation is so bizarre, that Sokka can’t help a little chuckle.

“What’s so funny?”, the dark-haired girl asks.

“Just… this”, he gestures around and she raises an eyebrow, making him feel a little
uncomfortable.
“Mai, this is Sokka, my husband. Sokka this is Mai, my…”

Zuko stops abruptly and looks a little mortified. The girl, Mai, doesn’t.

“I was supposed to marry him before you showed up”, she explains and Sokka stares at her.

Things just got ten times more awkward and he has no idea how to react to that. He looks at
Zuko, who seems to be wishing that the ground would just swallow him and when he notices
Sokka’s look, he shrugs helplessly.

Sokka can’t blame him. Of course, there must have been a prospect for the Crown Prince. It
was logic. Somehow a little disturbing, given their current situation, but still logic. Ty Lee
looks at Mai scandalized and reproachfully, as if she expects some great drama to unfold
immediately between Zuko and him. Well, that won’t happen.

Gathering himself, Sokka focuses on Mai and hopes that his smile looks adequate.

“Nice to meet you”, he says with a nod.

She grins, which is oddly intimidating and looks like a threat and Sokka makes a mental note
to not piss her off.

“Nice to meet you too.”

Before they can engage in further conversation, the atmosphere in the hall shifts. The
amicable chatter around them dies down, when a rumbling noise rises up and suddenly the
ground beneath their feet begins to crack and tremble.

Sokka’s eyes widen and he finds Zuko’s concerned gaze. Neither of them has to say it out
loud.

Earthbenders.

They look around frantically to make out the source.

“What in Agni’s name?!”

Fire Lord Ozai rises from his seat, yelling.

It is in that moment that some of the guests begin to scream, when the ground beneath them
crumbles and rocks come flying through the air, guided by an invisible force. Immediately
the celebration turns into chaos.

His father yells for the guards, who stand unmoving at their posts. Once the command has
been spoken, they get into fighting stance. The next moment more rocks rise into the air,
threatening the guests and the Fire Lord alike, and some guards coax ropes of water out of
their canteens.

They attack with deadly precision, unleashing their elements and before Sokka can react he is
shoved aside by Mai, who glares at the assailants holding throwing knives in her hands. He
ducks, when another rock comes flying at him, crashing into the table behind them. His eyes
widen and he tries to comprehend, what is actually happening as the world around him turns
into complete disarray.

Sokka finds Zuko unleashing a torrent of fire, that is actually quite impressive, pushing back
an advancing waterbender with fierce determination. He looks around and even though it’s by
far not a weapon he grabs a chair leg that lies on the floor to hold it like a sword. It’s good
enough to parry an earthbender’s attack, countering with a swift strike that sends the assailant
sprawling backwards.

It’s not enough to take him out, but suddenly Ty Lee is there, hitting the man against different
points on his body and the disguised guard falls down like a puppet with cut strings.

She turns and winks at Sokka, before rushing off to attack another guy.

He hears a familiar roar behind him and when he turns, he sees that Zuko has trouble
standing his ground. The waterbender is still after him, throwing sharp icicles in his direction.
The ground is still trembling beneath them and it is obvious that Zuko struggles. With a grim
look on his face, Sokka rushes over, deftly maneuvering through the chaos.

His eyes widen, when he finds a weapon that has fallen to the ground. For a moment he stares
at it, before a rock sears over him and decidedly he takes it and throws the boomerang
through the air, knocking Zuko’s attacker out.

The prince is panting, but he seems relieved, when he finds Sokka.

He doesn’t hesitate and runs over to him, picking up the boomerang on the way.

Another waterbender takes the fallen one’s place and Zuko groans while he creates a wall of
fire that shields them from the incoming attack. He grits his teeth and though the flames
before him dance with intensity Sokka can tell that it takes a lot out of him.

Amidst the mayhem, a voice cuts through the air.

“Don’t kill them. We need the children and the consort alive!”

They stare at each other and a grim look settles on Zuko’s face, fueling his determination to
survive.

Rocks and water and flames mingle, shooting through the air and Zuko’s flame is dying
down. Sokka throws his boomerang, but it’s impossible to fight off the attackers with just that
weapon.

By now, Fire Lord Ozai himself, a towering figure wreathed in flames, enters the fray, his
power casting an intimidating shadow over the room. Sokka’s heart pounds in his chest and
the agonizing screams of the attackers that are burned by the Fire Lord, make his blood
freeze. Next to him Zuko shivers violently, unable to keep the flame going any longer.

The attackers are determined and with horror Sokka realizes that they get closer.
From the other side of the hall he sees blue fire erupting ever so often, but then there is a rope
of water coming at them, almost in reach. An impressive Fire Lash comes down in front of
them, wiping the water away. They both look up, only to find Iroh standing there, glaring
furiously at the people who dare attack his nephew.

“Get out of here!”, he yells at them and before Sokka can react, Zuko has grabbed his wrist
and they sprint to one of the side exits and then further down the palace halls. There are
people running after them and Sokka trusts Zuko to find a way out of this.

He doesn’t complain when they turn around a corner and Zuko shoves him unceremoniously
behind a wall carpet and through a hidden door behind it.

The prince closes the door behind them and puts a finger over his lips. As quietly as possible
they try to catch their breaths, while they are pressed against each other in the small alcove
that hasn’t been designed to be a hiding place for more than one person.

Sokka doesn’t dare make a noise, even when the steps outside rush by the wall carpet and
further away. He startles, when there is suddenly a hand on the back of his neck and when he
looks up, Zuko’s eyes watch him intensely.

They are blown wide and he feels Zuko’s heart thrum against his own and despite the fear
and chaos Sokka’s mind briefly wanders into the realm of intimacy. But before those thoughts
could fully take shape, Zuko’s voice brings him back to reality.

“This is your chance”, the prince whispers, sounding shocked by the realization.

Puzzled, Sokka looks at him.

“They are after you anyway. This is your chance to escape. Your father must have send
them”, Zuko shakes him a little, as if he wants to make Sokka understand.

The Water Tribe boy shakes his head. “There are no Waterbenders in the South. These are not
my father’s men.”

“Does that matter? This is your chance to escape. They will take you back to him. It’s not too
late. Go!”

Sokka’s eyes widen and his heart pounds even harder, when he realizes that Zuko is right.
Whoever these men and women are, they are enemies of the Fire Nation and probably willing
to help a fellow Water Tribesman.

Zuko reaches for the door handle, but Sokka holds him back.

“Come with me! They are after you too.”

“Sokka, they would kill me.”

“They said they want you alive.”

“But what for? Did you think about that? You are the son of the Southern Chief, they
probably just want you back. But what do you think they would need Azula and me for, huh?
They would want revenge. They would kill us.”

A dismayed expression settles on Sokka’s face and he shakes his head.

“I could protect you.”

“Go!”

“Zuko, you have to come with me. You have to trust me. I beg you.”

The prince doesn’t seem to listen.

“Sokka, you have to go now. This might be your only chance.”

Sokka stares at the familiar face and he bites his lips. It’s so easy. He just has to get some of
the attacker’s attention and let himself be ‘captured’ again. They would take him wherever,
but in the end he would see his dad and Katara again and things would be over. For him at
least.

It dawns on Sokka, that no matter how a faked capture would turn out, Fire Lord Ozai would
blame it on Zuko. Prince Zuko would have to suffer because of him and he would be hurt
again and no one would be there to step up for him.

Sokka closes his eyes and leans his forehead against Zuko’s.

“Please. Come with me.”

Zuko shakes his head.

“Go”, he says weakly.

Sokka digs his fingers into the fabric of Zuko’s tunic. He’s torn. He wants to run, but he
can’t. Not when it means putting Zuko’s life at risk. Sokka is pained and he shakes his head,
trying to figure out what to do. Why does his freedom represent Zuko’s suffering? How can
he be expected to choose?

He feels tears burn behind his closed eyes. Zuko is right. This might be the only chance he
ever gets and here he is, unable to make the decision. It should be easy. He shouldn’t have to
think twice.

A voice in the back of his mind that sounds a lot like Katara screams at him to escape, to
make a run for it, to save himself. His grip on Zuko’s tunic tightens, his fingers trembling
against the fabric. Sokka is unable to move. He wrestles with the weight of his decision.

“No”, he finally speaks, his voice steady despite the storm raging within him. “I won’t leave
you.”
He opens his eyes to look at Zuko, who stares at him and opens his mouth to protest, but
Sokka shakes his head determinedly.

“I can’t leave you with them.”

Zuko gulps heavily and a flicker of relief passes through his eyes, despite everything.

“You will regret this”, he whispers. Contrary to his words, he puts his arms around Sokka and
holds him close.

Probably, Sokka thinks, but he doesn’t say it out loud. Instead he leans his head against
Zuko’s shoulder and closes his eyes again, hoping that he didn’t just make a huge mistake.
 Close
Chapter Summary

Zuko has feelings and going back to the Great Hall turns out to be not such a great idea.

Chapter Notes

You guys are AMAZING! I loved how hyped you were about the last chapter <3
Without further ado, we jump right into this one. Maybe not as good, but there can't
always be fireworks.
Enjoy!

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 13: Close

Zuko holds Sokka's slim body against his own and closes his eyes. In the small space of the
alcove they are pressed against each other from head to toe, and Zuko is hyperaware of
Sokka's every motion. He feels Sokka's breath ghost over the sensitive skin of his neck, feels
the muscles under the fine robes, feels the fingers that dug into the fabric of his tunic uncurl
to rest flat against his chest. The proximity is grounding, comforting and keeps Zuko
connected to the physical world.

The prince takes a deep breath, his body is still trembling. Part of it stems from the
exhaustion of keeping the wall of fire that was supposed to protect them upright, until he
couldn't maintain it any longer. The bigger part of him is just outright overwhelmed.

Zuko can't believe that Sokka is still here, that the Water Tribe boy decided to stay with him
and let the opportunity to flee from the Fire Nation slip away.

No one had ever done something so selfless for him.

Sokka's inner struggle had been visible on his face. Zuko made the attempt to convince him
to save himself, because he can't guarantee his safety. He could hardly protect them from the
attackers and if it hadn't been for his uncle, they would have been captured.
Maybe Sokka would have been right. Maybe the Water Tribe boy could have protected him
and convince the assailants not to harm Zuko. But the prince couldn't bring himself to take
the risk and he feels horribly selfish and guilty to not have tried harder to convince Sokka to
make a run for it and thus denied him the opportunity. At the same time, he feels nothing but
gratitude that Sokka is still here.

He put Zuko's wellbeing over his own freedom in an act of unbelievable selflessness and
loyalty. Zuko is bewildered and a little lost due to the wave of emotions that washes over
him, unable to sort them out.

His grip around Sokka tightens, holding the other boy as closely as possible to himself,
unwilling to let go. It feels like something inside him shifts, the encompassing gratitude
turning into something else, something deeper and warmer and bigger than the prince can
fathom right this instant.

There is a lump in his throat and Zuko is at a loss, unable to phrase any words to express how
he feels about Sokka’s sacrifice and the knowledge that the other boy cares for him enough to
risk his own safety. He lets out a shaky, uncertain breath.

How does he deserve such devotion? How can he be worthy of it?

For a moment Zuko wishes them far, far away just the two of them, untied and free to go
wherever they want to without having to worry about their safety.

Suddenly the guilt weighs even heavier down on him, when Zuko realizes that ever since
their first meeting Sokka did everything to protect him, always putting Zuko first. And his
refusal to leave is the biggest proof of that yet.

He can’t let this sacrifice be in vain. It is time to return the favor. The prince vows to himself
to protect Sokka with every fiber of his being. He can’t let any harm come to him, not when
Sokka is ready to risk it all. Zuko will stand tall beside him, proud of the fact that Sokka
deems him worthy to give up on his freedom and he’s willing to prove it to him.

He buries his nose in Sokka’s hair and takes a deep breath.

The other boy shifts a little in Zuko’s arms and looks up to him slowly, with an open and
vulnerable expression on his face. Zuko gulps, when their eyes meet, his mind is completely
blank.

Sokka opens his mouth to say something, but then he shakes his head and closes it again like
he has made up his mind. He is perfectly still and listens, as does Zuko and for the last few
minutes there have been no more noises of fighting or rumbling in the distance.

“Do you think, we should get back?”, Sokka whispers a little apprehensive to the idea.

Zuko gets it, because he is nervous too and his heart is still beating a tad too fast. The attack
has been terrifying, not only because he couldn’t stand his ground against the attackers for
long, but also because the assailants made it to the heart of the Fire Nation in disguise with
the masks of the guard’s uniforms providing a perfect cover. Despite their precision and skill
they shouldn’t have come this far. It means that the palace is even less safe than before. Zuko
is not eager to step out of their hiding space to find out if the situation is under control.

On the other hand, they can’t stay in here forever, so he nods and let’s go of Sokka
reluctantly. Then he opens the wooden door to peak out from behind the wall carpet. The
hallway is empty, there is no one to be seen and thus he steps out of the alcove, offering
Sokka a hand to climb out after him as well.

The Water Tribe boy takes it and once they are both standing in the hall, they share a baffled
look both obviously unsure if they should let go or not. Something changed between them in
the small space, but Zuko doesn’t dare think about it too hard. Now is not the moment
anyway and he needs to get his head straight before jumping to any conclusions.

He nods awkwardly in the direction they have been coming from, earning a hesitant nod from
Sokka in return, before he releases his hand. They sneak carefully through the corridors,
looking regularly behind their backs to make sure that there is no one following them,
peeking carefully around the corners to not walk into an ambush. Zuko takes the lead. If
anything or anyone should be coming at them, he’ll make sure that Sokka is safe.

There are still loud voices coming from the Great Hall, but the fighting seems to be over.
Nevertheless, they don’t enter right away. Instead they lean against the wall behind the door
to listen and assess the situation.

Zuko still seems a little shaken but at the same time sure of himself and though Sokka is still
in turmoil, his mind swirling with the impacts of his decision, he feels a sense of fondness for
the prince. The way Zuko held him as if Sokka was the most important thing in the world
stirred a tender feeling within him. It made something in his chest uncurl. The warmth and
strength in Zuko’s embrace allowed him to feel safe and vulnerable at once. It made him feel
seen.

He is still a little distracted by his own emotions and grateful that Zuko took the lead.
Nevertheless, Sokka forces himself to pay attention to the voices coming from the Great Hall.

“Where are they?! Where have they gone?!”, Fire Lord Ozai yells aggravated.

“I saw them run through a side exit over there.” Ty Lee’s voice sounds meek and worried, not
like her cheerful self at all.

“How fitting. Running from a fight like cowards”, Azula says, but it sounds less dismissive
than usual and more on the edge. It seems like even the princess is shocked by the
unexpected attack.
“There were at least half a dozen assailants after them”, Mai adds, no less worried than Ty
Lee.

"Assailants or supporters", Zuko’s father spits out in disgust. Zuko and him share a look.
Sokka gulps.

"You think, this was a pretense, Father?", Azula asks, sounding surprised.

"It could have been. After all, their leader made it clear that they wanted them alive."

"They said they wanted me too”, Azula seems composed, but there is an edge in her voice
that makes it sound a little forced.

"Maybe a cover. However, they are gone now. I must admit, I underestimated Hakoda. It
won't happen again. We have to find out, how he managed to infiltrate our guard with his
men and allies and who helped him. They will be wiped from this earth."

"With all due respect, Fire Lord", Iroh interrupts his ranting. "Shouldn't we focus on finding
the princes?"

"Princes?!", Azula echoes indignantly. "You mean the prince and his consort."

"Actually, with marriage the title usually applies to the partner too. The ‘consort’ is only
added to avoid confusion, but actually Sokka is as much a prince as your brother."

"Enough! I don't have time for an etiquette lesson”, Ozai scoffs. “I thought it would be
amusing to force them into this marriage, but it seems we should have just thrown the peasant
over board the moment we realized that we had the wrong child.”

Sokka gulps, because the prospect of drowning in the ocean or being eaten by one of the
dangerous creatures living in the southern waters is a terrifying thought. Even worse, if they
threw him into the sea nothing would have stopped them from returning to the South Pole to
get his sister. He's lucky that they decided to marry him off to Zuko instead.

He glances at the prince, who seems concentrated and listens with increased worry showing
on his face.

"Prince Zuko wouldn't have given up without a fight and neither would Sokka. If they have
been captured, the attackers can't have gotten far. If we act quickly-"

The Fire Lord interrupts Iroh.

"Pfff. How much of a fight could Zuko have put up? You’re a fool if you think, that Water
Tribe savage wasn’t involved in this attack. I guess he had no problem taking Zuko down. If
Zuko didn’t follow him willingly, that is. I wouldn't be surprised if it was like this."

Sokka grits his teeth at Ozai's words. He's an absolute jerk. An angry expression settles on
Zuko's face and he looks at Sokka questioningly, raising an eyebrow. Sokka nods and they
both slip into the Great Hall.
"I'm sorry to disappoint, Father. But we are still here."

Everybody turns to them at once, staring at them. Even the Fire Lord himself seems
surprised, but his face darkens quickly and he glares at them with narrowing eyes. Ty Lee,
Mai and even Azula seem relieved, which makes Sokka think that maybe she has a heart
somewhere under her heavy armor. Iroh, however, goes pale and he stares at them wide-eyed,
his mouth a little agape.

The Great Hall resembles a battle field. The festive decorations from earlier are completely
destroyed just like the furniture. The ground is ripped. Rubble and rocks lying in between
bodies of guests and attackers alike and Sokka shivers, hoping that they are only unconscious
and not…

In front of the furthest wall eight attackers kneel on the ground, their feet and hands tied
behind their backs. Real guards stand watch behind them, awaiting the Fire Lord’s orders on
what to do with them. Most of the men and women hold their heads down, but those who
watch the situation glare at the Fire Lord defiantly, but once their eyes find Zuko and him, the
expression makes place for outright shock.

It’s unsurprising. They surely thought that their allies managed to catch them and now they’re
proven wrong. Curiosity sparks within Sokka about who they are and what the reason behind
their attack has been.

“Seize him”, the Fire Lord says coldly and only a second later, Sokka feels a kick to his
calves from behind and he topples over, before two pairs of strong, rough hands hold him
down on his knees. Instinctively he tries to shake them off, but the two guards are too strong.
A solid punch into his stomach forces the air out of his lungs and Sokka groans in pain.

“No! Let him go!”, Zuko yells, but the guards ignore him. “Father, please! He’s done nothing
wrong!”

The Fire Lord ignores him and walks over slowly, his eyes fixed on Sokka.

Zuko tries to step in his way and despite his shock Sokka is impressed by the newfound
defiance and determination in him. But Ozai shoves the prince out of his way effortlessly and
when Zuko tries to grab his arm, he throws a murderous glare at his son. With a wave of his
hand another guard grabs Zuko and twists his arms behind his back, so that he can’t break
free.

Sokka’s eyes find Zuko’s and he sees panic rise in the ember orbs. Cursing himself, he tries
not to show how terrified he is himself, when Ozai leans down to him, a vicious grin on his
thin lips.

“He has balls, your father. He might not have the guts to meet us in an open battle, but to pull
of an attack like this in the heart of the Fire Nation… I must say, I’m impressed.”

“My father is not involved in this. That are not even his men!”

“They are waterbenders.”

“You know that there are no waterbenders in the South”, Sokka bites back, squirming against
the hands, that hold him down.

“That does not mean that he didn’t ask for help from the North, does it?”

“Father, leave him alone!”, Zuko pleads again. “Sokka fought them! He could have escaped
with them, but he didn’t. He’s here. He did nothing wrong.”

Sokka’s eyes widen in horror, when Ozai’s smile grows wider and he straightens back up,
turning his attention to Zuko. This is exactly what he wanted to prevent, when he decided to
not leave the prince behind. They should have run together.

“How could he have escaped, Prince Zuko? You were with him.”

His mind is racing and Sokka thinks of a way to distract the Fire Lord.

“We fought the intruders off together”, he says quickly and receives another hit to his
stomach and he can’t even curl into a ball, because the guards’ hands maintain an iron grip on
him.

The Fire Lord chuckles, unamused.

“You don’t expect me to believe that, do you? I know what my son is capable of. Or rather
what he is not capable of. You didn’t even have a weapon. It’s touching how you try to
defend him. That you are still here says a lot more about your loyalty than about Prince
Zuko’s. Maybe I have raised a traitor.”

A shiver goes through Zuko’s body, when his father stops in front of him, but all Sokka can
see in his eyes is fury. Obviously, Ozai sees the same, because he looks everything but
pleased.

“I have let you get away once for similar behavior. Did you think I would allow that to
happen twice?”

His voice is dangerously low.

Then, with a sudden movement, the Fire Lord grabs Zuko by the back of his neck and shoves
him over to where Sokka is still kneeling and they are both frozen in shock, unsure of what
awaits them. The Great Hall is completely silent, all eyes are on them. A disturbing tension
hangs in the air.

Fire Lord Ozai’s face is a mask of rage and the fear that Sokka feels inside is reflected on
Zuko’s face. With his free hand, Ozai grabs Zuko’s and presses it onto Sokka’s face.

“Do it. Or else I will end you.”

Zuko squirms and digs his heels into the ground, but his father is too strong, he can’t escape
from his grip. Nevertheless, he tries by pushing back against his father, trying to free his
wrist, ram an elbow into his stomach or just gain any physical advantage, but the Fire Lord is
strong in more than just his bending abilities.

And he is furious. But so is Zuko.

Fury and fear rage within him. He doesn’t fear for himself, but for Sokka.

The prince feels like a fool, that he didn’t find the courage to listen to his husband and make
the attempt to escape. Surely being captured by the strange attackers wouldn’t have been
worse than this. He must not let it happen, must not let his father force him to do the
unspeakable to Sokka. He must protect him at all costs. He promised to.

The blue eyes stare up at him in horror. Zuko doesn’t even realize that he’s yelling ‘No!’ over
and over again. He doesn’t realize that Azula steps forward, raising a hand as if wanting to
stop their father.

His eyes are fixed on Sokka and he sees the despair, the plea in his eyes and Zuko can’t give
up. He fights back with all that he has. But the Fire Lord half shoves, half pulls him forward
until Zuko’s hand touches Sokka’s face.

The skin is surprisingly soft, he notices, despite the force of the touch.

“Do it!”

Zuko gulps. He looks Sokka in the eyes and he isn’t capable to cast that flame. He couldn’t,
even if his life depended on it. Which it does, but Zuko can’t do it. He can’t burn Sokka.
Feeling that soft skin, feeling his breath against his palm, seeing the fear in his eyes that
showed trust and understanding and kindness only such a short time ago, he can’t.

“Do it, Prince Zuko!”, his father hisses into his ear and Zuko closes his eyes. “Or do you
want me to do it?”

A surge of energy fueled by hate runs through him and later Zuko doesn’t know how he
manages, but with what feels like superhuman force he jolts his hand free and hits his elbow
into the Fire Lord’s side causing him to let his grip slip. Zuko spins around and shoves him
back, glaring at the man. His shoulders are heaving, his breath is ragged and with every
exhale he feels an overwhelming heat rising in his chest.

The fury in his father’s eyes multiplies and when he opens his palms they hold huge flames.
For the blink of an eye fear flares within Zuko, but it is gone just as fast, replaced by resolve.
Zuko doesn’t back down, not this time.

With another exhale flames that appear in his own hands, mirroring those of his father in size
and intensity.

The guards who hold Sokka down shift uncomfortably and Zuko wants to tell them to back
off, but he can’t effort to let his attention slip. Standing protectively in front of Sokka, he lets
the flames grow as big as he dares, while hatred pulses through his veins.

Then, he hears a crackling, hissing sound and with a slight turn of his head, his eyes land on
Azula. Her face is a distorted grimace of concentration while she summons a small ball of
electricity into her hand. Tiny bolts of lightning surround it and sizzle dangerously.

Zuko knows that he doesn’t stand a chance against either of them, but now the odds are
worse than ever.

“I should end both of you”, Ozai gnarls and that is when his uncle snaps.

He steps in decidedly, closing his hand over Azula’s, pointing with his other hand out of a
window and the lightning follows his path into the night sky. Shoving her away without
another look he turns to the Fire Lord.

“Fire Lord Ozai! Enough! Are you so shortsighted that you rather torment those boys, than
investigate, who has really been behind this attack?! An attack here, within the palace can
only mean that it has been an inside-job. You heard the princes! And you know that Hakoda’s
fleet hasn’t left the Southern Sea. Only days ago they have been sighted near Kyoshi Island.
Whoever is behind this attack, these boys are not responsible. And instead of running, they
chose to stay loyal to the Fire Nation, even fighting against the assailants. Are you going to
punish them for that? Are you so blinded by hatred that you ignore all logic?”

Ozai’s eyes widen just like everybody else’s and Zuko stares at his uncle. Rage has never
been a sentiment that he thought suitable for Uncle Iroh, but even without any fire he
suddenly honors his title as Dragon of the West. It’s an impressive sight. Zuko has never
heard anyone talk to his father like that.

“You dare to speak to me like that?!”

“I do, if you decide to ignore what is happening around you!”

Ozai lets out a roar, but the fire ball that erupts from his hand sears over one of the broken
buffet tables, setting it on fire.

“You disrespect me!”

“No, brother”, Uncle puts a lot of emphasis into the word. “I remind you of your honor.”

Zuko’s eyes go wide, but to his surprise, all that his father does is raise his chin and look at
Iroh for a very long moment, pursing his lips. The seconds pass by, nobody dares to make
any noise. Everybody is waiting for the Fire Lord’s outburst. Claiming that Ozai doesn’t hold
honor calls for an Agni Kai. His father has every right to challenge Uncle.

Zuko’s hands start to tremble and he has to let go of his fire. His father’s eyes are still fixed
on Iroh, who looks ready to burn him to ashes.

“Very well”, the Fire Lord finally says after what feels like an eternity. With a wave of his
hand the guards let go of Sokka, who lets out a sigh.
In an instant Zuko is kneeling next to him, checking him over with a worried look. The Water
Tribe boy just shakes his head, signaling that he’s fine. The prince gulps heavily and resists
the urge to pull him into his arms.

His father turns to them.

“I am surprised to see that your bending has improved”, he says to Zuko.

On any other day he would have probably been proud to hear those words coming from the
Fire Lord, but Zuko is still too upset to think clearly. He is about to answer, to shout the truth
into his father’s face, but Uncle is quicker.

“I doubt that”, he says nonchalantly. “What Prince Zuko did was nothing but a reaction to a
threat, one like the little children are capable of in moments of fear. As much as we might
want it to be true, I am sure Prince Zuko wouldn’t be able to do that again, would you?”

He throws a meaningful look at Zuko and the prince understands, that they need to keep the
cover of healing sessions and that Iroh considers it unwise to let anyone know, what Zuko is
capable of. Actually, Zuko is still surprised by himself, that he was able to pull that off.

He looks to the ground, trying to look ashamed.

“I don’t think so, Uncle”, he mutters.

A disrespectful huff comes over the Fire Lord’s lips.

“Get out of my sight. But I warn you, both of you. One false step, one false word and you
will carry that mark. Am I understood?”

“Yes, Fire Lord”, they both mutter. It's the truth, actually, because Zuko doesn't know exactly
where the power to cast such big flames came from.

Sokka looks shaken and as if his thoughts are a million miles away. Zuko helps him up and
not looking at anyone else, they leave the Great Hall. When he throws another look at Sokka,
he sees tears shining in the Water Tribe boy’s eyes.

Suddenly, Zuko feels beaten, a hollow feeling settling in his stomach and he feels like crying
along.

Sokka has been right. They should have run away together, when they had the chance. The
feeling of guilt that washes over him is suffocating. He wants to pull Sokka into another hug,
but he doesn’t dare reach out and touch the other boy.

Zuko’s voice is choked, when he manages to speak.

“I’m sorry, Sokka. I’m so, so sorry.”

Blue eyes look at him, hurt and afraid, and all Sokka does is nod weakly.
 Pain, processions and prospects
Chapter Summary

The aftermath of the events in the Great Hall, Azula's departure and some new
developments occur

Chapter Notes

This is a Sokka-centric chapter, mostly because I didn't feel like dealing with the mess
that is Zuko right now. We had quite a few chapters of that yet, so :-)
I'm as always immensely grateful for your feedback on the last chapter! Hope you like
this one too!

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 14: Pain, processions and prospects

“I’m sorry, Sokka. I’m so, so sorry.”

Sokka sees Zuko’s lips moving and he hears the words, but they don’t reach him. He feels
oddly numb, unable to form a coherent thought. It’s like his brain is shutting down, trying to
protect him from the storm of emotions that is brewing within him ever growing and
threatening to break free. Sokka has been troubled before, he has been in turmoil before, but
whatever is currently going on within him is much more intense.

He tries to keep his breathing even, tries not to think about what just happened – the attack,
their little moment of closeness, the decision to stay against his better judgement, getting
back into the Great Hall, Fire Lord Ozai trying to force Zuko to burn him and Zuko
protecting him.

Sokka is standing there in the corridor leading from the Great Hall to the Royal Quarters, he
is trembling and yet he feels like he is just having a very bad dream, wishing to wake up
every moment now. Unless he knows that this is no dream. This is the fucked-up reality, this
is his life. He blinks fiercely, confused and trying to keep his composure and he is faintly
aware of the worried look on Zuko’s face, but that seems far, far away.
It’s only when the prince places a gentle hand on his shoulder, that Sokka startles, taking a
step back and thus getting out of his reach.

His eyes shot up to Zuko’s and there is a flash of hurt in them, but right now Sokka can’t
focus on that, because he is already overwhelmed and he just can’t deal with him right now.

He stares blankly at Zuko, who clenches his jaw and looks to the ground beneath their feet.

“Sokka, please… say something”, the prince asks him quietly to.

Sokka opens his mouth to reflexively assure Zuko, that he’s fine, but for once the words
won’t come out. He croaks out a weird noise and shakes his head, before taking another step
back.

“I… I need a moment for myself.”

With that he turns around and runs. Halls and corridors pass him by and Sokka doesn’t even
know, where he is running to until he finds himself on his knees in front of the turtle duck
pond.

The water is completely still, an even surface mirroring the silhouette of the crescent moon
above. There is no sight of any living creature. The turtle-ducks must have hidden due to the
noise of the attacks and except for the croaking of a few frogs, the world around Sokka is
disturbingly quiet.

He tries to keep it in, tries not to let the emotions take him over, but he is still shaking, his
hands still trembling and Sokka’s breathing becomes more erratic by the minute. He has no
idea what to think, he can’t even put a label on what it actually is that he is feeling except for
a big mess, that makes it hard to breath. And just when Sokka thinks that he must be
suffocating something within him snaps and he gives into despair.

A scream unveils itself from his lungs and Sokka digs his fingers into the grass, clinging to it,
while hot tears make their way over his cheeks.

He’s terrified. Sokka is terrified.

It’s like he can still feel the force of Zuko’s hand being pressed down on his face. He can still
see the mad determination in the Fire Lord’s eyes, his thirst for blood and pain and Sokka
knows that he just barely got way.

His scream dies down, turning into a wet sob coming from deep down his throat and the hot
stream flowing from his eyes won’t subside.

With a decisive motion he tears at the wristbands on his forearms, pulls them off and stares at
the fine scars that wind around his wrists. He feels his chin quiver and tries to suppress
another sob. Sokka hates it, that he always starts crying when he’s angry.

Right now he is angry. So, so angry.

At himself, because he didn’t manage to convince Zuko to run away with him, because he
didn’t find it in him to run alone.

At Zuko, because the prince didn’t trust him, because he was too afraid to take the leap of
faith and try to escape from their cursed prison. Sokka knows that Zuko has probably been
reasonable, because they didn’t have any idea what the attackers where up to, but it is easier
to ignore this fact and be angry.

At the people, who attacked his tribe, who caught him and brought him to this forsaken
palace.

At the people, who attacked tonight, causing this horrible evening to unfold.

He’s angry at the whole world.

Sokka wants to smash something, demolish something, hit something or someone. Instead all
he does is kneel there, in the dim moonlight and looks up into the sky out of tear shed eyes,
pleading for a miracle.

Heavy, hurried footsteps on the graveled paths come in his direction and Sokka swirls around
warily, noticing that he has nothing to defend himself. Two guards are coming his way and
for a moment he thinks they are another pair of the attackers. His eyes widen in fear and he
gulps.

The guards, however, take in the situation and stop a few feet away from him, still on the
main path through the garden. After a moment of awkward silence, one of them clears his
throat.

“Are you alright, Prince Consort? Has there been another attack?”, the man asks, sounding
tense.

Sokka shakes his head.

“I’m perfectly fine”, he mutters quietly, obviously lying. “You may go.”

Strangely enough, he feels relieved that they are not some of the strange intruders because it
spares him from the decision what to do if they asked him to come with them. Because
despite his anger and disappointment and despair Sokka feels like he can’t. He takes another
look at his wrists and sighs heavily.

“Do you wish to be accompanied to your quarters? Or shall we get anyone? Prince Zuko,
maybe?”

“No!”, Sokka almost yells at the man, immediately feeling a little embarrassed at his
outburst. Quieter, he adds. “I’m sorry. That won’t be necessary.”

Only now it occurs to him to wipe the tears off his face and he also pulls the hair tie, that
holds his wolf-tail in place, out of his hair. It does little to ease the tension on him. Sokka
doesn’t even notice that the guards’ eyes widen and that they look away quickly. His gaze has
already turned back onto the water.
“You may go.”

“As you wish”, the guards say in unison and leave him alone.

Sokka’s shoulders slump once more and he sighs deeply. He leans forward slowly and sinks
his arms into the water up until his elbow. It feels cool against his skin and Sokka breathes
deeply, concentrating on the feeling of the smooth liquid surrounding his arms and flowing
through his fingers, when he moves them. Not for the first time in his life he wonders what it
would be like to be a waterbender, to control the element. To have control over something.
He sighs again. Even if Sokka is not a bender, the water does something for him. The
coolness against his skin clears his mind. It washes some of the anger away.

It’s still there, but there is also another feeling within him and that is impossible to ignore.

He can’t forget the warmth of Zuko’s embrace, the strange emotions that rose within him
when they were so close to each other, the feeling of safety and trust. Sokka doesn’t know
what to make of the nervous, jittery feeling that came with being this close to Zuko, being
held and hold him, even contemplating the idea of a kiss. It’s a strange thing to think about
right now, but a welcome distraction. Sokka is so upset about everything else that happened
tonight, that he can’t find it in him to upset about that part.

What is upsetting in another terrifying way is how Zuko protected him. For the first time,
Zuko stood up against his father. And he has done so in an impressive demonstration of will,
strength and fire. It seems nobody, not even Zuko himself, thought that the prince would be
capable of bending a flame so intense and powerful and strangely beautiful. Sokka is at a loss
to describe, what he felt in that moment. He had been grateful and proud. He still is and that
makes it difficult to stay angry at Zuko.

It really is just a big mess. How is he supposed to figure out, what they should do? He doesn’t
even know what to say to Zuko right now. The Fire Lord will keep an even closer eye on
them and it’s probably only just a matter of time until one of them gets hurt.

They should have run away.

Sokka balls his hands into fists and pulls them out of the water. It’s of no use to contemplate
on what should have been done. The chance is gone.

He doesn’t know why Shyu’s words come to his mind right this moment.

The path that lies ahead of you is… complex. There is both light and darkness, hope and
despair. It depends on which path Prince Zuko and you decide to take. Stray but a little and it
may lead to your downfall. But if you stay true to your course you may find a light, that will
guide you through the darkness.

He made his choice. Wailing won’t get him anywhere, so Sokka might just as well live with
it.
When he makes it back to their quarters, the lights are already out and he lies down next to
Zuko as quietly as possible to not startle him awake. He ignores that the prince’s breathing is
too unsteady for him to be asleep, but he still doesn’t know what to say and it seems the same
applies to Zuko. They lie next to each other for at least an hour, both pretending to sleep,
until Zuko breaks the silence.

“Are you asleep?”, he whispers.

“No”, Sokka replies. “You?”

He doesn’t know, why he makes this dumb joke, probably because he doesn’t know what to
say instead. Zuko doesn’t acknowledge it, obviously thinking.

After another while Sokka hears the sheets rustle and it seems as if Zuko has turned to him.
Reluctantly, he does the same. It’s too dark to see his face, but nevertheless comforting to
think that the amber eyes are looking at him.

“I’m truly sorry, Sokka.” His voice sounds heavy and dead serious.

A long sigh leaves Sokka’s lips.

“Don’t be. It’s gonna be alright”, it’s only halfway a lie.

The Water Tribe boy is convinced that somehow things will be alright between them, even
though it will probably take some time to get over the fact, that Zuko didn’t gather the
courage to make that escape. But he is not so sure if life in the palace will be alright in any
way.

“Do you hate me?”

The quiet question catches him a little off-guard and Sokka groans, pinching the back of his
nose, because this is really not the moment for him to deal with Zuko’s deep-running issues.
It’s still disturbing and Zuko’s belief that every wrong action will somehow lead to people
hating him seems to be deeply engraved into his soul. It’s too much to handle right now, but
Sokka has to acknowledge his question anyway.

“No”, he says firmly and it’s the truth all the way through.

He notices the relieved sigh from Zuko and for a second a tiny smirk appears on his lips.

“How you stood up against your father… that was very brave and very impressive.”

Zuko doesn’t answer for a few minutes.

“Azula is right, that I have been a coward. Not in the way she meant it, but she’s still right. I
should have gone with you. I was a coward.”
Sokka inhales, asking himself what to say to that, when Zuko continues, his voice barely
audible even in the silent room.

“But I couldn’t let him hurt you.”

There is suddenly a lump in his throat and Sokka nods, even though Zuko can’t see him, but
he finds himself incapable of speaking. Taking deep breath, he reaches out to where he
figures Zuko’s hand must be. When he finds it, Sokka squeezes it gently before he lets go off
it again.

“It’s gonna be alright”, he repeats in a hoarse voice.

After that, they don’t say any more, each of them lingering in their own thoughts.

Sokka still feels the turmoil and the emotions raging within him, even though it starts to calm
down slowly. Maybe it’s just because he’s tired. Sokka is half asleep, when Zuko suddenly
says two more words.

“Thank you.”

The next morning the streets of the Fire Nation capital leading down from the Royal Palace
to the harbor are alive with vibrant colors and buzzing energy. Festive red and yellow banners
adorn the buildings, fluttering in the warm breeze. The city’s inhabitants line the streets,
eager to catch a glimpse of the royal procession for Princess Azula’s departure.

The Fire Lord and his daughter are carried in ornate, golden palanquins decorated with
intricate engravings and shimmering gems and carried by dedicated servants. The crowd
erupts in cheers and applause, voicing their admiration for their Fire Lord and his prodigious
daughter, wishing her safe travels and a successful return.

Sokka feels once more strangely out of place, walking a few paces behind the palanquins
with Zuko and his uncle. He tries his best to hide his weariness, though no smile comes to his
face.

Despite their nightly conversation, the Water Tribe boy still feels troubled. To distract himself
he watches the cheering crowd, suddenly realizing that this is his first contact with the regular
Fire Nation citizens. Most of them are dressed in what Sokka supposes is their best attire,
tunics and robes in all shades of red and maroon. They are waving little flags, leaning over
the barrier that separates them from the procession, wishing to get closer to their rulers.
Sokka sighs, discouraged by this display of devotion for a tyrant. If only they knew how the
Fire Lord acted behind the Palace walls.

Nevertheless, Sokka lets his gaze wander over the crowd. It’s the people in the third, fourth
and fifth row, that catch the Water Tribe boy’s attention and he stubs, surprised.
The citizens in the back wear simpler clothing and they seem less engaged in the festivities,
their faces either blank or tired. Sokka recognizes wariness and worry in their expressions as
they watch the procession pass by. Some of them look as if they don’t really care, some as if
they don’t even want to be there. It is an astonishing observation.

It is visible that the presence of Iroh, Zuko and himself is attracting less attention, even
though Iroh makes an effort to nod and wave occasionally to the watching crowd. But the old
man does not seem as cheerful and collected as usual. Zuko seems less engaged, but even he
nods a few times in different directions, maybe when he recognizes some more or less
important noblemen in the crowd. Sokka is too occupied watching the spectacle, letting his
gaze wander left and right, to make any signs of greetings on his own. It doesn’t seem
expected. He is surprised that no insults are thrown at them and probably the simple folk
doesn’t really care about their superior’s liaisons.

The citizens don’t seem threatening and for a moment Sokka feels a little foolish. The
rational part of him knows that there must be normal people in the Fire Nation - people that
are just living their lives without oppressing others and spreading terror in the world. He sees
mother’s holding their babies, sees old men with worn faces and sorrowful looks, he sees
people that have lost an arm or support themselves on crutches. He sees young people, whose
eyes – wide and curious and oddly empathetic - follow them as they walk down the streets.

It doesn’t help lighting Sokka’s sullen mood, but once more he comes to understand that the
Fire Nation does not consist of only bad people. They are war-torn too and maybe some of
those people, that have gathered for the procession, don’t support the war. They just try to
make ends meet, like everybody does.

Sokka frowns and from the corner of his eye he notices that Zuko is watching him. A heavy
feeling settles in his stomach and he can’t look at Zuko right now, even though he senses his
own sadness reflected in the other boy’s posture. He doesn’t want to hurt or upset Zuko, but
the truth is, that he is still too hurt and upset to find a better way to deal with his emotions.

Watching the ship, that will take Azula to the Earth Kingdom, sail away causes an aching in
his chest and Sokka tries not to let show how desperate he feels. They could be on a ship
right now too, leaving the Fire Nation behind for good. He could be, at least, if only he
listened to Zuko. The missed opportunity weighs heavily on his shoulders and Sokka’s eyes
are fixed on the ship, his gaze tinged with melancholy.

The feeling of remorse and anger is still there, even if less intense than the night before. He
notices the glances Zuko throws at him, apologizing and obviously having similar thoughts
about the ship, that now passes through the Gates of Azulon into the open sea.

Once it is out of sight, the Fire Lord gives the signal to return back to the palace. With one
last look at the sea, Sokka turns and follows with heavy footsteps. The crowd begins to
dissolve, once the palanquin has passed them on the way back.

Later, Sokka doesn’t know exactly why they caught his attention, but he finds two girls at
Zuko’s and his age or only a little older, standing closely together behind a barrier. It actually
looks like the taller one, who wears her hair in a topknot that looks a little like Zuko’s, has
her arm wrapped around the shorter girl, whose dark curls fall softly over her shoulders. The
shorter girl’s eyes meet his and she looks around to check if there is any attention on them,
before she and her friend form a little heart with their hands together. They smile at Zuko and
him gratefully and Sokka is a little perplexed.

He turns his head to the side to look at Zuko and check if the prince saw the gesture too.
Obviously he did, because he stops for a second and looks a little dumbstruck. But despite his
confusion Zuko raises his hand in the direction of the girls. They bow and let go of each
other, before quickly disappearing in the crowd.

Staring at each other, Sokka doesn’t know what to say. He hasn’t realized that they stopped
and it’s Iroh’s voice that makes him startle.

“You might not be aware of it, but your union is inspiring and encouraging to some people.
Young love is always a beautiful sight, is it not?”

He seems serious and for once no encouraging smile accompanies his words. Iroh’s eyes hold
a strange expression of sadness. But his words manage to make both of them blush and
Sokka looks away quickly.

Once they get back to the Palace and the Fire Lord gets out of his palanquin he doesn’t so
much as spare a glance at Sokka, before he turns to Zuko.

“Prince Zuko. Yesterday’s events showed that the control of your bending still leaves much to
be desired. Your uncle however is convinced that not all hope is lost”, Fire Lord Ozai waves
his hand dismissively, clearly showing his opinion on Iroh’s statement. “I allowed him to be
your teacher, not that I expect anything to come out of it. You have trained with the best
masters of the Fire Nation and failed them all. But well, let him have at it. At least this way,
we are not wasting anyone’s time.”

Zuko’s eyes widen in surprise and even Sokka’s mouth stands open. Particularly after last
night that is a most interesting turn of events.

Quickly, Zuko presses his fist against his hand and bows before his father.

“Thank you, Father.”

The Fire Lords hums unhappily and raises an eyebrow.

“Furthermore, I have thought about your future in the Fire Nation. As it is you are hardly of
any use at the moment. I can’t let you have leading any military mission as you would
certainly embarrass me. So I thought of assigning you to be Kebai’s assistant.”

Zuko’s eyes go even wider and even though Sokka has no idea who Kebai is, he figures that
it’s not exactly a pleasant task that has been assigned to the prince.
Said prince stares at his father, his mouth agape and only, when Iroh hits him with his elbow,
that Zuko repeats his bow and mumbles his gratefulness.

“You honor me, Father”, he spits out lacking any gratefulness and Sokka raises an eyebrow.
“I won’t disappoint you.”

“We’ll see.”

With that, the Fire Lord disappears and heads for the Throne room.

Sokka waits until he is out of hearing distance, before he turns to Zuko and Iroh. The prince
looks angry, so obviously he has just been humiliated once more.

“Who’s Kebai?”, Sokka asks.

Zuko gnarls and so it’s Iroh’s turn to answer.

“He is the agricultural minister.”

“He’s a thousand years old and he reeks of garlic, tobacco and old man!”, Zuko rages and
Sokka can hardly suppress a laugh at this explanation.

Iroh looks at his nephew reproachfully.

“He is old, indeed. But he has a seat in the council and access to information from all over
the Fire Nation and the occupied Earth Kingdom colonies.”

“Not the war council!”

“Are you really that eager to return to the war council?”, Iroh asks, his voice unuaslly sharp
and Sokka frowns, while Zuko goes pale.

He doesn’t understand what’s going on and he doesn’t like it.

“But agriculture is the least important resort and he’s disgusting. I don’t want to write his
correspondence or carry his stuff around or whatever else an assistant does. I’m the Prince of
the Fire Nation!”

“Are you dense?”, Sokka interrupts Zuko’s rambling, voice a little harsher than it would
usually be.

The prince stares at him.

“First of all, you just got assigned an official task. Isn’t that what you wanted? Second,
agriculture is the least important resort? I don’t know which planet you come from, but
usually sated people are satisfied people. There are a lot of things that can be done right or
wrong in such a resort and it will have an impact on the approval of the people regarding
their government. Third, if he is that old, then as is his assistant you will probably become
next in line for the job and thus have real influence and the possibility to work your way up.
Did I sum that up right?”
Sokka looks at Iroh questioningly, who nods with grim satisfaction. Zuko however, seems
still not happy about it.

“I don’t know shit about agriculture”, Zuko says and Sokka rolls his eyes.

“That’s why you begin as an assistant. And there’s that huge library over there in the Palace.
Maybe you choose some other books than those plays and novels you usually read.”

For a moment Zuko is silent. Than he turns to his uncle wide-eyed.

“You managed to become my teacher officially”, he says with wonder.

Iroh nods.

“Yes. After what happened yesterday the situation has changed.”

He sounds regretful and Sokka doesn’t know what to make of it. It seems the attack partially
improved their situation. At least they don’t have to hide the training anymore. Shouldn’t be
Iroh be happy about that?

“You have a lot to learn, nephew. Especially after Azula showed that she can now lightning-
bend.”

Zuko flinches uncomfortably and Sokka thinks back to the prophecy he read about her in the
temple. He isn’t eager to get a real demonstration of that power. Frowning, he turns to Iroh.

“So, what will I do?”, he asks him. “Seems like Zuko will have a lot of things to do now.”

“The same as Zuko, basically. Train, educate yourself. You’ll never know what you need it
for. How did you enjoy the book, that I gave you the day of your wedding?”

Iroh doesn’t even wait for an answer and nods at them, before turning to go.

“I will see you tomorrow an hour after sunrise, Prince Zuko.”

They both stare after him and then at each other.

“Something’s off with him”, Zuko states, obviously worried.

Sokka shakes his head. “I would say, something is going on.”

They share another look and Sokka wonders if Zuko is thinking the same thing, but he
doesn’t dare say it out loud, because than it becomes a real suspicion and they don’t need any
more danger, than they have already on their backs.

“Do you want to spar?”

Sokka shrugs. “Sure, why not.”

Suddenly Zuko looks a little shy and scratches his neck, while looking to the ground. It’s a
sight Sokka could become used to, if he’s completely honest and he quickly shoves the
thought of a blushing Zuko being very close to him away. None of that.

Instead he wonders what’s going on, but before he can ask Zuko beats him to it.

“I have something for you”, he says.

“Oh!” Curious surprise settles on him.

Zuko nods. “Yeah. It’s in our quarters. We can fetch it on the way to the training grounds.”

Making an inviting gesture Sokka asks the prince to lead the way.

His eyes go wide, when Zuko hands the present to him, once they reach their rooms. It’s the
weapon he snatched from the assailants to help Zuko get rid of that waterbender, that was
attacking him.

It’s the boomerang.

 Dark Moon
Chapter Summary

The night takes an unexpected turn.

Chapter Notes

I am still amazed by your support for this story and I am so invested in planning, writing
and sharing it with you. You might notice that I churched it up a litte. According to the
original I decided to make it 3 'Books' and the chapters got titles too. This chapter is the
end of Book 1, but worry not. Book 2 is already in the making.

Book 1: Ember

Chapter 15: Dark Moon

Sokka still seems to be in awe, when they reach the training grounds. He holds the
boomerang in his hands as if it’s something precious and fragile and there is an expression on
his face, that Zuko can’t decipher. The Water Tribe boy’s fingers trace the smooth curves and
edges and though there is a flicker of excitement on his features, he looks also hesitant.

When his blue eyes turn to Zuko, a little smile spreads on his face.

Zuko feels a tug on his lips, a sense of satisfaction and relief swelling within him. It’s only a
small gesture, but he’s grateful that Sokka is still willing to engage with him, talk and spend
time together. Guilt is still nagging at him and the prince feels the lingering tension in
Sokka’s demeanor. He can’t blame him. It’s only natural that Sokka is apprehensive after he
has gotten only barely away from being branded by Zuko’s hands - even if those hands have
been forced by the Fire Lord.

Nonetheless, it feels like some of the trust between them has been broken, despite Sokka’s
reassurance that he doesn’t hate Zuko now. But the prince can’t help the feeling that
something is still off. It feels strangely as if he lost something. Whatever it was that has
happened in that alcove, there was something between them. Zuko wouldn’t call it a spark,
but he is sure that he hasn’t just been imagining it.
Whatever it was, the Fire Lord seems to have undone it. But Zuko is not willing to accept that
loss. Not after he held Sokka so close to him and after he has seen how readily the other boy
gave up his freedom to protect him. He rather stayed a prisoner to the Fire Nation for Zuko
than to pursue his escape.

Zuko still feels speechless and overwhelmed by what Sokka has done and he understands the
other boy’s despair at the realization that things didn’t turn out like they hoped. And the
prince wants to make this right. It’s not an obligation, not a debt that he feels forced to pay.
No, it’s a need that has nestled somewhere in Zuko’s heart, something that is worth
achieving.

He wants that easy and amicable air between them. He enjoys Sokka’s company and Zuko
doesn’t want anything to be standing between them, least of all his father driving a wedge
between them by his unjust punishments.

Giving Sokka the boomerang might be a petty attempt to win back some of his favor, but
when he sees how touched Sokka seems to be by the gesture, Zuko feels a little proud of
himself and maybe not all hope is lost.

He clears his throat.

“Do you want to try it?”, he asks, startling Sokka a little, but the Water Tribe boy nods
quickly and bends his knees a little, raising the boomerang in his right hand.

It doesn’t take long for Zuko to realize that Sokka is an expert in handling the special weapon
and he is impressed by his skill. The boomerang soars through the air, deftly cutting the ropes
of the hanging targets before returning to Sokka’s waiting grasp. It’s a display of precision
and fluidity that he hasn’t seen in Sokka so far, at least not during their sword practice, even
though the Water Tribe boy is getting constantly better at that as well.

The longer Zuko is watching him, the more his admiration grows. The Water Tribe boy
moves effortlessly, his reflexes sharp and his strikes calculated. Sokka told him that he was
supposed to be a warrior, but only now can Zuko see it.

When Sokka puts the boomerang back onto his belt after his next catch, he looks a little more
relaxed.

“That was awesome. I never saw anyone use this thing in a fight. But you seem to be a
master”, Zuko says. Sokka shrugs.

“Well, I suppose these are not very popular outside of the Water Tribes. To be honest they are
not very popular among the Tribes either. But I like it. It’s not easy to learn how to handle a
boomerang, but once you get the hang of it, it’s an amazing weapon. The beauty of it is that it
always comes back. I mean, this might not have been mine, but I’d still say it counts.”

Sokka smiles to himself absentmindedly and a fuzzy feeling settles in Zuko’s stomach at the
sight. He feels himself blush. The prince just looks at Sokka and his mouth goes dry, while
the word ‘beauty’ echoes in his head.
“Shall we get our swords?”, Sokka asks and Zuko nods, glad for the distraction.

His uncle is still unusually quiet, when Zuko joins him for training the next morning on an
abandoned training ground of the Royal Firebending Academy. It is only a small area that
clearly hasn't been maintained for a while. The targets look as if they have seen better days,
the wood looks breakable and washed and bleached out from rain and sun. Weeds are
growing in different spots on the sandy fields, some are even in bloom. It creates a strange
atmosphere of fragile peace and Zuko wonders if that is why his uncle looks so deep in
thought.

Zuko bows, when he comes to stand in front of him to show his respect and gratefulness that
Uncle Iroh enabled them to train under better conditions than in a small room somewhere in
the temple. Uncle returns the bow and motions for him to start going through his katas,
without his fire at first.

The attentive eyes watch him carefully, while Zuko tries to go through every motion perfectly
and even his breathing in the process. He has gotten a lot better at it ever since he started
training with Uncle. Nevertheless, Iroh usually finds things to correct or gives him advice on
how to improve one form or another, but today he just watches and the frown on his face only
deepens the longer the exercise goes on.

When he doesn’t say anything, even when Zuko starts punching balls of fire without being
told to do so, the prince turns to him, worried.

“Are you alright, Uncle?”

The old man nods slowly. “Yes, I am. I just got lost in my thoughts. Forgive me, Prince
Zuko.”

He shrugs, but instead of getting into stance again, Zuko crooks his head to the side.

“Is it about the attack?”

A deep sigh leaves his uncles lips and he nods. “Indeed, it is.”

Zuko waits for an explanation that is obviously not to come and he looks around, finding
Iroh’s supplies on one of the stony benches that surround the area.

“I will prepare us some tea”, he says.

His uncle follows him slowly and looks gratefully at him. His golden eyes look tired.

“This is very kind of you, Prince Zuko.”

He shrugs again, not sure what to respond, while heating up the water. They sit down next to
each other on the stony bench in silence, until his uncle hums.

“I was impressed by the fire you casted when faced with your father’s wrath.”

Zuko huffs. “So was I.”

He hands the teacup to his uncle, who takes a sip and only grimaces slightly. Zuko takes it as
a win. He knows that his tea-brewing skills aren’t exactly great, but it seems like he’s getting
better at that as well.

“You didn’t cast it from your muscles”, Uncle Iroh points out.

Zuko looks at his uncle in surprise and realizes, that he’s right. So far he tried not to think too
much about what happened in the Great Hall, trying to shove the unpleasant event into a far
corner of his mind, together with all the other intimidating memories. Not that he has been
very successful with this approach. Sokka’s obvious turmoil and stress that came with the
aftermath of the attack and being confronted by the Fire Lord make it impossible to forget
what happened. But Zuko has been more focused on the Water Tribe boy and how to fix
whatever Ozai managed to break than giving it much thought, where the immense flames
were coming from. Somehow they were just there.

A little insecure, he mumbles. “I didn’t cast it from my breath either. At least, I wasn’t aware
of it.”

His uncle nods, as if that doesn’t surprise him at all, but doesn’t comment. Then he looks at
Zuko with an unreadable expression on his face.

“What happened after you ran that night? There were quite a lot of attackers coming after
you. How did you manage to fight them off? Did your fire come as easy to you right there?”

Looking down, Zuko gulps. He is not proud, that he hid like a child, but he never could have
fought off those assailants, not even with Sokka’s help. But it’s not easy admitting that.

“To be honest, we didn’t fight them. We hid away in that alcove behind the wall carpet of the
Great Hunt.”

The prince feels his uncle’s intense gaze on him. It’s not reproachful, but nevertheless Zuko
suddenly feels like he has to justify himself, like he has made a mistake in his uncle’s eyes.
Disappointing his uncle weighs much heavier on his shoulders than disappointing his own
father, because Uncle cares for him more than anyone else. Or almost anyone else. The
thought of Sokka crosses his mind, but the prince doesn’t focus on it.

Zuko doesn’t know what it is, that he did wrong in his uncle’s eyes, but he wants to explain
himself, he wants to confide in him. He needs Uncle to understand that he tried to do the right
thing.

“I tried to convince Sokka to join them. To go with them and run from the Palace”, he
whispers and Iroh’s eyes widen.
“Then how come that he’s still here?”, he asks, equally quiet and Zuko gulps. He closes his
eyes, too ashamed suddenly to look at his uncle.

“He said that he couldn’t leave me behind.”

Iroh inhales deeply and for a few minutes silence stretches between them. When Zuko dares
to look at his uncle again, he finds that Iroh’s eyes are closed, but there is a deep frown on his
forehead. When the elder man opens his eyes, it looks like there is a deep understanding, a
realization that has dawned on him. The sadness is still present too, and actually Zuko doesn’t
know what to make of it.

“And you didn’t think about going with him? It would have been perfectly understandable
after everything you have been through.”

“I did”, Zuko admits. “He suggested it.”

“But you didn’t want to?”

Zuko sighs, not sure if he should be honest or diplomatic. Either way, the truth is that he was
a coward.

“No. The risk that this would have ended badly was too high. And I am not a traitor. I am the
Prince of the Fire Nation and my place is here. As hard as it might be.”

Iroh makes a noise that is somewhere between pain and pride and Zuko looks at him with a
worried raise of his eyebrow.

“You truly are a man of honor, Prince Zuko.”

He stares at his uncle. Surely he must have misheard and it’s the kind of comment that stings.
A dry laugh comes over his lips.

“Me? A man of honor? Everyone can see that I lost my honor, just by looking at my face.”

Uncle Iroh shakes his head decidedly and his eyes are full of affection, that makes Zuko feel
almost a little uncomfortable. “This is not how I see it. And neither does Sokka.”

Zuko sighs at that. “He’s mad at me, still. For not running away with him and because I let
Father get far too close to him.”

“He will get over it”, Uncle Iroh states like a matter of fact and Zuko looks at him, before
staring down at his tea.

“I hope so.”

“I know it.”

Zuko throws a look at him, but his uncle looks confident as he says it.

“What makes you so sure about that?”

“Sokka is still here, isn’t he? If he really wanted to go, he would be gone by now. But he
stayed for a reason and after all, you protected him in a display of passionate determination,
if I may say so.”

There is an amused undertone in Iroh’s words and Zuko feels his cheeks heat up.

“There is no need to be ashamed, Prince Zuko. You two have been bonding and growing
closer those last few weeks. I am very pleased to see that.”

Zuko groans. “Uncle, whatever you think is going on, is not. But we have become friends.”

The doubtful, raised eyebrow from his uncle is not lost on him, but Zuko just throws him an
unfriendly look. The last thing he needs right now is his uncle mocking him about this kind
of stuff. It’s bad enough that he keeps thinking about this moment of close proximity with
Sokka in the alcove, about the feeling of warmth, protectiveness and fondness towards the
other boy. Or about how nice Sokka’s body felt against his own.

Flushed, Zuko tries to think of something to change the topic and another disturbing
observation comes to his mind.

“Azula obviously mastered to bend lightning.”

Iroh hums. Worry is written over his face. “Maybe not mastered it yet, but she’s getting
there.”

Zuko doesn’t comment. Lightning bending is a dangerous and powerful ability and in Azula’s
hands it’s probably only worse. Should his sister ever challenge him seriously, Zuko knows
that he wouldn’t last any longer than against his father. And Azula probably wouldn’t let him
get away with a horrible scar.

Truth is, he is afraid of her and afraid of the power that she possesses. Nevertheless, he
doesn’t have a choice.

“Can you…”, he begins hesitantly, but his uncle shakes his head before he gets any further.

“I can’t. Let me explain”, Iroh says, when Zuko is about to argue. “Lightning is a pure
expression of firebending without aggression. It is not fueled by rage or emotion the way
other firebending is. Some call lightning the cold-blooded fire. It is precise and deadly, like
Azula. To perform the technique requires peace of mind.”

He pauses and Zuko nods to show that he is listening to his uncle’s explications.

“Lightning is energy. There is energy all around us. The energy is both Yin and Yang,
positive energy and negative energy. Only a select few Firebenders can separate these
energies. This creates an imbalance. The energy wants to restore balance, and in the moment
the positive and negative energy come crashing back together you provide release and
guidance, creating lightning.”

“I see. But why can’t we try it?”, he insists.

“Prince Zuko. Without meaning any offense: Do you think you are able to untangle all the
inner turmoil, to separate all the good and bad that has happened to you since you were but a
child, to create the clean space for those energies to clash and find a way out instead of
turning inside and destroying yourself?”

Zuko looks at his uncle in horror by the implications of literally imploding due to the energy
within himself. He feels himself go pale and shakes his head. No, this is nothing he can do.

Uncle nods approvingly.

“You have my word, that I will teach you how to redirect lightning, so that you can defend
yourself should it ever be directed at you. But you are not there yet, despite your remarkable
progress. You still have to learn some more firebending forms, before we will engage in more
dangerous techniques. I must ask you for some more patience, dear nephew.”

For once, Zuko doesn’t argue.

A beautiful full moon illuminates the sky, while Sokka waits for Zuko on their balcony that
night. He hasn’t been surprised that the prince disappeared directly into the bathing chamber
after his first day as minister Kebai’s assistant, muttering insults under his breath and
smelling as if he just came out of a smokehouse.

Zuko still looks everything but pleased, when he comes to stand next to Sokka, leaning
against the wooden railing with a deep sigh.

“How was it?”, Sokka asks, unable to contain the mocking undertone in his voice.

Zuko groans. “As can be expected. And I can’t get that smell out of my nose. It’s disgusting.
I swear he didn’t stop smoking the whole afternoon.”

“Did you learn anything?”

“Not really. It’s basically just cataloging the reports of where how much of what is harvested,
shipped and sold. Most boring job in the world, I assure you.”

Sokka shrugs. “Well, it’s something. I spent my day in the library again.”

“I’ll readily swap. Honestly, it’s awful”, Zuko says, before he takes a rattling breath and
imitates Kebai. “Prince Zuko, we must be able to trace back every ounce of spice, every
single grain of rice to make sure that the Fire Nation is not robbed of its resources.”

Sokka laughs and the prince sighs again. “I swear he thinks his job is the most important.”

“But he wasn’t mean or anything?”

The amber eyes flicker at him and Zuko shakes his head. “Nah, I don’t think he’s really
aware of anything that happened in the palace for the last thirty years. Probably thinks he’s
still working for my grandfather Azulon.”

Sokka laughs again. It’s funny hearing Zuko complaining and talking like that. It shows
another side of him and even though it’s belittling and a little arrogant, Sokka is not mad
about it. Actually, a little arrogancy suits Zuko quite well. He looks at the other boy, who
relaxes a little, while he looks up at the moon.

“The moon looks beautiful tonight.”

“It sure does”, Sokka agrees.

They are both looking up into the night sky by now, silent and just standing side by side and
it makes him nervous. There are still many things left unsaid and Sokka knows that they
should probably talk about what happened in the Great Hall. It’s just that he can’t find it in
him and maybe he also doesn’t want to. What’s done is done and Sokka doubts that bringing
it all up again will do them any good. But there is one thing that he needs to tell Zuko,
because the prince has to know. It’s just hard to find the words.

He tears his gaze from the moon to look at Zuko and let his eyes wander over the left side of
his face. The scar is prominent, standing out against the pale skin as it always does. It’s
etched into Zuko’s features, but Sokka has never found Zuko’s appearance appalling or ugly.
The prince is more than his external imperfection, much more.

Sokka’s gaze traces its path across his face, taking him in and suddenly he feels foolish for
having been mad at him.

Zuko fought back. He fought back against his father, against the person who publicly
threatened to kill him, who mistreated him constantly and whose single purpose seemed to be
making Zuko’s life hell. But Zuko fought back against him, stepped in front of Sokka,
shielding him, protecting him.

I’m an idiot, Sokka thinks to himself, when the realization sets in and he’s overwhelmed by
the emotions that come over him, containing everything from astonishment to shock and
embarrassment and a very, very weird urge to throw himself into Zuko’s arms.

Zuko stepped in, risking to be hurt or burned or worse and Sokka pushes that thought far
away, because no. Just no.

He just watches Zuko in awe and suddenly feels a deep admiration for the person standing
before him. Zuko is so much more beyond the surface and Sokka wants to tell him so badly,
that he doesn’t regret his decision to stay. This might be a terrifying place full of terrifying
people, the Fire Lord being the worst of them all, and even though Sokka knows that they are
riding on the knife’s edge, he doesn’t regret it.

Saying that out loud, however, seems impossible. It’s as if he’s forgotten how to speak, the
words just don’t want to come to him. Softly Sokka shakes his head at himself and reaches
for Zuko’s hand.
It feels warm and calloused just like it did on the day of their wedding and his eyes jolt up to
meet Zuko’s, a little perplexed as to where that thought is suddenly coming from.

Zuko looks not less surprised, but he also seems relieved and he turns fully to Sokka, taking
the other hand into his as well and suddenly his heart is thrumming in his chest and Sokka
doesn’t know where to look. Despite the pleasantly cool air he feels hot.

“I’m glad that you’re still here”, Zuko says quietly and a breathless laugh comes over
Sokka’s lips.

He gulps and nods weakly.

“Zuko… I don’t regret it.”

There. He said it.

Zuko doesn’t respond right away, but the grip around his hands becomes a little stronger and
Sokka looks up to him hesitantly and for a second he forgets how to breathe.

There’s a fire burning bright in Zuko’s amber eyes, a mix of determination and vulnerability.
He can’t say which of them steps in, his brain short-circuits, but suddenly Zuko is incredibly
close and Sokka’s heart is beating way too fast. His hands find Zuko’s shoulders to have
something to hold onto and all he has to do is lean in and close the distance.

It’s at exactly at that moment, that the color of the sky changes dramatically and the moon
turns to an unnatural shade of blood red. It’s such a shock, that they let go of each other and
stare at the sky instead.

The hairs on Sokka’s arm stand up, it feels like his blood is freezing and fear rises within
him, like it’s cutting his throat. It is a different kind of fear than what he felt under Zuko’s
hand on his face. This fear runs deeper, it is much bigger, much more unpredictable.

“What in Agni’s name…”, Zuko whispers and Sokka clutches his hand.

From the yard they hear alarmed voices, maybe they are expecting another attack. Sokka has
no idea what is going on, but whatever it is, it’s otherworldly and supernatural. They don’t
dare move or go inside. Sokka is literally too shocked, because the moon just turned red.

A relieved sigh comes over his lips, when after some very long minutes the silver light of the
celestial body is back, as if a veil has been lifted. Zuko throws a glance at him, but he seems
equally relieved. Only mere moments later the world falls into complete darkness and a yelp
escapes from Sokka’s mouth.

It seems as if suddenly the world has become completely silent. The light of torches around
the yard is suddenly less bright. Horror overcomes him. Sokka feels like something is
slipping, like the world comes to a crashing halt and next to him Zuko holds his breath.

Something is wrong, incredibly wrong.

“It’s gone”, Sokka whispers, horrified and his heart is still beating fast, though for entirely
different reasons than before. “The moon is gone.”

He is not a spiritual person, by no means. But the moon spirit, Tui, is real and that the moon
is gone means that someone killed the ancient spirit.

“No. No, no, no, no, no, no. This can’t be happening!”

“What is happening?”, Zuko asks, sounding tense and casting a flame in his hand. He looks
frightened and confused and Sokka feels the same.

“I don’t know. But Zuko, this is bad. Like the end-of-the-world-kind of bad.”

A short, grim nod is Zuko’s reaction. The prince looks into the dark sky, then at the flame in
his hand, then at Sokka.

“I always thought the world would end in fire, not in darkness.”

He sounds serious, regretful and Sokka has no idea what to say to that. He becomes aware,
that he is still holding Zuko’s hand and lets go of it. This really is not the moment to be
embarrassed about holding another boy’s hand or about almost kissing that boy, but Sokka
can’t help it. Maybe it’s because of the overwhelming graveness of the situation, that is too
much to comprehend, that his brain focuses on more trivial things.

His cheeks are burning and Sokka is actually grateful for the darkness. They almost kissed.
Maybe he should have seen that coming, but actually Sokka is too shocked and even a little
upset. In a good way, but still.

He tries to focus on anything but Zuko’s face behind the flickers of his flame and so he looks
back at the sky again, wondering if this really is the end.

If it is, then it’s not what he expected it would be like. Sokka did not expect it to be so
awefully quiet and threatening, but maybe that’s just the world that holds its collective breath
before hell breaks loose. For a moment he even wonders, if he’s just dreaming, because he
can’t believe that the moon, that shone so beautifully in front of the night sky is just gone
within the blink of an eye.

He feels Zuko’s gaze on him and flinches a little, not sure what to say or do. The prince looks
insecure, almost shy and Sokka’s heart flutters nervously.

A guard runs into the yard, yelling that the Capital’s citizens are panicking and that there are
some people looting shops and warehouses near the harbor. Chaos seems to take over the city
and he gathers more men to support the City Guard outside of the Palace.

It is worrying, that it didn’t even take five minutes for chaos to spread after the peaceful,
glowing moon has gone. Maybe this is how the world will end, descending into complete
chaos. But here on the balcony with Zuko, Sokka feels oddly safe. At least for now.

Their eyes meet and everything seems to glow, when the pale, shining light is back in the sky.
“What the…?!”, Sokka gasps.

What is happening? The moon was gone. Like gone gone. Not existant anymore. How can it
be back all of a sudden, looking brighter than it ever did before? Something strange is
happening tonight, the spirits seem to go completely crazy. Despite the relief the Water Tribe
boy feels at the sight of the celestial body back in the sky, he can tell that something is
definitely not right.

“Maybe it’s not the end. But someone’s messing with the universe”, Zuko says with a deep
frown on his face. Sokka gulps.

“Do you think the Avatar possesses the power to fix this?”

He’s the bridge between the worlds, so if anybody can handle the mess that just happened it
is probably him.

“Maybe he just did”, Zuko guesses with a shrug.

Sokka nods doubtfully. “Then he’s more powerful than we thought.”

The prince throws a glance at him. “Isn’t that a good thing?”

“Depends on which side of the war you are on, probably.”

It’s a stupid comment and Sokka regrets it as soon as it leaves his mouth, because Zuko looks
at him like he’s been slapped. The prince quickly gathers himself, but Sokka can sense that he
hit a nerve. He feels bad for the ailed expression on the prince’s face.

“I’m sorry. I shouldn’t have said that”, he apologizes.

Zuko shakes his head, but he doesn’t look at him. “No, it’s fine. You’re right. I… I think, I
will get some sleep. It’s been a long day and as the world doesn’t seem to be ending anytime
soon…”

He throws an awkward smile at him, before he enters their chamber and Sokka curses
himself.

He really is an idiot sometimes.

It takes a long time before Zuko falls asleep. He’s tossing and turning and hoping that he
doesn’t wake Sokka in the process. The prince feels on the edge for several reasons. First of
them is the fact, that he almost kissed his husband. It sounds incredibly dumb, even in his
own head, to be worried about that, but he is. This marriage was supposed to be a farce, he
wasn’t supposed to be actually falling for the man he’s been married to. But he is and it’s
freaking him out. Especially because of Sokka’s comment that made it very clear, that they
are in fact not on the same side. It’s something that Zuko outright ignored over the last few
weeks, too content with how their friendship was progressing. But it’s true. They are from
different nations and those nations are on different sides of the war. It has been easy to
ignore, secluded away from the world in the Palace, but that doesn’t make it any less real. It’s
devastating and Zuko’s heart clenches uncomfortably. Again, he wishes that they have met
under other circumstances.

When he drifts off into a restless sleep in the wee hours, weird dreams swirl in front of his
eyes and take a hold of him. It’s like Zuko is aware that he’s sleeping and at the same time
he’s not. He’s aware of the mattress he’s lying on, the fabric of the blanket, but he is also far
away, standing on a hill on a small volcanic island. The prince doesn’t know the place and he
feels a little lost.

“Don’t worry, Prince Zuko. You are safe.”

He swirls around and finds the old man, that he has seen already in his dreams months ago,
standing behind him. His dragon is nowhere to be seen, which Zuko is actually grateful for,
but he wonders, what the man could possibly want from him.

“Who are you?”, he asks.

The man is wearing long, red robes that clearly identify him as a member of the Fire Nation
and he wears a golden headpiece not unlike a crown on his head. He must be a noble of high
rank and Zuko supposes that he should know, who he is, but he doesn’t.

“I’m a friend”, is all the man answers.

Zuko frowns skeptically. “Of my uncle?”

The nobleman looks even older than uncle, but it’s more likely that he has met Iroh than
Zuko himself. He smiles.

“Your uncle? No, unfortunately I have never met him”, he pauses, crooking his head to the
side and studies Zuko carefully. “Your fire has gotten stronger since I have seen you last. It is
burning much brighter.”

The prince doesn’t know what to say to that.

“Why are you here?”

“To talk to you, of course.”

Zuko is a little puzzled and he frowns, in his dream and also in his bed in the Royal Palace.
The man continues.

“I see much of myself in you, Prince Zuko. You are warm-hearted, strong, dedicated and
devoted. You are more resilient than anyone I have ever met. Much more resilient than I ever
was. But you are also torn.”
The golden eyes are looking at him with great empathy and Zuko is getting a little annoyed.
This feels like talking to his uncle. The old man is speaking in riddles and Zuko is not a fan
of those.

“What are you talking about?”, he demands to know.

The man just shakes his head and doesn’t answer.

“I know better than anyone else that navigating between doing what is right and doing what
is expected of you is a narrow and rocky path to walk on. The world is approaching a
breaking point, Prince Zuko. All the parties involved in this war are growing more desperate
and more ruthless. You saw the proof of that tonight. The time will come for you to decide
what part you are going to play – in this war and in this world.”

Zuko’s eyes widen, while he listens to the words.

“My own indecisiveness led to my downfall. You must not let yours stand in your own way.”

The old man shakes his head and looks up into the sky.

“Tonight the moon spirit almost got killed. It is thanks to a young girl that it is still with us.
She made her decision, brave and unafraid of the consequences. Just like you did, when you
protected the Water Tribe boy from your father’s wrath. I have high hopes for you, Prince
Zuko. You are not alone and you have what it takes to face the obstacles in your way.”

His heart is beating faster and Zuko tries to find a meaning in the words said to him. From the
distance flapping noises can be heard and they are drawing nearer until the red dragon lands
behind the nobleman, his wings rustling softly when it folds them at its back. Zuko shivers at
the sight, especially when the piercing orange eyes seem to look right through him.

The old man mounts the dragon and Zuko takes a step forward and reaches out.

“Wait! What does that mean? What am I supposed to do?”

The elder sighs. “Follow your destiny, Prince Zuko. We will meet again.”

With that, the dragon takes off.

“Wait!”, Zuko yells, arm still outreached. “You didn’t even tell me your name!”

The scene disappears in front of his eyes and the next thing he sees is a blue dragon that
opens its mouth widely. He can’t even get his arms up in time to shield his face, before he’s
surrounded by fire.
 Breaking the Silence
Chapter Summary

They are pining. They are idiots. They are pining idiots.

Chapter Notes

Thank you so much everyone for your feedback on the last chapter!
Without further ado, we jump directly into Book 2. I had a lot of fun (and a little
headache) writing this.
Enjoy!

Book 2: Spark

Chapter 1: Breaking the Silence

Zuko groans and leans back in his seat. He puts the brush into the inkwell and grants himself
a moment to look out of the window to watch the pouring rain outside. The weather mirrors
his mood, the sky is covered by dark, grey clouds and a gusty wind is hauling outside. The
Fire Prince sighs and looks onto the many papers that are laid out in front of him.

He's exhausted and not only because of all the paperwork he has to do ever since Minister
Kebai has fallen ill. That's exhausting too and also discouraging and worrying. Zuko is not in
a very good place mentally. He hasn't been for a few weeks by now, basically since the Night
of the Dark Moon two months ago.

Ever since then his thoughts are circling around the question which side of the war is the
'right' side. Zuko shouldn't be asking himself that question. He's supposed to know. But not
for the first time in his life he wonders if it's really that easy. It's not only due to that little
remark from Sokka at their balcony or the rather disturbing dream about the old man with his
dragon.

He is the prince of the Fire Nation. He should not doubt the rightness of the war. Zuko might
have never felt at ease when it came to thinking about it, but he didn't question its whole
purpose. His ancestors kept it going for almost a hundred years and who is he to doubt their
judgement? Sharing their superiority with the world seems like an honorable goal. It must be.
But why does the way of achieving that goal feels so wrong then, so unjust?

Zuko has experienced injustice first-hand almost his whole life, which probably makes him
more sensitive to it. Maybe he is really just too soft and too weak for the war, but he can't
ignore that the Fire Nation is basically starving the occupied Earth Kingdom provinces by
confiscating more than eighty percent of their harvest, leaving barely enough for the villagers
and farmers to survive. At first Zuko thought he misunderstood Kebai's notes and
calculations and he spent days trying to figure out, where the error was until he finally
realized that there was no error. Zuko is disgusted by how detailed everything is documented,
from the numbers of population to the harvested goods and quantities to the calculations of
how much is enough to keep the Earth Kingdom citizens going with barely enough to
survive.

It's just not right.

Zuko doesn't even know why he is surprised. He's learned in his history and strategy lessons
that this is what you do: cut the enemies resources to make them more likely to surrender. It's
logic. But it's the amount of people affected, that shocks him.

The prince can't help but wonder, if it's justified. He pinches the back of his nose, willing the
growing headache behind his temples away, when more questions come to his mind.

Is it justified to sacrifice their own young people in the army? Is it justified to try and kill the
Moon Spirit? Is it justified to challenge a kid into an Agni Kai and burn his face off? Is it
justified to kidnap the enemy's kid and force them to marry one's least favorite child?

Zuko buries his face in his hands and sighs deeply.

Sokka...

He hasn't shared a lot of his work and his discovery with his husband. In fact, Zuko is trying
to keep his distance. He doesn't want to make Sokka uncomfortable by talking about the war
or Fire Nation politics, because he is sure that the Water Tribe boy doesn't want to hear about
it and even if, he would not agree and then he would be mad at Zuko and-

Everything is weird between them and Zuko knows that it's his fault. He has pushed too hard,
was too eager and happy to have found a friend - the first he has ever had all to himself - that
he got carried away, wanting more and ignoring the fact that they did not enter this marriage
willingly and that they are on opposite sides of the ongoing conflict.

At least, Zuko supposes they are. Truthfully the prince has no idea which side he's on or if
he's somewhere in between, always threatened to be crushed by either party.

But war aside, he doesn't want to make Sokka uncomfortable. That night on the balcony
Zuko thought that his touch was welcomed. He thought he saw something in his eyes and it
was Sokka who took his hand in the first place. But the longer Zuko thinks about it, the surer
he is that he misinterpreted the whole situation. Yes, they helped each other through
dangerous situations with Zuko's father or sister and that included comforting each other
through innocent touches like a hand on the shoulder, a hug or even holding the other's hand
for a short while. But that was not an invitation for a kiss, even if Zuko wanted it to happen.

He still feels embarrassed about that and blushes. It's typical that something like that happens
to him. Zuko is too emotional, he always has been. Azula wouldn't have developed a crush on
the boy, if their positions were reversed. That was something that could only happen to Zuko.

Living in the same quarters as his crush, seeing him on a daily basis and knowing that he
couldn't act on his feelings however, doesn't make it easier for Zuko.

All he can do is try to bother Sokka as little as possible and not make him more
uncomfortable as necessary. He is trying his best, but he can tell that Sokka is not happy with
their arrangement.

The prince sighs again and takes up the brush to add six bushels of rice to remain in the Taku
province in the Earth Kingdom. He can't do much more without anyone noticing, but he
hopes that by adding some quantities here and there he can make at least a few lives a little
easier.

Sokka flips listlessly through the pages of the book in front of him. He's draped over the
chair, his head propped up on the arm that rests on the desk and he's bored.

"When did my life become this dull?!", he whines.

Jin, who is rustling around and changing the sheets in the bed chamber throws him a
sympathetic look through the open door. She doesn't comment though and Sokka sighs.

He knows the answer to his question exactly. It has been that way since the Night of the Dark
Moon - ever since Admiral Zhao failed to conquer the North Pole and catch the Avatar. It has
been ever since Sokka almost made a complete and utter fool of himself by kissing Prince
Zuko.

And now things between them are just weird. Sokka can only imagine how weird things
would be if he really did it. Sokka is still not sure what came over him in that moment. He
knows that the admiration, the warmth and the longing to be close to Zuko have been real and
Sokka thought he saw those things reflected in the prince's eyes. If the moon hadn't turned
red they definitely would have kissed.

The idea still makes his stomach flip even after months and Sokka feels equally relieved and
regretful, that it never came to that. The reasonable part of him knows that it's probably for
the best. It was some heat of the moment thing. For Zuko at least. Because ever since then,
he's keeping his distance. At first Sokka thought he was mad at his comment regarding the
war, but Zuko hasn't mentioned it ever since and before, they never had a problem discussing
the conflict of their nations. So the only other explanation is that Zuko did not want to kiss
him. Which is really fine. Totally. No problem at all.

The problem is that the prince is obviously still freaked out over it. It's not that he ignores
Sokka. They get along and they spar sometimes and they talk. But it is awfully superficial
and meaningless. He has no idea what is really going on in Zuko's life. If anyone should
know it's him, because they are married, for Agni's sake. Maybe Sokka crossed a line and
maybe he should apologize (even though the time to apologize is probably long behind him).
They were friends and Sokka spoiled it with his impulsive actions. He has to deal with the
consequences, but living side by side without living with each other is not something he's
ever wished for. It's what he feared this relationship would be like (as second to the option of
Zuko being a cruel, sadistic bastard like his father) and to see it unfold like that is
disheartening. They get along, but that's it.

Sokka feels like he's back to the start, back to his first week in the Palace.

He's lonely and bored and the weather outside does not even allow him to work on his sword-
fighting skills. He's worked a lot on those ever since the Night of the Dark Moon and he
improved a lot, sometimes he was even able to get the upper hand over Zuko. Not that they
trained regularly together anymore. Zuko is busy with his work as Kebai's assistant,
especially since the old minister has been ordered bedrest due to some illness. It means even
less time spend together and Sokka has to go through the motions alone or work on his
general fitness.

The Water Tribe boy is quite happy that he built some muscle during the last few months and
due to the excellent food at the Palace he doesn't look so skinny anymore. He has also grown
an inch and his features are becoming sharper. Sokka is slowly growing into a man. A
handsome man, if the giggled whispers of the female palace staff are anything to go by with.
He wonders if Zuko has noticed it too. Sometimes he gets the impression that the prince is
watching him with a curious expression, and maybe he likes what he sees.

Sokka stops himself there and groans about being so pathetic. He needs to let it go.

The Water Tribe boy looks down onto the book before him.

"Aren't there any Fire Nation tales with Happy Endings?", he complains, when Jin enters the
living quarters with the laundry basket under her arm. She frowns at him.

Sokka has worked himself through all kinds of Fire Nation literature in his free time, which
he has plenty of. It's not only to pass the time, but also because he knows that Zuko has a
thing for poetry and theatre and maybe this could be something that they can talk about, and-
did he already mention that he's pathetic?

Most of the tales he comes across are right-out depressing, usually something about
forbidden love or one lover dying tragically and the other following them into the grave or all
of the above together. On one hand the stories are beautifully bittersweet, but Sokka could
really do with some more upbeat literature, something where the guy gets the girl and there's
roses and sunsets and shiny spirits and such things.
Maybe the title 'Song of Everlasting Regret' should have given him a warning, but he has yet
to come across a happy story. Maybe 'happy' is something that the Fire Nation just doesn't do.

"There are, but the tragedies are so much more meaningful. Have you read 'The Butterfly
Lovers'?"

"Yes. And I have also read 'The Peacocks fly to the Southeast'. But if I have to read another
story about devastated lovers, who end themselves in suicide, I'm going to kill myself."

Jin purses her lips. "Now, that would be a little drastic, don't you think? Maybe you should
try some more trivial literature instead of the high novels. Something like 'A Midsummer
Night's Dream' maybe. It's more of a comedy than a love story, basically a bunch of spirits
accidently messing with two couples in love, but it's pretty sweet."

"Anything that's not sorrow and death", he says gratefully and huffs. "This is really not how I
imagined my life to be. I mean, why am I even here? I could just as well sit in a prison cell
somewhere. It wouldn't change anything."

Jin snorts and rolls her eyes.

"If you really believe that, Prince Consort, you are definitely an idiot."

Sokka throws a look at her. Since their first meeting Jin has never beaten around the bush and
this is not the first time she calls him that. Nevertheless, he's a little annoyed.

“You know that you could just talk to him”, she begins, but Sokka interrupts her rather
rudely.

“About what, huh?”, he asks without waiting for her answer. “Look, I’m trying to find things
to talk about, okay? He’s the one, who doesn’t want to and who avoids me.”

The servant sighs. “Sure. That’s why he looks at you like a kicked puppy. It’s alright that
none of you is telling me what happened. It’s none of my business. But Sokka, everyone
knows that something happened. People are talking and drawing their own conclusions.”

Sokka blinks at her in astonishment and an uneasy feeling washes over him. This day keeps
getting better.

“What conclusions?”

Jin shrugs, obviously not willing to tell him. His eyes bore into hers, but she’s stubborn.

“I’m just saying, you should at least try to not look so unhappy with each other. Or you could
just discuss whatever has caused this discourse between you.”

“The Fire Lord wants us to be unhappy”, Sokka simply says, ignoring her suggestion like he
has done the last few weeks.

Jin lets out an annoyed groan and rearranges the basket in her arms, before she turns to go.
Sokka watches her retreat and the hollow feeling in his chest becomes too much to handle
suddenly.

“I feel lonely”, he blurts out, feeling immediately ashamed, when Jin turns around and
watches him sympathetically out of her olive green eyes.

Saying it out loud doesn’t make him feel better. In fact, Sokka only feels worse. He likes
Zuko, he really does and the prince’s company has been a source of comfort and yeah,
friendship. Simply co-existing with the other boy is not what he wants and even though his
feelings for Zuko are not brotherly he can’t help but miss Katara and worry about her even
more.

Sokka still has no idea how his little sister is doing. So far he hasn’t received a reply to his
letter and he knows that it’s unlikely that he ever will. Zuko explained to him that
unfortunately that was not part of the deal with whoever he hired to get the letter to the South
Pole.

Shortly after the Night of the Dark Moon Sokka has had the shocking fear that Katara has
been at the North Pole and was travelling with the Avatar. It has been due to the fact that the
survivors of the Fire Nation Navy told a very disturbing story about the Avatar merging with
the Ocean Spirit, killing Admiral Zhao and destroying more than half of the Fire Nation’s
fleet. They said that the Avatar was accompanied by two girls barely older than him, one a
Kyoshi Warrior and the other a waterbender.

Sokka’s heart almost stopped when he heard that, but then he convinced himself that it was
impossible. Katara’s waterbending abilities were petty, which was perfectly normal without a
master to teach her. Plus, if Katara was anything then it was reasonable. She would never
head into such an adventure, leaving the Tribe behind and get herself into such danger. If the
news of the Avatar even reached the South Pole, it would surely give her hope, but there was
no way that his little sister dropped everything and went on an insane quest with a stranger.

The thought of Azula chasing his little sister still freaks Sokka out and is enough for his
heartbeat to speed up. No, he doesn’t even want to imagine. With Admiral Zhao’s defeat the
Fire Lord saw need for a change of plans and so he sent the Crown Princess together with
Mai and Ty Lee to get a hold of the last airbender instead of sending them to Ba Sing Se.

So far, the Avatar always managed to escape and the only good thing about the whole
situation is, that it seems that the Fire Lord is growing impatient with Azula for once. Sokka
would probably enjoy it more if things between Zuko and him were better. He sighs.

Jin’s eyes are still resting on him.

“Tell him”, she says gently.

“And then?”, Sokka shrugs.

“I don’t know. But we are talking about Prince Zuko. He’s probably lonely too. And this
mutual pining won’t get you anywhere.”
“I’m not pining!”

Jin looks unimpressed. “Huh. That’s too bad, ‘cause he definitely is.”

Sokka’s eyes go wide and he stares at her, while his heartbeat is getting faster.

“What?”, he croaks out unintelligibly.

“If you’ll excuse me, I have some more rooms to clean. Have a nice evening”, she singsongs
and is gone.

Sokka stares at the closed door and doesn’t know what to think.

Sokka leans against the door frame that leads to their balcony and watches the rain pour
down. It’s still early in the evening but due to the bad weather it is already pretty dark. He
doesn’t bother to light any candles or lanterns.

The Water Tribe boy still thinks about Jin’s words. They should talk. But he has no idea, what
to say to Zuko and even if he did, would it change anything? Sokka crosses his arms.

Pining.

Pfff. He is not pining. He is just thinking about his situation, wishing that they could go back
to how it was before. That’s not pining. She probably just wanted to make fun of him. What
other reason could the young servant have to tell him that Zuko was pining after him too?
That obviously isn’t true, because if it was, Zuko would probably want to spend more time
with him and not as little as possible.

Sokka wipes a hand over his face and sighs.

He hears the door opening and closing with a soft click.

“I’m back”, Zuko says unnecessarily and Sokka nods without turning to him. Instead he
continues to stare at the rain.

The prince lights a few candles and soon the room is covered in a dim golden light. It’s a
stark contrast to the grey outside.

“How was your day?”, Sokka asks, like he usually does and turns around.

Zuko looks tired and unhappy. He shrugs with a sigh.

“As usual. Lots of paperwork. And I’m not getting anywhere in terms of relocating and
establishing more vineyards on the islands instead of in the colonies. The conditions on the
islands are basically perfect, safe for the winds. Kebai said I should leave it be, but if we
could relocate the viticulture to our territory it would allow the Earth Kingdom colonies to
grow more grain and vegetables. It would benefit them more.”

Sokka nods, without really paying attention. Zuko always goes into detail when he tells him
about his work and Sokka assumes it’s mostly to fill the silence. But nevertheless and despite
Zuko’s many declarations that agriculture is boring and an unworthy resort for a prince it is
obvious that he really tries to make improvements. Not only for the Fire Nation. It coaxes a
little smile out of him and Sokka wants to tell Zuko that he appreciates, what he is doing. But
there is this heavy feeling in his chest and he doesn’t want Zuko to feel more weirded out by
him than he already is.

Tell him, Jin’s words echo in his ears and Sokka bites his lip. He can’t go on like this.
Thinking about every word, talking about nothing substantial, being in the same room
without really being with each other.

"I'm sorry", Sokka blurts out.

The prince looks at him wide-eyed at the sudden yell. Insecurity and self-consciousness are
showing clearly on his face.

"What are you sorry for?" Zuko's voice is quite and a little apprehensive.

Sokka scratches his neck, realizing that he didn't think this through, even though he has had
plenty of time to do so. His cheeks are burning and he looks everywhere but at Zuko.

"Well, you know... uh..."

He makes a vague gesture and hopes that Zuko understands, without actually having to say it
out loud. The Water Tribe boy can't remember, when was the last time he felt this awkward.
Probably the night after their wedding and he cringes internally at the thought.

He feels Zuko's eyes on him and dares to glance at the prince. To his surprise Zuko looks
rather serious and a little down on himself instead of embarrassed and blushing, as Sokka
expected him to be at the mention of their almost-kiss.

"You don't have to be."

"Oh."

Now, that is not what he expected. A warm, fluttering feeling settles in Sokka's stomach and
he can't help but be a little hopeful and nervous.

"Really?", he asks, sounding a little breathless and a tiny smile appears on his lips. Zuko nods
sharply.

"Of course not. You just spoke the truth. It is my bad, that I can't handle it. Our nations are at
war and as much as I would like to change that, I can't. It was just unexpected to hear you
point out so clearly, that we are not on the same side. That our friendship is basically an
illusion."
Sokka blinks, before he squeezes his eyes and opens his mouth with a questioning look on his
face. What in Tui’s name is Zuko talking about? Then it dawns on him. So this is about his
stupid comment about the Avatar and the war. It's not about the kiss at all and he can't decide
if he should be relieved or disappointed.

Then, once more he can't believe that it takes so little to make Zuko doubt their whole
relationship. It's discouraging.

"I never said that!", he protests.

Zuko shrugs though the sadness is obvious on his face. "You implied it."

"No!", Sokka cries out, taking a step in Zuko’s direction. "You decided, that's what you
heard. Could you please stop thinking that everyone will always turn against you?! Could
you start using your brain, for a change? Fuck, Zuko! I stayed here for you, when I could
have gotten away. Because you are my friend! Did you think I forgot about the war, when I
made that decision?"

Zuko looks at him with big, amber eyes and he seems completely dumbstruck by Sokka's
tirade but the Water Tribe boy isn't done yet. He takes another step closer, gesturing lively,
while he lets his frustration out.

"Yes, I hope that the Fire Nation will lose this war and I hope that the Avatar will take your
father down and kick his ass. But that doesn't apply to you."

Sokka huffs and looks at Zuko expectingly. The prince just stands there and looks a little lost
and as if he doesn't understand at all.

"But I'm the Prince of the Fire Nation", is all he says and Sokka fights the urge to hit himself
against his forehead.

"But you are not like them! Damn it Zuko, we don't know each other very well, but I never
saw you show any enthusiasm for the war. That alone makes you so much better than them. I
trust you. I stayed for you. And you fought back against your father to protect me. That
means something. It has to mean something."

Zuko still looks at Sokka with a very open and vulnerable expression and despite his
frustration the urge to hug the prince is back. Sokka decides against it, because he doesn't
want to make this more complicated than it already is.

"You're right", Zuko croaks out and looks to the ground.

Sokka waits for more, for a specification what he's right about, because he just said a lot of
things.

"I don't know which side I'm on", the prince finally admits.

Zuko sounds as if he's holding back a sob. He looks haunted and confused and Sokka feels a
slight ache in his chest. He sighs deeply and runs a hand through his hair. Sokka can't pretend
that he doesn't understand.
"They are my family. This is my nation. But... there are so many things that seem wrong”,
Zuko says and looks at him like he’s looking for help.

When Sokka doesn’t say anything, he sits down on the bed and props his head up on his
knees.

“I can't abandon them. He's still my father. I... what he did... but... I can't turn my back.”

Sokka just looks at him and he wants to comfort Zuko somehow, but no words come to him.
A part of him is utterly disappointed, but Sokka has to admit that he can’t say what he would
do, if he was in Zuko’s place. How can he judge him for still being loyal? It pains him, it
really does, because Zuko deserves better than what his father is doing to him, but Sokka
can’t be mad. Not right now and maybe never.

His eyes widen, when Zuko goes on.

"You mean a lot to me, Sokka. I didn't want to make you feel uncomfortable. That's why I
kept my distance.”

His heart is thrumming at Zuko’s words and a warm feeling spreads in his chest.

“You mean a lot to me too”, Sokka admits quietly and slowly sits down next to the prince.
His gaze flickers to Zuko, unsure if this is okay and wondering if he meant the words the way
Sokka thinks he meant them.

The prince looks at him and gulps. The flicker of the candle on the nightstand is reflected in
Zuko’s eyes, making it look like the fire is right there and Sokka realizes that he hasn’t
looked at him this intensely since that fateful night two months ago. His gaze traces over
Zuko’s features, but he won’t make the same mistake twice. If anything is going to happen,
Zuko has to initiate it. Sokka won’t make a fool of himself again. The prince seems nervous
and fidgety and Sokka’s heart beats painfully fast, while he waits for him to do something.

Zuko’s gaze flickers to his lips and unconsciously Sokka holds his breath. Then, an
expression of sheer shock spreads on the prince’s face, but he quickly gathers himself and
clears his throat. He bumps his fist against Sokka’s shoulder.

“Okay. Cool. Glad that we got that out of the way, buddy.”

Sokka blinks rapidly and tries to force a smile onto his face, while he feels mortified. He just
hopes that it doesn’t show on his face. He doesn’t know what he expected.

This is fine. They are still friends. That’s what he wanted. Buddy.

Obviously Zuko picks up on his discomfort, because the prince frowns. “You okay?”

Quickly, Sokka straightens up and nods, burying the uneasy feeling deep down in his heart.
He tries to sound light-hearted, but the smile never reaches his eyes.

“Yeah, sure. Buddy.”

He bumps his fist against Zuko’s shoulder in return and the pathetic feeling within him is
back.
 Councils and Courtesans
Chapter Summary

Zuko has a meeting to attend to and Sokka meets people.

Chapter Notes

No almost-kisses in this chapter, I promise ;-) But I really liked your reactions to the last
chapter, that's what a writer thrives for. Thanks a lot to everyone who's reading and
following the story. This is the longest thing I've ever written now and we're not done by
any means :-)
Enjoy the new chapter. Yours, Kim

Book 2: Spark

Chapter 2: Councils and Concubines

There is still some tension in the air between them and Zuko knows that it’s thanks to him for
almost making the same mistake twice by letting his emotions get the best of him. His
attempt at saving the situation might have been a bit embarrassing, but he’s rather
embarrassed than mess it all up again. The prince is not sure how to interpret the expression
he saw on Sokka’s face. Was it skepticism? Hesitation? Something else entirely?

In the end, it doesn’t really matter. Sokka made it clear on their first night together, that he
did not wish to engage in anything physical and Zuko will respect that. He has done so before
and he won’t go against it now. It’s a question of honor.

Sokka still seems a little tense, his gaze is wandering restlessly over the room as if he’s
looking for something to talk about. Zuko watches his profile and actually he is grateful for
the little moment of silence, because it allows him to really let everything sink in.

To say that the prince is astonished by Sokka’s heartfelt declaration that the Water Tribe boy
stayed for him, by the vehemence and insistence in his voice, would be an understatement.
Actually he is blown away and when he said that he, Zuko, means a lot to him… Sokka
already said before, that he didn’t regret staying in the Palace when maybe he could have
escaped, but only now does Zuko really understand, that every word he said on their balcony
was true. It makes a warm feeling run through his veins, a surge of happiness running
through him.

For the prince it’s a strange feeling and it seems illogical somehow, knowing that their
relationship won’t progress further than friendship. But right in this moment it feels like
that’s enough and that it will be enough. It is something precious, something that Zuko is
eager to keep under all circumstances.

He bumps his knee against Sokka’s and smiles at him when the other boy glances at him with
raised eyebrows, before finally a resignated, little smile appears on his lips as well.

Then, a thoughtful expression settles on Sokka’s face.

“So, what’s the problem with the winds?”, he asks.

At first Zuko has no idea what he’s talking about, but after a moment he gets that Sokka is
picking up on their conversation (or rather his monologue) about his work.

“I don’t want to bore you. We should do something fun.”

“Like what?”, Sokka asks a little skeptical and throws a look outside. “It’s pouring outside.
Unless you want to take a shower in the fountain I don’t see what we could do.”

Zuko chuckles. “I’ve fallen into that fountain once, when I was still a child.”

“Yeah?”

“Yeah. It was a result of one of Azula’s stupid games. Not a very pleasant memory, actually”,
he admits, thinking about how he shoved Mai into the fountain to get that burning apple off
her head and toppling over her in the process.

“We could play a round of Pai Sho”, Sokka suggests and Zuko pulls a face. He agrees
nevertheless, because Sokka actually seems to enjoy the game.

While the Water Tribe boy sets up the board he repeats his question about the wine and the
winds.

“It’s the downwinds on the mountainsides. The plants are too fragile to withstand them
apparently. They have too much surface and thus the wind can easily push them down and
destroy any possible harvest.”

Sokka nods thoughtfully and scratches his chin. “So you would need some wind protection
that doesn’t shield the plants from the sun and allows for a big surface.”

“Basically”, Zuko agrees and sits down opposite of Sokka.

“Hm.”

The Water Tribe boy motions for him to go first, but Zuko insists that he opens the game.
Sokka does so without hesitation and places the White Lotus tile first. Zuko makes his own
move and watches Sokka, who seems to be deep in thought. After a few exchanges, the
prince notices something.

“Are you mimicking Uncle’s strategy?”, he asks.

“One of his strategies. And yeah, I try. But actually, this one doesn’t make a whole lot of
sense to me. I mean, it makes for a nice pattern for sure”, Sokka says with a shrug.

Zuko crooks his head to the side and it’s true, there is some symmetrical pattern, even though
he can’t figure out what it is yet.

“What about pits?”, Sokka asks out of nowhere and Zuko throws a puzzled look at him.

The other boy rolls his eyes. “The wine. What if you plant them in pits that are wide enough
to allow for the surface and maximize the amount of sunlight the plants can gather and deep
enough to let the winds go over them? Plus, a pit would lead any rainwater directly to the
roots.”

Zuko blinks at him. “Uhm.”

“You have no idea, what I’m talking about, right?”

With that, Sokka stands up and gets a piece of parchment and some ink. “Here, let me show
you.”

Zuko realizes that Sokka sucks at drawing and sketching things, but nevertheless he quickly
understands that the other boy just solved the problem that he spent weeks on thinking about.

He smiles at Sokka. “We make a good team, don’t we?”

The Water Tribe boy beams back at him. “We sure do.”

“Don’t worry. You got this”, Sokka says as they walk side by side through the palace
corridors.

Zuko wishes that he could be as calm and collected as his husband, but he only nods shortly,
his lips pressed tightly together. The prince feels his nerves and he tries to draw deep breaths
and relax. It doesn’t work. He is tense as a bow string and it gets worse with every step closer
to the Throne Room.

He is glad that Sokka decided to walk him there, even if he’s not allowed in the council
meeting of the ministers. The Water Tribe boy even promised to wait for him in the hall
outside during the meeting, which makes Zuko feel a little pathetic, but at the same time
Sokka’s support does make the situation easier.
The prince shouldn’t be attending the meeting in the first place. But as Kebai is still on
bedrest (and with every day that goes by it becomes more unlikely that he will recover) it’s
Zuko’s job as his assistant to participate in the council meeting. He doesn’t look forward to it.

Rationally he knows that the meeting of the ministers that is held less often and lasts much
shorter than the war council meetings is nothing to be afraid of, but the prince is unable to
shake off the haunting memories of the day that led to him receiving the scar on his face. It
was in the same room at almost the same time not even half a year ago. Zuko gulps and traces
the outline of the scar with his fingertips.

Sokka throws a worried look at him.

The Water Tribe boy is wearing the formal attire, that suits him outrageously well and is
complimenting his slim waist and the shoulders that have become a little broader ever since
he arrived in the Fire Nation. The bright blue of his eyes is a sharp contrast to the red uniform
and Zuko knows that he shouldn’t think that his husband looks gorgeous. But he does and it’s
kinda distracting and only adds to Zuko’s nervousness. If his father knew what he was
thinking…

Zuko himself is wearing a simple robe in two shades of red with a few yellow seams that
identify him as royalty. He still is their prince and he doesn’t want people to forget that.

Nevertheless, he assumes that Sokka must look like his bodyguard in the more military attire,
with his attentive posture and his hand hovering over the boomerang on his belt. People are
looking at them and Zuko hopes that his discomfort in regards to the meeting is not showing
on his face. He tries to keep a grim look, but he can’t tell if he’s successful.

In front of the Throne Room he stops and looks at the large curtain with the embroidered
flame on it. Breathing feels hard suddenly. Zuko is frozen in his spot, but then Sokka steps in
front of him and looks at him with a worried frown.

“Hey”, he says. Gently, Zuko thinks and meets the blue eyes. “There’s nothing to worry
about. I know you got this. I’ll be right here, when you get out, okay?”

Sokka gives him a reassuring pat on the shoulder and Zuko nods slowly.

“Okay.”

With a last glance and the tiniest smile that he is capable of, Zuko takes a deep breath, before
he enters the Throne Room.

He is one of the first to arrive, but that’s fine. It means less attention on him. Or so he thought
until Minister Quon arrives and sits down next to him.

“Nobody told me, that it was ‘Bring your wife to work’-day”, he says in a mocking tone and
laughs at his own joke, accompanied by the chuckles of the few other ministers that are
already around.

Zuko throws a dark look at him and bites back a comment.

He’s relieved, when he sees Uncle stepping through the curtain and taking his seat opposite
of Zuko, winking at him with a pleased expression in his eyes. The prince knows that his
uncle was unhappy with the obvious discord between Sokka and him and apparently he
understands Sokka’s presence in front of the Throne Room as what it is – a sign, that they got
it over with.

There is no time to engage in a conversation with his uncle, because the Fire Lord arrives and
takes his seat on the throne. A grim expression lingers on his father’s face and Ozai only
greets them shortly before gesturing to Quon to give him a short debrief about his resort.

This council meeting is entirely different from the war council. There is much less discussion
and planning, it is not an exchange but rather a presentation of those fields that are not
directly involved with the war. Nevertheless, the war is one of the major topics anyway. Zuko
listens carefully to how and what the other ministers present. The Fire Lord seems impatient
and mostly uninterested, but whenever he is asked to make a decision he does so quickly,
without a lot of contemplating.

When it’s Zuko’s turn, the prince stands up and bows to his father.

“Fire Lord Ozai”, he begins and presents only the most important information. “There has
been a lot of rain in the northern regions of the Earth Kingdom so that the harvest of winter
barley is much less than we expected. Fortunately, we got it covered due to the warm weather
in the south that allowed to gather more than what was forecasted. Overall Kebai’s numbers
proved to be accurate.”

“Very well”, the Fire Lord says, obviously uninterested in the subject and is about to turn to
Minister Yuma to Zuko’s left.

“That is not all”, Zuko says quickly and his father’s piercing gaze bores into his.

“What else, Prince Zuko?”

The young man gulps, bracing himself for bringing forth his request.

“I have been thinking about establishing more agricultural sites on our own territory. At the
moment most goods are imported from the Earth Kingdom while the potential on our own
land goes awry.”

“Awry?”, the Fire Lord repeats and raises his eyebrow. “Enlighten me, Prince Zuko. Do you
think that the supplies from the Earth Kingdom will stop at some point? Do you think the
Fire Nation is losing this war?”

Zuko’s eyes widen and he quickly shakes his head.

“Of course not”, he says hastily. “But we could make for a bigger variety of supplies and
potentially better quality of the goods, too.”

“Hm.”
“I was thinking about establishing vineries on some of the outer islands of the archipelago.
That would allow them to develop their economy into another direction and it would allow to
grow other or more needed cultures in the Earth Kingdom colonies”, he explains.

“You don’t find the conditions for vinery there. The winds won’t allow it”, Uncle says
indulgently with an encouraging smile.

Zuko nods. “Not with the traditional method. But if we were to plant the wine into round pits
that are about three feet deep the wind will simply go over them. With the sun and the
volcanic ground, it could be a promising approach.”

The Fire Lord snorts. “You don’t care about the wine. You are an incorrigible fool, who
wants to make improvements for lesser people, like those in the Earth Kingdom.”

“But hasn’t that been one of the reasons to start the war? Didn’t my great-grandfather Sozin
chose the war to share the Fire Nation’s strength and superiority with the world?”

Despite his confident words Zuko’s heart is beating fast in his chest and he hopes that he’s
not going too far with his request. His father’s eyes narrow, but he doesn’t answer right away.

Obviously, that invites Minister Quon to raise his voice.

“The Prince has obviously found his love for foreign peasantry, Fire Lord Ozai, thanks to his
husband.”

Zuko turns his head and glares at the man, while everyone around the table - except for his
Uncle and the Fire Lord on the Throne – laugh at his words.

“But apparently he can’t even reign that Water Tribe boy in. Looks like the Consort holds the
reigns on him”, Minister Yuma chimes in and the laughter around him becomes louder.

It is very tempting to just shove the man out of his seat, but before he can do so, Fire Lord
Ozai’s voice sounds through the room.

“Enough! I don’t have time for such nonsense.”

The laughter dies down immediately.

“Prince Zuko’s plans could hold a lot of potential. If you want to be sure that it is not a waste
of time and resources, maybe he could begin with only one site on one of the islands. Let’s
see how it goes before establishing a long-term project”, Uncle Iroh says and Zuko throws a
grateful look at him.

The Fire Lord waves his hand dismissively. “Fine. I’ll allow an experimental vinery to be
established. You may choose the location and sign a contract with the local farmers on your
own. I have bigger things to worry about. The White Lotus has attacked some of our ships
and caravans again. And they thwarted the capture of the Avatar, attacked Crown Princess
Azula and forced her to retreat.”
Unhinged anger swings in Fire Lord Ozai’s voice and Zuko’s eyes go wide. Azula has been
forced to retreat? She must be furious about it.

The prince doesn’t know what to think about the order that has made itself known since
shortly after the Night of the Dark Moon through several surprise attacks to the Fire Nation’s
trade routes, trying to interfere with Azula’s chase for the Avatar and there are also
speculations that they have been behind the attack at the Palace. The latter would mean that
they are after Azula and him (and maybe Sokka though probably for different reasons). It
would mean that Azula became from hunter to huntee and even though Zuko is not on good
terms with his sister, he also doesn’t want her to fall into the hands of a declared enemy of the
Fire Nation.

The prince throws a worried look at his uncle to see his reaction. Iroh has a frown on his
forehead and looks incredibly serious.

“I have set a bounty for any information that leads to their capture”, the Fire Lord declares.
“They might be a bunch of old fools, who believe that a child could defeat me – Me! Even
though I will soon be at the peak of my power once the comet arrives. But they are still a
thorn in the side of our proud nation. A thorn that must be pulled and destroyed.”

The Fire Lord rises from his seat.

“Ministers, there will soon be important reforms to be executed. The war will end in a few
months with the arrival of Sozin’s comet. In this moment the Crown Princess is on her way
back to the Fire Nation as I need her here for some important decisions. Our enemies might
not grow in numbers but in brazenness and ruthlessness and before we reach our biggest
glory we must overcome a moment of vulnerability. Most of you already know what I am
talking about. The Day of the Black Sun. Our enemies will see it as their chance to attack.
The Princess and I will make sure that everybody is safe and that it does not come to that.”

Zuko inhales sharply. That is a lot of information to take in and obviously his father isn’t
done yet.

“The Avatar is on his way to Ba Sing Se and there he will stay. He needs the Earth
Kingdom’s full support if he is to attack the Fire Nation. But the Dai Li have a strong hold
over the king. They won’t give that up for the Avatar’s sake. No, let him cut his teeth on it.
The longer the Avatar stays in Ba Sing Se, the better for us. Princess Azula will take care of
him once the timing is right.”

Prince Zuko’s mouth stands open. The Fire Lord wants Azula to do what?! He feels a shiver
run down his spine and he fights down the overwhelming urge to say something. Father can’t
be serious. He would send his own daughter to kill the Avatar? She is only fourteen years old!
She might be sadistic and frightening, but she is not a killer. How can father even think about
that? This is… Zuko has no words. All he can do is stare wide-eyed at the man on the
Throne.

The Fire Lord catches his gaze and he raises an eyebrow, basically daring Zuko to say
something. The prince feels his hands starting to shake and it takes all of Zuko’s self-control
to not stand up and remain silently on his seat.
He glances at Uncle, who shifts in his seat and clears his throat.

“Fire Lord Ozai, forgive me, but could you specify what you mean, when you say that the
princess will take care of the Avatar?”, he asks carefully, though Uncle Iroh is not capable to
ban the worry from his voice either.

The Fire Lord throws a bored look at him.

“Azula is capable to do what needs to be done, should the situation call for it. Even though I
want to be the one to end him. But not everything can be foreseen in war and should it come
to that, the Princess is ready.”

“I understand.”

The grim expression manifests on Iroh’s face and Zuko knows that Uncle is just as concerned
as he is.

Sokka leans against one of the pillars in the hall in front of the Throne Room. His arms are
crossed over his chest and his eyes are fixed on the dark red curtain, behind which Zuko
disappeared half an hour ago. He can feel the guards’ eyes on him. They still watch him like
he is an intruder, a prisoner, who shouldn’t be allowed to walk freely among them.

Ever since the attack on the Palace, the guards are not allowed to wear the masks anymore to
avoid another infiltration. It makes it impossible to ignore the obvious dislike on their
otherwise stern faces.

Sokka glares at them, before his attention is caught by three young woman walking down the
corridor. They are older than him, dressed in fine, flowery silk robes and their lovely faces
are painted with only a subtle layer of make-up. The flowers in their pinned up braids look
delicate and they make quite a stunning image as they come walking in his direction.

“Now look at this handsome young man”, the tallest of them with the turquoise robe says, her
eyes flickering at Sokka and a seductive little smile plays around her lips.

While her two companions in orange and pink giggle and cast flirtatious glances at him as
well, their eyes sparkling with mischief, the Water Tribe boy feels the heat rising to his
cheeks. He raises his eyebrows, a little unsure how to react, when they stop right in front of
him.

It is not the first time that he’s heard a comment about his looks these last few weeks but it’s
still new to him and he has no idea how to react. What is he supposed to do?

“Prince Consort”, they say in unison and do a curtsey.

“Uh… ladies”, he says and nods at them.

The girls exchange a look, that makes him actually feel uncomfortable. Sokka is well aware
that the guards are watching his every move and he has no idea, what these girls even want
from him. He wonders if it would be very rude to just slip away and try to escape. But he
can’t do that. He promised Zuko that he would be waiting for him exactly in this spot until
the meeting was over.

That doesn’t mean that he’s exactly cool about basically being cornered by those girls.

“Such a handsome warrior”, the girl in orange agrees with her friend.

The one in pink nods. “It’s a shame that you have to spend the days all by yourself, really.
We’ve heard that the Prince is neglecting you. That must make you feel lonely.”

She reaches out and places her hand on his biceps and suddenly it dawns on Sokka, what they
are, but he’s so perplexed that he doesn’t know how to make them leave him alone. His face
is burning.

“It’s fine”, he squeaks out in a high-pitched voice.

“There’s no need to be ashamed. We could help you out”, the turquoise one says, hooking her
arm under his and Sokka awkwardly tries to get out of her grip. His back is pressed against
the pillar as he unconsciously tried to retreat.

“That is a very...”, he thinks about what would be a fitting word. Nice? Disturbing?
Unsettling? “…offer. But, uhm, no thanks. I’m good.”

“Are you, Prince Consort? We could show you pleasure. Do you not desire a woman’s touch?
A woman’s lips wandering over your skin? A woman’s body covering your own?”

The pictures the pink lady paints in his mind make an odd feeling run through him. Heat is
pooling in his lower belly and Sokka has to admit, that she’s good with words. She knows,
what she’s doing. He has thought about being with a woman like this, of course he has. He’s
a teenager! And he can imagine it being nice, pleasurable even.

But Sokka is not an idiot. Her words do make him blush. But not only because being intimate
with someone seems tempting. Also because he’s married and he hasn’t stopped thinking
about kissing his husband for weeks and-

Great, now his brain is supplying the pictures she painted in his mind with Zuko’s body
covering his. The heat intensifies and yeah, probably he doesn’t desire a woman’s touch that
much. And definitely not one from a courtesan.

He shoves their hands from his arms carefully but resolutely and offers them an apologizing
smile.

“I’m afraid no”, he says and to his relief his voice doesn’t shake. The three courtesans
exchange a surprised look and the pink one has to hide a giggle behind her wide sleeves, that
makes Sokka feel like an idiot.
Of course it is exactly in that moment, that Zuko steps through the curtain followed by the
other ministers. They stop abruptly and literally everyone in the corridor is looking at Sokka,
talking to three courtesans at once. He wishes for the ground to swallow him whole.

While some of the ministers behind Zuko show a gloating, mean grin, Iroh looks stunned and
the prince himself seems taken aback, before he frowns and raises an eyebrow. Sokka hopes
that the helpless look on his own face tells him that this wasn’t his idea.

The courtesans become aware of the spectators and do a curtsey in front of him again.

“Prince Consort.”

Before they turn to leave, the orange one looks him in the eyes once more. “Should you
change your mind, the Velvet Rose Inn looks forward to your visit.”

With that, they slowly walk away and Sokka is left absolutely mortified.

He doesn’t dare look at Zuko, when the prince comes over to him.

“Should I ask?”, he says, sounding skeptical but there is the slightest hint of amusement in
his voice.

Sokka groans. “Please don’t.”

That actually makes Zuko chuckle and maybe that’s worth the shame.

“How was the meeting?”, Sokka asks to change the topic, while they start walking in
direction of Kebai’s office.

“Not too bad”, Zuko admits. “We can test our idea on one of the islands. Which means we
have to figure out which one would be the best to start.”

“Great. Want me to help you with that?”

“Sure, that’s why I said ‘we’.”

They share a smile, before Zuko turns serious.

“Father also had an announcement to make. Azula will be back within the next few days.”

“Lovely”, Sokka says sarcastically.

Zuko nods, but something about the expression on his face is off and he seems worried.

“Everything alright?”, he asks gently and Zuko sighs.

“Probably not. I… give me some time to think about it, alright?”

It’s a surprising request, but Sokka has no problem accepting it. “Sure.”
Zuko throws a grateful look at him, before he looks him over with a look that Sokka can’t
decipher and shakes his head lightly.

“If you… you know… the, uhm, the courtesans… Gosh, this is embarrassing”, he looks
decidedly away and Sokka feels his cheeks burn again. “If you want to… that’s… fine.”

Sokka looks at Zuko, whose cheeks are bright red as well and his posture basically screams
‘uncomfortable’ at him.

The girls were pretty, there is no denying. But Zuko is pretty too, in a completely different
way, and Sokka tries not to think too hard about how easy the words come over his lips.

“I don’t want to.”

Zuko looks at him, eyes wide with surprise, but the tension in his shoulders eases a little.

“Let’s just forget that ever happened, okay?”, Sokka offers and Zuko gratefully agrees.
 To Trigger Lightning
Chapter Summary

They embrace their re-found friendship. A training match escalates.

Chapter Notes

I'm so amazed by your feedback <3 Love you all, people.

Next chapter will only be online some time next week unfortunately, because I'll go on a
trip with the family so no time to write. But that'll give me time to think about the details
of the further outlining for Book 2 and Book 3 ;-)

That being said, be warned because there is going to be a CLIFFHANGER at the end of
this chapter. I'll update as fast as I can once I'm back from vacation.

Book 2: Spark

Chapter 3: To Trigger Lightning

Zuko spreads the map of the Fire Nation on the large wooden table and Sokka steps closer to
get a better look at it.

“We are here”, the prince says and points at the biggest island in the West, before he falls
silent and studies the map with a thoughtful expression.

Sokka watches him for a moment. He can’t help but think that the formal, ministerial robes
look a little too big for him underlining that the position of a minister isn’t usually made for a
teenager. And somehow the robes also make Zuko look older, some would say sublime,
maybe. But that could also be due to the serious look on his face. Right now the unscarred
side is turned to Sokka and the Water Tribe boy knows by now that the serious look is the
prince’s face is one of focus and concentration, while others might suppose it’s one of
annoyance.

The suppressed yet familiar feeling of fondness for the prince rises within him and Sokka is
glad, that they are working together. Technically Sokka probably isn’t allowed to, but on the
other hand, who cares? It is not like the position of the agricultural minister holds a lot of
prestige. It’s nothing to brag about, especially not in times of war, but if he’s not completely
mistaken that suits Zuko just fine.

The prospect of finally having something to do excites the Water Tribe boy and he doesn’t
really care about prestige either way. The only thing that makes him feel antsy about the
whole thing, is the fact that he’s literally about to help the Fire Nation figure out and improve
their food supply chain. It’s something that doesn’t sit well with Sokka and in some way it
makes him understand Zuko’s dilemma better, because it feels like he’s betraying his people.
But if Zuko’s right then by doing so they can also improve the situation for the occupied
Earth Kingdom provinces and that probably justifies it in some way. He hopes it does.

Rubbing his wrists unconsciously, Sokka leans over the map.

“Alright, talk me through it”, he asks.

“We can rule out Caldera, Shuhon and Jonduri. They are too urban and Jonduri has a harsh
climate”, Zuko explains pointing again on the capital, then on a rather central island and at
last on an island that is a little farther from the Fire Nation, basically located in the middle of
the sea between Earth Kingdom, Fire Nation and the former Southern Air Temple.

Sokka nods in understanding and points at a smaller island in the south. “What about this
one?”

Zuko shakes his head decidedly. “Bhanti? Absolutely not. No one has set foot on this island
for centuries. It’s basically a sanctum.”

Sokka can’t deny that he’s surprised that sanctums and their likes even exist for the Fire
Nation, because they weren’t hesitant when it comes to destroying other nation’s sanctuaries.
He doesn’t comment however.

“Any other options in the south?”, he asks.

Zuko nods. “Nán Yanshi could be a good place to start. We already grow a large variety of
stuff there, so vineries could be an option. Hing Wa maybe, though I’m not sure about the
climate. It’s a subtropical region, ideal for the ash-bananas we grow there, but I am not sure if
wine can handle that.”

“Okay. So Nán Yanshi. What about those eastern islands?”

“We can rule out Natsuo and Crimson Sails. Too much trouble.”

“Oh?”, Sokka throws a questioning look at him.

“Natsuo is bordering to the Earth Kingdom and with the current… unrest I don’t think it’s
wise to start our efforts there. And Crimson Sails is the home to pirates and outlaws.”

“Your father tolerates pirates and outlaws in his nation?”

Zuko shrugs and grimaces. “Yeah. It’s kind of a complicated history between the Fire Nation
and Crimson Sails. They are not loyal to us, but they never declared themselves enemies
either and it’s… complicated.”

Sokka raises an eyebrow and even though he’s curious, he decides that this is a story for
another time.

Zuko frowns while his gaze traces over the map.

“Ma’Inka could be an option. It’s a very prosperous island. I’m not sure if the citizens would
be thrilled if we install agricultural sites there. It’s mostly rich people and I don’t think that
they want to have farmers around. From a socio-cultural aspect I’m really not sure if it would
be a success. But the same applies to Ember Island, even though most of the wealthy only
spend a few months of the year there for vacation.”

Sokka throws a look at Zuko.

“You really know a lot about the geography and population.”

Zuko raises his eyebrows and shrugs awkwardly. “Uhm. I mean, it was kind of my job.”

Right, Sokka thinks and wonders how he could forget that Zuko was supposed to be the next
Fire Lord.

And it’s weird, like really weird, but there is something about him in that moment that makes
Sokka think that he can see Zuko being the Fire Lord. Maybe it’s the robes, maybe the
serious expression or the fact that Zuko seems so careful and deliberate while he
contemplates about the consequences of his decision. It’s obvious that he cares – and not only
about his own people.

It seems he has been looking at the prince for a little too long, because Zuko turns to him and
seems a little insecure.

“What?”, he asks.

Sokka quickly shakes his head.

“Nothing”, he says and looks back down onto the map. “Just thinking. Don’t rich people like
wine and stuff? Maybe we could find someone who would actually want to support the
vineries, if only to brag that the best wine in the Fire Nation grows on his land or something
along those lines.”

“That could actually work”, Zuko says and Sokka elbows him lightly.

“Don’t sound so surprised. The wine pits were my idea in the first place.”

From the corner of his eye he captures that the prince is rolling his eyes, but he doesn’t argue.
He hardly can, because it has been Sokka’s idea. The Water Tribe boy grins to himself.

“What about that island?”

Pointing at another spot on the map, Zuko crooks his head to the side.
“Dizin Island. Hm, it’s kind of a remote place, there isn’t much going on there. That could
make it pretty interesting.”

“Okay. So in conclusion we have Nán Yanshi, Dizin and Ember Island. We are both not
experts in the field, pun intented, but we should find out which one of those provides the best
conditions and go with it.”

“And find some farmers willing to try the idea”, Zuko adds.

Sokka throws another look at him. “You are literally the Prince of the Fire Nation. It’s not
like they can say ‘no’, right?”

A sour expression appears on Zuko’s face and he looks away. Sokka immediately regrets his
words, especially when Zuko snaps.

“I don’t like the idea of forcing someone into something they don’t want to.”

Sokka opens his mouth, but he actually has no idea what to say, so he closes it again. Of
course, Zuko isn’t like his father, who would just use violence if the people don’t follow him
willingly. He just came to the conclusion that Zuko cares, which makes it even more stupid to
assume that he would just order somebody around against their will. Sokka himself is the best
example for that and once more he becomes aware how lucky he has been to be given to
Zuko and not, Tui and La forbid, to Azula. He shivers uncomfortably.

“Sorry”, Sokka mumbles.

Zuko shakes his head and sighs. “Nevermind. It’s not about the farmers anyway.”

Sokka notices that the prince has clenched his hands into fists. Forcefully it seems, because
his knuckles are turning white. He raises an eyebrow questioningly.

Zuko huffs. “Believe it or not. I’m worried about Azula.”

Sokka’s eyes go wide. That is the last thing he expected to hear from Zuko. He leans against
the table and crosses his arms while a deep frown settles on his face.

“Care to explain?”, he asks with an edge in his voice.

The look that Zuko throws at him can only be considered helpless.

“I’m worried what she might become. I mean, she has always taken after my father. I know
that. And most of the time I can’t stand her, but she is still my little sister and he is turning
her into a monster.”

For a moment the very ugly statement, that Azula already is a monster, lingers on Sokka’s
tongue, but the look on Zuko’s face alone makes him swallow it down. An unspoken question
hangs in the air.

Zuko shakes his head. “He says he wants to do it himself, but somehow I think he wants her
to kill the Avatar.”
Sokka’s mouth stands open and he stares at Zuko. The prince isn’t looking at him.

“It’s just so fucked up. I have no idea what to do. The worst part is that I have no idea if she
would do it only to please Father or if she would do it, because she wants to do it. But what
kind of person would that make her? I… I know I couldn’t do it. But Azula… a part of me
wants to believe that she can’t neither, but actually I think she can and she would. I have no
idea how much is left of my little sister, that little girl that played with dolls and asked me to
read stories to her. I don’t know if she’s still there.”

Zuko’s voice is low and he blinks forcefully, willing the tears away. A hollow feeling settles
in Sokka’s stomach. He doesn’t say anything, but puts his hand on Zuko’s shoulder in a
display of comfort. The prince doesn’t need to say the words. Sokka knows them all too well.

He misses his little sister.

And while Sokka knows that Katara is still out there somewhere, hopefully safe either with
his dad or with the Tribe, Zuko’s sister seemingly got lost along the way. It’s difficult to
sympathize, because Sokka has never known Azula as anything but a malicious snake, but he
doesn’t even want to imagine what it would be like to know that Katara is gone.

He doesn’t say anything, but Zuko throws a grateful look at him nevertheless.

“Let’s just hope that it doesn’t come to that, huh?”, the prince says, his voice a little hoarse,
before he motions to the bookshelves. “C’mon, let’s figure out which is the best place for our
vinery.”

Sokka claps onto his shoulder in silent understanding. They don’t have to talk about it.

He could be happy, Zuko figures.

He didn't ask for the resort of agriculture and at first he despised it (though probably mostly
because of Kebai), but he feels like he's actually doing a good job and that he somehow
managed to get Sokka on board, makes it even better. Especially after he wasted weeks
avoiding the other boy just because he's a fool and can't handle his feelings properly.

He could be proud of the progress they are making. But his father's plans for Azula weigh
heavy on his shoulders, even more so given the fact that Zuko doesn't have the slightest idea
how to help her and what 'help' would actually mean. Zuko realizes with shocking clarity,
that it would be his task to chase after the Avatar if he was still the Crown Prince of the Fire
Nation. He knows that he couldn't kill the boy. For a millisecond he is grateful that he has not
been given that task, but to know that it will be up to his little sister doesn't make it any
better.
Zuko has conflicted and troubled emotions when it comes to Azula. Some days he thinks he
hates her, most times he's intimidated by her coldness, but there are also days like today when
he just wants to protect her, because he still has love for her and he refuses to believe that the
girl she once was turned into that cold-blooded inferno.

He usually doesn't put it into words. It's something he never talks about, not even with uncle.
So explaining those emotions to Sokka is something big and Zuko is grateful that the Water
Tribe boy didn't push him after confessing his worry about Azula. It really means a lot,
because Sokka doesn't hold any sympathy for her which is perfectly understandable. And
probably reasonable. But Sokka seems to accept or at least respect Zuko's emotions. That he's
not reprimanding him speaks volumes about the bond of trust and friendship between them
and Zuko wonders how he could ever doubt it.

But would Sokka help him help Azula? And again, what would that even mean? Zuko knows
what he wants it to mean - preventing her from having to do that task in the first place. But
would she even want that? Azula is so dedicated and devoted to their father, maybe she
thinks taking down the Avatar is the right thing to do.

Zuko is still standing in front of the bookshelf. He hasn't moved an inch and just stares at the
books without even taking in the titles. The prince has no answer to any of his questions,
when it comes to Azula and how to go on about her quest. It's not like he could do much, not
when he's practically forced to stay at the palace and she's out there somewhere.

He sighs.

Sokka is running over the titles of some scrolls and books and when he turns to Zuko again
with an arm full of texts he sends a small, encouraging smile in his direction. It makes things
a tiny bit better.

"You know what? It's a beautiful day. Let's take these outside. We can ask Jin for some
lemonade and make ourselves comfortable at the pond."

Zuko nods gratefully while another wave of affection for the Water Tribe boy washes over
him.

They decide to start their project at Ember Island, or rather they decide to give it a try and
find someone, who would be interested in establishing vineries on their territory in the south-
east area of the island. Zuko sent out several letters to potential investors and after a long day
of regular work of going over new lists of harvests and distributing plans from the Fire
Nation and the colonies with his usual minor adjustments in favor of the colonies, he is really
looking forward to a round of sparring with Sokka.
It seems the Water Tribe boy has been awaiting him on the training grounds, because he
jumps up immediately when his eyes find Zuko and he seems eager to starts.

Zuko shakes his head, while he takes off the light robe he wears on regular days in the office,
leaving him in a simple tunic that allows him to move freely. The prince wonders if it’s just
wishful thinking or if Sokka’s eyes really trail over the bare skin on his arms and collarbones.
The thought makes him tingle and Zuko hopes that he’s not blushing, even though his cheeks
heat up and he looks at Sokka looking for a blush on his face. With his tan it’s impossible to
tell and Zuko finds himself thinking that it’s pretty unfair, because his own pale skin doesn’t
hide anything and he’s blushing a little too often around the other boy for his liking.

Shaking his head decidedly, he unsheathes his dao swords, his eyes focused on Sokka, who
already got into a fighting stance. A smile plays around Zuko’s lips because he has to admit
that Sokka came a long way since he held a sword for the first time. By now he looks like he
knows what he’s doing. The clumsiness is gone and the weapon really suits him, Zuko thinks.

They start to circle each other slowly, each of them waiting for the other to make the first
move instead of rushing right into it.

Then, without warning, Sokka lounges forward, swinging his sword at Zuko’s head. The
prince easily parries the blow with one sword and counters with a quick strike to Sokka’s
midsection with the other. Sokka dodges to the side and spins around, aiming a sweeping
strike at Zuko’s leg.

Zuko leaps over it and lands behind Sokka, his swords at the ready and when Sokka turns to
him, they are both smiling at each other.

The Water Tribe boy has gotten so much better at this, his movements and his footwork are
fluid and the dedication he put into his training really shows. Zuko enjoys training with him,
because it is obvious that Sokka appreciates the sword as much as he does and he’s on a good
way to become a worthy opponent.

It’s Zuko who launches the next attack and this time they clash swords, the sound of steel
meeting steel rings across the training yard. Exchanging blows at an increasing frequency it
seems neither of them can gain an advantage and it really is impressive how well Sokka can
hold himself against two swords by now.

The way they move around the yard, circling each other without ever breaking eye contact,
faintly reminds Zuko of a dance. He spins, his swords glinting in the sunlight. Sokka moves
easily out of the way, mirroring Zuko’s steps with a posture that speaks of newfound
confidence in this territory. They move in synchrony and despite the sound of clashing metal
and the fact that they are literally trying to hit each other, there is something oddly tantalizing
about the whole situation. A fine layer of sweat is covering Sokka’s arms and the evening sun
drowns everything in an orange-golden light. Zuko knows that he should focus, but he can’t
help letting his eyes trail over Sokka’s body and feel a little aroused by the sight of the other
young man.

He’s blushing again, but his face is already heated by their sparring, so it doesn’t make any
difference. Zuko licks over his lips and he’s been distracted for a moment too long, because
he can barely raise his crossed swords to block Sokka’s hit.

Not only did Sokka became quicker on his feet, pushing against his sword Zuko can tell that
he also got a lot stronger and somehow that just adds to the heat pooling in his belly. They
stare at each other, both panting hard and there’s a mischievous sparkle in Sokka’s blue eyes.

“Gotcha”, he says smugly and takes a step back before lowering his sword, obviously
satisfied with himself.

Despite himself, Zuko sheathes his swords, a smile tugging at the corner of his lips.

“Well done”, he says and Sokka beams back at him.

“I had a great teacher”, he replies with a wink and Zuko doesn’t even try to convince himself
that his heart is beating so hard because of their sparring. It’s… he has to let go of this crush.
It won’t do him any good to hold on to it, because it’s leading nowhere. Neither does the
pining.

But before he can think about that too hard, a voice behind them makes him flinch.

“Here you are, Zuzu.”

He turns around to look at Azula. She leans against the wall, looking at her fingernails
instead of him and seems utterly bored.

“Azula!”, he exclaims, surprised and also relieved to see her unharmed.

Zuko didn’t know what to expect, when his father said that the White Lotus forced her to
retreat. But Azula looks like she always does: flawless, graceful, collected and without a hair
out of place.

“I was surprised to see, that you weren’t part of the welcome committee, brother.”

She looks at him and an ironic smile is playing around her lips. Zuko doesn’t know what to
make of it.

“I was busy with work.”

“Oh yeah, I heard about that. You surprised us all with your obvious talent as a simple scribe.
It’s true, none of us thought that you would turn out to be more of a secretary than a prince”,
she mocks and it bruises his pride.

Why does she have to be so infuriating? Azula really makes it hard to be worried about her,
when all she does is push his buttons.

Zuko snorts and crosses his arms over his chest. Sokka steps in next to him and throws an
unfriendly look at Azula.

“Laugh all you want. Your brother is doing a great job.”

Azula just raises an eyebrow. “I wasn’t laughing. It’s true. Good for you, Zuzu, that you
finally found something that you’re good at.”

It’s not meant as a compliment.

“Speaking of which: I have heard that your bending improved remarkably. Why don’t we
have a little training match? I’ll go easy on you. I promise.”

Zuko hesitates, because they both know how this match will end and he throws an insecure
look at Sokka, who looks back at him, his whole expression screaming ‘absolutely not’. The
prince sighs and tries to change the topic.

“It’s good to have you back”, he says, trying to sound as sincere as possible. It’s impossible
to tell if Azula believes it. Not that it matters, she doesn’t seem to care about it.

“Not for long. I’m only here to discuss strategies with Father. I brought news from the Earth
Kingdom and if we do it wisely we might get a hold of the Avatar and the Chief of the
Southern Water Tribe.”

Sokka’s head shots up to Azula and he watches the princess with wide eyes. Zuko’s heart
sinks, when he sees her false smile.

“Maybe you will see your father again soon, Sokka. Isn’t that great news? He’s neglected you
for so long. I wonder if you even want to see him again. I would be furious, if my father
abandoned me like this.”

Sokka’s knuckles crack and he’s about to take a step forward. Quickly, Zuko grabs his wrist
and holds him back.

“What do you know?!”, Sokka barks at her and Azula’s smile deepens.

“Just that he has quite an interest to cooperate with the Avatar apparently and that he never
seems to sail too far from where the boy and his entourage are heading. Doesn’t that hurt?
That he cares more about that boy than about you?”

Sokka tries to break free from his grip, forcing Zuko to pull him back a little and step in front
of him, turning his back to Azula. He squeezes Sokka’s wrist to make the other boy look at
him instead of glaring at his sister.

“Azula always lies”, he whispers vehemently, also reminding himself of it.

The princess continues as if nothing happened.

“On the other hand, you made yourself at home here with my brother. I’m glad to see that the
rumors about trouble in paradise were only just that – rumors.”

Sokka growls and even Zuko can’t help but throw an annoyed look at her. He doesn’t know
why her mocking bothers him more than other people’s and against his better knowledge
Zuko can’t just leave it be.
“How’s your chase for the Avatar going?”, he bites back. “I heard you’ve been outsmarted by
a bunch of old gasbags.”

Azula’s eyes narrow dangerously and a sudden rush of nervous, frightful energy jolts through
Zuko. He immediately knows that he has gone too far.

“What about that training match, Zuzu? Afraid that I’ll burn you?”

For a moment silence hangs over the training yard and the royal siblings are just staring at
each other. It’s when the grip around his wrist disappears that Sokka’s eyes widen in horror.
He can’t believe that Zuko would be so stupid to actually accept Azula’s challenge. This time
it’s him, reaching for Zuko’s arm but the prince just throws him an unfriendly look.

“You can’t do this”, Sokka hisses, but Zuko frees himself.

“It’s only for training”, he says and turns to Azula. “Let’s do this.”

Sokka can only watch, how a satisfied smirk tugs on the princess’ lips and it can’t mean
anything good. Not in that situation and definitely not coming from her.

“You should get out of the way, Sokka”, Zuko says. He sounds tense.

“This is a terrible idea!”, Sokka exclaims, but nobody is listening to him.

“Don’t worry, Consort. You’ll get him back in one piece”, Azula says casually, but that only
causes more nerves to flutter and more unease to overcome him.

Zuko just told him that she always lies and this really is a terrible idea! Sokka feels awful and
he really doesn’t want to sit by and watch, but Azula already casts the first blue flame into
her hands and it’s probably very unwise to just stand there, where a mislead punch could
easily set him on fire. Reluctantly, Sokka moves onto the rangs, biting his nails, while he
watches with increasing worry.

Zuko gets into stance as well, facing his sister, their eyes locked in an intense gaze, that
makes a shiver run down Sokka’s spine. Zuko casts his flame as well and crackling fire
illuminates their determined expressions. This absolutely doesn’t look like a friendly match.
And Zuko doesn’t even wear any armor. His arms are bare, while Azula is dressed in the light
military uniform of the Fire Nation. That’s another advantage on her side, on top of her
already superior bending abilities.

She strikes first, sending a surge of blue flames hurtling toward Zuko. He deflects the attack
with a swift swing of his arm, before he counters her attack with a burst of his own flames
accompanied by a strained gnarl. His determination is visible, but Sokka notices immediately
that the prince falls back into his old scheme of forcing out the fire with his muscles and it’s
exactly what Iroh told him not to do.

The flames look bigger, but even from the distance Sokka can tell that there’s less heat in it
and they burn out before even reaching Azula. Zuko doesn’t stand a chance and Azula knows
it.

Her attacks grow more aggressive immediately, the blue flames burning hotter and brighter.
She sends punch after punch in Zuko’s direction, driving him backwards. Zuko is fighting
back with everything he has, but it’s not enough and even his defenses seem to grow weaker
and he yelps in shock when a wall of flame washes over him. He’s barely able to dodge
below it.

Sokka’s heart is beating fast and he’s terrified, because Azula doesn’t show the slightest sign
of slowing down her relentless assault. He can’t watch this.

“STOP IT!”, he yells on top of his voice. “THIS IS MADNESS!”

A cold laugh escapes from Azula. If anything she only intensifies her attack and Sokka sees
the desperation flicker in Zuko’s eyes as he tries to block her, tries to find a way to turn the
tide.

He throws a helpless punch of fire at her, but Azula just jumps into the air, swirls around
herself in an impressive move of grace and precision and casts a whip of fire going down on
Zuko with her feet. Zuko somehow manages to block it by raising his forearms over his head
and slicing the flame to rush by him, but Sokka hears the painful hiss and this has to stop.

“Azula! STOP IT!”, Sokka yells again.

“I will show you madness”, she says darkly.

While the flame in her left hand grows smaller, an electric sizzling fills the air and Sokka sees
that she’s casting lightning in her right hand.

He sees the horror in Zuko’s eyes and does the only thing he can think off.

Sokka can’t remember that he has ever ran so fast in his entire life. The palace gardens and
corridors pass him by and he doesn’t care about the guards calling after him or the servant’s
worried yells. They are a background noise to the painful beating of his heart.

He bursts into the room not caring about being polite or showing proper behavior.

The three old men look at him in shock when Sokka comes to a halt. He wants to yell, but
he’s out of breath, unable to form a word. One of the guests discretely shoves a scroll into his
sleeve, but Sokka’s eyes are fixed on Iroh.
He forces himself to get the words out.

“Azula!” Pant. “Zuko!” Pant. “Lightning!”

Iroh’s eyes widen, the old man goes pale and he doesn’t even excuse himself to his guests,
before he rushes to follow Sokka.
 Cold
Chapter Summary

The fight between the siblings continues. Severe consequences ensue.

Chapter Notes

Did I just pull an all-nighter, because I felt bad about that cliffhanger? Yes, yes I did.
Does this chapter end with another one? Maybe... actually I'm not sure if that is
considered a cliffhanger, but see for yourself.
Your feedback is as always appreciated. I'll get back to your comments on the last
chapter once I'm back home ;-)
Love you guys. Best wishes, Kim

Book 2: Spark

Chapter 4: Cold

For a man of his constitution and age Iroh runs incredibly fast. They rush through the
corridors and there’s only one thought on Sokka’s mind.

Hopefully it’s not too late.

His heart is thrumming painfully against his ribs and he can’t get enough air in his lungs, but
Sokka doesn’t care about it. He just keeps on running, followed by Iroh, who is falling a little
behind. Sokka wants to yell at him that they have to move faster, but he knows that they are
already running as fast as they can.

Hopefully it’s not too late.

Sokka is scared. He’s absolutely terrified and for a split of a second he is not sure if he even
wants to know, wants to see what happened on the training ground while he was looking for
help. Tears are burning behind his eyes and he swipes a hand roughly over them.

By now the sun has almost completely set, and the few clouds in front of the deep red hue
look dark and threatening. It’s not that, what makes his blood run cold when he runs down
the wide pathway to the training area. It’s the flicker of bright blue light in the distance and
the electric sizzling in the air. Sokka comes to an abrupt halt, not even knowing why. He sees
that light and he knows that it’s Azula’s insanely strong fire and obviously she’s still
cornering Zuko, still chasing him. How is anyone supposed to withstand such a force of
power?

Then he realizes that Azula still being at it means that Zuko has not gone down yet. A tiny,
disbelieving flicker of hope sparks in Sokka and he looks back over his shoulder to look for
Iroh.

The old man is catching up and Sokka urges him on, turning back in direction of the training
ground. He flinches forcefully, when a lightning bolt is shot into the sky, the bright white
light cutting through the dusk.

There is a lump in his throat and goosebumps spread on his arms and Sokka is not sure if he’s
ever been this scared in his entire life. The Fire Nation attacking his tribe when he was but a
little boy, the soldiers chasing after him when they thought he was Katara only a few months
ago – he has been scared in those situations. But he hasn’t felt that bone deep fear that feels
like it’s crushing his heart, almost paralyzing him. And instead of running from that place
Sokka runs towards it, but it feels like he’s dragging his feet.

Sokka tries to steel himself for whatever might await him on the other side, when they enter
the training area through the tunnel under the ranks.

He’s panting hard and yet his breath hitches, when he takes in the scene.

Zuko is nowhere to be seen, but judging by the lightning Azula is directing at the man-sized
ball of fire pressed against the wall, he must be somewhere behind it. Sokka has never seen
anything like this and apparently Iroh hasn’t either, because he stops next to him and gasps,
shock and fear written all over his face.

Azula hasn’t noticed them yet. Her face wears an angry, dogged expression and whatever she
is doing seems to take a lot out of her. Her arms are shaking violently, while she keeps the
constant flow of lightning directed at the huge fire ball that slowly turns from orange to blue
flames.

“ZUKO!”, Sokka screams.

It makes Azula flinch and throw a look at him. For a moment it seems as if the blue fire
retreats, but then she growls and intensifies her efforts.

“Azula!”, Iroh yells, his deep and commanding voice sounding over the whole place. “Stop it
right this instant!”

The princess’ voice sounds strained, when she replies without retreating. “I’m only teaching
him a lesson!”

“Whatever you do to him, Azula, I will unleash on you tenfold! Let him go, NOW!”
Sokka has never seen Iroh so furious and he decides that he never wants to be on the
receiving end of this glare. He gets into a stance and raises his hands.

“Well, if you insist Uncle!”, Azula snarls under her breath.

But instead of letting go, she pushes the lightning one last time further against the ball of fire
that surrounds Zuko and within a second the orange flames are completely gone, replaced by
blue ones. The whole sphere is suddenly flashing with tiny lightnings.

Iroh throws a punch of fire at her and Azula swirls around, just in time to block it before it
can hit her and the lightning dies down. The ball of fire remains for a few seconds and bathes
the whole training ground in an eerie light before it goes out and everything is completely
dark.

An exhausted, pained moan comes from the direction where the ball of fire has been only
moments earlier, followed by the dull sound of a body hitting the ground.

“Zuko!”

Sokka doesn’t hesitate another second and runs to him, sliding the last few feet on his knees,
just in time to save the prince from completely toppling over and hitting the ground face first.

A moment later the lanterns around the place are lit by several little flames that Iroh casts
from his hands.

Sokka doesn’t pay any attention to it. He turns Zuko in his arms so he can look at him and his
throat becomes a little tighter. Zuko looks terrible. His body hangs limply in Sokka’s arms,
his eyes are half-shut and his breath comes in short heaves. The prince’s hair is falling
loosely into his face, his robes are sweat-soaked and he shivers violently. In fact, he’s
trembling so much that one could think he’s cold.

“Zuko, hey. Look at me. Zuko. Zuko, it’s me. It’s fine”, Sokka says, tapping against Zuko’s
cheek gently.

But there is no reaction. The prince seems far, far away and Sokka can tell that something is
wrong. His fingers start to shake.

“C’mon, man. It’s over. It’s fine. You did good. You did great. I’m proud of you.”

Not even that coaxes a reaction out of him and panic overcomes Sokka. He taps against
Zuko’s cheek a little more strongly, he wants to shake the prince to coax any reaction out of
him, while the pressure behind his eyes increases and Sokka feels so completely help- and
useless.

“Pathetic”, Azula says and Sokka glares at her.

She’s a little short of breath still, but she’s already getting back into her bored, untouchable
appearance and Sokka feels cold hatred cutting through his heart.

Iroh walks over to her and grabs her rather ungently around her wrists.
“What the- let me go!”, she protests, but Iroh won’t have any of it.

“You have never been known for kindness or compassion, but this is extra-ordinary even for
you. What did he possibly say or do for you to attempt killing your own brother?!”

Fury underlines every single one of Iroh’s words, yet he sounds close to crying.

Sokka adjusts Zuko’s body and holds him a little closer to himself, in hope to reduce the
trembling.

“I didn’t want to kill him. But Zuko needs a real opponent to improve his bending. In fact, I
was just helping him. And it worked. You saw what he did there”, she says, trying to serve a
justification for her ruthlessness when they all know that it’s just an excuse. A lie. Azula
always lies.

Sokka takes a deep breath.

“Azula”, Iroh says in a warning tone.

She snorts. “You attacked me. That is considered treason.”

Iroh’s eyes narrow and there is a flare behind his eyes and obviously Azula sees it too,
because she waves her hand dismissively.

“But it was only your worry for Zuzu, so I’ll let that one go.”

“I suggest you leave, Princess Azula. You’ve done enough. For the future I’d appreciate if
you let me decide which lessons are appropriate for the prince.”

“As you wish, Uncle. He’s tough, I’m sure he’ll be as good as new in no time.”

“Get out of here”, Sokka says not recognizing his own voice. It’s tinged with anger, hatred
and worry and he’s glad that he left the sword somewhere on the ranks when he went running
for Iroh. Otherwise, he couldn’t guarantee for anything.

Azula meets his bitter expression with a self-satisfied smirk and once more there is only one
word that comes to Sokka to describe her: Monster.

She leaves the training area, her footsteps fade into the distance.

Iroh kneels down next to him, shoving the hair out of Zuko’s face and looks his nephew over.

“My boy, my poor, sweet boy”, he murmurs and Sokka gulps.

“What is wrong with him? He will be alright, right? He’s going to be okay?”, Sokka pleads.

Iroh watches him and Sokka can see the truth in the yellow eyes. Iroh doesn’t know either.
Zuko feels like he’s floating. A brownish-golden fog surrounds him and he has no idea,
where he is. But neither is he confused, nor angry, nor sad. A comfortable indifference
surrounds him and actually Zuko feels a sense of calm wash over him. It’s nice, somehow.

But after a few minutes he wonders, what he is actually doing here. Wherever ‘here’ even is.
Should he try to get out of this fog? But where to? And in which direction? Can he even walk
here? Zuko supposes that he can at least try and takes a step forward. Nothing happens. His
feet touch ground even though that ground seems to be made of fog as well. This is a weird
place, Zuko figures.

Suddenly there is a noise behind him, a rustling that he has already heard somewhere and he
turns around cautiously. There is no one to be seen at first, but Zuko can hear soft steps
coming his direction and a more impactful sound every now and then. He waits for what is
about to happen.

Finally, a person materializes in front of him. Zuko hasn’t been aware that he tensed in the
first place, but he feels his shoulders relax when he recognizes the familiar face.

It’s that strange old man that has already visited him a few times in his dreams. The impactful
noise makes sense now – it’s the red dragon walking with its master.

“You again”, Zuko says, but greets him with a bow.

“Yes, we meet again, Prince Zuko”, the old man says and stops in front of him.

He looks at Zuko sympathetically. There is such an all-encompassing sadness in his eyes, that
Zuko feels touched as well. The feeling becomes more intense, when he discovers the same
sadness in the red eyes of the dragon. So far, Zuko has been intimidated by the powerful
creature, but right now it seems almost gentle. It sits down behind its master and lowers its
head so that it’s level with Zuko’s eyes.

The prince flinches a little, but he reminds himself that this is a dream and the last time it
breathed fire, that fire didn’t burn him, so probably there is nothing to worry about.

And this time the dragon only exhales deeply, it sounds strangely like a sigh and warm air
washes over Zuko’s body. It’s a pleasant warmth, one that heats him to his core. He didn’t
even realize that he felt cold.

Strange. Zuko has never felt cold in his entire life.

The old man puts a hand onto the dragon’s snout and he sighs as well.

“You are so strong and brave”, the man says and his voice shakes a little. “My dear boy, so
many would have given up and just let it happen. But you saw it through, like you always
do.”

Zuko frowns. “Saw what through?”

The man shakes his head. “It has already happened, Prince Zuko. Don’t run from it. You have
to face the truth eventually. I wish we could help you, my boy. But we are not more than a
memory, an echo of the past, sounding within you.”

“I don’t know, what that means.”

“Ah”, a sad smile lingers on the man’s lips. “Your mother would be very proud of you, Prince
Zuko. I, for my part, know that I am. It’s time for you to go back.”

“Back?”

The man nods and the dragon snorts, impatiently, small clouds of smoke rising from its
nostrils.

“Yes, Prince Zuko. This is not a place for a young and strong man like you are. And it seems
there is someone waiting for you on the other side. You should go.”

Zuko nods, despite his confusion. Then, he scratches his head.

“Which direction?”

The old man raises an eyebrow. “What do you think?”

He looks around, but there is nothing but fog. It looks just all the same. But as he turns
slowly he feels a light pull. It’s cold, uncomfortable, almost painful.

He throws a look at the old man and points in the direction. The elder nods.

“Be brave, Prince Zuko. You’re not alone.”

Zuko gulps and takes a step forward. Then another. And another. Then, the ground
underneath his feet gives in and he falls through the fog.

Zuko gasps for air and blinks heavily. He’s shaking, his robes are sticking to his body and
he’s aware of the source of warmth at his back. Zuko is exhausted, his body hurts and he’s
not sure if he can move.

The memories come crushing down on him and his eyes widen, his breath quickens and he
doesn’t see Sokka and his uncle leaning over him with worried looks. All he sees is fire
surrounding him, closing in on him. Zuko tried with all his might to keep the lightning away,
knowing that it would kill him if he didn’t and it took every little ounce of energy out of him
to maintain that ball of fire that protected him from Azula’s power.

“Zuko? Zuko?”
The voice seems to come from far away and the prince tries to fight the panic down and
concentrate on that voice. He blinks a few more times and finally he makes out Sokka’s face
in front of the dark sky.

The Water Tribe boy seems relieved, when Zuko’s eyes focus on him, at least judging by the
heart-felt sigh. He hits him softly against his shoulder.

“You scared the shit out of me!”, Sokka hisses. “Don’t you ever do something like that again.
You hear me?”

Zuko nods. Or at least he tries to, but even that little movement is too much. He groans. A
shiver runs down his spine and there are goosebumps on his arms and legs and he feels cold.
He shifts a little closer to Sokka.

“Do you think, that you can sit up, nephew?”, Uncle asks softly and Zuko nods again.

There are two pairs of hands that support his movement and in the end he’s sitting. His upper
body is still leaning against Sokka’s, but it’s something. He’s still shaking.

“Is this normal?”, Sokka asks in Iroh’s direction.

He wraps an arm around Zuko’s shoulders and it feels nice. Warm. Comfortable. He could
just lean his head against Sokka’s shoulder or his neck and drift off to sleep. That sounds
nice. Zuko’s tired.

“It’s the exhaustion, probably”, Iroh says.

“’M cold”, he mumbles, actually considering falling asleep right then and there.

He doesn’t notice that Uncle’s eyes go wide and the worried look Sokka throws at him. His
eyelids are growing heavy and with every passing moment sleep seems so much more
desirable.

“We have to take him to the temple”, Iroh says insistently.

Zuko doesn’t know what is Sokka’s reaction to that, but shortly after there are hands pulling
on his arms and then he’s upright, held by Sokka on his right and Iroh on his left. Zuko
groans and forces himself awake. He’s trying to help them carry him through the palace by
setting one foot in front of the other with great effort. Everything around him is a blurr and
later he can’t remember how he got there, but after a while they lay him down on a warm,
soft pad and Zuko sighs gratefully.

Zuko still seems to be halfway passed out, when they lay him down on the bamboo mat on
top of the stony hearth in one of the treatment rooms of the temple. Shyu and a young novice
are already stirring a small fire underneath.

Sokka really doesn't like the concerned look on the usually stoic Fire Sage's face. He's
standing next to Zuko, his hand still placed on the prince's shoulder. Sokka tunes out the
sound of Iroh's low voice, who's explaining what happened to Shyu. His gaze rests on Zuko's
face and the prince looks back at him through half-lidded amber eyes.

"Stay?", Zuko asks. His voice sounds small and tired.

Sokka nods and gulps against the lump in his throat.

"'Course", he croaks out, resisting the urge to run his hand through Zuko's hair. Instead he
squeezes his shoulder lightly.

Maybe it's due to the stony surface heating up, maybe it's due to his reassurance but Sokka
notices that the trembling of Zuko’s body subsides. It's a good sign, he supposes and relaxes a
little bit.

Next to him someone clears his throat and Sokka startles a little.

"Prince Zuko, will you allow us to examine you? We will keep the flames as small as
possible."

Zuko tenses up immediately, but he nods weakly.

"Nobody is going to hurt you, nephew", Iroh says quietly. "You're safe."

The prince nods again.

"May I ask you to take a step back, Prince Consort? We need the space and we can't have
your energy interfere with his", Shyu explains.

Sokka does as he's told, not without squeezing Zuko's shoulder once more, before he walks
over to Iroh and kneels down next to him. They share a look and Sokka hopes to find
optimism and confidence in Iroh's eyes, but instead there is only sadness and worry.

Suddenly he feels so useless and angry. Why did Zuko have to accept the challenge? Why
couldn't he simply ignore Azula? And why couldn't she just leave him alone? Why does she
hate him so much?

Zuko should have known better. Sokka absolutely doesn't understand how he could be so
reckless, so stupid, so stubborn to accept a challenge that he knew he was going to lose.

Sokka wants to lash out at him and at the same time he just wants to hold Zuko close and tell
him that everything is going to be alright. Right now, he can't do neither. He can just watch
the Fire Sages do their work.

Shyu and his novice cast little flames into their hands and start to move them in a circular
motion a few inches above Zuko's body. Sokka recognizes it as the energy-reading, that he
already witnessed the first time they visited the temple together.
But back then Shyu didn't look so upset. His novice repeats the motions over Zuko's legs and
lower body several times and frowns.

"Master?", he asks, a little insecure and throws a questioning look at him. Shyu's reaction,
that is a knowing, discouraged look does nothing to ease Sokka's worry.

"I know", the Fire Sage replies, leaving Sokka wondering what exactly is going on.

It must be something grave, otherwise they wouldn't look so concerned. But Zuko looks fine,
apart from the obvious exhaustion. So what did Azula do to him?

The heat from the stony hearth below and the Sages’ flames above slowly seeps into Zuko’s
body, pushing back the cold. They are infusing him with warmth, that eases not only the
heaviness in his muscles but also helps him clear his mind.

Zuko feels shaken, he feels off in a way that he can’t quite put into words.

Probably that can be expected, given that his little sister just turned a training practice into a
fight for his life. He thought it was the end. Seeing her direct the lightning in his direction,
Zuko has been convinced that it would be his end. He unleashed his fire on instinct, in a
reflex more than anything else knowing that it physically couldn’t stop the lightning. But he
simply had to do something, when he knew that he couldn’t escape. And yet, somehow it did
stop it.

Somehow he managed to hold her back, even though it took everything out of him. He’s still
here and for once Zuko is grateful for the Fire Sages’ care.

He relaxes slowly and takes in the heat that surrounds him, like a lizard on a stony rock in the
summer. If someone was to put a blanket over him, Zuko would fall asleep instantly. But it
would be undignified and he has to keep up some appearance even though he surely is not
giving the best impression at the moment.

He tenses a little, when Shyu bends the fire over his face, but unlike the last time Zuko
doesn’t freak out or calls him off. For one, he sees the necessity after such an intense fight
and also, the heat washing over him really feels nice. The shiver that runs down his spine
feels comfortable unlike the cool ones earlier.

Shyu’s forehead is deeply furrowed and the Fire Sage looks awfully serious, when he
gestures to his novice to take a step back. Then he holds his open palms over the center of
Zuko’s chest and the heat intensifies strongly.

Zuko clenches his teeth. It feels as if a heavy weight is pushing down on him, it’s not actually
painful, just very uncomfortable. It doesn’t feel warm, but somehow intrusive.
He hisses and from the corner of his eye he notices the worried look that Sokka throws at his
uncle, who watches the whole procedure with a look matching Shyu’s.

“Do you feel anything?”, Shyu asks and Zuko throws him a disbelieving look, because how
could he not feel that heat on his skin?

“You could say that”, he presses out.

“Does it spread? Into your arms? Through your stomach? Your legs?”

Zuko looks at the elder man, not really understanding, what he’s talking about, but he shakes
his head. The intense heat reverberates in his chest, directly under Shyu’s hands, but it
doesn’t go further. Zuko can tell, because the novice dims down the fire under the stony
hearth and he notices the missing source of heat immediately.

Shyu doesn’t comment, but he closes his palms and pulls his hands back, cutting the constant
flow of warmth directed at Zuko.

The prince feels the loss immediately. For a moment the heat lingers within his chest, but a
few seconds later it vanishes, leaving a disturbingly empty feeling behind.

Zuko frowns and his heart starts to beat faster. He can feel the blood pumping through him,
but something is missing. The solid stream of energy and warmth is missing. And now that
he concentrates on it, he knows what feels off. There is no flame, not even a tiny spark. That
spot right next to his heart, that is supposed to be filled with heat and flares… it’s empty. It’s
a void.

Zuko’s eyes widen and he jolts up, ignoring the dizziness that the motion causes and throws a
punch into the air. Nothing happens.

“Easy, Prince Zuko”, Shyu says in an attempt to calm him down, but Zuko doesn’t even hear
him.

His heartbeat echoes in his ears, tuning everything else out and he stares at his hands in
disbelief. This can’t be happening.

Maybe a punch is too much. After all he put so much effort into his defense tonight, it makes
sense that he hasn’t got the power anymore. Plus, it’s dark outside. It’s normal that his fire is
weaker by now.

Zuko takes a deep breath and opens his palm as he exhales.

It stays empty.

He doesn’t feel the slightest pull. There is no energy following his movements. The prince
gulps and threads a hand through his hair, trying to keep his composure. He fails.

“No, no, NO!”, Zuko yells. “This can’t be happening! This is just a nightmare and I’ll wake
up any minute now and everything is alright.”
Sokka jumps to his feet.

“Zuko”, he starts slowly, but the prince interrupts him.

“No! Don’t tell me that this is not a dream.”

When Sokka just looks at him with a discouraged and pitiful expression without saying
anything, Zuko shakes his head. He jumps off the stony table and lands on wobbly feet, but
that doesn’t stop him from motioning through a few, easy katas. He puts as much force as he
dares into his kicks and punches, but not a single spark emerges from him.

“Prince Zuko, I must insist that you calm down”, Uncle says behind him.

“Calm down?”, Zuko whispers and turns around to look at him. Tears start to cloud his vision
and his eyes search for Shyu’s.

“This is only temporary, right? When the sun comes up, I will have my power back.”

The old man looks to the ground and it is all the confirmation that Zuko never wanted to
receive. He sinks down onto his knees, shattered, when the realization sinks in.

He has lost his bending. The fire in his heart is out.

 Uncertainty
Chapter Summary

Zuko's fire is gone and they have to deal with it.

Chapter Notes

Let me thank all of you for your comments and reactions on the last two chapters. I'm
back, and so here we go with a new chapter. I'm not sure how I feel about it, but for now
that is what it is.
Enjoy!

Book 2: Spark

Chapter 5: Uncertainty

It is quiet in the chamber inside of the temple, when Zuko gets off the stony hearth with a
tired and beaten expression shortly after the break of dawn. He looks pale, a lot paler than
usual, and so incredibly hopeless, that it almost makes Sokka hurt physically. Even more so,
when the prince insinuates a light bow at Fire Sage Shyu's direction and thanks him for his
services. Sokka knows how much Zuko hates the temple and how little respect he holds for
the Sages, so this is really saying something.

He gets up as well from his spot on the side, where he has been sitting and watching over
Zuko the whole night.

"C'mon, we should get some sleep", Sokka suggests, but Zuko shakes his head.

"You go. I think, I will take a walk. Yeah, yes I will do that", he answers, but it seems Zuko is
rather talking to himself than to anyone else.

The sorrowful expression on his face is the only reason, that Sokka doesn't argue and it's
understandable that Zuko would need a moment to himself. After all, he just got the worst
possible news and Sokka can't imagine what he must be feeling right now.

Not only did his sister try to kill him, but as a consequence Zuko lost his bending power,
which is something that Sokka didn't think was even possible.
He sighs helplessly as he watches Zuko go.

Shyu's novice begins to remove the ashes from below the stony table, while Iroh and the Fire
Sage stand in a corner and talk in low voices to each other.

Sokka doesn't mean to pry, so he tries to come up with an idea on how to handle this new
situation. He's tired and worried, and neither of those are really good advisors when trying to
make a plan. His thoughts are slow and muddled and instead of coming up with something
productive or creative the only thing that really stands out clearly is that nagging feeling of
guilt that settles in his heart.

If only he had been faster when getting Iroh. If only he had thought about bringing his
boomerang so that he could have distracted Azula and gave Zuko a chance to escape before it
was too late. Sokka can't help but think, that it's at least partially his fault that Zuko is unable
to bend fire anymore. He feels a little nauseous at that and wishes that he could come up with
something to make this right, but somehow he's stuck on what happened, unable to think
ahead.

The fight between the royal siblings has been unbelievable. Sokka has never seen such fire
before. What Zuko had done there to shield himself, casting the brightest and most
impressive thing he's ever seen someone do with flames, has been beyond compare. The
logical part of Sokka doesn't understand how the fire could have held off that lightning or
how the prince didn't burn himself. He understands even less how Azula changed the color of
his fire or how she managed to rob him of his bending. With a shudder Sokka wonders if that
means that she's kinda absorbed it, making her even more powerful.

Either way, something otherworldly happened and now they have to deal with the severe
consequences. It's a tragedy, really, because Zuko improved so much ever since he started
training with Iroh. He has made progress, slowly maybe, but he was beginning to master his
element. That it's gone now, leaves a bitter taste in his mouth and Sokka has no idea how to
comfort the prince.

He has been scared for Zuko's life, when he held him in his arms at first and it's a feeling that
Sokka never wants to experience again. But he can't help thinking that losing his bending is
probably the second worst outcome of the fight.

"How did she do that?", he asks under his breath and clenches his hands into fists.

A hand on his shoulder, makes Sokka look up. Shyu and Iroh have come over to him, both
equally concerned. The Fire Sages sighs.

"I don't think that Azula did anything. It is impossible to take away another one's bending. It
is something that has never been heard of."

"What are you saying? That Zuko brought this on himself?"

The Fire Sage nods sadly. "I'm afraid so."

Sokka stares at him, before he turns his head to look at Iroh, who looks shaken just like the
rest of them.

"How is this even possible? Has this ever happened before?"

"I'm not sure", Shyu admits. "But I will consult some of the old books to try and find an
answer for the question and a cure for the prince's condition."

Sokka nods, before another thought crosses his mind. "Zuko must never know that he did
that. He would reproach himself terribly. He would blame and hate himself and..."

"I agree. What my nephew needs now is unwavering support."

Sokka nods and they exchange a meaningful look. It causes an odd feeling to stir within him,
the urge to protect and hold, and with it comes the self-loathing for not having been there
when Zuko needed him, but also that unnerving tingling in his belly at the idea of being
close.

It's a really strange mix of emotions and with the tiredness on top, Sokka struggles to think
straight but somehow he manages.

"What are we going to do about this? What will the Fire Lord do once he learns about this? I
can't stand by and watch him burn Zuko or worse. I can't do this!"

Iroh hums in agreement.

"We must keep it a secret for as long as we can manage", he says.

Sokka blinks, puzzled by this suggestion. He crooks his head questioningly.

"Azula doesn't know, so why would the Fire Lord?", Iroh points out.

While Sokka's mouth stands open, Shyu nods thoughtfully. "It could work. But not forever."

"No, not forever. But maybe long enough. The only people, who know are in this room. I'd
say the risk is reasonable for the time being."

Shyu nods and throws a look at his novice, who just finished the cleaning. The young man
bows before him.

"My lips are sealed, Master." He turns to Iroh. "Grand Master."

Sokka frowns, because he hasn't been aware that Iroh holds a position amongst the Sages, but
maybe it's rather an acknowledgement of Iroh's age and wisdom. Not that it really matters.

"I will go and look for Zuko, before he stumbles across Azula or worse", he says and Iroh
nods.

"That is a good idea. And once he's ready, we shall continue our training. There are things
that you can learn - both of you - that don't need bending, but that will help you understand
more."

At that Shyu throws a surprised look at Iroh, almost as if he wants to protest, but Iroh looks
firmly back at him.

"We will be there", Sokka promises, before he turns to go.

Zuko takes a deep breath and lets the crisp, cool morning air flood his lungs. He exhales
slowly, trying to get rid of the tension that has a firm hold on his body.

The prince is sitting at the edge of the turtle-duck pond, his arms are wrapped around his legs
and his head is resting on his knees. He tries to take in the beauty of the scene before him.
The sun is still rising, casting a soft, golden glow over the water. A few ducklings waddle
clumsily behind their mother, that glides effortlessly over the surface, quacking softly to her
offspring. It's the only noise sounding in the garden at this early hour.

The serinity of the moment does little to ease the turmoil within him. Zuko is tired and sleep-
deprived from spending the whole night in the temple. He is still exhausted and his muscles
are sore from fighting against Azula. The prince can't decide if he's feeling hot or cold. The
breeze that flows over his arms is chilly. But otherwise Zuko feels too warm, due to the hours
he has lain on the stony hearth in the temple and Shyu's countless attempts to fix him. The
old Fire Sage tried everything, he pulled his whole repertoire to reignite Zuko's flame almost
working himself to exhaustion, but to no avail.

It’s gone. Zuko feels the emptiness, feels the loss like he’s cut off a limp.

His flame has always been a nervous and unstable little thing - easily wavering, sometimes
flaring dangerously, sometimes barely more than an ember. But it has been there. Zuko might
has been clumsy at nurturing it and bending it to his will, but the fire has been there.

A sigh comes over the prince's lips and he buries his face against his knees, trying to fight
down the desperation that is rising within him.

He doesn’t even have it in him to scream or cry. Zuko is just tired and he feels numb, small
and helpless. How is he supposed to go on from here? He doesn’t even know what exactly
happened, how it is even possible that his flame burned out.

He’s never heard of such a thing. Even Shyu and his uncle didn’t have an explication. They
discussed theories while they infused him with heat, but Zuko didn’t listen. He was too
occupied trying to absorb the warmth and their fire and somehow spark a flame within him. It
didn’t work.

He’s lost his bending. He’s a Fire Prince without fire.

It’s a joke. He's a joke. Now even more so than ever before.

All he did was trying to stand his ground against Azula and he did. Zuko didn’t know that he
was capable of doing what he did. He only knows that it shouldn’t have worked. He shouldn’t
have been able to shield himself against her lightning with his fire. But the flame took him
over and now it’s gone.

Zuko doesn’t understand. It doesn’t make sense. And probably it doesn’t matter. He paid the
price and he almost finds himself wishing that he didn’t, even though he knows what the
other consequence would have been.

A loud quack next to him makes the prince look up. The turtle-duck has come closer,
followed by her little ones and looks at him curiously.

Zuko reaches his hand out slowly and she looks at it, rising her wings slightly to allow the
ducklings hide under them, if need be. They are gentle creatures, Zuko thinks and carefully
opens his palm not far from a curious duckling, that walks ahead of the others and stretches
his head into his direction. The mother-duck quacks again, wary of Zuko's motions and the
duckling stops abruptly before it hurries back to her.

"Don't worry", Zuko says quietly. "I'm not a thread."

Anymore, he adds bitterly in his thoughts.

It’s overwhelming, really. He just feels wrong, like an integral part of himself is missing.

He couldn’t stand the pitiful looks or Uncle’s words of encouragement, which is why he
excused himself for a walk, even though he was aware that neither of them, least of all
Sokka, seemed to be thrilled to let him go instead of continuing their fruitless attempts of
growing a flame within him.

For Zuko it’s impossible to see hope in the fact, that he can hold a flame that someone else
puts into his hand. It’s not like he can do anything with it - neither grow it, nor direct it or do
anything useful. It felt wrong, when first Shyu and then Uncle tried. Like a mistuned sound
echoing within him, uncomfortable like a foreign object that he didn’t know how to handle.

Shyu mentioned that maybe the sunrise would help, but as Zuko feels and listens within him
there is still nothing. He doesn’t even try to ignite a flame.

He sighs again and looks at his reflection on the water surface.

He’s been destroyed by fire. Inside and out.

Zuko buries his face against his knees once more.

He must have fallen asleep, because when he comes to again, the sun has fully risen. Zuko
raises his head and hisses at the sharp pang of pain that jolts through his neck. He rubs it
soothingly and turns his head at the sympathetic hum next to him.
Sokka is sitting there, polishing his boomerang and it seems as if he's been keeping watch
over him. They share a short look, before Zuko turns his gaze back to the pond and the
ducklings that swim around more lively by now. Zuko takes a deep breath. There's something
about them, that is just soothing.

Sokka doesn't say anything at first, but smiles at him empathetically. Zuko is grateful that, for
once, the Water Tribe boy is not telling him, that everything is going to be alright.

"How long have you been here?"

"A while."

They don't look at each other, Sokka turns his attention back to his boomerang and Zuko
watches the mother-duck cleaning herself.

"I could tell you that you've been an idiot to accept your sister’s challenge. Or that being a
nonbender is not so bad. Especially as you are a great swordsman. But I guess, it's not the
right time for that. So I won’t."

Zuko snorts. "I appreciate that."

"I thought as much."

Silence spreads between them.

Zuko knows that every word Sokka said is true. He has been an idiot, a fool to believe that
there was still something good in his sister. That she was still there. But the Azula from
before she bent fire for the first time, the little girl he liked to play with and read stories to is
definitely gone, just like his flame.

And that fucking hurts and actually he can't tell what he's more upset about.

"Was that an Agni Kai?", Sokka interrupts his thoughts and Zuko's first impulse is to shake
his head. But when he thinks about it, it kinda seems that way.

"Depends which way you look at it. Probably. Yeah."

He gulps and shakes his head, because now he can't unsee it. He's not only lost his flame but
probably the last remains of honor that he still possessed.

"I'm a disgrace", he mutters, still not looking at the boy next to him.

Sokka lets out a deep sigh and it's obvious that he doesn't agree.

"That day when Shyu showed me around the temple, I read the prophecy about you", he says.

"It's all just rubbish."

Sokka shrugs. "I'm not so sure about that anymore. I mean, sure, it mentioned a strong
bender. But did it ever occur to you, that maybe the prophecy is referring to inner strength?"
"Now you're sounding like my uncle."

"Your uncle is a wise dude, so I'll take that as a compliment."

"But you're overlooking something. It's about a strong bender. I lost my bending."

That causes Sokka to look around nervously, but there is no one in sight so Zuko goes on.

"Father already stripped me of the succession. If he learns that I can't bend anymore he'll strip
me of my title altogether. Or worse."

"Yeah, about that... We discussed it after you left and, uhm, we agreed that it would probably
be better to keep that to ourselves", Sokka says and Zuko stares at him wide-eyed.

"You want me to lie to my father?"

Sokka shrugs. "Technically, it wouldn't be lying. You just don't mention it. Think about it:
right now there is exactly a handful of people who know and they are all on our side. Azula
just saw that you lost the match and that you were pretty beaten up. But she has no idea what
actually happened."

For a second the suggestion sounds tempting, but Zuko can't fight the fear that is immediately
rising up within him. He's never been a good liar and if the Fire Lord finds out that Zuko has
been hiding such a shameful secret, his wrath would be unimaginable. It's a lost cause and he
better admits that and faces the consequences right now.

"How long do you think this will work? They will find out eventually. It would only buy us
some time."

"Exactly", Sokka agrees. "And meanwhile we can think of something."

Zuko shakes his head, because the optimism in Sokka's voice sounds forced and desperate.

"I don't think time is gonna bring my bending back."

"Maybe not. But Azula will be gone in a few days and your father isn't exactly paying a lot of
attention to your bending anyway. So maybe, it will give us enough time until the Avatar-"

"Sokka", Zuko interrupts him. "You saw what my sister is capable of. And the Fire Lord is
even more powerful. Do you really think a twelve-year-old boy, who hasn't even mastered all
the elements yet is going to stop them?"

The sigh that leaves Sokka's lips is unnerved and he pinches the bridge of his nose.

"Listen", he begins. "I cannot say, that I can relate to what you're currently going through.
And actually I'm kinda angry of you, but that's not the point here, okay? I understand that you
lost something, Zuko. But your bending is not what makes you, who you are."

The Water Tribe boy scratches his neck awkwardly and the almost shy expression, that settles
on his face doesn't really fit him. He turns his eyes away and opens his mouth and whatever it
is, that Sokka is obviously considering to say, seems to be difficult.

He looks beautiful, Zuko thinks incoherently, unable to tear his eyes away. Out of nowhere he
suddenly gets an idea, what Sokka could be wanting to say and a queasy feeling settles in his
stomach. He is not ready to deal with this right now. He needs a distraction.

"I always loose. It's the story of my life. Everything I ever had, I've lost", the prince says
vehemently, as if he's trying to convince Sokka that believing in him is a waste of time.

The other boy just shrugs. The blue eyes finally turn to him again and Zuko can't tell if the
little smile that spreads on Sokka's lips is rather sad or hopeful.

"You're not going to lose me."

To underline his words, Sokka reaches for his hand, as slowly and carefully as Zuko reached
for the turtle-duckling earlier. Unless that the Water Tribe boy is going through with it.
Sokka's hand is warm and sure. It's not the first time that he takes Zuko's hand, but this time
it's different.

It sends Zuko's heart racing, but definitely not in a good way.

Zuko is not sure that he's drawing the right conclusions or if this is just an amicable way of
showing his support. It somehow doesn’t feel like the latter. If Sokka had told him, what
Zuko thinks he's telling him any other day, he probably wouldn't have believed it at first
either, but it would have made him feel giddy and it would have made his stomach tingle and
it would have made his heartbeat speed up excitedly. Right now, however, it sends him into a
panic and his heart is beating painfully against his chest and he absolutely doesn't know what
to make of it. It's just too much.

Zuko doesn't have the heart to pull his hand back, but maybe his discomfort is showing on his
face, because Sokka's smile fades.

Instantly, Zuko curses himself. Why can’t something in his life just be easy?

Why does everything have to be so complicated? He likes Sokka, he really, really likes him
for crying out loud. But right now he's just too overwhelmed by everything and he doesn’t
even know how to deal with himself right now or with the loss of his fire. Why does Sokka
have to bring this up now?

"Chrm, chrm."

Someone behind them clears her throat and they turn around simultaneously, Sokka letting go
of his hand immediately and Zuko is almost relieved about the interruption. But once he
realizes, who it is, he feels even worse than before.

Azula is standing under the tree by the pond and smiles at them in that typical, malicious way
of hers.

"I'm sorry, am I interrupting something?", she asks in a voice sweet as honey and Zuko feels
the anger burning up inside him. Unless, it's missing something. It's missing the actual burn
and that makes him feel just pathetic.

"What do you want?", he barks out, nevertheless.

"I just wanted to check on you, brother. You don't look so good. Are you feeling unwell?"

To his surprise it's Sokka, who speaks up before he can even react and the Water Tribe boy
sounds bitter.

"Why? Are you here for a rematch?"

Azula's eyes narrow on him and Zuko knows that the hatred in Sokka's is not just a product
of his imagination. His grip around the boomerang tightens and he can only hope, that Sokka
won’t lose his calm, because Zuko can’t defend him whatsoever.

"No, thanks", Azula says calmly. "I know now, what Zuzu is capable of. Father will be
pleased to hear that."

She smirks in his direction and Zuko's eyes widen. Again, panic rises up within him, but
Sokka throws him a meaningful look and despite all of his turmoil and confusion Zuko
knows that he can trust him, so he keeps his mouth shut.

"You shouldn't underestimate him, Azula. Or me for that matter."

A shiver runs down Zuko's spine at the cold in Sokka's words, but his sister just raises her
eyebrow in a bored manner.

"I wouldn't dream of it", she says and irony is dripping from her words. "Now, if you'll
excuse me. As I said, I just wanted to check on you, Zuko, before meeting Father.
Unfortunately, I can't afford to sit in the sun all day, holding hands with my husband. Enjoy
it, you'll never know how long it'll last."

Zuko jumps to his feet.

"What is that supposed to mean?"

"We are at war, Zuko. It means, that no one knows what might happen next. Relax, brother.
Consort.”

With that, Azula waves her hand dismissively and retreats, a self-satisfied smile lingering on
her lips. They watch her until she’s out of sight.

“Man, I wish that stupid lightning would’ve bounced right back at her”, Sokka says.

Zuko nods absent-mindedly, without really paying attention to what he said.

He casts a glance at Sokka, but by now the Water Tribe boy seems as worried as ever and the
awkwardness and shyness are gone. Maybe he really just misinterpreted something. Zuko’s
not sure how to feel about it.
 The only way around is through
Chapter Summary

Sokka deals with his emotions, Zuko with himself and Iroh has a plan.

Chapter Notes

Thanks for your lovely comments :-)

And sorry that this chapter took a little longer than usual. One reason was that I couldn't
figure out what was going on with Sokka and then life got in the way - which will
probably be the case for the next few weeks, so there will be probably only one chapter
a week. I hope there'll be more, but I need to be realistic.
Anyway, I hope you enjoy this one!

Book 2: Spark

Chapter 6: The only way around is through

Sokka feels disheartened. He supposes that he should be used to it by now, because the last
months since his capture at the South Pole have been nothing but a series of disheartening
events. That he still manages to hold onto hope is either a sign of incorrigible optimism or
stupidity.

The Water Tribe boy sighs, because he has never seen himself as an optimist.

He tries to make the best of things, though, even if the circumstances aren’t exactly in his
favor. It’s nothing new to Sokka.

Even back home at the South Pole he has been aware that the little children he tried to teach
how to hunt or fight, didn’t take him seriously. Probably they thought he was a source of
entertainment. But that didn’t make him quit. He tried his best and though he was often
frustrated and disappointed to basically be a nanny for the younger children, he recognized
the worth in it. It gave their mothers opportunities to do their tasks or to just have a moment
to themselves and either miss or mourn their men, who sailed to the sea. Of course Sokka has
been aware of their pitiful glances. He knew as well as them that he was hardly a real warrior
and that when it came to it, he wouldn’t be able to protect the tribe. But he protected Katara
when the situation called for it – with a ruse instead of a weapon, but it did its job.
Everybody at home admired Katara, because she was a bender, the last and only in the South.
Sokka was the only boy his age, too young to join the men at sea, but too old to be considered
a child anymore. And yet he proved himself as a pretty decent hunter. Yes, sometimes he felt
like the odd one out. But that didn’t stop him from trying to do his best.

He tried the same here in the Fire Nation. But whenever he feels like things are finally falling
into place, like he can eventually make peace with his life in the Fire Nation, something bad
happens.

Zuko losing his bending is definitely bad and that the prince seems so indifferent and almost
stoic makes him worry. But Sokka can’t help thinking, that losing his bending probably isn’t
the worst that has happened to Zuko. Sure, it’s crass and shocking and devastating, but Sokka
meant what he said: Zuko’s bending is not what makes him who he is. He’s so much more
than that.

And probably Sokka is a little stupid, because he almost put the confusing fondness and
affection he feels for the prince into words.

The heat rises back into his cheeks.

The words have been on the tip of his tongue, even though Sokka wasn’t exactly sure what he
was going to say. He has been tempted to make Zuko understand that he is an amazing
person, that Sokka admires his strength, that they are in this together and that, actually, he is
glad that Zuko has been chosen to marry him.

That realization just came to him in that moment with such a shocking and overwhelming
sentiment of warmth and a flash of happiness that was completely unfitting of their current
situation. So in the end, he just blurted out that Zuko was never going to lose him a little too
passionate and he made it even worse by taking the prince’s hand.

Sokka could have sworn that there was something between them. So far, Zuko initiated most
physical contact between them and sometimes Sokka felt his eyes on him, watching him
curiously and hesitantly. But the panicked and almost pained expression when he took Zuko’s
hand says otherwise. Did he really misread the prince entirely?

Maybe he is hopelessly optimistic. It would have been too easy, too good and too much like
the stories, if the prince Sokka has been forced to marry would fall in love with him.

Sokka feels a little peng of disappointment in his chest, even though it’s quickly replaced by
cold anger against Azula.

And even though Sokka knows that Iroh’s plan of pretending that Zuko could still firebend is
only going to work for so long, he really enjoyed lying right into Azula’s face and to let her
think that Zuko could fight back against her. He would have enjoyed it more if there had been
fear on her face, but that she seemed to buy it was well enough.

He sighs and nudges Zuko gently with his elbow, once Azula is gone.

“So, what do you want to do now?”

Zuko shrugs. “I should get back to work.”

“That’s not what I meant.” Sokka makes a vague gesture. “I meant, more in general.”

The prince shrugs again. “Do my work. Hope that nobody finds out.”

Sokka rolls his eyes.

“Zuko”, he says slowly. “What would you want to do, if you could do whatever you want?”

At first, Zuko doesn’t answer. He looks into the distance and really seems to think about it.
Sokka doesn’t rush him. Instead he watches how two ducklings are chasing each other over
the water. He almost startles, when Zuko finally answers after a while.

“I would get us away from here. I don’t even care where to. Some island or the Earth
Kingdom maybe. And figure out what I want.”

At that, a soft smile spreads on Sokka’s lips, because Zuko glances at him almost regretfully
and maybe not all hope is lost. Maybe he really just showed bad timing, Sokka figures, now
that he thinks about it.

“Sounds good”, he says softly. “We should do that. We could also visit the South Pole. I
could show you where I come from.”

“I would like that.”

Sokka smiles brightly at him and nudges him again.

“I wonder what Azula meant, with what she said”, Zuko says out of the blue and Sokka sighs.

“Maybe she just wanted to piss you off”, he says. At least, that explanation is as good as any
other. “And even if she is planning something, what else can we do but face it? As I see it,
the only way around is through.”

Zuko raises an eyebrow at him skeptically.

“You really do sound like Uncle sometimes.”

“Hey, I came up with that by myself, okay? And I’m much better looking.”

That draws a chuckle out of Zuko. “You sure do.”

It’s impossible to wipe the smug grin off his face and Sokka feels a lot better.

“You really going to work today?”, he asks then, sounding a little skeptical and not at all
motivated.

“Yes, I have to.”

“Fine, I’ll help you.”

With a dramatic groan Sokka gets up and reaches his hand out for Zuko to take it. The prince
does so without hesitation and he pulls him up.

“The only way around is through”, Zuko repeats and looks at him gratefully. “I’ll make sure
to remember that.”

He bumps his fist against Sokka’s shoulder and they slowly leave the turtle-duck pond behind
them.

What does he want?

It's a good question, Zuko thinks while he sits down at the desk in his office and takes the
first scroll from the pile next to him. In fact, it is a question he has never given much thought.
Why would he? His life was laid out for him since the day of his birth and he didn't have a
say in it. Sure, he wanted to live up to the expectations that were directed at him, but Zuko
really wonders, if that has truly been his desire or rather a necessity.

Even after he has been stripped off his title as Crown Prince he thought that he wanted to get
this title back, to follow the path that has been destined to him.

Right now this motivation feels foreign to him. Maybe that is due to the hollow feeling
within, the lack of warmth. Zuko's body feels strange to himself without the ever present
glow of a fire in his core. He has to get used to it. Zuko is well aware that he hasn't really
processed it yet, because otherwise he wouldn't be sitting so calmly at his desk. He's tired,
yes. But actually he is waiting for anger and fury, and it's there somewhere, but it feels kind
of dull.

He sighs quietly.

What does he want?

He throws a look at Sokka, who searched the bookshelf for a while, before he decidedly
grabbed a book and made himself comfortable in the second chair in the office. Even though
the tiredness shows on his face as well, the blue eyes trace the lines excitedly and Sokka
seems to be completely absorbed by whatever he is reading.

Warmth spreads through Zuko's whole body as he watches the other boy. He is truly, truly
amazed that things aren't weird between them right now, despite the awkward tension that
Zuko created earlier with his reaction to Sokka's words. They have to talk about it eventually.
Zuko knows he wants to when everything is a little less complicated, when he's had more
than a few hours to cope with the fact that he has become a non-bender just like Sokka.

Somehow they’ll figure this out.

He hasn’t been lying when he said that he wanted to get away with Sokka. Zuko really wants
to get to know him, wants to know what it would be like to be with the other boy without a
threat constantly hanging over their heads, without having to watch their backs any given
minute. He wants to know what a normal life with Sokka would be like. Zuko doesn’t
necessarily wants to go to the South Pole because he doesn’t like the cold. And what could be
there to see aside from an icy desert? But it’s Sokka’s home, so if it made him happy, Zuko
would go without hesitation.

It’s strange, Zuko thinks.

He lost his bending and yet, he thinks more about Sokka than about that. The prince
definitely wants his fire back, not that he thinks that is a possibility. And frankly, he is
worried about having to pretend that he can still bend a flame. He has to be careful,
incredibly careful. But subtlety has never been his strong suit and Zuko knows that Azula
would be able to tell immediately, if he was lying to her face. Hopefully she’ll stay in Ba
Sing Se for the foreseeable future.

He sighs again and looks down onto the scroll, reading through the reports of the last week’s
harvests in the western Earth Kingdom colonies, the demands of the Fire Nation troops that
are heading East, as well as the requirements of the different regions in the Fire Nation and
how little they presume to leave for the citizens in the occupied territories.

And suddenly the anger breaks free and Zuko balls his hands into fists.

All they do is take and in the current situation as some integral part of himself has been taken
from him Zuko feels personally offended. Is this really what they are fighting for? Taking
everything for the Fire Nation and leaving the scraps for everyone else?

Zuko has been taught that the original motivation behind the war was to share the Fire
Nation’s greatness with the world, but how could that even be a thing if everything they do is
take what belongs to others?

They take lives, homes and futures, only to leave pain and broken souls behind.

The nagging feeling, that what the Fire Nation does in the name of greatness is wrong, comes
back to him and makes Zuko feels disgusted and ashamed. There is just so much injustice in
this war. But what can he possibly do about it?

What does he want?

Zuko wants this war to end, because what is even the point? He wants the suffering to end.
He wants peace. For the world, but also for a selfish part also for himself.

His knuckles crack and Sokka looks up from his book.

“Are you alright?”, he asks, sounding worried.

Zuko shakes his head, before he runs a hand over his face and sighs again.

“Just stressed out”, he says.

He doesn’t know, why he doesn’t explain the situation to Sokka. Well, he does. But Zuko
doesn’t want to hear that his nation is committing crimes, that they are the bad guys and that
he should do something to stop this. It’s bad enough coming to that conclusion by himself.
But he’s powerless and Zuko doesn’t want to add ‘traitor’ to the list of things his father sees
in him. He’s still the prince, despite everything. He can’t go against his own nation.

But he can’t do nothing either.

“You should take a break, Zu. What happened is nothing that you just shake off and go on as
usual.”

He blinks at Sokka in confusion, a little taken off-guard by the Water Tribe boy calling him a
nickname. It’s… endearing. And it soothes his anger, a little.

“I can’t. If I don’t go through these scrolls and adapt them, the orders will just be executed
like that without verification.”

“Would that be so bad? I mean, there can’t be so much to change? They’ve done these
transfers for ages, so shouldn’t they know what they are doing?”, Sokka asks. “I thought
Kebai established a system over the decades.”

Zuko sometimes forgets how smart Sokka is and he flinches uncomfortably.

“He did”, Zuko admits. “But it’s gotten a bit rusty. I think it can be done better.”

Sokka looks at him and raises his eyebrow. Zuko quickly looks down onto the scroll and
reaches for a new piece of parchment and a brush. This is exactly why it is a bad idea to have
him pretend to still be a firebender. He is a terrible liar.

“Okay”, Sokka says slowly and Zuko dares to look up.

There is a questioning look on Sokka’s face and it’s obvious that he wants to know what’s
going on, but it’s equally obvious that he won’t push it, that he trusts Zuko. It’s an uplifting
thought and he hopes that Sokka understands how grateful he is about that without having to
tell him.

Looking down onto the empty parchment, Zuko hesitates.

He just told himself that he needs to be incredibly careful regarding his deceit and that he
doesn’t want to be a traitor. He shouldn’t take any risks if he doesn’t want to end up thrown
into prison or burned to a crisp.

And yet he can’t help but double the amount of grain and vegetables to remain in the
colonies.
It takes two days and a lot of convincing from Sokka, before Zuko is ready to meet with his
uncle. He still hasn’t come to terms with the new situation. It infuriates him that he has to use
matches to light the candles in their room and that he can’t heat up the water in their bathing
chamber once it has gotten too cold.

It’s those little things that show him what he’s lost. He doesn’t see the point in participating
on training, even though Sokka is probably right that they have to attend, if only to keep up
the appearance.

But Zuko is so anxious about meeting his uncle on the small training ground they use for his
lessons. There is nothing to worry about, because Uncle would never do him any harm and
actually, that isn't what he's afraid of.

The prince is not sure, if he can handle the look of sadness, pity and compassion on his face.
Uncle always believed in him and somehow Zuko has got the feeling that he let him down.

Sokka is walking right next to him. He is carrying the boomerang at his belt and to Zuko it
seems as if he isn't willing to go anywhere without it anytime soon. The prince has seen how
precisely Sokka can handle this particular weapon, even though the guards only seem to see it
as an advanced toy rather than as what it really is.

It makes him feel protected, Zuko thinks with a good portion of embarrassment. He's not
going to tell Sokka that under any circumstances.

He sighs deeply, when he sees Uncle already waiting for him and tightens his shoulders.

Uncle Iroh looks very serious, but luckily there is no sign of any sentimentality on his face.
He bows respectfully and Zuko feels a little touched by the gesture, because he doesn't think
he deserves it.

"Prince Zuko", Uncle greets him.

"Uncle."

Iroh surprises him, when he greets Sokka by grabbing his forearm and the Water Tribe boy
seems a little perplexed as well, before he reciprocates the gesture with a grim smile.

"Sokka."

"Iroh."

It's a weird ambiance and Zuko isn't exactly sure, what is happening or why. His uncle seems
oddly determined and he carries himself more like the general, that he used to be, instead of
the calm and comforting old man. Something has changed, Zuko realizes. He can’t point out
what, but it surely has to do with the loss of his bending.

“Thank you for joining me”, Uncle says.

Zuko shrugs a little helplessly.

“I don’t see the point, if I am being completely honest. But if you think, that it’s worth it and
that there are things I can learn, I will try.”

Iroh nods. “I expect nothing less of you.”

That makes Zuko gulp and he throws a searching look at Sokka, but the other boy only
shrugs as well.

“I have been discussing theories with Shyu those last few days and I would like to see to
which extend they are true.”

Zuko nods nervously, trying to fight down the urge to argue that they already saw that he
can’t do anything. He doesn’t need a demonstration of that again.

“Hold out your hands, please”, Iroh asks him and Zuko does as he’s told.

He holds his hands as if he was holding a bowl of something. The prince watches Iroh cast a
flame of his own, that he places carefully, almost gently in Zuko’s.

It wavers, for a second, but it doesn’t burn out. Zuko holds his breath, he tries to feel the
flame, but he can’t make the connection. Actually it feels like the fire is slipping through his
fingers and he’s unable to grasp it, even though the flame stays intact. This fire doesn’t
belong to him and it’s feels like a distorted echo – loud and unclear and just uncomfortable.

The little flame threatens to die down and Zuko feels like crying.

“Breathe”, his uncle reminds him and as Zuko lets out a sigh, the flame stabilizes again.

Iroh nods contentedly.

“We’ve been so far already”, Zuko murmurs and he sees Sokka’s pitiful look. The Water
Tribe boy watches quiet and respectfully.

“Correct. Let’s see what happens, if you move. Come a few steps forward.”

Zuko takes slow and even breaths and finally dares to take a step forward. The flame wavers
heavily, but when he stops, it calms down. He gulps and takes another step, this time more
slowly. The flame remains in his hands.

“Very good”, Uncle says, but Zuko is not so sure about that.

He still doesn’t feel the flame or made a connection. Sure, he feels the heat over his hands,
but it’s definitely not what it should be like.

“Now, let’s see what happens, if you separate your hands like you would do to split the fire.
Concentrate, Zuko, and then, when you’re ready, give it a try.”

Zuko takes a deep breath and he concentrates. He isn’t quite sure what he should concentrate
on. His breathing is fine, they have worked on this for months, so that part comes naturally
by now. His hands? Uncle always insists that he mustn’t bend with his muscles, but as Zuko
really can’t feel the flame, what else is there to focus on?

Deep in his heart Zuko knows that it’s not going to work. He turns out to be right.

As soon as he moves his hands apart, the flame vanishes immediately. He feels his shoulders
slump and he’s disappointed even if he knew that this was going to happen.

His uncle, however, hums.

“Let’s try again”, he says.

He casts a bigger flame this time and sets it down over Zuko’s hands more quickly.

“Don’t hesitate, Zuko. Try to split it.”

The second try doesn’t work either and the well-known feeling of being incapable and
inadequate rises within Zuko. He hates it. He’s never felt like that when he trained with
Uncle. Iroh always managed to make him feel good about even the smallest progress. He
huffs.

“Again”, Iroh insists. “I place it in your hands, you try to divide it. No waiting, no
hesitation.”

Zuko nods obediently, even though he feels terrible.

The third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth try don’t work either and he’s growing
increasingly desperate. It’s admirable that Iroh doesn’t lose hope in him, but his bending is
gone and no amount of training will change that.

“Again”, Iroh repeats.

The lesson starts to feel like a very frustrating and devastating dance. They find their rhythm,
Iroh casting flames and Zuko making them fade away with every motion of his hands. He
tries so hard, but he could as well be trying to bend any other element – nothing happens. He
just goes with it, to not disappoint Uncle.

Zuko doesn’t even realize that Iroh has brought more and more distance between them, as his
flames grow a little bigger. As if a more intense fire wouldn’t burn out in Zuko’s powerless
hands. So, when a little ball of fire comes flying at him, Zuko’s eyes widen in shock. His
reflexes take over and he gets into a defending stance, just in time to make the flame vanish
with a downward movement of his hands.

His heart is pounding and he stares at his hands in shock.

Then he looks up to Uncle in disbelief. The old man seems smug. Zuko’s gaze wanders to
Sokka and there’s a look of disbelief on his face as well, but also a big smile.

Zuko chuckles, unable to contain his excitement and tries to punch a ball of fire in the air.
Nothing happens. He frowns and tries again with the same result.

“What is this? I don’t understand!”, he exclaims.

He concentrates and tries to focus on his flame. Then Zuko realizes that there is still a void
within him. The sudden rush of energy when he parried Iroh’s fire has obviously been just
adrenaline. It wasn’t his flame bursting back to life and as quickly as hope and joy rose
within him, they vanish.

“Uncle?”, he asks helplessly and Iroh sighs.

“It has been one of our theories, after you were able to maintain a fire that is put into your
hands, that you still have some control over fire, even though it’s not your own and you can’t
shape it. We were hoping that you could still use it to defend yourself. Which seems to be the
case.”

It’s good news, obviously, but Zuko can’t be happy about it. For a moment he thought he had
his power back only to learn that this is not true.

“That makes me what? The world’s most pathetic firebender?”

Uncle throws a sharp look at him.

“I wouldn’t call it pathetic. Being able to defend yourself is a much better perspective than
losing your bending altogether, don’t you think?”

It probably is, but Zuko has always been sensitive about his bending and actually he doesn’t
know how to feel about this very limited power.

“How am I supposed to stand my ground against Azula with this? I was only able to fight her
off because of my flame. She almost had me! What am I supposed to do if she tries again?
She’s too powerful. Probably it’s best if I just admit that and surrender, should she attack
again.”

Uncle’s look darkens.

“No! She’s crazy and she needs to go down.”

Zuko’s eyes go wide and he stares at his uncle. When he glances at Sokka, he sees that the
other boy looks just the same. Did his pacifist uncle really just say those words?

“Uhm…”

“No offense, but how is Zuko supposed to take her down if all he can do is defend?”, Sokka
asks carefully.

Uncle huffs.

“We will start slowly and carefully test how far your abilities go, nephew. A lot of work lies
ahead of us, but in the end I hope you’ll be able to redirect her lightning.”
 A burning in my chest
Chapter Summary

Iroh shares his wisdom and the boys share moments.

Chapter Notes

My dear readers, I’ve had a rough two weeks and though I longed to write, I found
myself unable to do so due to timely but also mental restrains. Things are slowly getting
better and I am happy to find, that my drive for this story is still there and as strong as
ever. I am fairly certain that you will enjoy this chapter. I actually changed some of my
original plans, but I think it turned out well enough and that it’ll work with what else I
have in mind. There is so much more to come and I’m excited to share it with you <3
Best wishes, Kim

Book 2: Spark

Chapter 7: A burning in my chest

Sokka knows that it has been him, who talked Uncle Iroh into teaching Zuko firebending.
And don’t get him wrong, Azula is crazy. That she completely freaked out over a mocking
comment from her brother and probably would have killed Zuko if Iroh didn’t step in just
proves that point. Sokka absolutely wants to see her fail and he definitely doesn’t want her to
follow Fire Lord Ozai on the throne one day.

And yet, he stares at Iroh with bewilderment, because the statement that the Crown Princess
needs to go down seems so unfitting of him. The determination in the old man’s words makes
a shiver run down his spine.

Azula crossed a line, that is without a doubt. Maybe witnessing that his niece was ready to
kill Zuko, made Iroh see red. Sokka would have bet an arm that Iroh would always prefer
wisdom and peace over violence and fighting.

Sokka glances at Zuko, but the prince seems as shocked by Iroh’s announcement as he is. The
Water Tribe boy bites his lip and a worried frown settles on his forehead.
He’s thrilled that Zuko still possesses some kind of power, however limited it may be. That
Zuko is able to defend himself against fire is more than they could have hoped for. It could
help to keep up the pretense of Zuko still being able to firebend and given the right time and
circumstances the ability to basically make fire vanish could be immensely useful.

Re-directing lightning, however, sounds dangerous. That Iroh wants Zuko to use the power
that almost destroyed him is alarming and Sokka is not sure what to think about it. Sokka has
seen with his own eyes how destructive lightning is. It might look delicate compared to a
blast or a punch of fire, but its effect is disastrous.

It’s not that Sokka doesn’t believe in Zuko. Quite the opposite. But there is a reason that Iroh
refused to let Zuko try to lightning-bend so far. That he suggests it now, when Zuko’s
bending is at its weakest, is at best a demonstration of the confidence he has in his nephew or
at worst a display of despair. Either way, it is concerning.

“Are you sure?”, Zuko asks and he sounds apprehensive too.

Good, Sokka thinks. At least the prince has got some common sense in him.

Iroh nods shortly. “It’s our best option.”

Zuko clenches his teeth, but gives a short nod. He looks a little pale and tense as he does so.

“Do not worry, we will not rush into this”, Iroh reassures him.

“What if I get my bending back in the meantime?”, Zuko asks. He’s clinging onto that hope.

It’s natural. Sokka wants that to happen too. He is well aware that not even half a year ago he
wished for all firebenders to lose their power and for some – first and foremost Azula and the
Fire Lord - this is still true, but not for Zuko.

Sokka is no firebender, but he knows what it means to lose something. He understands the
hope and the desire to bring back what has been lost and maybe for Zuko that hope is not
completely misplaced.

A part of the prince’s power has come back. Or it has never been gone in the first place, even
though it’s certainly not what it was before. But that Zuko can still do something with fire is
just another proof of how strong he is, at least in Sokka’s opinion. He just has to get Zuko to
understand that.

Sokka doesn’t believe that he will get his full power back. From what he understood of the
things Shyu and Iroh discussed in the temple, the sunrise should have had some impact on
Zuko’s fire. That it didn’t is not a good sign, but he really doesn’t have the heart to tell Zuko
that. The Water Tribe boy is not sure if encouraging him and telling him otherwise is much
better. But all things considered the situation could be much worse.

The look of empathy Iroh sends in Zuko’s direction speaks volumes about what he thinks
about the prince’s question. Zuko presses his lips tightly together and balls his hands into
fists.
“We’ll cross that bridge, if we come to it”, Iroh says indulgently.

Ouch, Sokka thinks. Iroh said ‘if’, not ‘when’. Zuko obviously noticed it too. The determined
expression on his face wavers for a second and he flinches, before he immediately straightens
and squares his shoulders. Zuko looks grim and Sokka knows that no encouraging smile in
his direction is gonna ease the bitterness.

“Fine. Where do we start?”, he asks, somehow managing to sound completely emotionless.

It’s obvious that Zuko is frustrated but he’s not willing to let that frustration get the best of
him. Sokka admires him for the willigness to just swallow his anger and move on with things.

Iroh seems pleased too.

“You have always been better at defending than attacking, so this will work in our favor. As I
said, we will do this carefully. First, we will test the limits of your ability. I will not throw fire
at you without being sure that you can handle it. Once I think that you are ready, we will
incorporate different bending styles. I meant to teach you these anyway. It is a shame that you
might not be able to fully experience this power.”

They both frown at Iroh.

“What are you talking about?”, Zuko asks.

Iroh sighs deeply. He throws a contemplating look at them, then closes his eyes and nods to
himself.

Sokka is not sure what to make of it and when he throws a questioning look at Zuko, the
other boy shrugs.

“It is important to draw wisdom from many different places. If you take it from only one
place, it becomes rigid and stale.”

That causes more questions than it answers, Sokka thinks to himself. But he knows that with
a little patience Iroh’s words will probably make sense soon. The old man seems almost
amused by the puzzled looks on their faces, judging by the little tug at his lips.

“I am talking about teaching you forms that are used for bending the other elements.”

Sokka’s mouth falls open and he stares at Iroh. Zuko looks at his uncle wide-eyed, but the
shock only lasts a moment before he grimaces, seeming overwhelmed and insecure.

“But I am not the Avatar, Uncle. And I can’t even properly firebend anymore”, he protests,
but it sounds beaten.

Sokka resists the urge to place a hand on his shoulder for moral support. Instead, he crosses
his arms, waiting for a further explication.

“It is the combination of the four elements in one person that makes the Avatar so powerful.
But it can make you more powerful, too. Especially in this particular situation. Too
understand the other elements, the other nations, will help you become whole.”

Zuko nods, but he looks discouraged.

Iroh takes a stick into his hand and draws the Fire symbol into the dirt.

“Fire is the element of power. The people of the Fire Nation have desire and will and the
energy and drive to achieve what they want.”

Sokka throws another look at Zuko, but instead of drive and energy he sees resignation. A
quiet sigh leaves his lips.

“Water is the element of change. The people of the Water Tribes are capable of adapting to
many things.”

Iroh throws a meaningful look at him once he finished drawing the Water symbol and Sokka
can’t help a tiny smile. He’s come a long way when it comes to adaptating to things. He
adapted to being the Prince Consort of the Fire Nation and – his eyes wander back to the
prince – Zuko’s husband.

“They have a sense of community and love that holds them together through anything.”

Zuko’s eyes widen ever so slightly at Iroh’s statement and he fidgets nervously. Sokka’s heart
jumps a little when he notices that the sorrowful expression vanishes from Zuko’s face. Their
eyes meet and Sokka’s breath catches in his throat.

Zuko’s eyes shine with infinite warmth and Sokka feels a rush of heat run through his body,
that is so intense that he thinks he might start to firebend, if that wasn’t completely
impossible. The urge to cross the distance, to be close to Zuko becomes overwhelming and
the intensity of the burning in his chest is almost frightening.

A shy, questioning, hopeful expression settles on Zuko’s face and with an incredible amount
of relief Sokka realizes that he did not misinterpret anything. They should definitely talk
about this. Maybe this marriage is more real than they thought it would ever be and Sokka’s
body tingles. He feels giddy in a very good way.

Sokka doesn’t even realize the smile that spreads on his lips. He is too captivated by the one
Zuko is giving him. His handsome prince... Sokka blinks and lowers his gaze, a little
embarrassed by this thought and by the fact that he feels heat pooling in his belly. It’s an
exciting feeling, but neither for now nor here.

A gentle cough reminds him that they are not alone. Iroh must have noticed that they were
having a moment. He smiles knowingly, which makes the situation less embarrassing. Sokka
steals a glance at Zuko, whose cheeks show a shade of red and he’s grateful for his darker
skin that hopefully hides his blush.

But it’s good to see that Zuko seems less tense and that is worth a little embarrassment. He
turns his attention back to Iroh.
“Earth is the element of substance. The people of the Earth Kingdom are diverse and strong.
They are persistent and enduring”, he continues. “And air is the element of freedom. The Air
Nomads detached themselves from worldly concerns and found peace and freedom.”

He draws the symbols onto the ground and frames them with a circle.

“I see”, Zuko says. “And you wanted to teach me techniques of the other elements?”

“I did and I will. In fact, re-directing lightning is a technique I developed by studying

waterbending forms. You will learn it too, I hope.”

“Really?”, Sokka asks with astonishment. “Are Azula and the Fire Lord aware of this?”

“No. And that might be our advantage should it ever come to another duel.”

Sokka throws a look at Zuko, because he remembers their conversation about Azula and that
Zuko does not want to use violence against his little sister. But Zuko doesn’t protest nor
argue. Maybe he came to the realization, that all hope is lost when it comes to Azula. It’s just
another thing he’s lost and Sokka finds himself thinking, that life is not fair. But neither is she
and the earlier Zuko comes to a conclusion which side he’s on, the better.

Sokka frowns, because another thought crosses his mind. Which side is Iroh on?

He just admitted plainly that he wants to defeat Azula. He’s definitely on Zuko’s side, but
Sokka wonders if there is more to it than love and care for his nephew. For someone who had
been so apprehensive to step into action to protect Zuko, Iroh is surely taking risks by now.
Except from the Avatar, Sokka can’t think of anybody who would take action so
straightforward against the Crown Princess and the Fire Lord. Except for the White Lotus, of
course.

But that Iroh, who is part of the Royal Family, could be a member of the secret order that
tries to sabotage the Fire Nation and support the Avatar seems a little far fetched. On the
other hand, his talk about the four elements, balance and the other nations seems like
something the White Lotus would appreciate.

An uneasy feeling settles on Sokka and he shoves the thought away. The suspicion alone
could bring Iroh a lot of trouble and as they are close with him, that would affect them too.
No, it is better to keep this to himself.

And probably it’s nonsense anyway. It is more likely that Iroh is somehow involved with the
Fire Sages. Shyu’s novice called him a Grand Master. Probably a member of the Royal
Family has to engage with the spiritual community in the Fire Nation. Yeah, that makes more
sense.

But Sokka can’t shove away the nagging memory of his tour through the temple when he
arrived in the Fire Nation. Shyu told him that the Sages originally served the Avatar.

Something is going on, that much is for sure and Sokka definitely isn’t at ease with it. Not
because he wants to protect the Fire Nation, but he wants to protect Zuko and right now he
has no clue how much of a risk they are taking with their pretense that Zuko is still a
firebender, with Iroh teaching the prince other bending forms and with Iroh confirming that
he wants to see Azula go down.

Maybe Sokka should really read the book that Iroh gave to him on his wedding day. Too
much is at stake here to ignore any possible clue what they are getting themselves into.

He throws a look at Zuko, who seems to be a little more eager to continue his training.

“Let’s get to it then”, he says and takes a deep breath, before he holds his hands out to Iroh to
place another flame in it.

It is strange to handle fire without feeling it resonating within him. The longer they try, the
more Zuko gets the impression that he's getting the hang of it, but nevertheless it feels wrong.
He feels the heat and when Iroh throws a bigger punch of fire at him, he struggles to make it
vanish in time and the flames lick over his arms. It's not enough to really hurt him, but rather
unpleasant anyway. They only continue after Uncle is sure that he has done no damage.

He promised to go easy on Zuko, but that doesn't mean that the training is not demanding.

The prince is eager to proceed from those basics to learning the techniques of other elements.
Uncle's words sparked his curiosity and caused him anxiety at the same time, because it
would have been awesome to learn bending forms that Azula would never even think about.
Uncle didn't hide that he does not believe that he will get his fire back, but Zuko is
determined. He will try everything. First, he will get back to a regular schedule for
meditation, he will willingly visit the temple for real healing sessions with Shyu and maybe
one day when the sun rises into the sky it will rise within him again. Until then, all he can do
is focus on his defense techniques.

He doesn't know what to think about Uncle proclaiming that Azula should not remain Crown
Princess and Zuko has got the feeling that his sister is not the only one that should go down
in Uncle's eyes. She's Father's favorite and the Fire Lord would never allow that. Zuko is
aware that there has been history between his father and his uncle. After all, Iroh should have
been Fire Lord but he never seemed to mind that Ozai was sitting on the throne instead of
him.

Sure, Uncle spoke his mind when he had a different opinion from his brother's but he usually
did so in a humorous way, covering his peaceful suggestions with laziness. He doesn't seem
lazy anymore and Zuko wonders what he's up to. It's easy to forget that Iroh is an incredibly
powerful bender over his comfy and pacifist attitude. That he obviously managed to study,
master and adapt techniques of the other elements to firebending is impressive and Zuko
wonders what else Iroh is capable of. It makes him worry, but he trusts him. In fact, Iroh and
Sokka are the only two people he trusts.
Of course he couldn't keep his eyes from Sokka, when his uncle mentioned the dedication
and love of the Water Tribespeople. How could he? Sokka has been with him right from the
start and Zuko is not sure if he would even still be here if it wasn't for him. He has been his
rock, his anchor, a loyal and unwavering source of comfort. But there's more to it. Sokka
never made him feel as if Zuko owed him something. And that was what he saw, when their
eyes met. Sokka's eyes have been as bright as his smile.

Sokka's affection does not demand a debt to be paid, it is something freely given and his heart
jumped, sending an intense tingling through his entire body. It makes Zuko feel strong and
powerful and happy, which is so weird, because a part of him is still so upset about the loss
of his fire. But somehow that loss weighs less heavy on his shoulders all of a sudden, due to
the warmth that settles in his chest, that feels so different from his inner flame.

Zuko hasn’t been ready to admit it to himself, but he is in love with him.

And something about the slightly embarrassed expression when Sokka tore his gaze away
tells him that the Water Tribe boy feels the same.

A wave of excitement washed over him and Zuko isn’t entirely sure how to handle it.

When they walk back to their quarters to freshen up, they grin at each other from time to time
and the happy, giddy sensation is unfamiliar and new to him. He feels innocent and young
and foolish and he sees his own excitement and nervousness reflected in Sokka’s eyes.

This was meant to be his punishment. But Zuko feels like Sokka is the best thing that could
have happened to him. And it’s ironic that his own father, who hasn’t granted him any
happiness since Azula started bending before he did, gifted Zuko the one thing that he could
have never had otherwise. He’s tempted to laugh out loud, because the joke is definitely on
his father.

Zuko feels smug and reckless, playful even. He doesn’t think twice, once the door shuts
behind them. Without hesitating he takes Sokka’s hand and backs him up against the wall,
pressing his body against the Water Tribe boy, who lets out a shaky breath and tenses a little
but doesn’t protest. Zuko takes this as the permission to gently let his fingers trail over the
shaved side of his head. The stubble under his fingertips feels scratchy and soft at the same
time. A shiver runs through Sokka’s body caused by touch and Zuko smiles, while his heart is
pounding.

Sokka looks at him wide-eyed, his lips slightly agape. Zuko gulps and shoves his hand into
Sokka’s neck, leaning in for the kiss.

The hitch in Sokka’s breath makes him hesitate and the light pressure against his hand makes
him realize that he pulled back.

Shocked, Zuko stops and tears his eyes open, blinking rapidly. His heart sinks though it still
thrums in his chest. He opens his mouth to say something, to apologize, but obviously he just
lost the ability to speak. Zuko stares at Sokka in disbelief. How could he have misunderstood
the situation so badly?
But when he looks at Sokka, there is no rejection. The Water Tribe boy looks torn and
indecisive. There is a tiny frown on his face and he looks insecure, there is longing in his
eyes, but also fear. Zuko is not sure, what Sokka could possibly be afraid of. Maybe that
overwhelming need to close the distance or the burning that Zuko feels in his own heart.

He won’t force himself on Sokka, but Agni knows that he wants nothing more than to feel
Sokka’s lips against his. Zuko finds himself unable to move.

Sokka exhales, it sounds frustrated, and leans his forehead against Zuko’s left shoulder.

“Sorry”, he mumbles barely audible, and Zuko, who is still a little overcome can’t think of a
better thing to do than gently rub his neck to make him calm down.

It’s still difficult to find words, but somehow he manages.

“Don’t be”, he says weakly.

They remain in that strange embrace and Zuko is not sure if he should retreat, but Sokka
doesn’t actually seem uncomfortable, just incredibly nervous.

“Gimme a minute”, Sokka murmurs and Zuko nods sharply.

He is shaking a little, he realizes and his heartbeat doesn’t even begin to slow down. It jolts,
when Sokka’s lips place a tiny kiss against the sensitive skin at his neck and Zuko shudders,
involuntarily pressing his body harder against Sokka’s.

The Water Tribe boy hisses, a surprised “Oh!” escapes him and it’s that tiny noise of wonder,
that makes Zuko’s control crumble and a deep hunger takes him over.

He squeezes the back of Sokka’s neck, nudging the Water Tribe boy to look at him. And
when their eyes meet this time, there’s no holding back.

When Sokka imagined his first kiss, he thought it would be hesitant, awkward maybe, a soft
touch of lips, carefully discovering each other's mouth. He imagined it to be with a beautiful
girl, sweet and petite. He expected some clumsiness.

He definitely didn't imagine himself pressed against a wall by the Prince of the Fire Nation.

Zuko’s mouth is hot and demanding as he kisses Sokka passionately and Sokka isn’t sure if
he can keep up with him. His mind is swirling, he feels like he’s floating on air and he clings
to Zuko, one hand buried in his hair, causing his topknot to slip and the long dark hair to fall
over his shoulders, and one hand clutching onto Zuko’s shoulder.

Sokka’s heart is thrumming and his senses are probably going into overload, but it’s an
amazing feeling. It’s like drowning in the most marvelous way.
Zuko’s hand is still at the back of his head, massaging softly, and the way the prince holds
him makes Sokka feel oddly precious. He winces, unable to hold back a noise and the arm
around his hip tightens, trying to pull him closer even though they are already pressed against
each other from head to toe.

This is by far the best thing he’s ever experienced.

When they break apart, both gasping for air, Zuko leans his forehead against Sokka’s and
they just stand there for a moment with their eyes closed and just enjoy the sensation. At first,
Sokka can’t think of anything to say except for whispering a soft “Wow.” Zuko nods and
takes his hand, intertwining their fingers.

Then his brain kicks in and Sokka blurts out the first thing that comes to his mind.

“We should have done this sooner.”

Zuko chuckles and Sokka finds himself giggling along. When the prince places a peck on his
forehead, he sighs contently and can’t help but think that despite having been kidnapped and
forced into this, he’s actually a very lucky guy.
 Present and Past
Chapter Summary

Zuko reflects on happiness, Sokka thinks about a lot and finds some interesting
distraction.

Chapter Notes

I hope y'all are still there. When I see that the last chapter was updated almost two
months ago, I can only apologize. This story means so much to me. Life is a real pain
this year and I can't wait for 2023 to end.
Parts of this chapter have been written two months ago, parts only now and if it's a little
unfitting, bear with me. It might be edited at some point, but I had to get back into the
flow and regain a feeling for my boys. Sokka hasn't really been helpful though, really
struggled writing his part this time.

The poem in the middle is not mine, it's written by Prinson Afonso. Check him out!

And now, without further ado, enjoy the new chapter!

Book 2 Spark:

Chapter 8: Present and Past

Zuko feels warm. Finally, after days, he feels warm again from within. It is a completely
different kind of warmth compared to what his inner fire felt like before, but the prince
relishes in the feeling.

He is still amazed and overwhelmed and just enjoys the silence that doesn’t need to be filled
with words. It’s enough to sit across from Sokka on their bed and hold his hands, giving them
both a moment to process what just happened between them.

Zuko is still in awe – of Sokka and of the feeling that has taken a hold of him ever since their
lips met. The prince is not a poet, but finally he can relate to the novels and grand love stories
that describe a kiss as something wondrous and otherworldly. It never felt like this the few
times when he kissed Mai.
Zuko finds it impossible to take his eyes off Sokka and it’s just strange that for once their
roles seem reversed. Usually it is Sokka, who reassures him, who finds reasons to not lose his
faith no matter what. Zuko has leaned on Sokka for support more or less since the beginning,
since they have met. That is probably what causes this irrational feeling of pride that he feels,
now that Sokka is leaning on him – almost literally.

Sokka only glances at him every so often. He seems a little fidgety and is basically radiating
nervous excitement. There is a shy yet happy expression on the Water Tribe boy’s face, even
though his eyes are mostly looking down onto their joined hands. Zuko squeezes them
reassuringly. The unexpected shyness makes him smile to himself. Zuko is proud to have
discovered that completely new side of Sokka and he feels honored that the other boy looks
to him for guidance in this particular situation.

Zuko knows that he let his emotions get the best of him. He is aware that he probably took
Sokka by surprise, when he let the longing and the need to be close and show Sokka how he
feels about him take over. But he can’t bring himself to regret it.

The taste of Sokka’s lips, the way his slender body fit against his own, how his hands
threaded through Zuko’s hair, the little gasps and hitches of his breath… It’s been perfect and
still feels a little unreal.

The air between them is so different now from what it was before. It’s like they are under
some kind of spell or inside a cocoon that makes everything but them seem so utterly
meaningless and small.

The intensity of his feelings scares Zuko a little, but he wouldn’t change it for the world.
Despite his excitement and wonder a sense of calm washes over him, as if a part of him
recognizes that this is exactly how things are meant to be.

Zuko wonders if this is what happiness is like: this calm and wholesome feeling, that
certainty. He listens within himself, astonished to find that the little voice in the back of his
mind, that ever present doubt regarding anything and everything, is quiet for once. The prince
always imagined that happiness would be some kind of bubbly, thrilling sentiment,
something positive that is just on the brink of being too much to handle. But this is better. It’s
bigger and quieter and just wholesome.

He looks down onto their wrist and his heart jumps a little. They somehow belong together,
not only because of the similar marks on their skin, but because of an immaterial connection.
He squeezes Sokka’s hands gently and the other boy looks up with bright blue eyes and
chuckles nervously.

“This is so weird”, he says.

Zuko acknowledges him with a questioning look, feeling a little unsure but unwilling to show
it. “Good weird?”

Sokka nods quickly. “Definitely good weird.”

Zuko can’t help but smile stupidly at that and Sokka sighs, before he shakes his head.
“I never expected something like this to happen when I got here.”

“Neither did I”, Zuko agrees.

“But you hoped?”

Zuko shrugs, not sure how to respond to that question. “I’m not sure about that. Actually, no.
I was certain that you would hate me. I didn’t think further.”

Sokka nods in understanding, before he chuckles again. “My ancestors would roll around in
their graves if they knew that I kissed the Prince of the Fire Nation and enjoyed it.”

That makes Zuko laugh out loud. “Likewise. My great-grandfather would have never allowed
that.”

“Then don’t call him great.”

It takes a moment before Zuko gets the joke. He rolls his eyes and nudges Sokka against his
shoulder, making the Water Tribe boy grin only wider.

“I like what Uncle said about the Water Tribespeople and their sense of community and
love.”

Sokka smiles at that, running his thumb over the back of Zuko’s hand and a giddy feeling
settles in the prince’s stomach.

“Do you think your people would ever accept me or consider me a part of the Tribe? Would
they approve of somethi- of us?”

“Hm.” A thoughtful expression settles on Sokka’s face. “I really can’t tell. I’m pretty sure we
never had anything like us in the South and I have never been in the North. Probably not.
Maybe. If the world was a better place.”

Zuko gulps. He expected something like that and he doesn’t miss the fact, that Sokka didn’t
give him an answer to his first question. They both know it anyway. He can’t say that he’s
surprised or that he doesn’t understand. Too much has happened in the history between their
nations to believe that they would just welcome him with open arms.

“I guess you’re right”, he mumbles. “I’m not a worthy representative of the Fire Nation, I
shouldn’t expect your folk to see me any different.”

A gentle hand finds its way to cover his cheek gently.

“Zuko, look at me”, Sokka says softly and he does, finding nothing but compassion and
fondness in the blue eyes. “You do hold the attributes of the Water Tribe that your uncle
mentioned. You are a master of adapting to different and difficult situations. I mean, look at
you. You’re still here, still going strong after everything you’ve been through. And what’s
that talk about not being worthy of representing the Fire Nation? You never give up, you see
things through – whatever comes your way. You stand your ground, you’re willing to face
every challenge. If I have ever seen anyone who’s got will and drive and energy, it’s you.”
There is suddenly a lump in his throat, because Sokka’s voice is so full of admiration and
sincerity, that Zuko is not sure how to handle it.

“So do you”, he says quietly, his voice barely above a whisper and a tiny smile flashes over
Sokka’s face.

“Maybe”, he shrugs. “Maybe this was supposed to happen. Maybe we are both worthy of
being part of the Water Tribe and the Fire Nation.”

For a moment Zuko forgets how to breathe as he lets the words sink in and he can’t believe
that the spirits blessed him with such a thoughtful and smart person like Sokka.

He knows that he sounds cheesy, but he can’t help it. “You’re my drive.”

Sokka freezes for a second, staring at him in disbelief before he inhales sharply. After a few
moments, he clears his throat. “You’re such a sap.”

Despite his words he leans forward, visibly nervous, and places a quick kiss on his lips,
pulling back almost immediately. Zuko doesn’t let him get away and places a hand in his
neck.

“Sap, huh?”, he murmurs in a low voice and he doesn’t miss how Sokka’s pupils widen
slightly. Goosebumps spread on the Water Tribe boy’s arms and a devilish little smile plays
around Zuko’s lips, before he presses them briefly against Sokka’s.

The other boy gasps and Zuko breaks the kiss, smiling smugly, before sealing his lips again
for only a second. He does so once, twice, trice and notices the frown spreading on Sokka’s
forehead. After the fourth brief and playful contact, Sokka all but glares at him.

“Would you just do it properly?”, he demands and - getting what he wanted - Zuko doesn’t
think twice.

He pulls Sokka closer against him, kissing him passionately and a little too eager, making
them both fall over and Sokka lets out an ‘Umph!’ when Zuko lands on top of him.

A little embarrassed by his own enthusiasm Zuko quickly breaks the kiss and stares at Sokka,
ready to apologize. But to his surprise Sokka doesn’t seem tense at all. They look at each
other for a few moments, before they both break into laughter. And now, Zuko can feel the
bubbly feeling right alongside the calm, that has taken a hold of him.

He buries his face in the crook of Sokka’s neck, inhaling his scent and when he exhales,
Sokka squirms and only laughs louder. It’s a wonderful noise. Zuko laughs silently and his
breath hits the sensitive skin of his neck again and Sokka tries to wriggle away, still giggling
with laughter.

“Stop it!”, he complains.

Zuko can’t hold back the puff of laughter as Sokka tries to shove him away. It’s hilarious that
the other boy is so ticklish. And adorable. By now his cheeks almost hurt from smiling so
widely and the grin doesn’t vanish even when he complies and lets go of Sokka, who throws
him a reproachful look that is quickly replaced by a bright smile of his own.

Zuko sighs. It feels almost too good to be true.

Sokka almost makes him forget the loss of his bending, that is lurking above him like a dark
cloud. Zuko still feels incomplete and not a hundred percent like himself. But for now the
world seems less dark and the void in his chest seems less empty. He looks at the other boy,
who smiles back at him fondly and once more the feeling of certainty settles on him.

They got this. Whatever Azula or his father might throw at them, they’ll get through it
together.

Zuko leans in once more to place a chaste kiss on Sokka’s forehead.

“I’m afraid, there’s work waiting for me”, he says apologizingly.

Sokka sighs, but he nods. “It’s fine. I’m not going anywhere. Do I see you later for some
swordbending?”

“Swordbending?” Zuko raises an eyebrow, while Sokka nods enthusiastically.

“What else would you call it? Comes natural to us, doesn’t it?”

“Sure. Whatever you say.”

With that and another quick kiss on his lips, Zuko gets up and fixes his hair, before he leaves
for his duties. The smile lingers on his lips all the way to his office.

Sokka watches Zuko go and once the door has closed behind the prince, he lets his head fall
back and takes a deep breath.

He stares at the canopy above the bed and is well aware of the stupid, love-struck grin on his
face, that he is unable to will away. His whole body is tingling, the giddy feeling in his belly
won’t fade away. It only seems to get stronger by the minute and somehow he feels like he’s
a lot lighter, almost like floating. His body just doesn’t feel like himself and all those strange
sensations are a bit too much.

Zuko kissed him.

Zuko kissed him.

An excited and not at all hysterical giggle comes over Sokka’s lips and he can’t help but grab
a pillow and bury his face in it for a moment. The diminishing availability of oxygen helps
him calm down and clear his head a little and Sokka sighs, when he puts the pillow aside.

Zuko kissed him. It’s a fact and he relishes in it, because the feelings that the firebender
caused in him are so new and exciting. He feels a little foolish too, even though he doesn’t
know why. Maybe it’s because he hasn’t been the one to initiate it. Actually Sokka is grateful
that Zuko has led the way, because he seems to have some experience while Sokka has
absolutely none. He just hopes that he didn’t mess anything up, but he has never seen Zuko
smile like this. The prince practically beamed at him and it’s been a sight to behold. A sight
Sokka is happy to have somehow coaxed out of him.

A pleasant shiver runs down his spine, when he recalls how Zuko backed him up against the
wall and pressed his body against him. It has made Sokka feel warm. His cheeks still burn
when he thinks about it, embarrassed that the feeling has been most intense down there.

Sokka throws an arm over his eyes and groans, because even though he is alone he’s a little
ashamed of this reaction, that repeated itself when Zuko buried his face against his neck and
the firebender’s warm breath ghosted over his skin.

He shivers again and laughs silently about himself and about the fact how improbable it has
been that his capture and the forced marriage would actually lead to something like this.
Sokka still doesn’t believe in destiny, but maybe there are some exceptions. Maybe they are
meant to be.

The smile on his face falters, when his mind jumps back to Zuko’s question, if the Water
Tribe would ever accept him. Sokka bites his lips, when he thinks of how his dad would
probably react to this new development. The Water Tribe boy wants to believe, that Chief
Hakoda would approve of Zuko, because Zuko is a good person and because of how much he
means to Sokka. But somehow he knows that he’s just trying to convince himself, because
it’s easier than facing the truth. And even if Dad would approve, Katara surely wouldn’t. Her
hatred for the Fire Nation runs deep and she can hold a grudge like no one else can.

Sokka sighs and turns his head to look out of the window into the sky, wondering where his
family might be right now and if they are alright. Do they still work on a plan to break him
free? Did they already give up on him? It’s been months and he still didn’t receive any
response to his letter.

The last remainder of a smile falls from Sokka’s face at the thought. It shouldn’t be so
disheartening. Zuko told him that it probably would be impossible for the messenger to bring
back a response, but Sokka can’t help but wonder, if his letter even made it to the South Pole.

All the excited, giddy feelings are gone by now, replaced by worry.

Does kissing Zuko make him a traitor? Wouldn’t they be relieved that Sokka does not only
not suffer in the prince’s company but is actually happy about it? Does that make him a bad
person?

He sighs and buries his face in the pillow again as homesickness washes over him. So far,
he’s handled it well enough, granting himself little moments of self-pity when he was alone.
Wanting Zuko to wrap his arms around him while he’s having such a moment is definitely
new. It’s ironic, because being close to Zuko is what caused this particular homesickness, but
at the same time even the idea of Zuko holding him makes Sokka feel a whole lot better.

He sighs again and closes his eyes, trying to think of nothing.

It doesn’t work, of cause.

What he needs is a distraction, but he doesn’t feel like playing Pai Sho with Iroh or take a
walk through the gardens. Breakfast hasn’t been too long ago and even he doesn’t feel hungry
now.

Sokka lets his gaze wander around the room and he finds the book that Iroh gifted him for his
wedding lying on a shelf. Zuko’s uncle keeps mentioning it every now and then, always
pointing out that it’s a worthy lecture. Sokka wouldn’t even consider it, if the
recommendation came from anyone but Iroh, but something tells him that he might find
answers somewhere among these pages, even though he doesn’t know the questions. It surely
won’t hurt to throw a look into the book.

Sokka gets up with a groan and fetches the book. He installs himself on a comfortable chair
close to the window and takes a doubtful look at the red leather cover.

Great Personalities of the Fire Nation

He snorts and shakes his head. Nevertheless, he opens the book.

The introduction is a lengthy explanation of the Fire Nation’s origins as well as a praise of
fire itself and its uses. Sokka pulls a face, because he really can do without some glorification
of the Nation that has dragged the world into a seemingly never-ending war. He’s tempted to
set the book aside, but he continues. After all, there must be a reason that Iroh wants him to
read this.

He turns the page and finds a poem.

Be that fire (Prinson Afonso)

I saw lightning striking into the middle of the earth.

I see it all, the beauty that blossoms inside the scars.

I danced to the rhythm between the stars that light up the world.

I hear it all,

The voices singing before the gates of the paradise

I sing, oh Agni, I wanna be the soldier of light

I feel it all

The love pouring out of the eyes

 Be the fire that lights.

Be the fire that lights.

Sokka crooks his head to the side and bites his lip. It’s beautiful poetry. The words are
touching him, igniting a feeling of warmth and hope. It’s probably what fire is all about in the
first place. It’s more than death and pain and destruction. Somehow the poem makes him feel
closer to the element. Thinking about the words it really makes him sad, that Zuko has lost
his fire. He sighs deeply and flips another page.

For the next two hours Sokka dives into the most interesting stories of Fire Lords, Avatars or
just simple Fire Nation citizens. At first the stories are not strictly chronologic and not at all
related to one another, but after a while Sokka realizes, what they all have in common. The
people that are portrayed on the pages were good people, who did good or even great things.
Not only for themselves or for their families but for the whole world.

A frown manifests itself on the Water Tribe boy’s face. He can’t imagine that it’s a widely
published work, especially the parts that highlight the collaboration between the nations and
how each of them can benefit from working with the others peacefully. The book doesn’t
mention any superiority of the Fire Nation at all.

Sokka flips another page and comes to the portrait of Princess Zeisan. At first it doesn’t seem
any different or more exciting than any of the other he has read so far, but that changes in the
second sentence already.

Born as the second in line to the Fire Nation throne, Princess Zeisan exhibited no signs of
firebending, which set the stage for her extraordinary journey. Throughout her upbringing,
the princess was repeatedly forced to engage in fierce battles against her brother, the later
Fire Lord Sozin, to achieve two goals: propel Sozin to greater heights and to awaken Zeisan’s
latent bending abilities, of which the latter has never been accomplished.

Sokka stares at the lines in disbelief.

Fire Lord Sozin, the Fire Lord who started the war, had a nonbender sister? Sokka can’t recall
that he has ever saw a picture or even heard of her and the palace is wallpapered with
portrays of generations of Fire Nation Royalty. The text goes on.

Consequently, her teacher’s sole focus shifted to Sozin, leaving Zeisan undaunted. Willing to
prove her worth compelled her to persevere and grow against the odds. Throughout her youth
she kindled a deep connection with a noblewoman from the Northern Water Tribe, Zeebee.
Later on, her life took a profound turn when she delved into the wisdom of Air Nomad
philosophies.

Zeisan came to the realization that the values of her family’s legacy were unworthy for her.
Aiming to outshine Sozin, she began her Air Nomad training under Sister Rioshon. An
unspoken love blossomed between the two woman, one which they concealed for the sake of
their shared quest to transform the Fire Nation for the better.
Zeisan ardently aspired to dismantle her family’s corrupt legacy. This pursuit led her to the
Guiding Wind, a burgeoning movement of Air Nomads advocating for the dissolution of noble
hierarchies. Zeisan realized that these allies could aid her in undermining her brother's
oppressive rule. She plotted to expose his schemes by capitalizing on his hubris, even though
this didn’t align with Air Nomad ideals.

Zeisan’s engagement to Monk Khandro, the Guiding Wind’s leader was motivated by political
strategy to strengthen the Guiding Wind’s influence while attracting crucial allies for Zeisan’s
mission to reform the Fire Nation.

Driven by her unwavering ideals, Zeisan organized a symposium to promote Air Nomad
values to Fire Nation nobles. The event was designed to counteract Sozin’s xenophobic
propaganda.

Unbeknownst to Zeisan, Sozin hatched a plan to thwart his sister’s ambitions. The plot
involved soldiers masquerading as radical Air Nomads, terrorizing nobles and spewing anti-
nobility. Sister Rioshon, who was aware of the sinister plan, was unable to warn Zeisan and
took it upon herself to cross Sozin’s treacherous machinations.

Tragically, despite her noble efforts, her mission ultimately failed. Sozin’s plan came to
fruition and the unfolding catastrophe led to the capture of Rioshon, her allies and the valiant
Princess Zeisan. Accused of treason she has been sentenced and executed the same day.

Sokka sits there and looks down at the lines in front of him in stunned silence. He gulps and
re-reads the text. A queasy feeling settles in his stomach, because the parallels are almost
grotesque.

... no signs of firebending … repeatedly forced to engage in fierce battles against her brother
…

… her teacher’s sole focus shifted … Willing to prove her worth …

… deep connection … Water Tribe … Sister Rioshon … love blossomed between the two
woman …

… her family’s legacy were unworthy for her … her family’s corrupt legacy … undermining
her brother's oppressive rule … reform the Fire Nation …

… noble efforts … failed … capture … sentenced and executed

It is unsurprising, that the Fire Nation Royal Family has a lot of issues. Sokka has witnessed
this with his own eyes. But that it seems to be a tradition to let the children compete against
each other to unhealthy lengths in that extend, is still shocking.

It’s impossible not to see the parallels between Zeisan and Zuko. Now it’s understandable,
why Sokka didn’t come across any mentioning of her existence yet. If she has been sentenced
for treason Fire Lord Sozin surely did everything to make it look like she never existed in the
first place, like he never had a sister to begin with.

Sokka bites his lips, because he can’t help but think that this is probably what Azula is trying
to achieve. She’s on her path to destroy Zuko, first dismantling him from his position as
Crown Prince and installing herself as the Fire Lord’s successor but ever since then, she uses
every opportunity she gets to cause Zuko hurt and pain. She would have killed him that day
in the training area, if Iroh didn’t step in. Once more Sokka curses himself that they came too
late to save Zuko’s firebending, but at least she didn’t achieve her ultimate goal.

Willing to prove her worth…

Zuko is like that too. He wants to impress the people, he wants to fulfill the expectations that
are directed towards him, but just like his great-grand-aunt the prince is aware of his family’s
wrong-doings. Zeisan acted on it. She tried to make the world a better place and right the
wrongs, but in the end she paid the ultimate price.

It’s discouraging, really.

And yet, Sokka can’t fight down a new feeling of excitement. A part of it comes from the
fact, that the Princess fell in love with another woman. It makes Sokka feel more comfortable
in his own skin and a lot less odd for his feelings for Zuko. In fact, it’s another parallel
between those two royals.

The bigger part of Sokka, however, is caught up on the fact, that even when Sozin was the
ruler of the Fire Nation there had been courageous people, who fought back, who genuinely
wanted to install reforms and lead the Fire Nation to a more just and peaceful way of life.
And the driving force came from within the Royal Family.

They might have failed back then. But times are different now and for some reason Sokka is
suddenly convinced, that it’s possible. Zuko could change the Fire Nation for the better. He
sees the wrongs, he’s been confronted with them for far too long and if anybody could
change something, it would probably be him. So far, Zuko always hesitated when Sokka
suggested openly defying either Azula or Fire Lord Ozai. But he didn’t argue with Iroh, when
the old man said that the Fire Lord and his daughter needed to be defeated. Maybe Zuko just
needs a push in the right direction.

They have to be careful though. A lot more careful than Rioshon and Zeisan have been.
Sokka doesn’t know a lot about Fire Lord Sozin, but he’s got a feeling, that Azula might be
even more vicious and dangerous than him. They would have to be so careful, if they don’t
want to face the same fate like Zuko’s great-grand-aunt.

Sokka doesn’t have a plan, but for some reason he feels almost invincible and he’s sure that
they can come up with something. Together, they can take down the Fire Lord and Azula.
Zuko might need some more time to adjust to his limited control over fire, but they can do it.
Sokka is sure of it.

A feeling as if there are butterflies in his belly takes a hold of him, when he thinks about
Zuko and about how strong he is despite everything that has happened to him. He would be a
great Fire Lord, and Sokka would be glad to be the person at his side, should it come to that.
He smiles to himself. This is not the time to think about possible future scenarios. But Zuko
needs to hear about his discovery immediately. He needs to understand that what Zeisan tried
to achieve is the right thing to do.

Setting the book aside, Sokka gets up. Whistling and with a bounce in his step he leaves their
quarters. If he can convince Zuko to plot against his family, there’s a lot of work that lies
ahead of them.
 Monster
Chapter Summary

An invitation for tea turns into a nightmare.

Chapter Notes

First of all, thank you so much for your kind words of encouragement ❤ It's amazing to
see how invested y'all are and how supportive. I really appreciate it so much.

Also, I wanted to post the link in the end notes of the last chapter, but I forgot about that.
Zeisan is actually canon, if you consider 'Avatar Legends: The Role Playing Game' as
canon. Her biography is just too good to not include her in a story and I stumbled across
her when I looked for historical Fire Nation personalities when I did my research for this
story. So yeah, credit should go to the writers and not to me (I just took the liberty to
change the end of her biography, because reasons). For those who want to know more
about her: https://avatar.fandom.com/wiki/Zeisan

WARNING: This chapter is probably the angstiest I have written so far and it's long, but
I didn't find the point to make the cut to make it two chapters and it needed to end where
it does.

Book 2: Spark

Chapter 9: Monster

Sokka bursts into Zuko's office without knocking, still overly excited about his discovery.

"You won't believe this! Did you know that your great grand-father -"

He stops abruptly, when he realizes that Zuko is not alone. There is a servant standing in front
of Zuko's desk, looking at the prince expectantly. His face looks familiar, but it takes Sokka a
moment to remember, where he has seen him. This is the very servant who came to look for
them to order them to meet Fire Lord Ozai right after that fatal speech in front of the pyres.
Sokka is still outraged and disgusted, when he thinks about that day. His eyes narrow. The
servant looks at him and scrunches his nose. It's easy to tell, that he despises Sokka as much
as Sokka despises him.
There is a warning in Zuko's eyes and Sokka sighs internally.

"Is there a problem?", he asks, unable to ban the slightly aggressive undertone in his voice.

Zuko looks stressed and worried and Sokka doesn't know what to do. His hand hovers over
his boomerang, but it won't be very useful in such a small room.

The servant throws another disdainful look at him before turning back to Zuko with an
arrogant expression.

"What is your answer, Prince Zuko?"

The prince glares at him, before he looks at Sokka.

"My sister invited us for tea", he explains.

Sokka is a little impressed how he manages to ban any emotion from his voice, but Zuko’s
eyes speak volumes. His good eye is a little too wide, showing the stress and fear he must be
probably feeling. Zuko is tense and obviously wants to avoid any confrontation with Azula.

Sokka totally gets that. He doesn't want to be anywhere near her either. The sooner she gets
away from the palace and puts a whole continent between herself and them, the better. Azula
doesn't hold any sympathy for any of them, so whatever she's got planned it's certainly not
just sharing a cup of tea.

He raises an eyebrow questioningly at Zuko, silently asking if the possibility to decline the
invitation even exists. The way Zuko's jaw tightens is enough of an answer and Sokka sighs
in surrender.

Zuko looks sharply at the servant. "Tell her, we'll be there."

The servant's bow is barely recognizable and it’s just rude considering that Zuko is still the
prince. Sokka throws another unfriendly look at the man.

“The Crown Princess will be happy to hear that. I'll leave you to your duties, Prince Zuko.
Prince Consort."

The man spits the words out and as soon as the door falls shut behind him, Sokka snorts.

"Such a prick", he mumbles, before turning to Zuko, who looks a little shaken.

"This can't be good", the prince says and wipes a hand over his face. Sokka can only agree.
His discovery about Princess Zeisan has to wait. They can discuss the issue and make plans
later. For now, they have to focus on the nearest crocofowl and that is Azula.

"Did he say what she wants?"

"No. Apparently, her departure to Ba Sing Se is planned for tomorrow. Officially, she wants
to say goodbye."
"Yeah, that’s bat-shit", Sokka comments.

Zuko just nods.

"I mean, what could she possibly want? She's got everything already. My title, my bending..."

"Not everything", Sokka corrects him and sends a gentle smile his direction, while he takes
Zuko's hand. "We got this. It will just be another one of her little mind games. She'll make
fun of us, try to provoke us... the usual stuff. We can sit it out. Just think about something
else, when she says something."

A little smile appears on Zuko's face. He guides Sokka's hand to his mouth and places a
gentle kiss on it.

"Like what?"

Sokka grins. "Hm, you tell me.”

He leans down and lets Zuko give him a peck on the lips. It makes him feel less tense and a
whole lot better immediately.

Azula awaits them in the tea pavillon in a garden that is secluded from the rest of the palace
by white walls. A winding path of white gravel leads past a pond to the small building. Most
of the plants in the area carry rose or blue colored blossoms. The wisteria branches that hang
over the path create an almost mystical atmosphere and it’s actually very pretty. When Sokka
mentions this to Zuko, the prince throws a long look at him before he nods grimly.

“These are all poisonous”, Zuko says quietly and points at different plants. “That’s oleander,
over there there’s monkshood, the one’s that look like trumpets are brugsmania and the one
with the black berries is called belladonna. Even the wisteria is considered poisonous.”

Sokka stares at him and suddenly the garden seems a lot less inviting.

“Lovely”, his voice slips higher than it usually is.

Zuko shrugs. “I don’t think that Azula will poison us. It would be too obvious and it’s not her
style.”

“That’s reassuring.” Sarcasm drips from his voice.

They share a look and for some reason Zuko seems to be suppressing a laugh. It eases
Sokka’s mind a little, at least until they reach the pavillon.

Azula is already there, sitting cross-legged at the low table, waiting for them.
She grants them a wide and by far too sweet smile.

“Brother! Sokka! Thank you so much for joining me on this beautiful day.”

“Here we go”, Sokka mumbles and he doesn’t miss her frown.

“Azula”, Zuko greets her and they both sit down as well.

Awkward silence stretches between them, while the servant pours tea into their cups. It’s
green tea. Everybody knows that Zuko hates green tea. So the mind games begin already.

Sokka wonders how he could start a conversation. Not that he actually wants to have a
conversation with Azula. If anything he wants to see her leave, as far as possible and
preferably to never come back. He definitely does not want to chat with the person, who
caused Zuko so much pain.

“They say you will be leaving tomorrow?”, he asks and doesn't manage to not sound hopeful.

“Indeed”, Azula says, taking a sip of her tea. “We managed to get a lot of work done these
last few days and made some strategic decisions. Father is very content with the outcome and
frankly, so am I. It will be a surprise, so I can’t go into any details yet. But you will learn
soon enough.”

Sokka throws a questioning look at Zuko, who glares at his sister and hasn’t even touched his
tea yet.

“So, I was wondering how you are faring, Zuko? Did you have some time to recover from
our training?”, she asks sweetly and Sokka’s grip around his teacup tightens. How dare she?

Zuko seems to think the same thing, but he just takes a deep breath and nods shortly.

“I’m fine.”

“That is a relief. You didn’t look so good the other day.”

“It was just a lack of sleep.”

She nods in understanding and sighs theatrically, before turning to Sokka.

“Sokka. We didn’t really have the occasion to get to know each other yet. But Uncle keeps
mentioning that you’re a respectable Pai Sho player. I wonder, if you would be up for a
game?”

Not sure where she’s going with this, Sokka nods.

“Why not?”

“Great.”
Azula snaps her fingers and instantly the servant appears, with a Pai Sho board under his arm
and sets up the table.

Next to him Zuko tenses and throws him a worried look. Sokka is not sure where this is
going either, but he just wants to get over with this meeting and at least Pai Sho requires
some silence for concentration, which means they don’t have to talk a lot. It could be worse.
But then again, Sokka thinks that he might be missing something.

Once the board is set up, Azula gestures at him to begin.

“Don’t you want to make the first move?”, Sokka asks carefully. He doesn’t want to spark her
anger.

Azula shakes her head. “No. You are the guest. You may begin.”

Sokka has come to learn and enjoy the game, but he is by far not an expert. He doesn’t want
to make a fool of himself, so he decides to go with an opening move that Iroh uses frequently.

He sets down the white lotus tile close to the middle of the board.

“Interesting”, Azula says, but something about her sly smile tells Sokka that he has made a
mistake, though he doesn’t know why she would consider this move unwise.

With careful consideration Azula places her first tile, the positioning telling him clearly that
she is going to be offensive. Either she wants him to retreat to a defensive role or she wants
to provoke him to meet her with a just as offensive strategy. It’s impossible to tell that yet, so
Sokka decides to play it safe and not take any unnecessary risks.

The game turns out to be surprisingly balanced. Even Azula admits that by throwing a
mocking comment at Zuko about his usual poor performance when it comes to the game.
Nevertheless, she tries to push her luck, daring Sokka to make a risky move, a mistake she
could exploit. He doesn’t want to give her that satisfaction. Luck seems to be on his side,
because once they are down to three tiles each, it becomes apparent that Azula can’t win.

“Hm”, she says. “Now, I admit that I did not expect that. Congratulations.”

“Thank you”, Sokka says, rubbing his neck a little unsure of what to say. “That was a good
game.”

“Indeed. Isn’t it nice, here?”, she asks and gestures to the garden.

Sokka opens his mouth to say something, but Zuko beats him to it.

“It surely is. But I’m afraid it is time for us to go. There’s still work that demands my
undivided attention and Sokka has some sword training scheduled for him.”

He nods quickly to confirm Zuko’s statement, maybe a little too quickly.

“I’m sure, you’ll have a few more minutes, Zuzu. I was just pointing out how pleasant this
afternoon is. I mean, look at us, sitting here playing together. Isn’t that wonderful? What do
you think, Sokka? Do you enjoy your new life here? All this luxury, the comfort, the
company?”

There is a challenging undertone in Azula’s voice and Sokka knows that no matter what
answer he is going to give, it will be the wrong one.

He gulps and throws a look at Zuko, who looks wary but also completely clueless and they
probably just walked into another one of Azula’s traps. The princess is still smiling at them,
raising her eyebrow expectantly.

“I… I wouldn’t say enjoy, but it’s not… too bad?” It sounds like a question.

“Not too bad, huh?”, Azula repeats. “At least you’re not a liar. But if life is not so bad here,
then why would you want to reach out to your past life?”

Sokka stares at her for a moment too long, before he quickly says: “I have no idea, what
you’re talking about.”

He knows exactly what she is talking about and a dark, threatening feeling takes a hold of
him, a premonition that this is the true reason she invited them here in the first place. The
hairs on his arms stand up.

Hasn’t he been thinking about the letter only a few hours ago?

Sokka gulps, while the sweetness in Azula’s smile vanishes and makes place for her usual
sadistic one.

“I knew, that I would have to jog your memory.”

She snaps her fingers two times. From the small servant’s room of the pavillon two guards
emerge, shoving a young woman, whose arms are tied behind her back, forward. Dark hair is
falling into her face, her black coat is ripped in some spots. The woman’s lips are painted red,
her eyelids black. The light make-up on her skin can’t cover the bruises on her face. She
glares at Azula, hatred glinting in her eyes and despite the obvious signs of violence, she
carries herself surprisingly gracefully. She tries to squirm out of the guards’ hold, to kick
their shins. Everything about her screams ‘defiance’.

Azula watches her coldly, but for once she looks oddly satisfied. The strange woman instead
looks as if she wants to spit in the Princess’ face.

“Leave us alone”, Azula says coldly. For a moment the guards hesitate, but when Azula
narrows her eyes at them, they quickly retreat.

The dark woman remains standing right in front of them. Her eyes flicker to Zuko, she seems
to recognize him and by the wooden expression on his face, he knows her too. The woman’s
gaze meets Sokka’s for only a brief second, before she looks down and the dark curtain of her
long hair hides her face.

“Azula”, Zuko says and there is something dark in his voice, something that makes the Water
Tribe boy shiver. “What have you done?”
“Me?”, she waves her hand dismissively. “I didn’t do anything. Do you know Admiral Chan?
Obviously he wants to be on my good side, probably so that one day I’ll marry his oaf of a
son. Not that this will ever happen, but anyway. His fleet is patrolling the southern seas and
he decided to send me a little parting gift.”

She motions to the woman.

When she doesn’t respond, Azula glares at her and casts a sizzling ball of lightning into the
palm of her hand.

“June, do I need to remind you, what is going to happen, if you don’t cooperate?”, she asks
coldly.

The woman, June, glares back at the princess and if looks could kill at least one of them
wouldn’t survive. Sokka watches the scene with increasing worry. His heart starts pounding
painfully against his chest. He absolutely doesn’t like where this is going.

Azula focuses on him and Zuko once more.

“Tell them, what you told me”, she orders, without looking at June.

The young woman raises her head, now looking directly at Sokka and she gulps.

“I am… a messenger. Amongst other things. My… my task was to deliver a message at the
South Pole.”

Sokka stares at her and his blood runs cold. Zuko reaches for his hand, but Sokka barely
notices.

“But?”, Azula demands coldly. She looks pleased.

June closes her eyes for a moment and lowers her head, clear signs of defeat and failure.

“It wasn’t difficult to find the village. But we couldn’t deliver the message.”

June opens her eyes again and Sokka knows, what she is going to say. His heart clenches, it
almost feels as if an iron fist wraps itself around it and he feels like falling, despite sitting on
the floor. He knows, what she is going to say and yet, the words hit him completely
unprepared.

“There is no Southern Water Tribe anymore.”

Zuko watches the scene unfold, unable to do anything. He can literally see something in
Sokka break, even before June says the words. When she does, Zuko’s breath hitches. The
words hit him, but what hits him more is the horror, the sheer disbelief, the sheer despair in
Sokka’s eyes. The Water Tribe boy opens his mouth, but no noise is coming over his lips.
Zuko can sense his pain, can sense the shock. It’s much more terrible to watch than to be on
the receiving end of Azula’s cruelty.

He should have seen this coming. He should have known better. Why would they spare
Sokka, when his capture didn’t solve the purpose they originally had in mind? Why would
they spare the innocent? The kids, the old people, the women, Sokka’s sister?

Burning anger boils in Zuko’s chest, like a monster that is going to break free at any given
moment. Tears shine in Sokka’s eyes, while he stares at June, stares at Azula with a plea in
his eyes. A plea to tell him that it’s not true, just a lie, just something to frighten him.

Sokka is squeezing his hand so hard that it becomes painful, but Zuko doesn’t care. His eyes
are fixed on Azula, who raises her eyebrow challengingly. A new feeling rises within him.
Yes, they’ve hit each other, when they were kids fighting over their toys. They battled each
other with and without their bending throughout their upbringing, fought for dominance and
prestige. But never did Zuko feel the actual urge to hurt his sister, to put his hands around her
fragile neck until she would either suffocate or break. Never did Zuko expect that he would
be capable of killing his own sister. In this moment, he knows that he is.

Next to him, Sokka shakes his head violently.

“This can’t be true! You’re lying!”, he chokes out, sounding surprisingly collected even
though his voice is barely louder than the wind that rustles through the leaves of the
surrounding bushes.

“Am I?”, Azula asks sweetly.

Sokka lets go of his hand and something dark settles in his eyes. He gets up on one knee,
ready to jump forward.

Azula seems to notice that as well and Zuko is not sure, if he should hold Sokka back or not.
For a moment his sister and his husband just glare at each other, Azula calm and coldy, Sokka
agitated and furious. June throws an apologizing look at him, but Zuko ignores her.

“You always lie”, Sokka spits out, hatred dripping of his words.

Azula rolls her eyes. “You really spend too much time with my brother. But if you want a
proof, you can have it.”

With that she reaches into her pocket and tosses a necklace onto the Pai Sho board. It’s a
pretty piece with a dark blue collar and a shiny stone pendant with carvings. The upsetting
thing is the dried blood that tainted both, the stone and the collar.

“Katara”, Sokka whispers.

Zuko barely dares to look at him, afraid of what he might see. But he is also unable to look
away.
As gently as possible Sokka picks up the necklace and holds it in his hand. He doesn’t hold
back his tears anymore, even though he makes no noise. His fingers trace the pattern on the
stone so carefully, as if he wants to make up for it having been tossed by Azula. There’s a
tenderness in his eyes like Zuko has never seen before and it's heartbreaking. It hurts him to
witness the scene, to watch how the realization of what has been done to Sokka's family sinks
in.

Suddenly, Sokka closes the hand around the collar and he squeezes his eyes shut. More tears
flow over his cheeks and his whole body is shaking. Zuko sits up, to wrap an arm around
him, to pull him close, to hold him through this. But before he can reach him, Sokka launches
forward.

The attack comes completely out of nowhere, too fast for even Azula to react. She falls over
unexpectedly and Sokka pins her to the ground, his forearm pressed against her throat to
choke her. His sister’s eyes widen in surprise. She squirms and wriggles, trying to break free,
but Sokka holds her down effectively, the element of surprise working in his favor.

Zuko watches in horror. He jumps to his feet and runs over to them, unsure what to do. He
has to hold Sokka back and at the same time, he doesn’t want to. He’s torn.

And when he sees Sokka’s face, he’s also shocked, because that expression, that grimace of
hate and rage and violence is nothing like him.

“You monster! You will pay for this!”, the Water Tribe boy hisses in such a dark tone, that the
hairs on Zuko’s arms stand up.

Azula coughs and struggles for breath.

“Do it”, she chokes out. “I dare you.”

Sokka presses his arm down more violently and she makes a noise that makes Zuko flinch
uncomfortably. For a second he sees fear wash over her face. It’s something he has never
seen on her before and it makes her look awfully human. A strand of hair escapes from the
accurate ponytail, which is held by the hairpiece that identifies her as the successor of the
Fire Lord. Zuko finds himself still unable to move. She’s struggling. Struggling for air,
struggling against Sokka’s hold.

Sokka growls loudly.

Somehow Azula manages to get a hand out of his grip and suddenly, there’s fire right next to
Sokka’s face.

“No!”, Zuko yells.

Azula laughs, even though it comes out in more or less desperate huffs. Sokka’s eyes widen,
but he doesn’t let go of her.

“Afraid?”, she asks. “Want me to give you a scar matching to my brother's?”

Sokka doesn’t answer, but Azula makes a pained noise.

“I knew savages like you know no honor!”

“You do not talk to me about honor. You’re a monster.”

Azula inhales with a rattling sound, ignoring his answer. “I could challenge you to an Agni
Kai. I don’t care that you are not a bender. How would you like that? Or I could challenge
Zuko.”

Sokka lets go of her as if he has been burned. Azula turns over and crawls to the nearest wall
to lean against it and covers her throat with her hands, trying to catch a breath. Without
another look at her or at June, Zuko is by Sokka’s side and puts an arm around him. The
Water Tribe boy is trembling, his breath comes in ragged huffs, tears are running over his
face and he looks beaten.

Zuko wants to say something, anything, but the words catch in his throat. He has no idea how
to console Sokka. He only knows that they have to get away, before Azula gets a hold of
herself.

Gently, he nudges Sokka to go, his arm still around his shoulders.

Behind them, Azula coughs. “You just made this game so much more interesting.”

Zuko doesn’t stop. He just keeps on going, on getting Sokka away from here, on getting him
to safety. Wherever that means. Sokka doesn’t make a single noise. He sets on foot in front of
the other, as if he was guided by invisible strings, like a puppet. Zuko gets the impression that
a gentle breeze could tip him over. It seems like all strength has left the other boy’s body and
when Zuko dares to look in his eyes, they are empty. All the life and energy is gone, as if
only the shell remained.

Zuko has no idea what to do or what to say.

When they reach their chambers, Sokka just stands there, in the middle of the room, the
necklace still in his hand.

Frankly, it scares Zuko that the other boy is so quiet. Where Zuko screams and cries when
despair and pain take a hold of him, Sokka is silent. The tears don’t ebb away. He buries his
face against Zuko’s shoulder and holds onto him, while his body trembles, but apart from the
heavy breathing there’s only quiet sobs.

They stand there for hours. Zuko’s mind is blank. He didn’t think it possible to be shocked by
his family’s or nation’s actions. But he is. Not for the first time the thought of just running
away crosses his mind. How could he have been so stupid to refuse, when they had the
chance to, all those months ago? How could he have been so happy this morning, when he
felt so in love, so powerful, so strong despite of the lack of his fire? How is it possible, that
Azula managed to make this happiness vanish in a blink, like she always does?

The longer he stands there, holding Sokka, the more the hatred in his heart grows. He can’t
do nothing. Azula won’t stop until she has completely destroyed both of them. Someone has
to stop her first. He can’t wait for Uncle to come up with a plan or for the Avatar to take
down his father. Zuko did nothing when Mother was gone, he did nothing after Father burned
him, he did nothing when Azula destroyed his bending power. But Zuko has to do something
now.

The anger and despair he feels are almost suffocating. He's been hurt countless times himself,
but never has he ever felt this torn apart like when he saw Sokka's world crumble to pieces.

Sokka is right, she is a monster.

He has to confront her, the sooner the better. Tonight, after nightfall. Before she destroys
another thing that is dear to him. Zuko tightens his arms around Sokka and places a soft kiss
on his temple.

It takes all of Zuko's self-control not to kick the door open. He balls his hands into fists and
glares at the slender form of his sister, who is lying on her left side on the rose colored silk
sheets. The hint of a smile on her lips tells Zuko, that she has been awaiting him and never
did he despise her more than in this moment.

"Who was it?!", he demands.

Azula doesn't even open her eyes.

"You're going to have to be a little more specific."

"Who gave the order to raid his village? Was it you or was it Father?!"

"Can't this wait until morning?", she asks and her indifference makes him even more furious.

"It can't."

He says it calmly, in a dangerously low voice. Azula sighs.

"Fine", she says, finally condescending herself to open her eyes and Zuko clenches his teeth,
when she sits up and makes a great show of yawning and stretching, before she looks at him
scrutinizingly.

"Did you forget that we are at war? And that he is a war prisoner?"

Zuko takes a step forward and his hand wraps around the handle of the dagger in his pocket.

"Answer the question!" His voice is shaking with suppressed rage.

Azula raises an eyebrow. "It wasn't me."

The prince looks at her, his eyes scanning for any sign on her face to indicate if she's telling
the truth.

Azula always lies, a litte voice in the back of his mind reminds him and he presses his lips
tightly together. What was he thinking, coming here when it's impossible to trust her?

"But you should ask yourself, which side you're on”, she points out.

He growls, which Azula acknowledges with another raise of her eyebrow.

"Don't you have any self-respect? Are you really so desperate for any recognition, for any
appreciation that you'd really fall in love with that boy? You are a Prince of the Fire Nation!
Did you forget that?!"

"What is your call here, Azula?"

"My call? You came into my chamber in the middle of the night. To do what? Threaten me?
Seek revenge?"

Zuko's heart is pounding against his chest and if he still had his bending, he knows that he
would have already set something on fire. Instead, he points the dagger at her. His hand is
shaking violently and it aggravates him only further, that Azula seems completely
unimpressed. She even has the audacity to role her eyes.

"Really, Zuzu? That's the best you can do? We both know that you don't have the guts to
attack me and you know, that I could take you out here and now."

"I warn you, Azula! I could challenge you to an Agni Kai!"

"I warn you, Zuko. How long do you think you would last without your bending?"

Her words hit as if he's been slapped and Zuko stumbles a few steps back, his eyes wide in
horror. How does she know? How could she possibly know?

"I don't know what you're talking about", he lies, quickly.

"Oh Zuzu, please. Let's not play those games. I know your little secret. I know everything
that happens in this palace. Instead of threatening me and making a scene you should be
thanking me, that I didn't tell Father. Yet. For now, your secret is safe with me. Something
that could change anytime, if I see fit. What do you think, he'd do if he knew?"

Fear, as cold as ice, spreads through his veins and all Zuko can do is stare at Azula in horror.
She seems pleased.

"You can't win this, Zuko. No matter how you spin it. You can never win. You're powerless.
You allowed yourself to get too attached to that Water Tribe boy. Now you gotta deal with it.
Maybe you forgot who you are. But you have to ask yourself one question: Do you really
want to turn against your family, brother?"
There's an unspoken challenge in Azula's voice, but Zuko is frozen in his spot. He's standing
in Azula's bedroom but from a distance far away he can hear his mother's voice in his mind
suddenly, desperate but insistent.

Never forget, who you are.

The words and her voice echo in his ears and Zuko shakes his head to cast them away. His
eyes fall onto the words engraved on the blade of his dagger.

Never give up without a fight.

In his head it's Uncle's voice saying those words and they mash with his mother's and Zuko
feels the urge to press his hands onto his ears to silence them. His whole body is shaking by
now and it feels like the burden is too much to bear. He thinks about the brokenness in
Sokka's eyes.

You can never win.

Suddenly he feels like crying. He came here to confront Azula, to make her pay for what she
did to Sokka, because somehow he still believes that the massacre at the South Pole has not
been his father's doing and he hates her. He hates her like he has never hated someone before.

Never give up without a fight.

You can never win.

Never forget who you are.

You can never win.

Never give up...

You can never win.

Never forget...

You can never win.

You can never win.

And then, like thunder coming from a distance, another voice comes to his mind. It's full and
loud and wise - the voice of the old man from his visions. It spreads through Zuko’s mind and
hits him to his mark, reverberating in his bones.

PRINCE ZUKO!

The powerful voice silences all the others and Zuko stands stock-still, while his heart is
hammering. For the blink of an eye Zuko is afraid, because the elder sounds furious. But then
his words trickle through the prince's brain. It's like a summoning, like pulling the strings of a
guitar and the sound fills every fiber of his being.
He knows who he is and recognizing it, recognizing himself suddenly makes Zuko feel
powerful. It’s an almost electrifying feeling.

He turns back to Azula and looks her straight in the eye. She watches him with an expression
of confused disgust. Maybe she thinks he's lost his mind, but Zuko has never seen more
clearly.

He is Zuko. He is the Prince of the Fire Nation. He is a protector. His family might be small,
consisting only of Iroh and Sokka, and it might be broken, but it's his and he will protect it at
all costs.

"Never", he spits out, answering to Azula's earlier question. His voice doesn't waver the
slightest. Zuko sounds determined.

"Good", Azula says scornfully. Then, she shakes her head. "It's over, Zuko."

He glares at her.

It's not, he wants to say. Not as long as I'm breathing.

But he has enough sense to not say those words out loud. Instead he turns on his heel.
 Coping
Chapter Summary

They try to cope.

Chapter Notes

We're slowly but surely approaching Book 3: Fire. Not quite there yet, but it is lurking
on the horizon. I am super excited for that, because it will be more heavy on the action
and less emotional (though I am not going to abandon those either).

Let me thank you for all the amazing feedback on the last chapter. I hope this chapter
lives up to it. Love you guys <3

Book 2: Spark

Chapter 10: Coping

Zuko is used to turmoil, but nevertheless he’s not sure how to handle that weird sensation of
being shaken to his core and complete inner calm. Panic and determination battle within him,
fueled by anger and compassion for the boy, who lies on the bed and watches him with big
blue eyes. The prince manages to croak out “I’ll be right with you”, before he storms into the
bathing chamber and closes the door quietly behind him.

With a few quick steps he’s in front of the basin. His fingers are still shaking and Zuko takes
a deep breath, before he looks up to gaze at himself in the mirror. It’s something he tries to
avoid, ever since his father decided to give him a mark that would remain.

Zuko watches himself. He’s disgusted, but not by the large scar, that covers his face. Right
now, he is almost grateful for it, because it distinguishes him from his father and sister. He
lets his eyes trail over his nose, his cheekbones, his chin. The family resemblance is
undeniable and Zuko glares at himself. He hates how much his eyes look like Father’s. Of
course, Azula got Mother’s eyes, lucky as she is, while Zuko wishes that he would look more
like Lady Ursa than like Ozai.

He looks at the ponytail on top of his head, that identifies him as a person of higher class, and
the golden hairpiece in form of a little flame, that gives away his rank as the Prince. He’s
looked like this his entire life. People would just need to glance at him and they would know
that he is a member of the Royal Family. There’s been days, when this has filled Zuko with
pride. It has been a great feeling to know that one look at him was enough to tell that he was
superior, that he was a direct descendant of Agni. Zuko has been so proud to be a Prince of
the Fire Nation, to be the next Fire Lord one day.

But now, as he looks at himself, knowing that Sokka is in the next room dealing with the loss
of who knows how many family members and friends, Zuko feels ashamed.

Does superiority really equal cruelty? If so, his family is undoubtedly superior. All that they
do is hurt people and cause them pain, just because they can. Which is probably the reason
that Father despises him, because Zuko can’t. He’s not like that. He doesn’t want to be.

Zuko pulls the dagger out of his pocket and weighs it in his left hand. He doesn’t want to be
like them. For a moment, he considers cutting off the topknot, wondering what he would look
like without it. It would be a message, a clear sign, that he breaks with the life he used to live.
It would make escaping from the capital so much easier. He would have to hide his face, but
otherwise he wouldn’t look like a prince anymore. They would just have to get down to the
port and find a ship that left by the first ray of sunshine.

A shaky sigh leaves Zuko’s lips. He feels an inner resistance. Running away has never been
more tempting and yet… a part of him doesn’t want to. Zuko can’t explain why, because
apart from Uncle, what holds him here? He knows that his place is in the Fire Nation. He is
the Prince, if he likes it or not. He has a responsibility, a duty. He can’t just run, even if that
causes him nothing but pain, even if it will destroy them.

How far would they come, anyway? They would be hunted. Neither Azula nor the Fire Lord
would stop before they had been caught and Zuko doesn’t want to imagine the consequences.
He’s terrified already, because somehow Azula knows everything. That part hasn’t been a lie.

Zuko must not make rash decisions, especially now that his sister has such leverage on him.
It is just a matter of time until she will use the knowledge of his lost bending powers or his
feelings for Sokka (or both) to her advantage. He could either openly defy Azula and Father
or play along, hoping that she will keep his secret. Zuko knows that she won’t. But she’s been
right: he doesn’t possess the power to defeat any of them.

Zuko looks at himself and maybe it’s the low light of the candles, but he looks terrifying. The
scarred side of his face is illuminated, highlighting the rough, ugly skin while dark shadows
dance over his good side. The light of the flame reflects in his eyes, making them glow
dangerously, as if a monster is sitting right behind them, waiting to break free. The prince
takes a deep breath.

Sokka has called Azula a monster and rightfully so. Zuko wonders what that makes him.

All his life he’s been taught that his family was better than anyone else. But how could that
be true?

Uncle always says that kindness is the true demonstration of greatness. But how could
kindness win over the cold-blooded power his family possesses?
Zuko doesn’t know what to do. He wants revenge, he wants to hurt Azula for all the times
that she hurt him and for how she hurt Sokka. She won’t keep his secret, she will tell Father
that he lost his bending and Zuko has to be prepared when this day comes.

He stares at the candle next to the mirror. Rage is still flooding through him, as is that
tingling energy that took a hold of him, when he heard the voice of that old master in his
mind. The energy flows through his body, it runs deep. It is so very different from the anger
he usually feels. Maybe this is it.

The prince evens his breath, his eyes are fixed on the flame. He feels the heat, physically. It
doesn’t reverberate in him, but there’s that energy in him that needs to go somewhere. He
breathes in and out, steady and calmly, but the little flame doesn’t bother. It doesn’t grow or
shrink with his breath and unconsciously Zuko grinds his teeth. This has to work. It just has
too.

He concentrates harder to accumulate the energy within him, but it slips away from him again
and again, almost as if he was trying to grab a bar of wet soap. With a frustrated gnarl Zuko
pushes his right hand forward towards the flame in a motion, that should provoke it to erupt
upwards and burn the ceiling.

Instead, Zuko finds himself suddenly in complete darkness.

He lets his head fall back and curses under his breath. He wouldn’t stand a chance against
any of them. At least not now.

As much as it pains him, as much as he wants to take Sokka’s hand and run, Zuko needs to
stay. He has to continue his training with Uncle until he can not only defend but defeat Azula
and the Fire Lord. As it is, he can’t protect anyone, not even himself let alone Sokka. He
needs to stay and so does the ponytail on his head. Zuko might not be a good liar, but for now
he has to make do. He has to pretend that he’s still proud of being the Prince of the Fire
Nation, that he still believes in what his father represents, while at the same time he has to
make sure that the light in Sokka’s eyes won’t vanish completely.

It has been a week since everything fell apart. Since he fell apart.

Around him, life goes on. It is brutal and unfair. But every day the sun rises again and every
day Sokka has to face the fact, that he will never see his baby sister again.

Katara is…

He can’t even think it.

Yet, his mind provides him with vivid imaginations and horrible nightmares about what
might have happened and everytime it sends him down a dark road of grief, pain and despair.
Sokka feels shattered, as if something within him broke and busted into pieces. He feels
battered and bruised, even though his body is completely intact. Sokka feels so incredibly
lost, he feels like the world is crushing him under its weight, like simply existing is too much.

He tries to manage, somehow. Sokka tries not to give into his despair, but most of the time,
he fails. It’s worst when he is alone. Then he gets lost in a spiral of dark, desperate thoughts
that pull him into an abyss of agony. And once it starts, Sokka is paralyzed, unable to break
free from the hell, that is his own mind.

He feels like it has been his fault. He knows it’s not. But that doesn’t change anything.

Sokka trusted, that his little sister was safe. Worried, sad any lonely, sure. But safe. How
could he have been so naïve? How could he have believed that they would leave the Tribe
alone, once they caught him and he gave his word to comply to whatever they would ask of
him? He feels so stupid.

He has been a terrible brother to Katara. He left her alone. He didn’t even try to escape,
instead he took the word from a Fire Nation Admiral that nothing would happen to his family
for granted. Sokka has been a terrible son, because he can’t remember to have grieved his
own mother the way he grieves Katara now. He is a terrible son, because he didn’t protect
Katara like he promised Dad he would do. He’s a terrible son, because he doesn’t even
remember Mom’s face.

Sokka curls into a ball and wails.

The memory of losing Mom is blurry, just like every other memory of her. Sokka shoved all
of those memories and all of those feelings that tore at him, that tried to eat away from him,
into a far corner of his mind, like putting it in a drawer and throwing the key away. He was
still only a little boy, when Mom was taken away from them and it had been… easy to
pretend that she was somewhere else and to just not deal with the loss.

But Sokka is no child anymore. He’s not an adult yet either, but he is too old to just bury what
happened to Katara, to Gran-Gran, to his people, deep within himself again. It’s impossible
because everything seems to come to the surface. It’s agony.

Sokka tries to push through it, but he gets so caught up in his mind and barely recognizes
anything else. He tries to push through, tries to hold on. With each passing day Sokka feels
less like a person and more like a ghost. He wonders if it’s possible to just fade away. It
seems like a worthy prospect, compared to the hurt, that seems to have become his whole
existence.

He tries to push through.

Sokka gets up in the morning, he eats when food is served, he lays down and falls asleep at
night. But sleep never lasts long, before he gets lost in the nightmares again and Zuko has to
wake him up.

The only thing, or rather the only one, who gets through all the darkness surrounding him is
the prince.
Zuko’s presence is like a beacon, like an anchor that keeps Sokka tied to the real world and
from drifting into the darkness of his own mind. When Zuko holds him, the pain becomes
bearable - which means that in these moments Sokka isn’t convinced that it will kill him.
Instead he thinks that Zuko’s arms are what keeps him together, what keeps him from literally
falling apart.

Zuko hurts too. Sokka can see it in his eyes. He sees the guilt and he sees the bitterness and
Sokka wants to tell him, that he doesn’t need to feel that way. But how can he, when he feels
guilty himself, because his only source of comfort is the Prince of the nation, that destroyed
everything? What would his people say? They lost their lives, while Sokka lives in the Palace
of the Fire Nation, married to their Prince.

It is nagging at Sokka, yet another reason that makes him a terrible son and brother, but it is
true. The only time he feels warm these days, is when he looks into Zuko’s eyes or when the
prince’s hand strokes gently over his cheeks, wiping the tears away.

Sokka feels so utterly helpless, so powerless, but at least he’s not alone.

But whenever Zuko is not with Sokka, the dark thoughts creep back to him and take a hold of
him once more.

That’s how Jin finds him.

Sokka lies on the bed, curled into a ball and he is unable to calm down. He cries and wails
and a part of him is ashamed, that the young servant sees him like that, but he can’t help it.
It’s simply too much to bear. He can’t break free from the grief and pain, that cling to him
like iron chains.

For a moment Jin looks at him with big olive-green eyes. She seems hesitant on how to
approach him. Their eyes meet and Sokka is shocked by how helpless he sounds, when he
speaks up.

“Zuko? Can… can you get him?”

Jin’s eyes widen, before a look of heartfelt warmth and compassion settles on her. She sighs
deeply and shakes her head apologizingly, before she closes the door carefully behind her and
comes over to the bed.

She squats down next to him and puts a gentle hand on his shoulder – something that is
surely inappropriate, given that she is a servant and he is technically part of the Royal Family,
but Sokka is grateful nevertheless.

“I’m sorry, Prince Consort. He is in a meeting with the ministers and the Fire Lord himself.”

Sokka gulps, not breaking the eye-contact, and tries to keep his composure (or what little is
left of it), but he flinches and squeezes his eyes shut, when yet another wave of loss washes
over him. It’s stupid, because Zuko is somewhere in this Palace, he’s not gone, but that he’s
not right here hits hard.
“If you’d like, I could keep you company”, Jin offers.

Sokka looks up to her. “You would do that?”

“Of course. If you’d like, we could go down to the market. It’s a lovely day and I have to run
some errands anyway. If you prefer, we can also stay here. As you wish.”

Under any other circumstances Sokka’s curiosity would have made him agree in a heartbeat,
but like everything else going to the market seems so trivial now. The world has become so
dull. The colors are less bright, even the heat in the Fire Nation is less intense. All the things
that might have been tempting are just not interesting to him anymore. And another thought
comes to Sokka’s mind.

“Am I even allowed to leave the Palace? I didn’t think I was.”

Jin’s smile falls from her face and she seems nervous, all of a sudden. She opens her mouth,
then closes it before she shakes her head and tries again.

“You’re allowed now.”

The message is clear. It stings like a thousand needles pinching into his skin. Why keep the
restrictions if there’s nowhere to go for him anymore? It’s just another blow, but Sokka is too
sad to feel angry. Instead, he nods, because he really does not want to be left alone in the
chamber and he also doesn’t want to hinder Jin doing her job.

He sits up and wipes the tears of his face.

“Give me a minute to…”, he gestures vaguely to himself. The young woman gives him an
encouraging smile.

Sokka still feels terrible after he’s washed his face and put on some clean clothes. Even the
cold water in his face didn’t help to feel like a person instead of a heap of misery. He
wonders, if he’ll ever feel any different again.

Zuko jumped into the air and swirled around himself to avoid the stream of fire his uncle
unleashed on him. A roar escaped him, when he landed on one knee, holding his forearms up
in front of his face, to block heat and fire. If he was an earthbender this motion would cast a
wall to appear in front of him. As it is, it makes the fiery stream part and pass on each side of
him and when Zuko decidedly moves his arms to the sides and pushes his fists to the ground,
the flames die down.

He looks at his uncle and despite this huge success in self-defense, they nod grimly at each
other. The reason for the tension, that lingers in the air, is not because of the training or
Zuko’s progress in his not-quite bending, because he is getting better at making fire vanish.
It’s the earlier announcement of the Fire Lord during the council meeting that weighs heavy
on their minds.

“Ministers”, his father had said. “The war has been going on for almost a hundred years
now and the time has come for it to end. The number of our enemies has diminished
remarkably ever since my rule began. The Southern Water Tribe has been defeated.”

Zuko pressed his lips tightly together at those words. He felt his father’s eyes on him and it
took a lot of self-control to keep his head down and not glare at the man on the throne. He
didn’t want to give him the satisfaction to see, how angry he was for destroying Sokka’s home.
When Zuko showed no reaction, the Fire Lord continued.

“The few ship, that Hakoda still has left, are no thread to our marine forces. The Northern
Tribe won’t engage into any battles, anyway. The siege of Admiral Zhao might have been
unsuccessful, but they haven’t engaged in the war before and ever since they lost their
Princess, the Northerners aren’t of any concern. What remains is the Earth Kingdom. Their
resistance is remarkable and many sieges have proved to be a waste of time.”

Fire Lord Ozai threw a meaningful look at Uncle, who just inhaled deeply to keep his
composure.

“Princess Azula is currently taking care of that problem. The walls of Ba Sing Se are thick, so
we will be taking it over from the inside out. If Ba Sing Se falls, so will the entire Earth
Kingdom. The only thing left to do to establish peace will be defeating the Avatar.”

The Fire Lord got up and began walking up and down in front of his throne.

“The timing couldn’t be any better. Sozin’s comet will return in a few weeks and when the day
comes, I will see to it myself. The comet will increase my power and that Avatar boy won’t
know what hits him. The war will be over and the Fire Nation will rule over the entire
world.”

He said it calmly, but the ministers cheered. His father’s eyes searched for Zuko and the
prince didn’t know how to react. He couldn’t bring himself to cheer, when actually he felt
nauseous hearing his father’s plans. Plus, cheering was for simpler people. He was not only
one of the ministers, but the Prince. Nevertheless, he had to show his respect to the Fire Lord.
Against his inner resistance Zuko bowed his head in the Fire Lord’s direction. To his surprise
it caused a tiny, satisfied tug at his father’s lips and Zuko felt like throwing up.

He once longed for nothing but his father’s approval. Now, it only made him feel terrible.

“My Lord”, minister Quon speaks up. “As you mentioned, the comet will arrive in a few
weeks. But what about the eclipse?”

Zuko’s eyes widened at that. He wasn’t aware that there would be an eclipse soon. It meant,
that for a short period of time, every firebender, even his father, would lose their bending
powers. It meant, that the Fire Nation would be vulnerable.
“Minister Quon, do you think so lowly of our military that they won’t be capable of
protecting the Fire Nation for a few minutes even without their bending?”

The question sounded like a thread, coming from his father’s mouth.

“Of course not!”, Quon said quickly. “But the White Lotus will surely try to-“

“They will try. And they will fail. I will make sure of that.”

The way Fire Lord Ozai said it, left no doubt that he meant it. He was so sure of his power
and the power of the Fire Nation, that Zuko couldn’t help but think that his announcement
would prove to be correct. Unease came over him and he couldn’t suppress the gnawing
doubts about the methods his father might employ to achieve his so-called peace.

The thought still haunts Zuko here at the training grounds and he throws another look at
Uncle, who lowers his arms and sighs. Then, he closes his eyes and hums to himself. When
he opens them again, the old man looks tired.

“For a long time, this war was like a smoldering fire. Your great-grandfather ignited it
fiercely, your grandfather let it glimmer. Your father wants to reinforce it and set the whole
world on fire.”

Zuko nods solemly.

“What would you do, Prince Zuko? Would you keep it burning?”

The prince shrugs. It’s a difficult question.

“Does it matter? Azula is next in line. My time was over before it even began.”

Iroh hums again, this time disapprovingly.

“It matters, because it answers a big question: Who are you? And what do you want?”

Zuko looks at his uncle and opens his mouth, but the words are difficult to find. He knows
what he wants, but it sounds silly and frankly naïve. Zuko hasn’t seen a lot of the world,
nothing actually, but what he has seen is enough to know that it doesn’t work that way.

“I want to live in peace”, he says quietly. “I want to be happy with Sokka, I want him to be
happy. I cannot undo what happened to him and his family, but I want to give him a home. I
wish I could make things right or correct the injustices of the war, that have been done to
him.”

Now that he started, the words simply come to him, but the more he says, the more Zuko
becomes aware of how unlikely these things are to happen.

“And not only to him. Actually, I want everybody to live in peace. Everybody deserves that.”
Resignation settles on him and Zuko looks to the ground.

“You have grown, Prince Zuko”, his uncle tells him and he shrugs again.

Uncle sighs. “You might not be ready for it yet, but as it is, I must show you this technique
rather sooner than later for I am afraid, that you will need it, nephew.”

Zuko looks at him and feels his heartbeat quicken. “Are you talking about…?”

“Yes. You have to know how to redirect lightning.”

Sokka feels strangely misplaced in the city, not only because he is a foreigner. There is so
much life around him, people going on about their daily businesses and it feels so wrong,
because how can they, when his life has come to a shattering halt? The Water Tribe boy is
aware of the pained expression on his face and even though some part of him is taking in the
buildings, people and conversations around him with curious excitement, he really doesn’t
enjoy it.

The street leading down from the Palace over the main plaza down to the port is seamed by
stony houses. Fresh flowers decorate the entrances and windows, many of which have
colored glass mosaics and it is obvious that wealthy people must live there. Several market
stands on the main plaza offer jewelry, spices, fine metal and leather works. There are no
prices indicated anywhere and the few customers are officials or noblemen and –women.

Jin doesn’t head over to those stands, instead she leads him down some smaller roads. The
further they get away from the palace, the simpler the houses become. Between the buildings
the women have strung lines to dry clothes, which are also less elaborate than what Sokka is
used to these days.

They arrive at another market, this one obviously for food and daily supplies. It smells like
fried meat and Sokka’s stomach grumbles a little. Jin grins at him at that, but continues her
way to a stand that offers yarns and needles. The merchant seems to know her, because he
greets her enthusiastically and starts to present his goods without further ado.

Sokka has never been interested in needlework, that’s woman’s work, but he waits patiently
for Jin and actually the sun on his face feels kinda nice. At the same time he can’t really
enjoy it, because his mind always jumps back to Katara. She would have probably liked the
metal needles that look more stable than those made of reindeer bone and they never had
such a choice of color for yarns back home.

There’s a lump in his throat and Sokka looks away quickly, somehow managing to suppress
the tears. He takes a few deep breaths and tries to distract himself by watching the people
around them.
There is basically no one wearing fine, embroidered tunics like he does. Even Jin’s dark robe
with the light red seam stands out against the rough, brownish linen clothes most people are
wearing. A woman with a little girl next to her catches his attention. Her robe has definitely
seen better days, it has been sewed several times. She looks worried, even though Sokka
can’t tell why.

When they pass the stand of a baker, the little girl pulls at her mother’s hand and points at it.

“Mommy, can I get one of those little pies?”

The woman grimaces, before she squats down so that she’s eye-level with the child. Carefully
she wipes a strand of hair behind the little girl’s ear.

“I’m sorry, darling. We do not have enough to afford that.”

The child pouts, before she nods sadly. The woman gets up again and obviously wants to
continue their walk over the market.

“We haven’t had pie since Aku went to the Earth Kingdom. Do you think we can have some,
when he gets back?”

The mother flinches and stops. The expression on her face resonates deep within Sokka. The
slight change in her posture tells him, that whoever Aku is won’t come back – and that the
child doesn’t know that yet. Watching her grief hits hard and for a moment he thinks his
knees might give in. It was a bad idea to come here and he’s about to tell Jin, that he wants to
head back to the Palace immediately, but when he turns, he catches the glimpse of a little
hand snatching two pieces of skewed, fried meat from the butcher’s stand. The woman
behind the counter, who is busy negotiating the price for a pound of rabbit-deer, doesn’t
notice.

The kid can only be a few years younger than him. He can’t even tell if it’s a boy or a girl,
but nevertheless he watches how they hurry away to hide under a porticus, where an even
younger boy is sitting, impatiently waiting for their friend or sibling to get back. The boy’s
eyes shine so brightly at the sight of the little piece of meat. A chuckle almost escapes
Sokka’s throat, because he can relate to them. He can relate so much and suddenly Sokka
sees.

He sees how the adults search their pockets for some coins. He sees how the old people look
wistfully at the meagre pieces of meat, that must cost a fortune for them. He sees the hungry
kids, the stressed look on their mother’s faces, not knowing how to feed them. And he
doesn’t see the men. There is hardly any man around and those who are, are either old or
injured. These people are suffering, Sokka realizes.

Somehow he thought that everybody in the Fire Nation benefitted from the war, living at the
other nation’s expenses. It’s stupid, now that he thinks about it. Obviously, these people in
front of him are paying the price for the war, too. They struggle to make ends meet as well.

These are simple people, real people so to speak, and somehow it has been easy just to not
think about the fact, that there are innocents in the Fire Nation as well. For a short moment
that idea popped up during the procession down to the port, when Azula left the Fire Nation
capital for the first time, but so much has happened since then, that the event escaped Sokka’s
mind.

Without really thinking about it, he turns to Jin.

“What do I have to do to buy some of those pies? Or these fried meatballs? I don’t have any
money.”

“That’s because you don’t need it. You need this.”

She shoves a stamp into his hand. It has a seal on it, that identifies him as a part of a royal
delegation and it has Zuko’s name and title on it.

Sokka looks at her questioningly and Jin laughs good-heartedly at him.

“The merchants will note the amount and with the official seal they can hand it in and get the
money directly from the Palace.”

He nods and hurries over to the bakery stand. The woman stares at him, when he purchases
all the pastries and even more, when she tells him the price and he doesn’t negotiate. But
Sokka doesn’t have time for that. He quickly makes his way through the crowd to find that
little girl and her mother. When he does, he hands them a bag that contains not only one but
two of the little pies the little girl was pointing at earlier.

The woman seems terrified, maybe because of the embroidered fire insignia on his sash belt
or the rest of his clothing, that clearly identifies him as who he is.

“I do not have the money to pay this”, she says, shoving the little girl behind her. “And I
don’t have anything to give in return. Don’t ask that of me.”

Sokka stares at her, dumbstruck. Does she think he’s trying to buy her daughter? For two
pies? Obviously he must look as horrified at her as she looks at him, because the defiance on
her face makes way for skepticism.

“It has been paid for”, Sokka reassures her.

“By whom?”

“Prince Zuko”, Sokka answers truthfully. “I assure you, we do not ask for anything in return.
Just enjoy the meal. Please, it’s the least we can do.”

The woman looks at him as if she’s having an appearance, but hesitantly she reaches for the
bag.

“The… the Prince?”

Sokka nods. She frowns but takes the bag from him, finally. “You are his… what is the
word?”
“Consort. Prince Consort.” He scratches his neck uncomfortably. “Well, if you’ll excuse me.
There are some kids over there, who could do with some bread and meat as well.”

He doesn’t wait for her reply and looks for the two children he saw earlier. On his way,
Sokka gives a large bread to an old lady, that looks at him with teary eyes and pats his cheek.
The gesture reminds him so much of Gran-Gran that he almost cries along, but luckily that’s
when he catches a glimpse of the little boy he was looking for.

He approaches him carefully, but the boy seems delighted that someone is giving away food
for free. The boy calls for his big sister, who thanks Sokka sagely. He notices that their shoes
are damaged and quickly takes them over to a stand to buy them new ones.

Sokka is aware that the people watch him warily. It doesn’t take long until they begin to
whisper among themselves that he’s the consort of the prince. He half expects insults at that,
given the popular opinion among the officials and nobleman, but there are none. It seems
beggars are no choosers in the Fire Nation either and somehow it feels nice to have people
not look down on him.

They spend the whole afternoon on the market and at some point Jin basically has to pull him
away. He lets her do so reluctantly, because it really made him feel better to see how happy
he could make those people with so little.

Jin throws a meaningful look at him.

“That was very stupid and very clever, Prince Consort.”

He doesn’t like how she emphasizes the title, but she actually looks proud of him.

“Why is that?”

“Let’s just say, people will talk about this.”

She winks at him and he follows her back through the streets, none the wiser.
 Will you fight or will you walk away?
Chapter Summary

Zuko is still torn about his path.

Chapter Notes

Now, let's see what happens after the visit on the market.
There are some quotes in this chapter or rather wisdoms that have not been thought of
by me, but by smarter people.
First is from Rikki Rogers (marked with * in the chapter), second is from Brené Brown
(**).
And now, enjoy!

Book 2: Spark

Chapter 11: Will you fight or will you walk away?

Sokka’s mind is still on the market, when he enters their quarters and thus, he doesn’t notice
right away that he’s not alone as he closes the door behind him. A snapping noise almost
makes him jump out of his skin and he raises his fists to defend himself, only to find Zuko,
visibly tense and agitated, who slammed his fist down on the table and glares at him.

“What’s gotten into you?!”, the prince yells in disbelieve, sounding distressed.

Sokka looks at him wide-eyed, not sure what to make of this outburst. He surely didn’t
expect it and frankly, he has no idea what Zuko is talking about. He is just about to tell him
that, but Zuko crosses the distance and pulls him into an unexpected, tight embrace.

Something is clearly off by the way Zuko clings to him and instinctively Sokka wraps his
arms around the other boy to reciprocate the hug.

“Are you alright? What’s wrong, Zuko?”, he asks softly, while bracing himself for more bad
news – as if they didn’t have enough of those lately. He runs his hand over Zuko’s back in a
soothing manner.
“What’s wrong?”, Zuko echoes and pulls back to look at him reproachfully. “What’s wrong?!
I tell you what’s wrong: when I came back from training you were gone!”

Sokka’s first impulse is to ask what’s the big deal about that, but once he understands that
Zuko is not actually angry but worried about him guilty conscience settles on him. He clears
his throat and looks at Zuko apologizingly.

“I wasn’t gone. I was just-“

Zuko doesn’t even let him finish.

“There was no message. Nothing! I thought… I… I thought you’ve been taken away by my
father’s orders”, he admits finally, his voice quiet and strained.

The Water Tribe boy shakes his head softly, while understanding dawns on him. He reaches
out to cover one of Zuko’s right cheek with his hand, gently stroking over the skin, while he
leans his forehead against Zuko’s.

“I’m sorry. I’m sorry, Zuko. I didn’t think. I’m here, I’m alright”, he reassures the prince.

A deep sigh comes over Zuko’s lips, before he nods weakly. It’s touching how worried he is
about him and Sokka pulls him into another embrace, this one less bone-crushing and more
tender.

“We’ve only been to the market.”

“We?”

“Jin and I.”

Zuko lets go off him and looks surprised.

“You’re feeling better then?”, he asks carefully and Sokka shrugs.

“I didn’t want to be alone”, he admits. “And yeah, I… it was nice to see the people’s faces
lighten up, when I bought them food and stuff.”

Zuko blinks at him, his face completely blank, before he frowns.

“You did what?”

Sokka sighs and sits down on the edge of the bed.

“I was surprised, that there’s so much poverty here in the Capital. I wasn’t expecting that. But
how could I not help them? I mean, these breads and pastries really weren’t that expensive,
but hardly anyone there could effort them anyway. So I bought some and gave them to some
children and old people.”

He doesn’t know, what to make of Zuko’s horrified expression, but Sokka definitely doesn’t
like that he goes so pale. Suddenly he feels a little nervous, because Jin’s words that he might
have done something stupid are still very present and Zuko’s reaction is not exactly
encouraging either. But as Zuko seems incapable to say something, Sokka goes on.

“Uhm. Speaking of which. Is there like a limit of how much we can spend per day or per
week? I’m sure there’s more people in need and I think-“

He doesn’t come further, because Zuko finally snaps out of his stupor.

“Have you lost your mind?!”, he yells angrily and now it’s Sokka staring at him.

Zuko’s reaction is not at all what he expected, actually he thought the prince would
appreciate that Sokka got up and out of the Palace and that he engaged with the people, trying
to move on after the latest ordeal they had to endure. Instead, Zuko seems furious and Sokka
has no idea, where this is coming from.

“Uh…”

“What have you been thinking?! You went into the city and just gave them bread?!”

“I didn’t think it was a bad thing”, he says.

“No, exactly! You didn’t think at all!”

Sokka narrows his eyes and glares back at Zuko. “What’s that supposed to mean?”

“This is bad! Word about this will spread all over the city.”

“That’s good, isn’t it? The people will know, that there’s someone, who cares about them.
They will know that the food on their tables has been paid by you. They will appreciate that.”

Zuko stares at him, his mouth hanging open before he runs a hand through his hair and starts
pacing.

“You don’t understand! I try to keep us out of danger. By running around and giving stuff
away for charity you are putting us right into it.”

“Well what did you expect me to do? Nothing?”

“That would have been the best.”

Sokka can’t believe how cold Zuko sounds as he says those words. It almost seems as if Zuko
knows about the conditions the people live in, but he doesn’t care, which seems unlikely to
Sokka. He’s definitely not going to apologize for what he did. It’s been the right thing and he
wonders why Zuko would be so reluctant to help.

“These people need someone to stand up for them!”, he argues.

“I once tried to stand up for the people and see what it got me!”, the prince shouts, pointing at
his scar.
His words cut through the air, leaving dead silence behind. Sokka gulps and for once, he is at
a loss for words. He watches Zuko, lets his eyes trail slowly over the large mark on his face.
It’s true, he has never seen Zuko without it and Sokka has become so used to the scar, that he
almost forgot that Zuko did not always look the way he does now. It never bothered him, he
never thought of it as ugly or a deformation. Sokka has fallen in love with this face and to
him Zuko is beautiful.

And yet, shame and guilt wash over him for accusing Zuko of not doing enough while he
paid the price for his courage.

Sokka watches Zuko, who balls his hands into fists and turns his back. Sokka doesn’t see his
face, but his posture is clearly showing, that painful memories rise to the surface. He does
feel bad about this, because he didn’t want to cause Zuko pain, but nevertheless Sokka is
convinced, that he did the right thing.

He gets up and carefully puts a hand on Zuko’s shoulder, but the prince shoves it away
unceremoniously. His voice is quiet, when he speaks.

“Things haven’t been great before, Sokka. But ever since I spoke up against my father’s
plans, my life has been hell.”

“Well, thanks a lot”, Sokka snorts sarcastically.

Zuko throws an unfriendly look at him. “You know that I am not talking about us. But I’m
not willing to take any more risks. What do you think my father will do, if he finds out that
my money is going to charity?”

Sokka bites his tongue, hesitating if he should say what’s on his mind. In the end, he does,
because it’s the truth and the sooner Zuko accepts it, the better.

“I honestly don’t think he’d care. When was the last time he talked to you that hasn’t been a
council meeting? I know that hurts, but your father doesn’t care about you, Zuko.”

The words hang heavily in the air and Zuko flinches as if Sokka’s slapped him in the face.
Then he glares at him with such intensity, that Sokka is almost afraid that a ball of fire will
burst out of him until he remembers that Zuko can’t bend anymore.

“What do you want from me, Sokka?”, Zuko’s voice is dangerously low.

“I don’t know”, Sokka admits. “But we can’t just sit by, while the world is suffering. People
are starving, even here.”

“People are starving everywhere! And just so you know: I’m not just sitting by. Every day I
am risking my head to …”

“To what?”, Sokka asks, frowing because Zuko suddenly cut himself off.

“Doesn’t matter.”

“It does. Someone has to do something.”

“That someone is not us!”

Zuko’s yelling and Sokka is agitated enough to just yell back. He doesn’t know, where it’s
actually coming from, because in the morning Sokka could barely find the energy to get up as
pain and grief felt like pulling him under water, but ever since he got out and caught a
glimpse of life, real life, there is an unsettling urge in him to do something. Sokka knows
nothing that he’ll do will ever bring back Katara. There is also a strange resistance within
him to actually help Fire Nation people, but it seems like the right thing to do. The only thing
he can do, if he’s honest with himself.

Sokka is still overwhelmed by everything and probably this is bad timing and maybe he’s
rushing into things, but he can’t help it. He suddenly remembers what he wanted to talk about
with Zuko, before Azula destroyed the little piece of mind that he found.

“Your great-grand-aunt would say otherwise”, he blurts back, crossing his arms over his
chest.

Zuko starts pacing and looks at him, confused.

“My what, now?”

“Wouldn’t you like to know?” Sokka knows he sounds incredibly childish, but he can’t help
the satisfaction at Zuko’s frustrated glare.

“Your great-grandfather Sozin apparently had a sister.”

“No, he didn’t. I would know”, Zuko argues.

“No, you wouldn’t.”

With that Sokka gets up and fetches the book from the shelf, opening it and searching for the
right page, before he shoves it into Zuko’s hands. The prince gives him a skeptic look, but
nevertheless he reads the entry about Princess Zeisan. Sokka watches, how his eyes go wide
and maybe he only imagines, that Zuko’s hands start to shake a little.

“What is this?”, he whispers after a while. “Where’s this coming from?”

“It’s the book your uncle gave me for our wedding. I read it, just before… you know.”

They exchange a look, before Zuko sets the book down slowly on the nearby table, Zeisan’s
page still open. He doesn’t say anything.

“Doesn’t she remind you of someone?”

The prince just exhales noisily and pointedly does not look at him. Sokka rolls his eyes, but
keeps pushing.

“She tried to change the Fire Nation for the better. She wanted to break her brother’s
oppressive rule. Zeisan took the risk and-“
“And look where it got her! Executed and wiped from the history of the Fire Nation!”, Zuko
yells, sounding increasingly desperate.

Sokka sighs. “Look, I know that you’re afraid. Who wouldn’t be? But… but don’t you think
she was right to try? Shouldn’t we try? There’s still hope.”

“There’s no hope, Sokka”, Zuko says and closes the book. He sounds beaten. “The Earth
Kingdom will fall and the war will be over. The Fire Lord explained his plans in the Council
Meeting. The preparations are underway. It is just a matter of weeks.”

A cold shiver runs down Sokka’s spine and goosebumps spread on his arms. It can’t be.
There must be a way. Otherwise, wouldn’t all the losses of his people and the people of the
world be worthless? Wouldn’t that mean, that they died for nothing? That they suffered for
nothing? That Zuko and him suffered for nothing?

“And what then?”, he whispers.

Zuko shakes his head. “I don’t know. But it’s not our fight.”

“It is our fight! Whose fight is it, if not ours?”

Sokka wipes over his eyes angrily, because the stupid tears are coming back and being angry
actually only makes it worse. He doesn’t want to cry anymore, not right now.

Zuko snorts.

“I’m sorry, Sokka. But I can’t stand up to anyone. I don’t have the power.”

“You are the greatest swordsman I know!”

“Then you don’t know a lot of swordsman.”

“Stop!”, Sokka pleas.

Once more, Zuko shakes his head. “I’m just telling the truth. You think we stand a chance
against my father, my sister? Well, we don’t. Uncle explained how to redirect lightning and
he showed me the motions, but he’s not letting me do it, because apparently it’s too
dangerous. He’s not going to do it even though he would go easy on me, which Azula and my
father won’t.”

“There must be something we can do, Zuko. Some weakness, we can exploit.”

Zuko opens his mouth, but closes it without saying anything. It makes Sokka frown.

“All I want to do is keep us save”, Zuko says finally.

Sokka smiles weakly. “I appreciate that. But I can’t just do nothing. I can’t, not any longer.
Maybe try to look at it, not as a fight against your family but for the people. Like… like
Zeisan did.”
“I’m sorry to disappoint, Sokka. But I’m not her. And that’s the last we’ll speak of this.”

It takes hours for Zuko to fall asleep that night. It’s Sokka’s fault, but not because he’s tossing
and turning next to him, while a troubled frown covers his face even in his sleep. They didn’t
talk a lot after their earlier fight and Zuko is fairly sure, that he managed to send Sokka back
into that stupor he’s been in since Azula presented the news of the destruction of his Tribe.

The energy, he seemed to have gained on the market and later during their fight, has left him
altogether and if Zuko had to put a label to it, he would say that the Water Tribe boy was in a
state of severe melancholy, that was fueled by grief, desperation and disappointment. Zuko
knows that he's to blame for the latter, but he did the right thing. Not that this makes it any
better.

He meant, what he said to Uncle. Zuko is well aware of the injustice that has and is
happening under the oppressive rule of his forefathers and if he could, he would change that.
But he can’t.

Maybe, if they had more time and the stars aligned in their favor, he could. But he’ll never
know, thanks for Uncle refusing to train him with real lightning.

Zuko snorts. Sokka wants him to openly rebell, but Zuko is not a complete fool. There’s no
way they would make it out alive, if he did so. And despite everything, Zuko likes to live.
Sokka might be excited about the discovery of Princess Zeisan’s story and Zuko does
understand this excitement – she has been remarkable – but even she failed and she had a
community rooting for her and supporting her. Zuko has none and maybe he is a coward, but
at least he’s alive.

He blinks against the sunlight, that is falling through the leaves and squeezes his eyes. Birds
with colorful feathers sing and jump from tree to tree. It’s warm and the air feels heavy
around him. He’s in a jungle, Zuko realizes, but he has no idea, how he got there.

He takes in his surroundings, all the plants and tropical flowers and for a moment he allows
himself to cherish in this heat. That’s when he hears someone humming a melody not far
away. Unsure, if it’s friend or foe, Zuko carefully makes his way through the plants and soon
the farns make way for a clearing. Under a small waterfall there’s a pond and on a large rock
at the shore a familiar old man is sitting and holding a fish rot.

Zuko pinches the bridge of his nose and sighs. He’s not in the mood for philosophical
discussions. For a moment he considers just retreating back into the forest, but apparently it’s
already too late for that.

“You can’t run away from yourself forever, Prince Zuko”, the old man says without looking
in his direction.

“I’m not running away from anything.”

The elder doesn’t comment.

“It has been a while since we met. You are doing remarkably well without your bending.”

Zuko huffs. “I don’t know about that.”

He walks over to the man and sits down on a rock on the opposite side of the little pond. He
watches the other man’s features.

“Are you ever going to tell me, who you are?”

“Eventually.”

Zuko rolls his eyes. “Where’s your dragon?”

“Oh, Fang is on a journey far away, watching over another young man in need of guidance.”

“Please, I don’t want any guidance. At least not more of it, anyway. It seems as everybody is
pushing me to open rebellion or sworn loyalty to my Father, the Fire Lord.”

The old man nods thoughtfully. “And you don’t know which road you want to go down?”

“I don’t want to go down either of those roads. I just want to live in peace.”

The man looks up and there’s so much understanding in his eyes that a sigh of relief escapes
Zuko.

“You know, what I’m talking about, are you not?”

“I am. Unfortunately.”

Zuko frowns in confusion. “Why unfortunately?”

“Because, you must not confuse neutrality or, worse, indifference with peace. It was one of
my biggest mistakes in life. I tried to avoid conflict and in the end, it only spread like a
wildfire.”

“So you, too, are saying that I have to choose a side?”

The man puts the fishing rod aside and lets his eyes trail over Zuko’s face thoughtfully.

“Evil and good are always at war inside you, Prince Zuko. It is your nature, your legacy.”
Zuko gulps at those words, because somehow he knew that. Being told right to the face is a
completely different story, however. And it’s one he doesn’t like to hear.

The elder seems to notice his discomfort.

“There is a bright side. Born in you, along with all this strife, is the power to restore balance
to the world, should you decide to do so.”

“I really don’t think so! People are telling me, that it’s in my blood. Sokka is totally
convinced that I should follow the footsteps of a former Fire Nation Princess, who rebelled
against my great-grandfather Fire Lord Sozin.”

The old man grimaces, but Zuko goes on. “But how could I? There’s a prophecy telling me
that I would be the strongest bender in lifetimes, but that’s sheer blasphemy. I do not have
that strength.”

“Strength doesn’t come from what you can do. It comes from overcoming the things you
once thought you couldn’t.”

Zuko blinks at him.

“I have no idea, what this means. Are you helping me get back my bending?”

The elder sighs and shakes his head, seemingly a little disillusioned. “No, Prince Zuko. As I
explained during our last meeting, this is nothing I am capable of.”

“Do you think it’s even possible?”

“I have seen many a thing in my life. Nothing is impossible. But I wasn’t speaking about
your bending.”

“I was afraid, you’d say that.” The frustration shows in his voice and Zuko throws a rock into
the water.

“There’s a lot of things I don’t think I can do. I’m not a great representation for a Prince of
the Fire Nation. People look down on me all the time. My family, the ministers, the
noblemen, the simple folk… The list would be shorter if I just mentioned those who do
appreciate me.”

“Well, for this problem I have an advice for you.”

“You do?”, Zuko looks up in surprise to see the elder nod.

“Courage starts with showing up and letting ourselves be seen. Think about this, Prince
Zuko.”

The elder starts to vanish right in front of his eyes and Zuko jumps up, reaching out for him,
yelling “Wait!”, but again, he’s too late. All he manages is to slip from the rock and fall into
the water below.
Zuko startles awake and groans. Perfect, he thinks, just another conversation to add to his
headache. He grabs the pillow and buries his face under it.

Zuko is still in a bad mood, when he calls Jin into his office, the next day. The servant bows
dutifully before him.

“Prince Zuko”, she acknowledges him, sounding unusually insecure.

It’s understandable. Unlike his sister, who requires new servants every few weeks because
nobody meets her impossible requirements, Zuko has had Jin serving him for years and he
has never called her out for anything.

“You have taken Sokka to the market. Why?”, he asks, coming straight to the point.

“I thought some fresh air would be good for him and that a visit of the city would help get his
mind a little off all the sorrow he is dealing with lately.”

Zuko never expected Jin to have bad intentions, it’s just that he has questions and he knows
that talking to Sokka won’t get him anywhere. He isn’t even sure, if Sokka wants to talk to
him right now. Breakfast has been a rather quiet affair, even though he woke up to Sokka
cuddled against his side this morning.

“I see. And why did you allow him to buy those things and gift them to the people?”

Jin flinches uncomfortably. “It is hardly my place to prohibit something to a member of the
Royal Family, Prince Zuko. He seemed to enjoy it and on the way back Prince Consort Sokka
was very passionate about it.”

“I’ve noticed”, Zuko sighs and rubs his forehead. “How many… how many people
recognized who he is?”

Jin looks at him out of her big eyes and seems unsure how to answer. She scratches her neck.

“Well, uhm… I mean, the royal attire is kind of… obvious? And he also confirmed it to a few
people, who asked. So…”

“Impossible to keep it a secret”, Zuko concludes and groans. “Perfect. Just perfect.”

He taps with his fingertips on the surface of the desk, trying to come up with something, but
Zuko has never been great at making plans and in this particular situation it is completely
impossible to somehow hide what Sokka has done.
“How… how did people react to him?”, he asks, if only to buy some time, but also because
he is curious.

“They were hesitant to accept the bread first, because they thought it comes with a catch, but
then…”

Jin shrugs and Zuko is not sure, if he should interrogate further, but his original question
wasn’t directed at the ‘gifting people bread’-thing but at the ‘Prince Consort’-thing.

“And after he confirmed that he is my… husband?” Zuko feels himself blushing. “Were there
any insults?”

“No, Your Highness.”

“None?”, he asks in disbelief and Jin shakes her head.

“People have been impressed with him. And grateful. They were frankly surprised that
someone from the Palace came to their district to help. May I speak openly, Prince Zuko?”

When he nods, Jin continues.

“The regular people care about how they are going to feed their families, how they are going
to pay for their houses and how they can keep their children away from the war. They really
do not care about who you share your bed with.”

His blush intensifies and Zuko coughs. “We are- we haven’t- I mean…”

Jin giggles at his stutter and Zuko realizes a moment too late, that he’s sharing information
that he doesn’t have to share. It’s not that he didn’t think about it, but this is certainly not
Jin’s business.

“I don’t know, how to deal with the aftermath of your trip to the market. I’m afraid it will
cause a lot of trouble.”

“If anything, the people see both of you in a better light now.”

“The Fire Lord won’t. I have no idea, how to avoid justifying this to him.”

Jin bites her lip, obviously worried. Then, her face lightens up.

“Maybe you don’t have to. Look!”

She points to the window, where a messenger hawk has just landed. The bird’s harness shows
the symbol of the Min-family, a noble family of Ember Island, that Zuko contacted a while
ago regarding the vinery project.

Quickly, he opens the window to take the letter from the hawk.

Without further acknowledging the bird – Jin is already taking care of that, cooing the hawk
to jump onto her arm to probably carry it somewhere to get food and water – Zuko opens the
letter. His eyes fly over the words and deep, heartfelt relief settles on him.

“This is our way out.”

There is no procession, no big parade, no grand words or speeches. The sun has barely risen
and the waves splash gently against the hull of the ship. The only one to see them off to the
boat, that will take them to Ember Island is Uncle.

He smiles at them solemly and puts a hand onto Zuko’s shoulder.

“I wish you a pleasant journey, nephew. It might take a while until we see each other again.”

“We’ll only be gone for a few weeks,” Zuko says, a little surprised that Uncle seems so
emotional.

The old firebender shakes his head. “I won’t be here, when you get back, probably. A friend
of mine has required some assistance for his business and how could I refuse such a humble
request?”

“It is kind of you to help”, Sokka says.

“Well, of course, young friend.”

“We have to thank you, too. For everything that you have done for us.”

In the increasing light it looks as if Iroh’s eyes water at Sokka’s words and he puts his other
hand onto Sokka’s shoulder as well, thus framing them both.

“It was the least I could do. Do not forget your training and whatever may come at you, stick
through it together. Together, you’re twice as strong, twice as clever, twice as powerful. It has
been a wise choice of destiny to send you to Ember Island. How do they say? Like waves
washing away the footprints on the sand, Ember Island gives everyone a clean slate. Ember
Island reveals the true you. I hope that you’ll like what you might find there. I wish you all
the best.”

There is a lump in his throat and Zuko nods.

“Thanks, Uncle. For you, too.”

He hesitates, but finally decides to pull him into a hug and Uncle embraces him tightly.

“My boy”, he says quietly and Zuko thinks, he doesn’t want to ever let go off him again.
He does so anyway, to give Sokka the chance to say Goodbye as well.

Uncle offers the Water Tribe greeting by grabbing Sokka’s forearm and the tear, that rolls
down Sokka’s cheek, glistens in the yellow light of the sunrise. He wipes it away, once he lets
go off Iroh and Zuko gives him a worried look, but Sokka smiles at him reassuringly. They
nod at each other, before walking up the plank to get on board of the little ship.

The crew quickly stores it away once they are on deck and they turn to Iroh once more, while
the ship begins to set sail.

“We will meet again!”, Uncle yells, waving at them and Zuko raises his hand in greeting.

He can’t deny the sadness as he watches Iroh grow smaller the further the ship gets away. At
the same time, it feels like he can finally breathe, now that Caldera lies behind him. He
glances at Sokka.

The Water Tribe boy still seems apprehensive to their departure, even though it’s the best
thing that has happened to them in a while. Sokka’s gaze is directed at the sea and he looks
incredibly sad. He’s still mourning, of course. Zuko doesn’t dare to ask him what’s on his
mind, but he gently takes his hand.

Sokka turns to him and looks down to their hands, squeezing gently, before he looks back at
the water.

“How did you manage to convince your father to let me come along?”

Zuko shrugs. “I didn’t. I just decided you would. As you said: he doesn’t care about me,
apparently.”

Sokka nods in understanding, a sad smile still lingering on his lips. “Thank you.”
 Caught up in paradise
Chapter Summary

Ember Island sets a few things in motion

Chapter Notes

First of all, let me apologize that this chapter took so long. I was so eager for them to get
to Ember Island, but somehow I've struggled with this chapter every step of the way. I
have rewritten it at least three times only to come back to more or less the first version.
I am curious to learn, what you think about it (because I know what I think...) but done
is better than perfect, and I prefer to get back to it one day and maybe rewrite it again
instead of blocking the progress of this story altogether.
Now, with that being said, here you go:

Book 2: Spark

Chapter 12: Caught up in paradise

The sea is calm that day, a glistening, flat surface under the sun, even after they pass through
the Gates of Azulon and soon Caldera is nothing more than a tiny spot on the horizon.

Sokka spares it one last glance before he turns, props his arms on the railing and looks to the
waters ahead.

The last time he has been on a ship, he was locked away, isolated from the world, terrified
and lonely, thrown into a dark cell with only his fear and worries to keep him company. The
Water Tribe boy grinds his teeth unconsciously.

Today, the weather couldn't be any better. The sun feels comfortably warm on Sokka’s skin,
the seagulls, that surround the ship, squawk and chase each other around almost playfully. In
the distance, Sokka thinks, he sees some dolphins or seals jumping out of the water. He can
only make out the silhouettes of the creatures as the sunlight reflects on the water surface, too
bright to allow a proper look. Everything seems to be glowing. It's almost idyllic and maybe
that's what makes him uncomfortable.

Despite the wide and open sky above him, Sokka feels caged.
He should be relieved to finally get away from the Fire Nation capital. It's something he
longed for. But now that he does, it feels wrong and Sokka is not happy about their departure.
And that's not only because of leaving Iroh behind, who has become a fatherly figure for him
during those last months.

Maybe it's just the unknown, that bothers him. Maybe it's the feeling of leaving things left
undone. Sokka can't put his finger on it, but there is an uneasiness inside of him, like a voice
telling him that he should be in Caldera instead of going on a trip to Ember Island.

The timing of their departure is a little too convenient after their fight and frankly, Sokka is
frustrated.

And he is also kind of hurt, because so far Zuko has always treated him like an equal and
Sokka just didn't expect him to dismiss the argument by simply telling him that they would
never talk about it again. He acted like Sokka had to follow his orders and that simply doesn't
sit right with him.

Sokka can't say, that he doesn't understand Zuko's point of view. He's concerned, of course.
The Fire Lord has proven time and again, that he's ruthless and that he knows no boundaries,
when it comes to taking down his enemies or getting what he wants. But what Sokka really
doesn't understand is Zuko's constant change of mind.

Lately, it seemed like the prince was willing to rebel and to fight against his father and sister.
It's what all his training has been about. Spirits, Iroh told him straightly that he would teach
Zuko how to bring Azula down and the prince didn't argue. Just the opposite. He threw
everything into his training despite his limited bending abilities.

It just doesn't make sense, that Zuko would change his opinion all of a sudden and lash out at
Sokka for trying to do something good and help the people. There must be more to it! Were
the plans that the Fire Lord presented in the Council Meeting really so impressive and over-
powering that Zuko would change his mind?

Leaving the Capital definitely takes them out of the picture, no matter what is going to
happen and it simply makes Sokka uncomfortable.

He wants to trust Zuko and it's endearing that the prince is trying to protect them, but Sokka
is not sure, if he wants to be protected right now. Actually, he can't decide if he's mad at
Zuko, disappointed or something else entirely, Sokka is also very aware that their options are
very limited and that Zuko is also just a boy. Maybe he’s asking too much of him.

On the other hand, a lot has been asked of Sokka at a much younger age and he didn’t
complain or ran away. When his father decided that it was time for the Southern Fleet to join
the war against the Fire Nation again, Sokka has been barely thirteen years old and yet he’s
been given the responsibility for the Tribe’s wellbeing.

And Sokka tried to live up to that challenge, he has been proud to be the man of the Tribe. He
tried to provide for his people even though his hunting trips rarely brought more to the table
than a few artic chickens. Sokka had been overjoyed when he managed to hunt down a turtle
seal (one that had deformed tail fins and was very weak already, but nevertheless). He tried to
keep the snow walls intact, tried to train the younger boys as soon as they could walk, tried to
lighten up the mood and have an open ear for everyone.

The women could handle themselves – Sokka knows that - they were capable. Most of them
knew how to use a spear for fishing, set traps for reinrabbits and cultivate seaweed to feed the
tribe. They didn’t need Sokka to take care of them, but that doesn’t mean, that he didn’t try.

He tried so hard to fill the much too large footsteps of his father, tried to be the Chief while
nobody took him seriously. But he tried anyway, even though he had been a bloody child! He
had to, because Dad left them alone, dumped the responsibility on Sokka’s meager shoulder
and left!

It had already been three years, when the Fire Nation attacked again, still searching for the
last waterbender and captured Sokka. Three years! But Sokka didn’t complain. He did what
he had to do.

And he didn’t complain, that Dad didn’t come to his rescue, that he didn’t try to liberate him
from the Fire Nation. It’s one thing, that Dad didn’t come for him. But why didn’t he come
for Katara?

It feels like a weight is pressing down on his chest and Sokka finds it difficult to breathe.
He’s so angry.

The Water Tribe boy isn’t even aware of the tears that built in the corner of his eyes. If he
was, it would only make him so much angrier, because it’s just humiliating that anger always
comes with tears in his case. He stares out to the sea, scanning the horizon for the sails of his
father’s fleet. He’s not even sure, if he wants to see him.

Dad left him alone and he left Katara alone and he left the Tribe alone. And now? What’s left,
apart from the warriors that sailed with him? Are a few dozens of men really a tribe? Or are
they simply survivors, remains of what was once a tribe? And if so, what would that make
Sokka?

His dad said that he, Sokka, was the man of the village, when he left. But neither did Sokka
have the age, nor did he pass the rite to be considered a man and a warrior. What does that
make him? Maybe Dad only did it to raise little Sokka’s spirit and to give him courage. But
did he ever take him seriously, when he knew that it would be the women to handle the
Tribe’s business?

What is he, if not a pathetic representative of the Southern Water Tribe, just like Zuko claims
he is an unworthy representative of the Fire Nation?

Maybe they really are made for each other. A wet laugh, that almost sounds like a sob comes
over Sokka’s lips.

He glances to the side, because he is well aware of the amber eyes, that rest on him and that
grow increasingly worried. Zuko sighs deeply.

“You’re angry”, he whispers regretfully.

Sokka nods. “Yeah. But not at you. Not solely.”

He means it. Because how can he blame Zuko for not wanting to carry a whole Nation’s fate
on his shoulders, when he himself failed so miserably at doing just that?

If there’s no Tribe anymore and if he’s not a warrior, what does that make him? What is left?

He turns and looks at Zuko. Sokka doesn’t want to believe that a better future is not worth a
fight. Not when the prince, who endured so much, is standing right in front of him and he
knows, he knows, that there’s a part of him that would do anything for Zuko. But is he ready
to give up? To not fight and just be the Prince Consort at Zuko’s side, tolerating the rule of
tyrants only to live in supposed peace and ignore everything else? Could he do that?

Sokka doesn’t want to give up on the world, but it seems the world has given up on him. It
seems his own father has given up on him. So why should he not simply embrace his role and
turn his back? Bury his ambitions to make the world a better place and whole-heartedly
become a Prince Consort of the Fire Nation, contribute to Zuko’s work, get assigned tasks of
his own? Maybe one day Zuko and him would be respected people for their contributions to
the Fire Nation and maybe one day Fire Lord Ozai would not see them as an annoyance and a
failed punishment for his son, but as worthy representatives of his rule.

Sokka has always had a vidid imagination and the pictures come to him shockingly easy. He
sees Zuko and him standing next to the Fire Lord’s throne, he sees faceless people kneeling
down before them, begging for mercy. He sees himself glancing at Zuko, who’s eyes glisten
sadistically and Sokka smiles back in anticipation, suddenly feeling incredibly powerful. But
it is a power tinged with darkness, that makes Sokka’s heart race and his stomach turn.

He can’t believe that he’s even thinking that! How? How can he think about supporting the
Fire Lord’s ambitions? What has become of him?

None of this would ever have happened, if Dad and his men had been there to protect the
Tribe!

He’s angry and he’s confused and all of a sudden he feels so fucking lonely even though
Zuko is standing right there. Sokka wants to scream, to lash out, because he has no idea
where all those thoughts are even coming from, but they are crashing down on him and he
just doesn’t want to be that person.

He doesn’t want to be the person, who got abandoned by their father. He doesn’t want to be
the boy, who couldn’t do his job. He doesn’t want to be grieving for the family he used to
have. He doesn’t want to be fighting with Zuko over what’s right and what’s wrong. He
doesn’t want to be a traitor. He doesn’t want to be angry, he doesn’t want to be miserable. He
doesn’t… he doesn’t…

Sokka doesn’t even know, what he doesn’t want, but it’s too much and he’s had enough.

He grinds his teeth and wipes stubbornly over his eyes, when those infuriating tears dare to
run down his cheeks.
“I’m so mad at him”, he chokes out and shakes his head, still in disbelief over the darkness
within him.

Zuko nods slowly. The prince looks at him helplessly and it’s obvious that he doesn’t know
what to do or say.

Sokka is not sure if he even wants Zuko to do or say something. For a moment he wishes that
they were alone in this world, so that all their problems would be gone and he wouldn’t have
to think about anything or anyone else.

It’s a little frightening how intense his feelings for Zuko are right in this moment. He’s still
confused, overwhelmed, and his emotions are running wild. Sokka really has no idea, what
has gotten into him, when he steps forward decidedly and buries his hand in Zuko’s hair
roughly, almost pulling at it, as he presses their foreheads together.

“Don’t leave me.”

Zuko stares at him wide-eyed and Sokka tugs at his hair again, possessively, coaxing a noise
out of the prince that causes a completely different set of sensations to run through him and
that makes a warm feeling spread in Sokka’s lower belly. He doesn’t really understand,
what’s going on with him or where those words are coming from, but Sokka doesn’t care. He
growls, unwilling to let go of Zuko, only wanting to be closer.

“S-Sokka?”, Zuko asks, his pupils blown wide and he seems genuinely shocked.

It causes a weird sense of satisfaction, that doesn’t last long, because suddenly the haze in
Sokka’s mind lifts and he notices Zuko’s obvious discomfort, while at the same moment he
becomes aware of the building pressure in his groins.

The anger is immediately forgotten, overcome by shame and Sokka lets go of Zuko as if he’s
been burnt. He opens his mouth to mumble an apology, that never makes it over his lips,
before he turns around on the spot and hurries into the hull of the ship.

Awkward silence accompanies them for the remainder of the day. It’s still there, when they
finally arrive at their destination in the late afternoon, though Sokka’s face lightens up
remarkably once they set foot onto the island.

Ember Island is brimming with vacation guests during the season, but it's not that time of the
year, so the port is a lot less busy. There are only a few privately owned ships, among the
boats of fishermen and a few larger trading vessels. Unlike Caldera there are no military
ships anchoring here, which seems to raise the spirit of the people immensely. There are
lively discussions between the retailers, fishermen and sailors, laughter echoes through the
air. The people are wearing lighter clothes around here, due to the tropical climate, that is
much different from the dry heat in the Capital.

The houses in the town, that is attached to the port, have many wooden decorations, some
buildings are made entirely of wood. Vivid flowers are in full bloom, covering walls,
pergolas or are just planted in terracotta pots. Their fragrance mixes with the smell of the sea
and Zuko inhales deeply. Palm-trees and banana-plants are also a familiar sight in the little
town. It's the first time that Sokka sees an ash-banana-plant and he's amazed by the large
leaves and the bulk of fruit that seems small in comparison.

Zuko is relieved to see the change of posture in him. He's been worried that they would spend
the entire stay in uncomfortable silence. Sokka still refuses to look his direction and he
decidedly puts some space between them as they walk over to the carriage, that is going to
take them to their host’s beach house for the first few days of their stay. But at least, he’s
talking to Zuko.

"What's that building?", he asks and points at a large stony house with a wide plaza in front
of it.

"That's the townhall. The governor has his office there. We might have to meet him during
our stay. If he invites us, that is."

Sokka only acknowledges Zuko's answer with a short nod, before he points at another large
wooden building a little bit higher on the hill.

"And what's that?"

"That's the theater."

"A theater? Can we go there?" Sokka seems excited.

"Uh. I'm not sure, if there are still shows this time of the year. The season is over and
honestly they are not that great. Most of the time they are butchering the classics. But if you
want to, we can give it a try."

Sokka nods enthusiastically, without looking at him.

"Where are we going to stay?"

"We have been invited to spend the first few days in Ushin Min's beach house, before we will
travel to his mansion up north. Down here it's too hot to grow wine, but a little further up, the
conditions are more promising."

"A beach house?", Sokka echoes and turns to him, completely baffled.

Zuko shrugs, unsure how to react.

"Uh yeah. Basically everybody, who can afford it, has a beach house on one of the islands.
My family's beach house is located a few miles from here, but I didn't really feel like asking
my father for the permission to stay there."
There's a little bit of melancholy rising within him, but Sokka doesn't seem to notice.

"Sounds good”, he says and the little smile on his face seems genuine.

Zuko feels a tug at his lips, but he's a little distracted by the strange mix of excitement and
nostalgia that settles on him.

Zuko’s family used to come to Ember Island, when he was much younger and the family was
still intact. Or at least seemed that way. Usually it has been his mom, Uncle, Lu Ten and
Azula and him. His father preferred to stay in the capital most of the time. Vacation time has
always been the best time of the year. Zuko remembers the plays in the theatre his mother
used to take him to, the hours of playing with his sister and cousin, building sand castles at
the beach, the first demonstrations of Lu Ten’s and then Azula’s firebending…

He finds himself missing those days, even though he understands now, that things haven’t
been perfect then either. But they were definitely better. Nevertheless, it feels… good to be
back at Ember Island.

Zuko throws another look at Sokka.

The curiosity in his eyes is definitely real, though that doesn’t help to ease Zuko’s worry.

Sokka freaked out on the ship, there’s no better way to describe it. It’s perfectly
understandable, that after everything that happened, Sokka would be in turmoil. No one
understands better than Zuko how hard it can be to control one’s emotions. Nevertheless, the
prince is confused about what exactly has been going on with Sokka.

Once the ship set course to Ember Island he seemed closed off and Zuko blamed that on the
still lingering fight between them. There had been tears in Sokka’s eyes and by now Zuko
knows that those are not necessarily a sign of grief or sadness but also anger, when it comes
to the other boy. For a moment he thought that Sokka would bring up the topic of their
situation with the Fire Lord again, but instead he only mentioned being mad at him.

Zuko has no idea, to whom that referred, but he guessed his Father, the Fire Lord. Because
who else would Sokka be mad at? On the other hand, why would that make him snap all of a
sudden?

And snapping he did. Before Zuko knew what was happening, Sokka threw himself at him
and pulled him impossibly close. He caught Zuko completely off-guard, especially when he
insisted that Zuko shouldn’t leave him and tugged at his hair in a fashion, that had Zuko
make a pretty undignified noise of arousal. It has been hot, very unexpected and very
confusing, especially when Sokka let go of him and made a run for it, obviously embarrassed
by his own actions.

Zuko has no idea, what to make of it. He gets, that Sokka is emotionally unstable right now,
which is perfectly fine. But Zuko has never been great at dealing with his own emotions.
Dealing with Sokka’s seems impossible, because he is not even sure, what exactly the other
boy is embarrassed about. Did he like it? Didn’t he like it?
It’s true, the day of their first kiss has been also the day of their last kiss. So far. Which is also
understandable, because everything has been going south since then. Sokka has to deal with
the loss of his tribe and family and though they are holding hands at times or holding each
other during the nights, nothing else has happened between them. Zuko doesn’t want to rush
things.

Sokka’s sudden initiative has been welcome, even though unexpected. Zuko liked how
possessive the other boy acted and he also liked the proximity. Very much. Not necessarily in
public, but that’s not the point. He liked it.

But maybe Sokka didn’t.

Zuko could ask him, but actually he’s not eager to have that confirmation. Plus, it’s more than
obvious, that Sokka very much does not want to talk about what happened. That’s fine, Zuko
supposes. And yet, he can’t help but feel a little uncertain about where they are standing
towards each-other.

As it is, he points to the carriage drawn by an ostrich-horse that is supposed to take them to
the beach house.

“Shall we?”

“Are we not going to visit the town?”, Sokka asks, sounding surprised and disappointed at
the same time.

“We can come back some time during the next days, if you like. For today, I thought we
could relax a little at the beach.”

Sokka’s reaction is not, what he expected. The Water Tribe boy quickly looks to the ground,
avoiding Zuko’s eyes, which in turn makes the prince blush.

“Relaxing”, Sokka says, followed by a cough and actually, he sounds incredibly tense. “Sure.
That sounds… great.”

Zuko doesn’t miss the hesitation and when Sokka turns at the spot and walks over to the
carriage, a silent sigh comes over his lips. He can’t help but feel rejected.

The beach house is located not far from what Zuko explained him is the main road over the
island. Nevertheless, it’s a little of a bumpy ride in the carriage down the hill until they arrive.
The house is surprisingly small compared to the vast space of the Fire Nation Palace, but
Sokka likes it. This is more like the place he used to live in, even though it is far too different
to be compared with a Water Tribe igloo. The interior is simple, but the furniture looks
expensive and luxurious. Either Ushin Min wants to impress them or he is simply a good
host, who wants his guests to feel comfortable.
Sokka doesn’t bother to unpack his things. First of all, he didn’t bring a lot and there’s still a
strange tension lingering between Zuko and him. Sokka knows that he’s to blame for that, but
he can’t help it. He knows that he owes Zuko an apology for – it’s so embarrassing to even
think about. Sokka wants to bury his face and the ground to open up and swallow him – for
basically manhandling Zuko, by pulling him close and tugging at his hair. It felt electrifying
and exciting and frankly, just good. But nevertheless, he has made a fool of himself.

Which is why he looks everywhere but at Zuko, after they changed into some lighter clothes
and walk down to the beach. To be fair, it’s an amazing sight.

Sokka takes in the view and it’s so unlike the coast, that he is used to.

Waves crash against the dark sand. The sound is nothing like the splashing of water on ice,
that Sokka knows since forever. It sounds more impactful and yet, the waves seem less harsh.
He buries his toes in the warm sand. Back at home, where no ice meets the coast, the beaches
are rough and lined with jagged rocks and boulders. It would be impossible to walk there
without proper boots and even then, one has to be careful to not stumble over the stones.

Here, the sea and the beach seem more inviting, more calm. Katara would have loved it. She
would have jumped into the water, done her magic and Sokka can almost see her surfing on
the waves. It hurts like hell and Sokka inhales deeply to breathe away the pain.

If only he could turn back time.

Sokka doesn’t know, where he would turn it to. Maybe to the day of his capture, maybe to the
day when Zuko kissed him for the very first time. Then he would convince him to decline
Azula’s invitation and they would never learn of his tribe’s downfall. (Sokka knows, that he
would have learned about it anyway, but that’s not the point here). He could simply enjoy the
exciting feeling of falling in love. Instead, everything is difficult, everything feels so heavy
like there’s a physical weight pushing down on him. Everything is complicated and for a
moment, Sokka just wants to jump into the waves, let himself be surrounded and carried
away by the water. Maybe it would clear his mind.

The leaves of the palmtrees whistle in the wind. He’s in paradise.

But somehow Sokka feels worse than in the little cell on the ship, that has brought him to the
Fire Nation. He’s in paradise and yet, he wishes himself a million miles away.

Zuko opens his eyes, as soon as he hears the door creek. It’s in the middle of the night and
soft moonlight is falling through the light curtains into the chamber. Outside the cicadas are
still chirping, the waves crush loudly against the shore. In the distance an owl hoots every
now and then and the curtains rustle in the wind. Ember Island is not quiet like the Royal
Palace is and even for Zuko, who knows the noises of the island, it’s not easy to fall asleep.

It must be much more difficult for Sokka, not only because of the sounds but also because of
the heat. The Water Tribe boy tossed and turned relentlessly, flipping the thin sheet he used as
a blanket back and then covered himself again with it a few minutes later. Zuko didn’t watch
him, but it was impossible to overhear the deep sighs, that clearly told, that Sokka’s turmoil
was anything but over.

It seems like Sokka came to that conclusion as well and decided to give up on sleeping
tonight altogether.

Zuko pricks up his ears and listens carefully for any noise coming from the living room, but
it’s quiet. Too quiet.

The prince props himself up on his arm and frowns. Sokka wouldn’t run away, would he?
Zuko bites his lip. That’s not like him. On the other hand, Sokka has not exactly been stable
these last few days. It was actually easier to deal with him right after Azula revealed the
obliteration of the Southern Water Tribe. Sokka has been completely shaken in the following
days, but nevertheless approachable, at least for Zuko. He thought he knew what was going
on with Sokka. But right now he seems unpredictable. Diffuse worries swirl through Zuko’s
brain and he can’t stay in bed, if Sokka is up to who knows what.

It doesn’t take long for Zuko to realize that Sokka’s not in the house anymore. He curses
lightly and quickly puts on some shorts and a sleeveless shirt, before he steps out of the little
beach house. The moon is bright enough to illuminate the surroundings. Zuko glances
around, his heart sinking a little, when Sokka is nowhere to be seen, but then he notices
footprints, that lead away from the house.

He follows them downhill to the beach. After he passes through some giant rocks, he turns
around a corner and the tension in his shoulders eases.

A solitary figure is sitting close to the shoreline, the waves almost brushing against his feet,
while he throws pebbles into the sea. Sokka didn’t bother to put on a shirt, he’s sitting there
only in his pijama pants. Zuko can’t see his face, but it’s easy enough to imagine the bitter
expression, that would match the forceful throws of his.

It seems Sokka really needs a moment for himself and Zuko is willing to grant him that. But
he doesn’t feel at ease to just go back to the beach house, so he stays, observing Sokka
silently. After a while, the other boy stops throwing pebbles. Zuko can’t hear the sigh, but he
sees how Sokka’s shoulder heave. Then he looks up to the moon and shakes his head
repeatedly.

A hollow feeling settles in Zuko’s stomach and he wants to go over to where Sokka is sitting,
wants to keep him company and spend him comfort. But he’s not sure if he would be allowed
to or even welcome. Torn, he shifts his weight from one foot to the other.

Sokka rests his head against his knees and he seems to go completely still.
Then, a bloodcurdling cry breaks out of him and Zuko flinches violently. The noise cuts
through the night and makes the hairs on his arms stand up. He grinds his teeth and closes his
eyes. It feels like his heart clenches in his chest and for a moment it’s incredibly hard to
breathe.

Sokka’s voice breaks and the agonized scream is followed by a loud, but weaker “Why?”

Zuko has no answer, but he finally finds it in him to set one foot in front of the other until
he’s almost next to Sokka.

He raises a hand to put it onto the other boy’s shoulder, but hesitates.

“Sokka?”, he says softly as to not startle him. Sokka flinches nevertheless, but otherwise he
doesn’t react. “Are… are you alright?”

It’s a stupid question, Zuko knows that, but he couldn’t come up with a better idea.

“No”, Sokka answers quietly and the prince is a little surprised, that he is actually talking to
him, because ever since his outburst on the ship, Sokka has barely said a word. “No, I’m
not.”

Zuko nods, even though Sokka doesn’t see it and sits down next to him.

Sokka is chewing on his lips, like he can’t decide if talking will make it better or worse.
Then, he inhales.

“I’m so… so mad at him”, he says in an exhale. Finally, he turns to look at Zuko. “Why
didn’t he protect us? Why did he leave us alone? Why didn’t he come for me? Why… why
didn’t he even try? Am I… am I…?”

Sokka shakes his head again and looks down onto the sand. Understanding dawns on Zuko,
that Sokka is talking about his dad. A lump builds in Zuko’s throat. They have talked about
their mothers and their sisters. But so far, they mostly avoided talking about their fathers.
Nevertheless, it seemed to Zuko, that Sokka saw his dad as a hero. Suddenly he’s not so sure
about that and he doesn’t know if it’s the right moment for this conversation. It’s a very
sensitive subject and Zuko tries not to think too much about the relationship with his own
father. He’s not ready to talk about it.

“Don’t”, is thus all he says.

Sokka looks at him, confusion written over his face. “What?”

Zuko gulps and his voice is uncomfortably close to breaking. “Don’t ask yourself if you’re
worth it. You are.”

He looks at Sokka insistently and grabs both of his hands to underline his point. The blue
eyes watch him searchingly, looking for guidance and Sokka sighs. He closes his eyes and
shakes his head once again.
“I feel like I’m going crazy, Zuko. There are… I’m having these dark thoughts. I… that’s not
me. That’s not, who I want to be.”

“What kind of thoughts?

Sokka shakes his head, unwilling to share them obviously, but the grip of his hands tighten.
Zuko sees it as a good sign.

“I just want this madness to end. I just want it to be over. I almost don’t care how or with
which outcome anymore. I just want this madness, this war, to be over. I want to start over. I
don’t even recognize myself anymore. I look in the mirror and I see this guy, who looks like
he belongs to the Fire Nation, who looks like he belongs to you and…”

Zuko’s heart beats painfully in his chest.

“And you don’t want that”, he finishes Sokka’s sentence. It’s impossible to ban the bitterness
in his voice and he let’s go of Sokka’s hands.

The Water Tribe boy stares at him.

“No!”, he yells and quickly reaches for Zuko’s hands again.

Zuko turns his face away, he doesn’t want to be let down slowly or gently. But the rejection
hurts anyway. Suddenly there’s a hand on his good cheek and despite his resistance, Sokka
turns his face back to him.

“Zuko”, he says, it almost sounds pleading. “I do belong to you. I want to be with you. It’s
the only thing I am sure about right now. I want to be with you.”

“Then why did you run away?” It sounds like a reproach, Zuko can’t help it.

To his surprise, Sokka chuckles helplessly.

“That was stupid, wasn’t it? It was embarrassing. I was totally beside myself. Shouldn’t have
done that.”

Zuko shrugs. “I liked it.”

Sokky glances at him shyly.

“You did?” When Zuko nods, he huffs. “Huh. Me... me too. It’s just… I haven’t…”

The heat rises to his cheeks and Zuko understands, what Sokka is getting at. His experience is
also pretty limited, but somehow that’s nothing Zuko feels uncomfortable about. An excited
tingling trickles down his spine and Zuko feels oddly confident all of a sudden.

“Come here”, he says gently and carefully guides Sokka to sit on his lap, straddling him.

The other boy watches him with wide eyes, his adam’s apple bobs and he seems unsure,
where to put his hands, finally placing them on his shoulders. Zuko wraps an arm around
Sokka’s waist, letting his fingertips trace over the naked skin on his sides.

Sokka exhales noisily.

“’this okay?”, Zuko asks in a low voice. Sokka shivers but nods.

With shaking fingers he strokes over Zuko’s shoulder, down to his biceps. His hand lingers
there and squeezes gently. Zuko pulls him a little closer, his eyes not letting go of Sokka’s.
He sees the insecurity, but also the longing.

Zuko raises his free hand and traces over the stubble under Sokka’s hair.

The other boy hisses, his nails dig into Zuko’s arm and his hips jerk forward, causing Zuko to
make a surprised noise in return.

“Too much?”, he asks quietly.

Sokka grimaces and looks to the side, obviously embarrassed.

“I’m sorry. I’m ridiculous.”

“You’re not.” Gently, Zuko guides his eyes back to him by touching his chin. “Hey, look at
me. I want you to be comfortable. If something’s too much or too fast, that’s not ridiculous.”

Instead of being relieved, Sokka looks actually a little frustrated, though with himself or with
him, Zuko can’t tell.

“What do you want, Sokka?”

The other boy looks shyly at him.

“Honestly? Just to forget about the world. I want it to be just you and me.”

A smile spreads on Zuko’s lips at his words.

“Can I kiss you?”

A breathless laugh comes over Zuko’s lips as Sokka nods hesitantly. Carefully and ever so
gently, he cups Sokka’s cheek with his hand and stretches his neck to barely brush his lips
over Sokka’s, before he places them firmly on the other boy’s mouth in a slow, sweet and
tender kiss. Sokka is passive at first, but the grip of his hands on Zuko’s shoulders tightens.
He definitely doesn’t want to let go and Zuko takes it as a good sign.

He lets his hands stroke over Sokka’s back, pulling him closer and when their chests touch,
Zuko hisses. An electrifying feeling runs through his veins. He’s happy to provide the
guidance, that Sokka apparently needs, holding him close and dominating the kiss. Sokka
clings to him. Hesitantly he threads his fingers through Zuko’s hair and the prince hums as a
pleasant feeling spreads through him.
“Just you and me”, Zuko confirms, his lips still brushing gently against Sokka’s. “Just you
and me.”
 The Beach
Chapter Summary

Sokka feels better and Zuko is being a fool.

And we meet some new characters.

Chapter Notes

I think two more chapters (this one not included) and we get to Book 3: Fire.
As the last chapter was pretty dark and emotional I thought we could do with some
lighter atmosphere in this. Oh, and I tried being funny. Maybe it worked, maybe it didn't.
I like it. I hope you do too!
Enjoy!

Book 2: Spark

Chapter 13: The Beach

Sokka wakes from his nap and groans, when he blinks directly into the sun. The bright light
hurts in his eyes, he squints and holds a hand out to cover them. Propping himself up on his
arm, he looks around searchingly. His heart jumps a little, when he finds who he’s looking
for.

Zuko is only a little distance away, standing on the sand like a statue. His head is lightly
bowed, his eyes closed and his hands are held in the traditional Fire Nation greeting, fist
against the bottom of his palm. It’s hard to tell from the distance, but Sokka is fairly sure, that
he can see a smile playing around Zuko’s lips. The prince looks relaxed and he seems to be
cherishing the sun on his skin.

It’s a sight, that makes Sokka feel warm from the inside, comfortable even. A sigh, that he’s
not even aware of, comes over his lips. He resists the urge to get up and just walk over to
Zuko to wrap his arms around him. It’s way too hot and Sokka feels sticky from just lying on
his towel doing nothing. He likes the idea though and he can’t wait for the sun to set and the
temperature to drop, so that he can properly enjoy being physically close to Zuko. And close
he wants to be.
Sokka’s mind is still in turmoil, his emotions are still running wild in the back of his mind.
They are all there: the anger, the grief, the fear. But surprisingly, he managed to shove them
into a far corner and tone them down. They are still there and it makes Sokka nervous,
because he doesn’t know for how long he will be able to keep them at bay. If he focuses on
Zuko, he can almost forget about them altogether, which is why he basically clings to the
prince ever since his feelings overwhelmed him the day before.

Zuko provides him a peace of mind, that Sokka needs desperately. It doesn’t make sense,
because there are still so many issues, that they need to discuss at one point or another. But
even though those are also lurking from another corner of Sokka’s brain, for now it works.
He feels closer to Zuko than he’s ever felt before and it’s not just a physical thing. He looks at
Zuko, who begins to slowly move through his katas now, and Sokka just feels calm despite
his heartbeat speeding up at the display of the toned body before him.

A tingling runs down Sokka’s spine as he thinks about what happened between them at night.
It has been incredibly nice.

Sleep eluded him as all the emotions and dark thoughts, that Sokka harbored, caught up to
him and he didn’t know what to do, except to get out and break down. It felt like hitting rock-
bottom and all the bottled up feelings needed to go somewhere. Screaming at the sea didn’t
make it better. But then Zuko was there, his touch warm and encompassing like a ray of
sunshine breaking through the clouds. He shone through Sokka’s darkness, providing exactly
what Sokka needed most in that moment: comfort and guidance. Sokka has been more than
grateful to follow Zuko’s lead.

He has been embarrassed at first, by the proximity of sitting on Zuko’s lap and even more by
the reaction of his body. Sokka had no idea, what he was doing, when he rolled his hips
against the other boy. His motions were frantic and probably clumsy, but judging by the
passionate kisses and the tightening grip of Zuko’s hands on his body, the prince enjoyed it
all the same. A shudder ran through Sokka’s body, when he felt Zuko’s arousal against his
own as they grinded against each other, still in their pajama pants.

And though it felt like Sokka’s whole body was on fire and as if his skin was too tight for all
the emotions, that twirled within him; and though he clung to Zuko as if his life depended on
it and he felt like bursting, Sokka suddenly felt himself calming down immensely. His
motions died down and finally stopped altogether. He felt more embarrassed about that, than
everything else, but suddenly it was enough to just bury his face in the crook of Zuko’s neck
and breath in his scent, feel the solid body against his own. It has been so comforting.

Sokka is not sure, if he was afraid of getting there, unsure if Zuko would like it. But he
definitely enjoyed how his heart pounded against his chest and how he could feel Zuko’s
frantic heartbeat, the hot breath on his skin. When Zuko noticed that he stopped, he didn’t say
anything or blame Sokka for ruining a moment. His arms just encircled Sokka tighter, pulled
him closer and held him as if he wanted to put Sokka back together.

Their breathing had been the only sound besides the crushing of the waves. The warm hands
of the former firebender rubbed circles onto his skin. His movements were so gentle and
soothing, taking Sokka’s mind from the edge. He felt understood and more importantly, he
felt safe.
It has been perfect.

And this morning, when he woke up next to Zuko and looked into the amber eyes, that
watched him carefully and so fondly, the world seemed less harsh. A new tenderness settled
between them and Sokka is willing to cast everything else aside (for now) and just engulf the
feeling of love blossoming between them.

His eyes are still fixed on Zuko, the concentration plain on the prince’s face.

He has come a long way, Sokka realizes. Zuko’s training with Iroh changed him a great deal.
These are no longer forced movements executed with grim dedication, underlined by a tense
posture. Zuko is concentrating, but he seems focused and centered. It looks like the motions
come natural to him, which makes the loss of his bending even worse. Sokka would love to
see what he can do with fire, now that Zuko has had a teacher, who understood not only the
element but also its bender. He’s sure that it would be amazing and he hopes that one day
he’ll see it.

Sokka yawns and stretches, trying to shake off the lingering feeling of tiredness from his nap.
He looks around, but everything looks exactly like it did, when they arrived in the morning.
The sky above him is bright blue and clear, the sun feels hot on his skin, palm trees grow here
and there between larger rock formations. The Water Tribe boy lets the dark sand run through
his fingers. He avoids looking at the sea, as to not search the horizon for ships that are not
going to come. He still feels bitter. But he also feels better, and the last thing Sokka wants
right now is to let the negative feelings taint this beautiful day.

He considers getting up to train with his boomerang, when he picks up noises of chatter and
laughter drawing closer to them. Zuko must have noticed them too, because he stops in his
motions and looks for the source of the noise.

“Are you sure, that we won’t get into trouble?”, a girl asks.

“It’ll be fine, Rani. The Min-Family is hardly ever here, especially not this time of the year”,
a male voice replies.

“But the sign says it’s a private beach and if…”

“Rani, don’t worry. We’ve been coming here for years and nothings ever happened”, another
boy tries to sooth the obviously worried girl named Rani.

Sokka throws a questioning look at Zuko, but the prince shrugs.

“Plus”, the voice of another girl chimes in, “I’m not going back to where Chan and his
baboons are, if there’s a perfectly deserted beach waiting for us right around this corner.”

With that, a young woman steps out from behind the large rocks, that hide the pathway down
to the beach. She’s wearing a maroon beach dress, her hair is tied up in a messy braid and
Sokka can’t see her face, because she looks at her friends, who appear behind her. The little
group stops dead in their tracks once they notice, that the beach is in fact not abandoned.
“Safe for these two guys”, a girl with curly, black hair and green eyes says and points at
them. There’s a worried frown on her face and the voice confirms that she is, who the other
teenagers called ‘Rani’.

The group consists of four boys and three girls, all around the same age as Zuko and him,
maybe a little bit older, judging by the broader and taller frame of the boys. Most of them
give them curious glances, safe for the Rani-girl, who looks like she wants to turn around and
run immediately.

Zuko seems just as uncomfortable as her, Sokka notices. The prince tenses visibly and walks
over to him slowly, without leaving the newcomers out of sight.

The other teens share a look and with a shrug they obviously decide that Sokka and Zuko are
no danger. The girl with the messy braid smiles widely at them and waves.

“Hey there. Looks like we’re not the only ones, who are done with the public beach”, she
says.

Sokka tilts his head curiously, while Zuko narrows his eyes.

“This is private territory”, he says and sounds about as welcoming as a hunting party.

The girl blinks, obviously not sure how to respond, but the tallest of the guys steps forward.

“Yeah, we know. The sign is hard to miss”, he says jovially. “Look, we won’t turn you in, if
you don’t turn us in. This beach is big enough, don’t you think? Oh, you could also join us
for Kuai Ball if you’d like.”

Sokka has no idea what Kuai Ball is, but the offer seems genuine and they seem nice enough,
so he is up for that. The way Zuko straightens up and crosses his arms over his chest, clearly
shows that he’s about to say something rude, which Sokka very much likes to prevent. He
quickly scans the rest of the group, trying to come up with something distracting, which turns
out surprisingly easy, when he spots the third girl, that peaks curiously over the shoulder of
one of her companions. Sokka blinks rapidly to clear his sight, because he thinks he’s having
a hallucination.

“Ty Lee?”, he blurts out.

The last thing he expected, was to see her here. Shouldn’t she be with Azula in Ba Sing Se
instead of Ember Island? This could only mean, that Azula send her and this group of
strangers to keep an eye on Zuko and him. Sokka quickly glances to the backpack on his
towel. The boomerang sticks out of it, but if any of them is a bender, it will be a close call to
reach it, before he gets burned.

The brown eyes of the girl go wide and she stares at Sokka speechlessly. Zuko shots him a
glance, then he looks at her and takes a step back, getting into a defensive position.
Obviously, they are thinking the same thing.
“W-what did you call me?”, the girl asks, stepping forward and the rest of her group seems
utterly confused.

“You know these guys, Cho?”, one of the boys asks and sends a wary look at them. The
undertone in his voice makes it obvious, that he’s willing to fight them, if need be.

The girl shakes her head. “No, I’ve never seen them. Did… did you call me ‘Ty Lee’?”

Sokka nods and slowly realizes, that it’s indeed not Azula’s friend standing in front of them.
But the girl looks impossibly like her and it dawns on him, that she must be a relative of Ty
Lee.

“You know my sister?”, the girl asks, her voice a whisper that is tinged with hope.

Zuko glances at him and Sokka nods again, even though he’s not sure, if that is a good idea
or not.

“Is she okay? Is she… it’s been years since she run away from home. Is she still with that
circus?”

They share another look and silently agree, that it’s best not to explain that Ty Lee is helping
the Fire Princess to take down the Earth Kingdom. Especially as tears are shining in the girl’s
eyes. She throws her large braid back over her shoulder and one of the guy’s puts his arm
around her.

“Uh-huh”, Zuko says.

“I never understood, why she ran away. Do you know more? What is she doing at the
circus?”

“Juggling”, Sokka says at the same moment that Zuko blurts out: “Trapeze acrobat.”

The girl looks confused and one of her friends raises an eyebrow.

“She’s a trapeze acrobat but for some of her acts she adds juggling”, Sokka quickly says and
Zuko flinches a little, as if he’s afraid that this explanation will give the lie away.

The girl, however, looks to the ground.

“Do you know if the circus will ever come to Ember Island?”

When they shake their heads, the girl sighs with a sad expression. “I would love to see her
again. My name’s Cho Lee, by the way.”

“Sokka.”

“That’s an unusual name, isn’t it?”

“Uh…”
Sokka scratches his neck and thinks that Zuko could introduce himself so that the attention is
not entirely on him. But Zuko just stares at the group of teenagers intensely, as if trying to
shoo them away by sheer willpower. It is more than obvious that these people make him
uncomfortable and Sokka has to resist the urge to shake his head.

“Woah”, one of the guys blurts out suddenly, staring at Sokka’s arm. “Is… is that… are you
guys married?!”

Zuko makes a noise, that could be interpreted as a growl, before he basically spits out: “Got a
problem with that?”

He is just being completely embarrassing, a sentiment that only increases as he tries to get in
front of Sokka to shield him. Sokka won’t have any of that, especially because these people
look nice and they are just looking for a place to chill on the beach and Zuko is being
ridiculous.

“We are”, Sokka confirms with a shrug and a little smile to show them that they are capable
of having a civilized conversation even though Zuko is effectively trying to counteract on
that part.

The seven stare at them.

“Oh, wow”, the girl, that greeted them says. “That’s uh… unusual. I mean, how old are you?”

“That’s none of your f-“

“He’s seventeen already and I will be in a few months”, Sokka cuts Zuko off, earning himself
an unfriendly glare.

“Holy shit”, a boy with a long ponytail mutters.

“But that’s illegal. I mean, no Fire Sage would do that figuring that you’re both…”, the
apparent leader of the group gestures vaguely at them.

“Yeah”, Sokka says and shrugs. “We’ve had a special permission.”

The group exchanges a doubtful look.

“Alright. Though it’s weird.”

“You’re weird!”, Zuko all but barks back at him.

Sokka is unable to not slap a hand against his front. He knows, that Zuko is awkward with
people, but he supposed that’s due to the stiff and cold atmosphere and even more so the
people at the Palace. Turns out, Zuko is just awkward with everyone. Except for maybe
Sokka and his uncle. They definitely have to work on his people skills.

His comment is followed by a moment of silence, even though some of the guys can’t bite
back their grins and the girl named Rani giggles. Sokka really can’t blame her.
“You don’t look like you are coming from anywhere around here”, Cho Lee points out.

“I’m from-“, Sokka interrupts himself, when he catches the warning look from Zuko. “The
South.”

“I wasn’t aware that the Southern Isles were a little backwards… but, hey. Good for you two,
I guess. So, uhm, maybe we should just go somewhere else”, the leader guy says.

“Nah, it’s fine. As you said, the beach is big enough. Right, Zuko?”

The prince glares at him, but Sokka doesn’t have it in him to feel guilty. He enjoys meeting
these people and to experience some real Fire Nation folk. His visit to the market with Jin
showed him, that there’s so much to learn about them. To meet people their age, who are not
a bunch of freaks like Azula and her friends, is refreshing. Sokka wants to engage with them.

“Right”, Zuko mutters lamely.

The leader’s face lightens up.

“Okay, great. My name’s Natsu. And these folks are Rani, Sae, Cho Lee, Jomai, Yoshi and
Kousei. Nice to meet you folks”, he introduces them one by one and Sokka nods at each of
them with a grin. Zuko just throws a look at them and turns his back.

While the group sets up their towels and umbrellas, Zuko sits down next to Sokka, basically
blocking him from them and not for the first time this day, Sokka thinks that he is being
completely ridiculous.

“Will you stop this nonsense?”, he says quietly, but not without reproach.

“Why did you invite them to stay here? We don’t know if they can be trusted.”

“Trusted with what? We’re at a beach, not signing a contract. We’re on vacation. Will you
just relax already?”

“They’re judging us”, Zuko mutters and throws a dark look at Rani, who peaks over to them
curiously.

“Of course, because you are acting like a cave-man.”

“If they knew, who I am…”

“But they don’t. Isn’t that a good thing? You can engage with people without any
expectations. They seemed nice enough to me.”

Zuko avoids his gaze and sighs. He looks miserable and Sokka wonders if he did the right
thing by inviting the group of young adults to stay or if it had been better to send them away
for Zuko’s sake. He takes the prince’s hand and squeezes it gently.

“It’ll be fine. You’ll see.”

Zuko looks up and the amber eyes look at him intensely, before he nods, still seeming
unconvinced.

Sokka’s curiosity is palpable as he peaks over Zuko’s shoulder to watch the group of
newcomers spread their things out on the beach. They don’t have any umbrellas, but the guys
quickly set up an awning using some branches of driftwood and a large, thin canvas one of
them pulls out of a big backpack. With skilled practice one of the boys (Zuko thinks he
remembers that his name is Jomai) ties the canvas to the branches, creating a shaded area
under the makeshift awning. The girls share their appreciation as they lay down on their
towels under it and even Zuko has to admit to himself, that it’s good work.

Contrary to the girls, the boys quickly remove their shirts and run into the water. There is
loud splashing, cries and more laughter and Zuko exhales noisily. Next to him Sokka
chuckles and he looks like he’s about to get up and join them. Zuko’s expression darkens.

This is really not how he expected this day to be like.

He watches the group of teens warily. Even at the first glance he could tell, that these are
none of the rich kids they used to rarely play with, when Azula and him were little and
mother took them to the city. Their clothes are simple, made of rough linen rather than silk or
fine cotton. The colors are rusty browns or maroon without any highlights or decorations.
The girl’s hairpieces and bangles are made of wood, not metal let alone gold. The guy’s wear
simple swim shorts without sashbelts or an embroidered middle-piece like Zuko does. Even
Sokka’s shorts (red with bright yellow seams) look much more expensive than those people’s
clothing. They come from a simple background, their parents are probably sailors or
craftsmen.

Zuko shifts uncomfortably.

Their host would probably not approve of inviting strangers to his private beach, especially
not people like them. Ushin Min is known to be a man of wealth, his family worked too hard
to earn it and to make it into the High Society to share their richness with the less fortunate.
Zuko really doesn’t want to anger him, even though technically due to being the Prince he
can do as he pleases. And yet, that doesn’t help the feeling of unease.

He looks at the girls, who chatter and giggle, throwing glances at them every so often, though
their attention is mostly on their companions, who still play in the water.

Sokka is right. They do seem nice.

But nevertheless, they make Zuko uncomfortable. What is he even supposed to talk about
with them?
When they arrived earlier, he braced himself for insults concerning the scar on his face, but
also the marks around his wrists, that show his connection to Sokka. Those insults never
came, but still. Maybe they keep that for later.

Zuko tries to tell himself, that he doesn’t care what people think of him. Especially ordinary
people like them. Who are they but a bunch of young adults, who don’t even know who he
is? Let them think, what they want.

Truth is, he does care. And when he looks at them chat and laugh with each other, there is an
odd feeling of sadness and remorse within him, because he knows he can’t have that. He is
not like them. He never was and he never will be. Zuko knows that, and they probably know
that too. No, he doesn’t need to know what they think of him.

He sighs and decidedly looks away, wishing that Sokka didn’t invite them to stay. Not only,
because he is not eager for company, but also – and he blushes involuntarily – because he
wanted to have the other boy to himself.

They’ve been through so much during the last few months and Zuko really enjoyed pushing
all those things aside and just be alone and close to his husband. It finally starts to feel like
they are in love, like this marriage is a real thing and not just a union to get each other
through the worst. Zuko is well aware, that everything is still far from ideal, but he’s happy to
ignore that for the time being and to just take a break from all the drama at the Palace. For
once, he allows himself to just enjoy and cherish what he’s got.

Sharing one of those rare days with some strangers instead of having Sokka’s undivided
attention bothers him.

On the other hand, seeing Sokka curious and excited is way better than the desperation and
pain he witnessed the days before. Zuko might not like it, but for Sokka’s sake he will try to
enjoy the day, despite the unwelcome visitors.

“You wanna get into the water as well?”, he asks.

Sokka basically beams at him and jumps to his feet. Zuko shakes his head exasperatedly and
reaches out to be pulled up. He’s aware that they are being watched and somehow that stirs a
possessive instinct inside of him. Wrapping an arm around Sokka he places a quick kiss on
his lips.

The giggles behind them stop, before they continue and one of the girls even makes an
‘Awww’-noise. To his surprise it bothers Zuko less than he thought it would. Sokka is his and
they better respect that.

When he breaks the kiss Sokka looks at him wide-eyed and Zuko is certain that he’s blushing
heavily, even though it’s hidden by his tan. A smile of grim satisfaction spreads on his lips, as
he turns to the sea, leaving Sokka a little dumbstruck.
 Simple People
Chapter Summary

The day at the beach goes on and everything is not so bad. Who would have thought?

Chapter Notes

Thank you guys for all your comments. It's fun writing a little fluff for this story and to
take a break from drama for once. Which doesn't mean that there will be no drama in the
future, because that is what we're really here for, aren't we?
But for now, things are good ;-) Enjoy!

Book 2: Spark

Chapter 14: Simple People

Zuko still feels a little apprehensive of their newfound companions, but even he can’t deny
that the afternoon turns out to be fun. After their swim the other boys talked everyone into
joining them for a game of Kuai Ball. To Zuko’s surprise it was an adapted version, that was
much more light-hearted and less competitive than the regular game. At first, he didn’t really
get the point of playing that way. It was probably to make it easier for the girls, who seemed
more fragile and cheerful than his sister and her friends ever were, but soon enough the
prince found himself enjoying the playful match too.

Maybe it was due to Sokka’s contagious enthusiasm regarding the unexpected company but
Zuko was genuinely happy, that the group of teenagers was clearly impressed when the Water
Tribe boy demonstrated his boomerang skills and that they laughed at his silly jokes. Sokka
obviously enjoyed the attention of everyone.

Even now, as they came to sit on their towels for a much needed break, he’s still entertaining
everybody. Zuko raises an eyebrow, as Sae holds on to Sokka’s shoulder as too not topple
over from laughing. He doesn’t shove her hand away. Instead, Sokka looks pretty self-
satisfied. It’s hard to not grant him that, because he is clearly having a great time.
Nevertheless, Zuko keeps an wary eye on him, wondering if he’s a little too possessive,
especially when he catches a mocking look from Jomai, who looks pretty amused on his
behalf.
Zuko is not sure if he likes any of them, but their company is pleasant. This is most likely just
a brief encounter and he will never see them again, so he doesn’t bother to start a fight. Sokka
made it clear earlier, that he thought Zuko was being ridiculous and he wants to show him,
that he can do better.

He even accepts the spiced rice-balls and vegetables wrapped in banana leaves, that Cho Lee
hands out at some point and he has to admit that they are pretty good. It feels weird to accept
food from them, to share with them, when they probably have much less to spare than Zuko.
Back at the beach house there is enough food to last them for days, but they didn’t bring
anything and thus, they have nothing to contribute to the meal. Zuko feels a little weird about
that, but the other teenagers seem unbothered.

Natsu, one of the guys, leans back with sigh and looks at them curiously.

“So, what leads you to Ember Island?”

“Work”, Sokka answers shortly, opening his second bundle of leaves, visibly delighted to
have been given more food.

An uneasy feeling settles on Zuko again.

“Must be awesome work, chilling on the beach”, Kousei comments and Sokka chuckles.

“Well, vacation first, work later.”

“And what are you doing for a living?”, Kousei inquires further.

“Uh”, Sokka shots a questioning look at him and Zuko shakes his head internally. Well done,
Sokka.

“We’re in agriculture”, he says vaguely, hoping that they will drop the subject.

It’s not a lie, technically, because they are here to discuss the option for founding vineries on
the island. Zuko prefers to not let them know, who they really are. He’s not a good liar,
though. Azula told him that many times and the skeptical look that the other teenagers share,
shows clearly that they don’t believe a single word he says.

“You don’t look like someone, who is working in agriculture”, Rani, the shy girl with the
green eyes, says.

“How would you know?” His words sound sharp and she flinches uncomfortably.
Nevertheless, she answers.

“My dad works on one of the plantations on the eastern coast of the island. I live and work
there too, though in the kitchen. But I know a farm worker, when I see one. You are clearly
not.”

It’s hard to argue with that. Zuko presses his lips tightly together and looks away.

“Are there a lot of plantations?”, Sokka asks quickly, trying to distract them.
Rani shrugs. “A few. Mostly for ash-bananas and coconuts. We were lucky enough to be
brought to work here, dad and I.”

“What’s that supposed to mean?”, Sokka wonders, while a realization dawns on Zuko and he
shifts uncomfortably.

Rani blushes and seems a little embarrassed all of a sudden.

“Oh. Nothing, really”, she mumbles.

“You probably wouldn’t understand”, Kousei says disparagingly. Zuko snorts.

“You’re Earth Kingdom guest workers”, he points out and is met with silence and a pair of
shocked blue eyes.

For everyone but Sokka it must be obvious, by Rani’s looks and even more by her story. A
bitter tug settles around Zuko’s mouth.

“Scratch the ‘guest’, but otherwise you’re right”, Natsu comments. There is a challenging
look in his eyes, as if he dares Zuko to insult her.

“You’re not from the Fire Nation?”, Sokka asks in disbelief and Rani shakes her head.

“No. But I lived here since I was five years old. After we had to leave our hometown it was
either become destitute refugees of Ba Sing Se or make a living in the Fire Nation
voluntarily. That’s how we ended up here.”

Her statement is full of euphemisms. Zuko thinks, that if she really believes that her dad’s
choice was one of free will, she’s incredibly naïve. They didn’t leave their hometown. Most
probably it has been burned to the ground and for her family it was either be left behind and
die of hunger or become practically enslaved in the Fire Nation. But he’ll let her have that
made-up story. He supposes that believing in a lie is sometimes better than facing the truth.

“Oh.”

Sokka looks a little disillusioned and it doesn’t surprise Zuko, that he is able to put two plus
two together. However, he doesn’t like the look in Sokka’s eyes, which is full of compassion
and Zuko has to put a stop to this, before he is going to share even more information about
them. They don’t know these people and Zuko prefers to keep it that way. He elbows Sokka
rather ungently, earning himself a reproachful look, that doesn’t go unnoticed by the others.

“Your family owns a plantation, don’t they?”, Natsu inquires, sounding less friendly than
before.

Zuko looks at the group. They seem cautious all of a sudden and he really can’t blame them.
It’s obvious, that them and him come from entirely different worlds, or rather opposite ends
of the same world. If they give him these looks, because they think he is the son of a rich
family, that could be one of their employers, Zuko doesn’t want to know how they would
react to finding out, that he is really their Prince.
He doesn’t want to tell them ‘no’, because that would only raise more questions and
suspicions. But he also doesn’t want to say ‘yes’, which would not only be a lie but also
make the situation a lot more awkward than it already is.

Zuko lets his eyes wander over the group, as he thinks of an excuse and he feels the palms of
his hands getting wet. Apparently it takes him too long to come up with something, because
Rani shakes her head and smiles indulgently at him.

“It’s fine, really”, she assures him and he believes her, even though the posture of her friends
says otherwise. “We have little influence of the life we are born into. We can just make the
best of it.”

Rani’s eyes shine brightly as she says those words. She turns to Natsu and smiles at him
happily. The tension in the other boy’s shoulders eases visibly and a gentle expression settles
on him, as he looks at the girl. It’s sweet to watch and warming to see how they intertwine
their fingers. Zuko is not even aware of the little smile that finds its way onto his lips. But he
is all the more aware of Sokka’s hand reaching finding his and squeezing it gently.

This day is so strange, Zuko thinks. He still feels a little out of place and he is still not
convinced that inviting them to stay is a good idea. But slowly he relaxes and the day starts to
feel good. He starts to feel good. It’s almost like he was a normal teenager, living a normal
life. The idea is just absurd.

“Rani’s right. And you’re easily the nicest upper class people we have met”, Cho Lee adds
and there’s approving murmurs from the others.

For a moment Zuko is not sure, if she’s being ironic. So far, he really hasn’t been nice to
them. It’s been Sokka, who offered them hospitality, not him. But if Cho Lee is anything like
her sister (and judging by the bright, genuine and cheerful smile, she is) he can trust that what
she says is true. Ty Lee never bothered to hide the meaning of her words under layers of false
friendliness or pretense. Sometimes Zuko still wonders, why she is friends with Azula,
because the two girls couldn’t be more different. But maybe that’s the whole point.

“Did you come across a lot of upper class people?”, Sokka asks curiously.

Yoshi snorts.

“During the season, the Island is full of them. And unfortunately there are quite a bunch
living here permanently, too.”

“We usually try to avoid them”, Sae explains. “They’re…”

“Entitled.”

“Douchebags.”

“Unbearable.”

“Insufferable.”
“… not like you”, Sae concludes with a shrug, after the conclusions of her friends.

While Sokka laughs, even Zuko can’t hide a grin.

“So, what are you guys doing?”, the Water Tribe boy asks, getting back to the original topic.

Zuko has to admit, that he’s curious about that too. He has never made the acquaintance of
regular citizens and he feels a little foolish and frankly superficial, that he hasn’t taken
interest into their lives so far.

“Natsu and I work for a boatbuilder at the shipyard in Ember Port”, Yoshi says.

“And I am working at the docks too, but during the season I work as a luggage carrier”,
Kousei says with a shrug.

“That’s how I met him”, Sae tells them. “I am working for the Shima family, maybe you
know them.”

Zuko nods, because of course he does. Gouto Shima is the tourism minister of Ember Island
and Zuko has met him, when he was still a little boy. The minister always greeted the Royal
Family upon their arrival at Ember Island and also invited them for meals several times
during their vacations.

“I’ve heard of him”, he says vaguely to keep the impression, that Sokka and him are only
tourists from another island; upper class but all in all of no importance.

“I am more or less a maid, you know. Running errands, house-keeping and stuff. It’s good
work. Plus, that’s how I came to meet Cho Lee.”

She throws an arm around her friend and the two girls grin at each other.

“How so?”, Sokka asks.

“I work as a laundress and the Shima family is one of the clients.”

Zuko nods again. He’s impressed. These people work for their living and probably they have
been doing so for years, even though they can’t be that much older than him. It makes him
question, what he has achieved so far. They can be proud of themselves, because they are
their own masters (save for Rani maybe), while he is living in a secluded palace unable to
craft the path of his own life. It’s depressing, really. They might have much less than him, but
they certainly have more freedom than he ever will.

“What about you, Jomai?”, Sokka asks and crooks his head to the side.

The boy grimaces and puts the notebook, that he held in his hands slowly aside.

“My father is a fisherman and during the off-season I work with him on the boat. He would
very much like to see me do so permanently, but that’s not what I want to do.”

“Which is?”
“Be an author and composer and work for a big theater. I want to write stories and plays and
songs”, he says passionately. “I want to see them on the stage, I want to see them come
alive.”

Jomai’s excitement is tangible, but Zuko can’t help but think, that he sounds a little crazy.
Obviously, that shows on his face, because Natsu laughs.

“He’s a dreamer, you know”, he says mockingly with a wink in Jomai’s direction.

“I’m trying, alright? And I got my first permanent engagement this year.”

“Yeah, playing music at the brothel”, Kousei snorts and the guys laugh, while the girls just
roll their eyes. Apparently this banter is nothing new to them.

Zuko looks at Jomai with a scandalized expression. Of course he is aware that these
establishments exist on Ember Island, but to be in company of someone who works at such a
place is unthinkable.

Jomai throws a dark look at his friends.

“So? The girls enjoy it and who knows? Someday some of these old moneybags might notice
the music and consider an engagement in a more respectable place.”

“Sure, because they go there for the music.”

“Shut up. I’ve never heard you complain about my songs.”

“I think, your songs are amazing”, Cho Lee says, trying to cheer Jomai up. “I always love to
hear them when I’m there.”

“Hang on”, Sokka chimes in, obviously confused and a little scandalized too. “What are you
doing in a brothel?”

“I am a laundress, as I said before. And sometimes I also sew stuff for them”, she says, as if
it’s the most normal thing in the world.

Zuko stares at them and he doesn’t even realize that his mouth is hanging open. He has never
been in such disrespectable company and he knows, that he should ask them to leave,
because there is no way that he could ever justify hanging out with them and having invited
them basically to another nobleman’s property. His reputation would never recover from that.
Then he remembers, that his reputation is already bad as it is. And also, he is strangely
intrigued by these people, who lead a live so different from his own.

“Point is”, Cho Lee continues, “Jomai’s music is a delight and he’s right to pursue his
dream.”

“Yeah, but you gotta be realistic. He doesn’t have any official education and I doubt that the
Ember Island Theater would ever consider playing something that has been written by a
fisherman’s son, who works in a brothel.”
Yoshi’s tone is good-humored, but the statement is true. Zuko knows that there are hardly
ever any new plays, apart from glorifications of the Fire Lord, and the theaters are only
allowed to play a handful of approved classics.

“Maybe not. I’m not some trained parrot, but that doesn’t mean that I can’t think of stories
that are worth being told.”

With that Jomai gets up, takes his notebook and walks away only to sit down on a large rock
on the opposite end of the beach.

“Was that really necessary?”, Sae asks Yoshi and sends him a reproachful look.

“He’s too sensitive”, Kousei says with a shrug.

“You should apologize to him”, the girl insists and Yoshi waves it off. “Later, when he
calmed down.”

Zuko doesn’t really listen. He is only aware, that Sokka asks some more questions about the
season at Ember Island. His eyes are on Jomai, who scribbles something down on his
notebook.

It is probably something deeply private and Zuko shouldn’t be curious about the work of
someone like him. It’s just inappropriate and he can’t imagine what kind of songs someone
would play in a brothel. Probably something naughty and though Zuko understands passion,
there is still something about the sheer idea of buying another person’s body and forcing
oneself onto them, that makes him scrunch up his nose. He can’t even imagine. Also, when
he remembers the courtesans that sometimes walk through the public areas of the palace or
worse, when he remembers how they approached Sokka, he feels appalled. No, Zuko really
doesn’t get, why someone would go to them.

But he likes poetry and drama. He knows the classics, some of them by heart, but to read or
see or hear something new, maybe something that is wicked or forbidden, seems tempting.

That is why he gets up and walks over to where Jomai is sitting on the rock. The pen is still in
his hand, though he is looking at the waves by now, obviously thinking.

Zuko clears his throat to make his presence known. The other boy seems surprised to find
him, when he looks up, and not one of his friends. The prince scratches his neck
uncomfortably.

“So… uh… what are your songs and plays about?”

Jomai chuckles. “Huh. Everything and nothing actually. Freedom, beauty, love.”

“Oh”, Zuko didn’t expect the last, given that Jomai works at a place for purchasable love.

An uncomfortable silence settles between them, as Zuko doesn’t know what to say. After a
while, Jomai watches him skeptically.

“Here’s the last thing, I’ve been working on. It’s not finished yet, but…”
He practically shoves the notes into Zuko’s hands, who is taken by surprise and almost lets
everything drop, before he gets a grip on it. He holds the papers carefully, as if they were
something fragile and somehow they are. These are the thoughts and songs of another person,
a window to their inner world and Zuko is not sure, what to do with the trust that is suddenly
placed in him. He throws a questioning glance at Jomai, who just nods encouragingly, before
he lowers his gaze to the paper in his hands.

He reads the words carefully and suddenly there is a lump in his throat. This is not some
entertaining, light-hearted or ambiguous song. This is deep.

Zuko frowns as he reads over the words again and again, because it feels like he’s looking
into a mirror, like he has been exposed. The song before him holds a sense of sadness and
fragility, that is incredibly familiar to Zuko. There are only few words, but the prince feels
incomprehensibly understood. And it is shocking how intensely the words resonate within
him. Particularly the part, where Jomai took all the sadness and turned it into hope.

Carefully, Zuko lets his fingers ghost over the words.

paper thin… like a waste of space… there’s still a chance for you… a spark in you… ignite
the light and let it shine… you’re a firework… after a hurricane comes a rainbow… let your
colors burst

He bites his lip, before he hands the notes back to Jomai.

“This is good”, he says with a raspy voice.

It’s an understatement. It’s brilliant. Zuko just doesn’t know how to say that, without showing
how much this song touches him.

Jomai smiles weakly.

“Do you know something about poetry?”

“I do”, Zuko confirms. “And this is better than many of the things I’ve seen on stage.”

Jomai seems content with that answer.

“This one is not for work. It’s for one of the plays I have in mind. I know, that the job
probably won’t get me anywhere. But I’m not ready to give up on it yet.”

Zuko nods. “You shouldn’t. Maybe someday an opportunity will make itself known.”

In the back of his mind he wonders, if there is anything he could do to help. The Fire Lord
doesn’t care for arts and culture, but nevertheless there is an academy in the capital. The
absolvents are approved and authorized to interpret the catalogue of licensed plays in the Fire
Nation theaters and to come up with new plays, as long as they go hand in hand with the code
of conduct of policy and society. Even if Zuko could arrange something to get Jomai into the
academy, that is probably not the kind of thing the young man wants to do.

“Maybe”, Jomai agrees, but it sounds unconvinced.

Then throws a look at Zuko.

“Can I ask you something? You don’t have to answer, if it’s too personal.”

Zuko braces himself, expecting that Jomai understood, who he is.

“Your scar… was it an accident?”

The prince’s eyes widen and he stares at Jomai in horror. He did not expect that question. It
makes a whole lot of emotions rise within him, ranging from shame to anger and sadness.
Zuko’s heart beats uncomfortably against his chests and unconsciously he balls his hands into
fist.

He can’t stand the attentive look on Jomai’s face, so he turns to look at the sea and takes a
deep breath.

How dare a simple citizen ask him such a question?! And how is he supposed to answer? It
would be so easy to lie, to just say yes and excuse himself. These people apparently don’t
know who he is and Zuko doesn’t want to give them any more clues. They don’t need to
know and they have no right to inquire about him!

A bitter taste settles in Zuko’s mouth. His first instinct is to lash out at Jomai for his audacity
to ask such a personal question. The other boy looks at him patiently and there is something
about his expression, that is completely open and unjudging, that makes Zuko hesitate.

He’s not mad at Jomai. He’s angry at Father. Because even when he manages to forget about
his scar for a short while, the Fire Lord made sure that the world never will. It’s a permanent
mark of shame and failure for everyone to see. So why should Zuko cover the truth? Why
should he protect Father from what he did? Why should he lie to a stranger and basically
himself? Father doesn’t care about him. So why bother?

“No”, he says quietly, not sure if Jomai can even hear him. But the other boy exhales noisily
and nods in understanding.

“Who?”

Zuko grimaces and bites his tongue, still not looking at Jomai. And then, he simply says it.

“My father.”

The waves crush against the beach, one so big that the water reaches his ankles. It is not an
unpleasant feeling, because Zuko feels hot due to the emotions boiling within him and
somehow the touch of water grounds him.

Now that he is surrounded by normal people, the things that happened to him seem even
more bizarre and cruel. He almost envies them for their supposed innocence and easiness,
despite being aware that they also have to face hardships. Those are just very different from
what he is used to.
Jomai hums and throws a look over his shoulder to where the group is still gathered under the
awning.

“Because of him?”

Zuko looks up, surprised, and turns to look over there as well, his eyes finding Sokka’s and
the Water Tribe boy grins, obviously happy to see him connect with people.

He shakes his head. “No. Sokka is…”

Zuko doesn’t know, what he even wants to say. A lot of things come to his mind, but none of
them seems fitting for the gratefulness and fondness he feels towards the other boy.

“He sees me through all of it”, he says, finally.

“You’re lucky”, Jomai states, simply, as a matter of fact and Zuko shrugs.

“I guess I am. In some aspects.”

They share a look and a hesitant smile before Jomai nods in the direction of the group.

“We should get back to them.”

As they walk back, Sae looks up. She seems relieved that Jomai calmed down and he gives
her a weak smile, before he sits down next to her and reaches for a kiwi-fig that some of them
must have brought.

Zuko sits down on his towel next to Sokka and there’s a content buzz of warmth within him,
as the Water Tribe boy leans lightly against him.

“We were discussing setting up a little fire and have a barbecue tonight”, Sokka fills him in.
“There’s tons of food in the house and who could say no to some hot meat on a stick?”

Natsu makes a choked noise and laughter erupts from the little group of teenagers. Zuko
groans at Sokka’s choice of words, and worse, he blushes. Sokka himself seems completely
oblivious and probably that’s for the best.

“Sure”, he says. It surprises himself, how easy it is to accept this suggestion.

It sets everybody into action. While Sokka walks off with Kousei and Cho Lee to collect the
food from the house, the rest of them spread out to gather wood and leafs to start a fire. Zuko
helps Yoshi prepare a fire-pit with some stones and soon enough everything is ready.

Yoshi kneels down next to the fire pit and casts a little flame into his hand. If Zuko still had
his bending, he would say it’s petty. The fire is very pale and flickers violently despite the
lack of wind. He doesn’t know what kind of training Natsu had, but it surely hasn’t been
great. As it is, he doesn’t say anything and also holds back any advice on how to best ignite
the crests.
Soon enough a little fire is crackling lively in front of them. Everybody has gathered around
it, some of them already holding sausages on sticks into the flames. It’s awfully nice and
Zuko listens to the chatter around him contently, instead of actively participating in the
conversations. A sense of calm and peace sets over him, he doesn’t really have a word for it.
The closest he can figure would be ‘home’, but that can’t be it. He is surrounded by strangers
and even this place is unfamiliar to him. Maybe it’s the absence of incessant, watchful eyes
following his every move; the fact that he’s not judged and that it’s just accepted that he is
here. That they are accepted, Sokka and him.

The sun has already set, when Cho Lee brings up something.

“There’s a party this Friday.”

The conversations around them stop and everybody looks at her a little bewildered and Zuko
senses, that something is off.

“A party?”, Sokka asks.

“Yeah, a little gathering of people. There’ll be food and drinks and music. It’s gonna be nice.
I was wondering if you would like to come?”

“Cho!”, Natsu hisses.

It’s obvious, that they would not be welcome there. Though Zuko doesn’t understand, why
she would bring it up, if that’s the case.

“I don’t know”, Zuko says slowly. “I’m not a party person.”

“C’mon, Zuko. It could be fun. And surely less boring than your dad’s parties for sure.”

“The last party I attended was everything but boring”, Zuko retorts dryly, thinking of the
ambush of earth and water benders that crashed it.

It takes Sokka a moment to get it, before he nods. “True. But not my idea of fun either.”

“I’m not sure if it would be up to your standards”, Kousei says awkwardly and Zuko frowns.

“What Kousei wants to say is, that it’s going to be… lively. Some would say inappropriate”,
Sae explains.

“I don’t care about standards. As long as there’s food, I’m in”, Sokka says, waving the stick
with another piece of meat around.

Zuko however, is not so sure.

“It’s not taking place at the brothel, is it?”, he asks, because no one is going to get him into
such a place.

That makes them chuckle.

“No, of course not. It’s a little bar, called ‘The Hotpot’. But yeah, it’s a simple location, so…”

“We’re simple people”, Sokka assures them and Zuko almost laughs at the face of disbelief
Sae makes at that.

The guys share a skeptical look, before Jomai shrugs.

“Alright, then we’ll see you there on Friday.”

 Crossroad of Destiny
Chapter Summary

Book 2 Finale! Let's get this party started!

Chapter Notes

Badumm, tsss!
Finale day, my lovelies. Well, finale of Book 2 and I can promise you, this one's a
monster. I wrote it in one go, because somehow yesterday I finally figured out how to
put all of the strings together and also, the trailer for the Live Action has been a huuuge
motivion.
I contemplated making this two chapters, but that wouldn't have worked out, so here we
are.
Get your seatbelts fastened, this is going to get wild.

Book 2: Spark

Chapter 15: Crossroad of Destiny

It’s already very late that night, when Sokka finishes washing the sand and salt off his body.
Zuko is already lying on the bed and the Water Tribe boy stops in the doorway to watch him.

The prince is staring at the ceiling. At first sight he seems tired, but there is something more
to his expression. If Sokka would have to put a word to it, he would go for melancholic, but
he’s not sure if that’s really what’s going on. He’s also not sure, if he should ask, because
Zuko seems lost in his thoughts.

Sokka feels a little pang of guilt, because he knows that the day didn’t go as planned and it
was impossible not to notice Zuko’s discomfort of being in other people’s company. After a
while though, he seemed to enjoy it. Maybe he’s been only pretending to do so, for Sokka’s
sake. If that’s the case, it’s charming but also a shame, because Sokka really enjoyed the day
and getting his mind off the constant troubles of their lives.

He walks over to the bed and sits down next to Zuko, placing a hand on his thigh and looks
apologetically at him.
“If I crossed a line today by inviting them to stay, I’m sorry”, he says.

Zuko’s expression softens.

“Don’t be. It… it was nice.”

His voice is quiet as he says those words and the tiniest smile plays around Zuko’s lips. He
seems genuine but also sad. Sokka really wants to get to the bottom of it, but he hesitates to
inquire further.

So all he asks is: “Are you okay?”

Zuko hums. “I think I am.”

He looks down onto the blanket and fiddles with the fabric, decidedly not looking at Sokka
when he finally speaks.

“For the first time in… probably ever I felt like a real boy. A real person.”

“Oh, Zuko.”

“Can… can we not talk about it please?”

Sokka nods, because he understands better than most that sometimes not talking about things
is what makes them easier to handle and also it’s too late in the night for philosophical
discussions to be productive anyway. Instead, he just lifts his blanket to let Zuko slip under it
and cuddle up against him, Zuko’s head coming to rest against his shoulder.

It’s already uncomfortably warm and he gives them five minutes maximum before the heat
will be unbearable but nevertheless Sokka is happy to hold the prince in his arms.

Placing a kiss against his hairline, he mumbles: “Good night, Zuko.”

The other boy cuddles closer against him and presses a kiss against his cheek.

They have a few days still until the official meeting with their host to discuss business, which
is why Zuko decides to take Sokka on a hike through the subtropical jungle on the southern
side of the island.

For the Water Tribe boy the exuberant nature and the lavish green, that surrounds them is
something completely new and Sokka really doesn’t hold back his excitement about the flora
and fauna that surrounds them. It’s endearing, how often he demands to stop to watch the
birds above them, who sing their cheerful songs.
Zuko tells him all the names of the birds he remembers: The Agni’s ray, a yellow bird with
long tail feathers that hops over branches and through the thicket above them like a foolhardy
ball of sunshine. The Kyoshi thrushes, some beautiful green and white birds, with a delicate
feather crown and a surprisingly strong voice for such a small creature. The blue masked
pheasant, that crosses the path they walk on and many more sorts of parrots and
hummingbirds.

A greenish-golden light surrounds them, caused by the sunlight that falls through the leaves
above and Sokka seems to be in awe of his surroundings.

“This is amazing. I could stay here all day and still discover something new”, he says and
Zuko chuckles.

It’s true though. He hasn’t been on many hikes through Ember Island’s forests, but whenever
Uncle and Lu Ten took him, when Zuko was still a child, he has been just as fascinated by his
surroundings as Sokka is now.

He gently nudges him to go on, because even though they have been already walking for a
while, they really haven’t come far.

“Let’s see, if we can find a nice spot for a picknick”, Sokka suggests and Zuko rolls his eyes.

It’s beyond him how the other boy can already be hungry again after they had a decent
breakfast only a few hours ago. Zuko himself doesn’t have any need for food, but he’s not
against finding a nice spot to spend the day either, so he agrees.

After another fifteen minutes, Sokka stops again.

“You hear that?”

At first, Zuko doesn’t know what he means, because the birds are singing just as
enthusiastically as before, but then he hears the sound of running water.

He nods and they decide to look for the source of the noise. Making their way through farns
and low bushes, they soon arrive at a small clearing and Zuko stops dead in his track.

He knows the place. He has been here not long ago.

While Sokka’s face lightens up and he rushes over to the little pond to splash water into his
face and drink a few hands full of the refreshing liquid, Zuko frowns and tenses a little.

Everything is exactly like he remembers it. The waterfall is there, the large rock, the little
pond. The only thing that is missing is the old man and Zuko looks around, half expecting
him to step into the scene from behind one of the trees that surround the area. Which never
happens.

Nevertheless, he only walks over to Sokka reluctantly, wary of his surroundings as he sits
down on the large rock.
Sokka has already slipped out of his shoes and lets his feet dangle into the water with a loud
sigh.

“Alright, I thought the beach was my favorite place on this island, but now I think, this place
here is.”

Zuko smiles half-heartedly, because even though he has to agree that it’s an incredibly nice
spot, unease is settling on him.

He’s been sitting on this rock once before and somehow it becomes increasingly difficult to
tell himself that his encounters with the elder are just some strange dreams. He doesn’t want
to call them visions, because he is not a seer (and he doesn’t want to be) and also, he saw
mother, he saw dragons. Both of those are long but gone, vanished from the world, which
means that whatever Zuko is seeing is clearly not the future. His encounters with the elder
feel too real to be dreams, but too bizarre to be real either.

Zuko lets his eyes trail over the waterfall and he can’t shake the strange tingling under his
skin. It feels like someone is peaking over his shoulder. That someone is clearly not Sokka,
who has propped himself on his arms next to him and lets his face be warmed by the sun with
closed eyes. Zuko shifts uncomfortably. Maybe this place has some spiritual importance, that
he cannot comprehend. Or maybe Zuko has been here with Uncle before, when he was so
little that he can’t remember it anymore.

Anyway, he doesn’t like to think about the things the old man told him, when they last met,
because it causes an itching under his skin and a strange sense of bad conscience.

So Zuko leans forward until his hand touches the cool water and splashes it in Sokka’s face,
causing the other boy to startle and yell in protest. He laughs loudly at the indignant
expression.

“Oh, you’ll regret that!”

With that, Sokka gets rid of his shirt and jumps right into the pond. A large splash erupts and
Zuko, who is too slow to slip out of his tunic, gets soaked with water.

“You just wait!”, he protests, glaring at Sokka playfully, before he jumps into the water as
well.

The days on Ember Island pass quickly. It almost feels like they are in some kind of dream
and Sokka knows that it’s an illusion, a brief escape of reality that is inevitably going to catch
up with them sooner or later. And yet, it’s soothing to just concentrate on something nice.
With each day, he feels closer to Zuko and it’s a huge relief to realize that they both
genuinely enjoy each other’s company and that their bond is not only created by the trauma
they went through.

Sokka finds himself wishing, that the vacation would go on eternally, but soon enough duty
catches up to them. The morning to visit the estate of Ushin Min arrives and they both dress
up in their respective official clothes, before a carriage picks them up to take them to the
mansion.

“Anything specific that I should need to know?”, he asks Zuko, while the carriage is slowly
moving up the hills that lead to the center of Ember Island, where the weather is milder. Still
warm, but not as hot or humid as in the subtropical jungles surrounding the coasts.

“I haven’t met Ushin Min personally, yet. He’s rich and ambitious. His family is considered
nobility, but only since his grandfather. I don’t know what to expect, but in his letter he
sounded eager to try our concept. If only because he sees the opportunity for economical
gain.”

Zuko shrugs.

“We’ll have to wait and see.”

Sokka nods. “That doesn’t sound too bad.”

When they arrive at the mansion, their host is already awaiting them, together with what must
be his house staff. A young woman in her twenties stands a few steps behind him, basically
between him and the servants. She’s wearing a silk robe in a dark rose color with
embroideries of cherry blossoms and peonies, her hair and make-up look impeccable and her
attentive and wary expression makes her look a lot more impressive than the stocky man, that
must be Ushin Min himself.

He is dressed in a long, crimson tunic which is embroidered with gold yarn and expensive
jewelry. Several rings on each hand underline his wealth. The smile on his face seems a little
too polite to be real, but at least, he greets Zuko with a deep bow and the traditional gesture.

“Prince Zuko, it is my honor to welcome you to my humble estate.”

Zuko returns the gesture. “Thank you for having us. May I introduce you to the Prince
Consort, Sokka of the Southern Water Tribe?”

Ushin Min presses his lips tightly together and looks at Sokka as if he was something
disgusting like a leech-roach. He acknowledges him with a curt nod, that is just enough to not
be considered rude, and turns his eyes away immediately.

Sokka is not sure if he should be amused or offended. In fact, he is actually proud, that Zuko
does not make the slightest attempt to hide him, even though their union is clearly considered
a shame, at least in the upper class. It boosts his ego immensely and somehow he feels a
wicked satisfaction, that Ushin Min seems to be annoyed by his presence.
Zuko and him exchange some polite pleasantries, but there is a certain impatience to their
host, that clearly shows that he wants to get down to business.

“I have read your explanations with great interest and there are some sites I want to show
you, that I consider worth a try”, he suggests.

“We would very much like to see them”, Zuko responds and Ushin Min throws another
disapproving look at Sokka.

“I see. Well, in that case Rika will accompany us.”

He makes a gesture to the elegant woman to join them.

“Shall I call for the palanquins? It is only a short walk, but maybe it would be more pleasant
for…”, Ushin interrupts himself obviously not sure how to phrase it and Zuko’s face darkens.

“We will walk.”

Sokka grins and looks at the woman, who has meanwhile stepped in next to him.

She greets him with a respectful bow and Sokka happily acknowledges it with the traditional
Fire Nation greeting. There’s a tug at her mouth and he can’t shake the feeling, that she’s just
as entertained by the whole thing as he is.

“Prince Consort.”

“Madame.”

She tries to hide the chuckle behind her sleeve, which clearly indicates that this is not the
proper title, but she doesn’t seem mad about it either.

While Ushin and Zuko lead the way, Sokka follows with Rika a few steps behind them as
they walk slowly up a hill. He hears their host asking Zuko different questions about the
vinery project, but when Sokka attempts to answer them, Ushin’s look alone is enough to
give it up. Zuko looks more displeased by the minute, but Sokka just shrugs and falls back to
walk next to the young woman.

“I think your father doesn’t like me”, he says.

She throws an unimpressed look at him and raises her eyebrow.

“He’s not my father. He’s my husband.”

Sokka’s mind comes to a screeching halt and he stops to stare at her, shocked. A sly smile
plays around her perfectly painted lips. Apparently she’s used to the misconception.

“But”, Sokka stutters, “He’s like, I don’t know, twice as old as you!”

“Not quite twice as old as me”, she corrects him gently and they continue their walk, while
Sokka tries to comprehend the information. It just screams ‘wrong’ to him and he really
doesn’t know how to feel about this revelation.

“Alright”, is what he says in the end, because he really isn’t here to cause a scandal or
counteract their mission by saying something insensitive.

But to think that a young woman, as pretty and classy as her, should be tied to a man like
Ushin is unsettling.

Rika is watching him attentively and she shakes her head as if she could read his mind.

“You should not be too quick to judge. Yes, Ushin is conservative, but he is a good man and a
wonderful father to our son.”

Surprised, Sokka looks at her. Rika sounds honest and convinced, and the look she directs at
her husband is full of warmth.

“You fell in love with him?”

“Is that so hard to believe?”

She looks at him with a mocking expression and for a moment Sokka is tempted to say yes,
but he holds his tongue.

“In our society, as a woman, you cannot choose who you will marry. I have been lucky to
have been given to Ushin. It is not a burden. He allows me to live a comfortable life, he
respects me and treats me like an equal. Yes, he is ambitious but does that make him a bad
person? I suppose not.”

Sokka nods thoughtfully and Rika smiles at him indulgently.

“I know that you understand that better than most, Prince Consort. We all have to fulfill the
role that fate has put upon us. And please do not tell me that you consider it to be a burden to
be with the young prince.”

Sokka groans and heat rises to his cheeks.

“Is it really so obvious?”

Rika shrugs. “For everyone with eyes.”

Meanwhile, they arrived at a shallow mountainside, that consists mostly of loamy soil and
lava-rock. Bushes and different sorts of grass cover the area.

An older man in simple brown clothing waits for them already.

“So”, Ushin Min begins without greeting him. “This is the terrain we considered fitting to the
needs you described in your letter, Prince Zuko. Now, would you explain how exactly you
plan to place the pits you have been talking about, please?”
Instead of answering, Zuko just takes a look at him and Sokka can’t suppress the grin for the
life of him.

“Good day, sir”, he greets the older man, just to mess with Ushin and he doesn’t miss the
amused tug at Zuko’s mouth.

He reaches for the scrolls that he carries in a container on his back and unfolds them.

“Here’s a sketch of what we had in mind. It depends a little from which side the downwind is
coming to determine the final layout and height for the pit, but what we thought is…”

He quickly gives them an explanation and though Ushin is still wearing a grim expression, it
seems to peak his interest. After Sokka has finished, he turns to the elder man.

“Show us an example of what the Prince Consort has just told you”, he demands.

The man nods quickly and hurries a little further up the hill, where he gets into a stance and
soon the earth starts to rumble, give in and smooth out into a perfect round and concave pit.
Sokka blinks and his mouth stands open in surprise. He thought the man was simply a
gardener instead of an earthbender, but in the end that seems to be the same thing.

Zuko and him exchange a glance and they are both thinking the same: he’s forced to work for
the Fire Nation.

“Let’s have a look”, Sokka suggests a lot less enthusiastic about the whole thing, but they
have no choice. It’s what they came here for and if it allows to make some changes for the
better in the end, they have to live with it for now.

After several adaptions until each of them is satisfied, Ushin Min agrees to use the
mountainside for the vinery. On the way back to his mansion, Zuko and him discuss the
conditions. Ushin insists, that if he provides the terrain, the ministry of agriculture should pay
for vines itself as well as for the staff that is to care for them. Zuko only allows the budget to
buy the vines, but not maintain the vinery as he wants to see results and is not doing those
tests for Ushin’s benefit alone. The man looks at him thoughtfully for a while after that, but
he seems strangely content.

“I agree under one condition. My son, Goro, is six years old and we recently discovered that
he is a bender. I am willing to run the vinery as you demand, Prince Zuko, as long as you
promise me, that he will be accepted into the Royal Fire Nation Academy for boys once he
turns eight.”

Zuko frowns and hesitates, but he’s a terrible liar and Sokka is fairly sure that even Ushin can
see, that his hesitation is only fake.

“Very well. We have an agreement”, he says and they reach out to shake hands.

Ushin seems very pleased with this outcome and hums.

“Thank you, Prince Zuko. It is a pleasure doing business with you. Now that it is done, let us
eat and drink.”
They accept the invitation and even though the conversation throughout the meal is a little
stiff, the food is great and Sokka thinks, this day really could have gone a lot worse.

When they are about to leave, Zuko turns to Ushin once more.

“We thank you for your hospitality, Ushin Min. I know, it was agreed to stay in your guest
house only until after the negotiations are finished, but I am wondering if we could stretch
our stay for a few more days as we rarely have the occasion to enjoy this wonderful island.”

Ushin Min snorts, but nods easily.

“Of course, Prince Zuko. It would be my pleasure to host you and…”, he throws another
disapproving look at Sokka, which is actually a lot friendlier than when they first arrived, and
exhales noisily, “… the Consort for as long as you wish.”

“Thank you, Ushin. I will not forget it.”

With that, they get back into the carriage, that is to take them back to the beach house.

“That was unfair play”, Sokka says. “As if he could say no.”

Zuko grins. “There must be at least some perks of being the Prince, don’t you think?”

“Very much so.”

They grin at each other.

“That was good work today”, he says and Zuko nods.

“Yeah, I think it was. We make a good team.”

“A good team?”, Sokka echoes, raising his eyebrow. “The best!”

Zuko takes his hand and smiles out of the window.

They make the most of their stay on Ember Island. They spend days on the beach, go on
hikes, visit the city and the port and Sokka even manages to talk Zuko into going shopping
for new outfits for the party they are invited to. There’s a lot of eye-rolling involved from
Zuko’s side until Sokka has finally decided what he is going to wear (a red, sleeveless shirt
with a nice shoulder-piece that has some pretty cool attachments to it and a matching pair of
short pants, that comes in two layers with a belt that has the typical middle piece; he throws
an annoyed look at Zuko, when the prince tells him the pants are probably for girls – it fits
him amazingly, thank you very much).
Zuko can say what he wants and even if he agreed to go out only reluctantly, Sokka knows
that he has also started looking forward to the evening of the party. The whole afternoon, he
fusses about his own clothes (a scarlet tunic with a large V-collar, that shows a distracting
amount of chest and suits him damn well, and some short black trousers) and wants to leave
way earlier then would be justifiable.

Finding the Hotpot however, turns out to be a difficult task.

Sokka verifies a few times if they are at the right address, but there only is a large, wooden
building in the typical style of Ember Island with the circumferential balconies, red railings
and shutters. But it looks abandoned and there is no sign or any other indication that there
would be a bar or restaurant. The house looks exactly like any other building in the little
town, except for the lack of paint and flowers.

“It must be here somewhere!”, Sokka says, becoming increasingly disheartened, because it
occurs to him that they might have been given the wrong address.

He throws a nervous look at Zuko, who wears a skeptical frown on his face as well. To think
that they have been fooled by the group of people that seemed to be so nice and inviting
causes a hollow feeling in his stomach. Sokka hopes that this is not the case, because Zuko
finally started to feel comfortable in company and he can’t have him be betrayed. And why
should they do that? Maybe they just have a terrible sense of orientation or maybe the party
has been cancelled altogether.

“Let’s walk down the road, maybe we’ll find it.”

Zuko nods quietly, but disappointment slowly creeps onto his face.

The town is really not big and it only takes a few minutes to walk from one end to the other.
The only people they come across are a few middle-aged men standing under the canopy roof
in front of a shop, talking in hushed voices. There is nothing special about them, but Sokka
can’t shake the feeling of unease as they pass them by. It’s not the first time during the last
days, that he feels being watched. He even turns around as they walk back, but the men pay
them no attention. It seems he’s really just becoming paranoid.

“Look!”, Zuko says suddenly and his face lights up. He points to a few girls further down the
road, who have hooked their arms under each other and walk straight to the abandoned
building, chatting and giggling excitedly as they do so.

Zuko and him share a look and a relieved smile flashes over Sokka’s face.

They watch the girls disappear next to the building through an inconspicuous wooden gate,
that they paid no attention to earlier. The garden behind it is overgrown by all kinds of weed
and frankly looks shabby, but there is a narrow path that leads behind the building. They
follow it and find a door on the backside of the house. Branded into the wood above the door
is the word ‘Hotpot’.

"Shall we?", Sokka asks and he can't ban the excitement from his voice. Zuko grins back at
him and opens the door.
"After you."

To their surprise the place is already pretty crowded. There are lots of tables all over the room
and most of them are already occupied by young adults. A stage is set up on the furthest side
of the room and different instruments, mostly drums and guitars but also a tsungi-horn, are
waiting for someone to use them.

The air is buzzing with excited anticipation, but before Sokka can even look for a free table
or their acquaintances, a tall man blocks their view.

"Stop", he commands. "I've never seen you around here. Who invited you?"

Before Sokka can answer, a cheerful voice shouts through the room.

"Sokka! Zuko! Over here!"

It's Cho Lee, who underlines her words by waving expressively at them. The man, who
blocked their way, grumbles something incomprehensible but lets them pass anyway and they
make their way over to the large table at which the group of teens is already gathered.

The girls beam at them and even go so far as to greet them with a kiss on the cheek. Zuko
turns bright red and is obviously a little embarrassed and Sokka can't help but laugh at him.
The guys just give them companionable handshakes.

"We weren't sure if you would come", Jomai says.

"This place is kinda hard to find", Zuko shrugs.

The other boy nods.

"For good reason. You'll see", he winks at them and Natsu shoves some glasses with a
greenish liquid inside in their direction.

Sokka gives it a sniff and finds that it's some fruity beverage.

"Best tropical punch you've ever had, I promise", Natsu says. "Be careful, it's stronger than it
tastes."

Sokka throws a questioning look at Zuko, who shrugs again and takes a careful sip. His eyes
widen, but he doesn't look displeased.

"That is good."

"Told ya", Natsu laughs, obviously satisfied with himself.

Sokka takes a sip as well and a sweet, pleasant taste fills his mouth. It's impossible to tell
which kind of fruit have gone into the drink, but it tastes great.

"So, what have you been up to these last days?", Kousei asks and while Zuko gives them a
story about their hiking trip and some vague information of having done some work-related
stuff, Sokka looks around.

He didn't know what to expect, because he has never been to a bar before and since Sae
mentioned that some would call it inappropriate, he has been curious. Actually, he doesn't get
what she's talking about. Well, the people's clothing is revealing, even by Ember Island
standards, but Sokka wouldn’t call it slutty or anything like that. There is nothing scandalous
about it. The girls are wearing sleeveless or neckholder tops (most of them belly-free), self-
made jewelry of wood, leather or metal and long, flowing skirts. Some have flowers in their
hair and they simply look pretty. The guys wear vests of different styles or sleeveless shirts as
well and light pants with sash belts just like Zuko and him.

In fact, they fit in surprisingly well and it’s nice to just be part of the crowd. When Sokka
turns back to Zuko he sees him engage in a conversation with Jomai and Sae and a warm
feeling is buzzing in his chest.

"You're so smitten", Cho Lee singsongs next to him and nudges him with her elbow.

"I'm not", Sokka says and rubs his arm.

"You are. I think you two make such a cute couple."

She beams at him and her big brown eyes shine brightly. Sokka really feels like he's having a
déjà-vu because that's exactly what Ty Lee told him, when they met months ago.

He shakes his head in disbelief and raises his glass at her.

"Cheers."

She laughs and drinks with him.

A sense of anticipation is hanging in the air as more and more young people arrive. Zuko
can’t remember to having been in such a crowded place ever or a place that is quite so
simple. The decorations on the walls are mostly tools, such as harpoons, fishing nets, weirdly
looking sticks which purpose is unknown to Zuko, but also some old and rusty swords. It
conveys the rural history of Ember Island and clashes with the colorful lanterns and the
young crowd, that comes together.

Zuko wouldn’t call the place cozy, because there’s really not much space, he’s squeezed
between Sokka and Sae, but he can’t deny that there is some appeal to the simplicity of the
place.

Once they have ordered their food, a variety of different snacks that they will be all going to
share, Natsu stands up and clears his throat.
"So", he begins. "There's a reason I've invited you here tonight."

He grimaces and the grip around his glass tightens. The smiles fall from the faces around
them and Zuko tenses as well.

"Two weeks ago I received the letter”, he takes a deep breath and makes a meaningful pause.
“I am to join the Fire Nation Army."

There's audible gasps around the table. Rani looks pale, but surprisingly unshaken and Zuko
supposes, that she already knew. After all, she's his girlfriend, so if anyone knew it would be
her.

Yoshi clenches his jaw and also most of the others have dreadful looks on their faces. Tears
shine in Cho Lee's eyes.

"Natsu", she says and it sounds heartbroken.

"No, please", he says and raises his hand. "It's alright. I knew this day would come. I've been
waiting for it to happen for months now, years even. I'm a bender, I have no choice. But there
is something I must ask of you."

He throws another look at them and Zuko feels miserable. He has seen Natsu ignite the fire at
the beach. This young man has no idea, how to use his bending to fight. He's completely
inexperienced, has no training and yet he's sent to war.

Memories come rushing back at him and he has to tear his eyes away and tries not to think of
the people he couldn’t save. His hands start to shake violently and he wonders, if he could
excuse himself or if it would anger the others. Before Zuko can come to a decision, Sokka’s
hand is already there, covering his and he squeezes it tightly. The grim expression on the
Water Tribe boy’s face tells Zuko, that he knows exactly what he's thinking. He takes a deep
breath and decides to stay.

Natsu's eyes land on Rani at last and he smiles at her, before he looks back at the others.

"This is my last night of freedom. I want to spend it with you guys. I want to celebrate this
evening and consider it a test for another celebration, that will be held once I'm back. Well, I
hope that we'll be celebrating, but that depends on you, baby."

He looks at Rani again and smiles widely at her, while he takes her hands into his.

"Rani, my love, will you do me the honor and marry me?"

The reactions are wild. Zuko can't believe it. While Rani laughs through a sob and nods
enthusiastically, the others start to cheer, whistle and applaud. He does so as well and when
his eyes find Sokka's, the Water Tribe boy smiles widely and his eyes look a little teary. Of
course the noise-level catches attention from the surrounding tables and soon the whole room
stands up to applaud the two newly engaged.

The atmosphere in the room is even more energetic than before and it’s unbelievable, that
these people invited Sokka and him to share such a special moment with them. Suddenly
Zuko feels oddly proud to sit among them and to be considered worthy to do so. These
people barely know them and yet they disregarded the obvious differences between them and
just welcomed them into their middle.

Zuko is grateful that the food is being served, because otherwise he thinks he would get
sentimental. Maybe the fruit punch is stronger than it seems, but somehow everything seems
oddly intense all of a sudden and the evening has hardly begun.

There’s more drinks and more laughter and the atmosphere becomes more exuberant by the
minute. Their table is undoubtedly the loudest, but that might be because there’s an endless
stream of people coming over to congratulate the happy couple. Rani is beaming and Natsu
looks like he could embrace the whole world. The happiness radiates off him and it’s kinda
contagious. Sokka leans subtly against Zuko, who wraps an arm around him not so subtly and
they grin at each other.

However, it is impossible to forget, that Natsu will be leaving soon and this night is a
farewell for the young man.

Sokka can’t help but admire these people and he can’t help but wonder, if this is what the
entire Fire Nation was once like. These people are warm and welcoming, they’re passionate
and energetic, their spirits lively and radiant. It is impossible not to like them and it’s easy to
share a laugh and a drink with them. If this is what the real Fire Nation is like, then it’s even
more of a shame what has become of it.

Suddenly there is the sound of a guitar and he turns to the stage curiously. A few musicians
have installed themselves and excited chatter starts to spread as another guitarist joins the
first one. When a young man hops onto the stage, an uproar of noise goes through the room
as the crowd cheers and suddenly everybody around them gets up to put tables and chairs
aside to clear the room.

Zuko and him get up as well, but they watch the scene a little lost as to what is happening.

When the drums start to accompany the guitars Cho Lee whistles and she’s not the only one.

The man on the stage smiles widely and starts to sing, then he pauses and the crowd answers
him. They go back and forth like this several times and Sokka grins, still confused, but also
amazed by the energy in the bar. He doesn’t understand a single word of what they are
singing, literally. He throws a questioning look at Zuko, while grabs the next best chair and
carries it over to the others, just to do something and not just stand there in everybody’s way.
Zuko follows suit.

“It’s a dialect, an old one”, he says. “Hardly anyone uses it anymore. Or so I thought.”
Sokka throws a doubtful look at the crowd. “Doesn’t look like hardly anyone to me.”

“I have no idea what’s going on”, Zuko admits.

“But you understand what they’re saying?”

Zuko nods as the crowd answers the singer again.

“What does it say?”

“Uh, basically… ‘It’s hot’ and ‘I’m on fire’.”

Sokka looks at him bluntly and blinks. “That sounds incredibly stupid.”

However, he has to admit, that the rhythm is nice. It’s loaded with energy, that only multiplies
due to the back and forth between singer and audience. It’s very entertaining to watch,
especially once the first people start to dance.

“Ah”, Zuko says, a realization obviously dawning on him.

“What?”, Sokka asks.

"Now I know why this place is considered inappropriate."

Sokka frowns, because he still doesn't understand. Zuko rolls his eyes and points at the
people.

"Dancing? This is what is inappropriate?", he asks in disbelief, because it looks pretty

innocent, basically just people jumping around, moving to the music.

"I'm afraid so."

Meanwhile they have retreated to the side of the room to watch the spectacle. Their new
friends are already on the dancefloor and everybody seems to be having a good time. Sokka
bobs his head to the rhythm.

When the song ends, the crowd cheers and applauds. They do so as well. The cries are
becoming even louder when the drums initiate another song and a young woman enters the
stage. The people seem almost ecstatic and Sokka gets why. The melody and the beat are
captivating and her voice is wonderful.

This time he understands the text and he’s actually surprised that it’s an homage to an
obviously free-spirited girl, who is unwilling to adapt to social conventions. He would even
go so far to say that it’s rebellious and now he gets, why they are careful as to who they let
into this bar. Sokka is fairly sure, that if any official site would know about this, these young
people would be in a lot of trouble.

It’s fantastic to see all these people so joyous and detached, to see the laughter and hear their
voices, because this is really not, what Sokka has seen on the streets so far.
He throws a look at Zuko, who watches the scene with wonder and something that Sokka
would label as longing, but he can’t be sure. There’s a twitch in Zuko’s shoulders and it
actually seems as if the prince is tempted to join the crowd.

He looks back and catches Cho Lee’s gaze, who grins at him and makes an inviting gesture.
When Sokka doesn’t react immediately, she leans over to Sae and whispers something in her
ear. Then the two girls break into laughter and Sokka thinks they might be making fun of
him.

His eyes go wide, when the two young women push through the crowd and he has no time to
react before Cho Lee grabs his wrist just like Sae grabs Zuko’s and he finds himself pulled
onto the dancefloor.

“I don’t know the steps”, he yells as the crowd around them is sing-shouting again.

“You don’t need to. Not for this one”, Cho Lee yells back and sways to the music. “Come on,
Sokka. Try it.”

He’s fairly sure, that he looks ridiculous. It’s awkward and Sokka feels like everybody is
doing this so much better than him, but no one seems to care and he has to admit, that it’s
fun. He smiles at Cho, who grins back at him.

One song merges into the other. When the next one comes on, Cho suddenly leaves him as
the girls gather on one side of the room and the boys retreat. Then, the girls start to move and
sing in unison. Sokka’s eyes go wide, when the texts become increasingly provocative. The
boys whistle to cheer them on.

“I’m a fire burning on, I do what the hell I want. Middle finger to the sky and my head held
high!”

Zuko’s mouth is agape, before it turns into a disbelieving grin.

“This is…”, he begins.

“Amazing?”, Sokka suggests and reluctantly the prince nods.

“In Caldera they could be arrested for something like this”, he says lowly, only for Sokka to
hear.

“Because they want to be independent?”

Zuko nods and Sokka huffs.

They watch how the girls dance and how their skirts fly around whenever they swirl. And
then, when the boys join the singing, Zuko completely surprises him as he sings along.
Sokka’s smile gets impossibly wider and he does so as well. There’ something shining in
Zuko’s eyes, he seems daring and it’s incredibly attractive.

“You know”, Yoshi yells over the music. “I was a little skeptical about you two, no offense.
But you seem to know how to party.”
Zuko laughs.

“None taken. I was just as skeptical as you.”

The prince takes another sip of his drink and a new melody sounds through the room. It’s
different from before, a murmur goes through the room and the couples from before get
together again. The music is intoxicating, there is a certain innuendo and it’s sexy.

Sokka looks at Cho Lee a little unsure of what do to. Around them the dancing couples move
effortlessly and they are dancing… close.

“I’ll show you”, she says and smiles encouragingly at him. “Go backwards with your left foot
and then just follow me.”

Dancing is surely not his strong suite and being so close to someone he barely knows is
weird. Cho Lee lets her hips circle against his and it’s at the same time exciting and a little
terrifying. He tries to evade her motions basically, which she seems to find hilarious.

“Don’t be shy. It’s just a dance.”

With a determined expression he gathers his courage and yeah, when he moves with her it’s
easier and surprisingly less awkward.

Over Cho Lee’s shoulder he captures a glimpse of Zuko and Sae and his heart skips a beat.

They look amazing together. Apparently they’ve already gotten further then Cho and him,
because Sae’s arms are wrapped around Zuko’s shoulders, one of his legs slides between
hers, just like the other couples do and Sokka gulps. It’s a sight to behold and suddenly he
feels inadequate. He turns back to Cho, but a worried frown settles on his face.

When he glances back once more, he sees how Sae leans in and whispers something in
Zuko’s ear and the prince laughs. It’s a laugh Sokka has rarely seen on him and that the
young woman coaxes it out of him so easily makes Sokka feel nauseous and suddenly the
song doesn’t feel as intoxicating as before.

Cho Lee clicks her tongue to get his attention.

“You ready?”, she asks.

"Ready for what?"

Cho Lee only grins and then she twirls him around swiftly and he finds himself in Zuko's
arms, who catches him barely and for a moment they just stare at each other, both caught a
little off-guard. A hesitant smile appears on Zuko’s lips, as he steadies him and with the
colorful lighting around him, his eyes seem to glow in a beautiful, golden tone.

"Hey there”, he says.

"Hey."
If Sokka sounds breathless and his voice a little raspy, that's only due to the dancing and not
the proximity.

Zuko holds his gaze as he guides Sokka’s arms to wrap around his neck, just like Sae did
before, and rolls his hips probingly against him. Sokka hisses and heat rises within him, but
he follows Zuko’s lead, allows himself to get lost in the music and he shivers, when Zuko’s
breath ghosts over his neck as they move together.

The choir gets louder the longer the night goes on. The music is mesmerizing and even
though Zuko doesn't know any of the songs he lets himself get carried away by the energy
and the atmosphere around him. Zuko feels alive like he has never felt before, he feels free
and euphoric.

Nobody is paying any attention to them, they’re just Sokka and Zuko here, and he feels like
he belongs. To Sokka, but also to these people, who know how to enjoy their lives. Right in
this moment Zuko feels like he is one of them. These people know hardship, but their spirits
are unbroken. Most of the songs, even the happy ones are tinged with melancholy despite the
joyous atmosphere.

It's a stark contrast: the bright and the dark, the joy and the sadness.

It stirs a hunger for life, that is foreign to him. The choir of all the voices around him rings in
his ears and soaks deep into his bones. Zuko might not know the lyrics, but the energy
reverberates within him. He feels invincible, like he is on fire.

He beams at Sokka and lifts him up to twirl him around. Laughter bubbles out of the Water
Tribe boy's mouth. Zuko finds himself laughing along.

Right in this moment the prince feels like life is perfect and he knows that it will forever hold
a special place in his heart. Even more so, when Sokka's grip around his shoulders tightens
and when he looks at Zuko as if he's everything he ever needed. Zuko feels so happy that he
thinks his chest will burst with all the feeling.

Sokka has never seen such joy on Zuko's face. The prince seems completely happy and
detached from his sorrows. His eyes are shining brightly and he looks breathtakingly
beautiful. A breathless laugh comes over Sokka's lips, his whole body tingles and he literally
feels swept of his feet. He looks at Zuko, getting lost in the amber eyes, that hold so much
warmth and make a bubbly feeling rise within him. He's impossibly and undeniably in love
with Zuko.

He doesn't need to say it, because he sees the same emotion on Zuko's face. His cheeks hurt
from smiling so widely. This is it. This is what life should be like.

The music around them is becoming an intense crescendo, it wraps himself around them like
a spell. Sokka’s heart is beating fast and he feels like he could move mountains.

Their faces come incredibly close, when Zuko lets him down. Gentle fingers trace softly over
his cheek and Sokka’s eyes fall shut as he leans in.

A deafening crack cuts through the air, Sokka’s eyes fly open only to see pieces of wood
soaring through the air when the door flies off its hinges. He’s got enough sense left in him to
pull Zuko down with him. Alarmed cries and shrieks sound around them, the music stops
abruptly and then a troop of Fire Nation soldiers storms into the bar.

Most of the people stand stock-still and stare at them in horror. Some try to hide behind some
of the tables, but the majority just seems terrified and doesn’t dare to move.

A tall man, that reminds Sokka faintly of Admiral Zhao, enters at last. The badges on his
chest identify him as a commander of the Army. He looks at the young crowd disparagingly.

“The party is over. Hand over the traitors and nothing will happen to you”, he declares.
“Well, nothing apart from the punishment for your participation in this spectacle.”

Nobody dares to say a word, the crowd collectively holds its breath. Sokka can see the fear in
the other’s eyes. They didn’t expect to be caught, they are confused and don’t understand
what’s happening. At least that, they have in common.

The commander raises an eyebrow expectantly. When nothing happens, he sighs.

“Very well.”

With that, he steps forward and reaches for the closest girl, pulling her to him by tugging at
her hair. Instantly, some of the boys rush forward, but the commander casts a flame into his
hand and holds it close to her face, while his soldiers cast a wall of fire between them and the
young people.

The girl cries and winces, because the man’s hand is buried in her hair and it must be painful.
Her brown eyes shine with tears and she looks terrified.

“Nu-uh. If I was any of you, I would consider my next steps carefully”, he says in a
dangerous voice.

Sokka throws a look at Zuko, who stares at the man with a hateful expression.

“My name is commander Jiwaru and I have been sent here to arrest some people. Those who
are concerned know exactly that I am talking of them. This is your chance to step forward.
I’m waiting.”
Nothing happens, but Sokka gets a feeling, that it’s not a coincidence that such a raid happens
tonight when they are at the bar.

“Nothing? I’m afraid, that will not end well for her.”

With that he motions the hand with the flame closer to her face and she screams in panic. The
high pitched tone hurts, but less in his ears and more in his chest.

Zuko’s frown is deep and there is a dark expression on his face, when he stands up and takes
a step forward. Sokka stares at him.

“Enough! Commander Jiwaru, as your Prince I order you to let her go immediately!”

There’s audible gasps in the audience and everybody is staring at him. Zuko presses his lips
tightly together as he tries to ignore the other teenagers and focuses solely on the commander.
He is used to being faced with a room full of disapproving looks. But somehow this is worse.
He catches a glimpse of Natsu and Yoshi. They look betrayed. Disappointed. Enraged.

Zuko gulps, because he’s ashamed. He stands there, admitting what he really is, a prince
among mere citizens and he feels nothing but shame.

Jiwaru hums contently.

“Ah, there he is. Prince Zuko.”

He smiles sadistically and emphasizes on Zuko’s title.

“I told you to let her go”, Zuko says calmly but the tension is audible in every word.

“Now, if you insist.”

A relieved sob comes over the girl’s lips and she basically crawls back to her friends, who
take her into their middle, where she buries her face against a boy’s chest.

Jiwaru turns back to him and lets his eyes trail over Zuko from head to toe.

“A fine prince you are. The prince of street rats and whores and scum.”

Zuko’s eyes narrow and suddenly he is angry. Jiwaru has no right, no right, to call these good
and honest people anything. He has no right to judge neither them nor Zuko himself. He has
been a punching ball for the entire ton for years. Everybody of rank was allowed to make fun
of him or call him names and he’s just done with that.

He takes another step forward.

“I am the Prince of the Fire Nation, the prince of my people. And neither will you call them
any of those things nor will you talk to me like that.”

Hushed whispers and murmurs go through the crowd, but Zuko pays them no attention. His
eyes are fixed on Jiwaru.

“Unfortunately, I am not taking orders from a traitor. I am here to arrest you and your
attachment for collaborating with the Order of the White Lotus to overthrow the rule of our
rightful Fire Lord Ozai.”

“What?”

The word falls from Zuko’s mouth and he stares at the commander in confusion.

“Don’t deny it. Your uncle has been identified as one of their leaders and he has been arrested
when he tried to protect the Avatar. Fortunately, the Crown Princess Azula knew to prevent
that. We had reliable intel from the Palace, which is how we know that you are involved in
the conspiracy as well.”

Everything falls from Zuko’s face and it feels like his head is spinning. Uncle, a master of the
White Lotus? Arrested?

Zuko shakes his head in confusion.

Behind him there is some rustling, but he’s too captured by Jiwaru to care.

“Today is really a great day for the Fire Nation. We cleansed it from the impurity of treason
and we defeated the Avatar in Ba Sing Se. It’s over.”

Gasps and horrified murmur wander through the room, while Jiwaru puts on a triumphant
smile. Zuko is frozen in his spot and shakes his head again. This can’t be. It’s impossible.
Uncle wanted to visit a friend. It’s impossible, that he ended up in Ba Sing Se. And even if…
it just doesn’t make sense.

A threatening realization dawns on Zuko.

This is the final blow. This is Azula’s or Father’s final plot to end them. He gulps and balls
his hands into fists.

Then, there is a voice coming from his left.

“It is not over”, Sokka declares grimly.

He jumps onto one of the tables and glares at the commander and for a moment Zuko thinks,
that the Water Tribe boy has gone insane.

“No? The Southern Water Tribe has been defeated. Ba Sing Se has fallen and so will the
remaining resisting provinces. The Northern Water Tribe will be destroyed too. It’s a matter
of months, maximum.”
Pain flashes over Sokka’s face, that has turned into a rageful grimace. He turns to the crowd.

“It is not over”, he repeats slowly and loudly. “Not as long as there is hope.”

Zuko looks up to him and gulps, while Jiwaru snorts.

“The Avatar is dead, boy. What kind of hope do you think there is?”

And really, Zuko wants to know that too, because he definitely can’t see it. They’re lost.
They’re done. Who is there to help them, if not the Avatar?

Sokka catches his gaze and the hint of a smile flashes briefly over his lips.

“He’s standing right in front of you.”

The commander stares at Sokka for a second, before he starts to laugh. He laughs so hard that
he almost topples over and he has to hold his belly, because his laughter shakes his whole
body.

Zuko is stunned speechless and his eyes are fixed on Sokka. There’s gratitude, but also pity,
because he simply cannot understand how Sokka can believe in him, when it’s so clearly a
lost cause. It seems like a last desperate act of defiance.

“Oh, this is good, this is really good”, Jiwaru says and wipes a tear out of his eye.

Sokka seems unimpressed, from where he’s still standing on that table.

“If you think, that tyranny is going to win over compassion and justice, Commander, you are
mistaken. There will always be people standing up against oppression. Fire Lord Ozai and his
ancestors did this nation a disservice. Look at them”, Sokka says and motions at the young
people, who are still standing gathered together with shaken expressions on their faces.
“These are good people. They are compassionate, they are driven and joyous and lively. The
Fire Lord, you and many others might think, that you can increase the temperature of fire by
compressing it. No! That way you can only manage to suffocate it. But it will never thrive.”

Zuko sees many heads go up at Sokka’s words and he’s completely baffled by Sokka’s
display of compassion towards a nation, that is not his own.

Jiwaru straightens and glares at the Water Tribe boy.

“Watch your mouth, Boy! The Fire Lord’s rule is just and glorious. You are the traitors! Did
you really think a misfit like this one over here would ever be capable of leading a nation?”

“I do.”

It comes without hesitation and Zuko holds his breath, when Sokka goes on.

“Not only because it is in his blood. But because Zuko cares. He cares about everyone. He
stood up for his own people and sacrificed his own safety, his own face. He cares about those
who are sent to war and those who are left behind. He cares about the people in the colonies,
the people in the homeland, about people who are not even part of the Fire Nation.”

Sokka talks about a man much better than he really is and the most shocking realization to
Zuko is, that he means it. This is how Sokka sees him. It’s wonderful and terrifying that there
is not a single doubt in his voice.

“Enough of that sentimental bullshit. Any last words?”, Jiwaru asks, obviously completely
immune to Sokka’s passionate words.

The Water Tribe boy shrugs. “Sure, I’ll grant you those.”

Jiwaru growls. It is an outraged sound full of uncontrolled anger and Zuko watches in horror
how he throws a giant ball of fire at Sokka, who evades it with a swift motion. Just as swiftly
his boomerang is suddenly flying through the air, seemingly out of nowhere. It hits the
commander’s forehead and leaves an impressive cut on the skin.

While Sokka smiles grimly as he catches his weapon, the commander sees red.

“At them!”, he roars and this is what sets the things into motion.

The soldiers get into stance and cast their flames. Zuko knows that he and Sokka will never
stand a chance against so many opponents, but he’s not going to give up without a fight. He
gets into a defensive stance as well and braces himself for the attack.

Then, there is a hesitant yell behind him. It’s from Kousei. Then there’s another one as
Natsu’s voice joins him. A moment later most of the young men raise their hands into the air
and surge forward, benders and nonbenders, and among them are also some girls that have
bending powers and they definitely have the element of surprise on their side.

Zuko looks at them just as dumbstruck as the Fire Nation soldiers.

When he spots a movement from the corner of his eye, he turns. It’s Sokka, who hurries to
grab some of the decorative swords from the wall. He jumps from the table and shoves one
into Zuko’s hands and together they launch forward, each attacking a soldier that is coming at
them.

It’s chaos.

Fires erupt everywhere and spreads quickly.

Blood runs over Jiwaru’s brows and down his nose and the commander seems determined to
burn the whole place down. As Zuko swirls around himself, knocking out another soldier, he
does feel like a traitor, because these men are not his enemies. He doesn’t want to believe
they are. But there’s no time to think about that.

It’s complete chaos.

There’s painful screams, when some of the girls who do not participate in the fight are hit.
Their cries ring in Zuko’s ears and he knows the pain, better than anyone else. It sparks his
fury. He looks around to find them a safe exit, but the soldiers are still blocking the door.

Jiwaru is after him. The commander’s eyes are solely fixed on Zuko, he throws punch after
punch of fire at him and though Zuko manages to evade the attacks, he suddenly realizes that
he walked right into the commander’s trap. The man maneuvered him right to where the non-
fighting girls are gathered and watch the combat with fearful expressions.

Jiwaru laughs grimly and throws a ball of fire at their feet. They cry out and press themselves
further against each other, further against the wall, but there is no more place to retreat. The
flames dance dangerously close to their legs and Zuko sees tears run over their cheeks. They
are scared for their very lifes.

“How many of them are you willing to sacrifice?”, Jiwaru asks him with a sadistic smile.

It’s those words, that make something inside of Zuko snap, he throws the sword to the ground
with a clattering noise and concentrates on the flames to his feet, forcing them down with a
motion that waterbenders use to calm the waves.

Jiwaru clenches his jaw. He doesn’t relent, but Zuko won’t allow him to hurt any of those
innocent people behind him.

He stands his ground and makes the flames vanish by basically trying to catch them. Jiwaru
is careful at first, obviously waiting for Zuko’s counter attack. When he realizes that there is
none to come, he laughs and sends an endless stream of fire at Zuko, who tries with all his
might to absorb it somehow to make it vanish before it can touch any of the girls. The heat is
intense and he struggles. Fire licks over his arms, it stings, but not enough to really burn and
hurt him like his father’s fire did once. But Zuko knows that he can’t keep it up for long. It’s
exhausting and he feels the energy drag out of him. He realizes that uncle did go easy on him,
despite his promises not to hold back. Jiwaru is not the strongest bender he has ever faced,
but Zuko is not sure how long he’ll be able to keep his defense up.

And just when he thinks that his knees are about to give in, there’s a loud ‘plonk’ and Jiwaru
topples over, unconscious. Sokka is standing there with a grim smile. He knocked the
commander out by hitting the back of his head with a flail that he must have picked from the
wall decorations as well.

“Huh, that came in handy”, he says and a relieved sigh comes over Zuko’s lips.

He looks around and finds that they managed to take out all the soldiers, but the result is
devastating. There’s wounds and blood, burns and broken bones. There are some motionless
bodies on the floor and Zuko really hopes, that they are only unconscious because he couldn’t
bear the alternative. He feels a little dizzy, as if a weight is pressing down on his mind and he
squints his eyes. He doesn’t dare to look at anyone just yet.

“C’mon, we’ve got to go”, Natsu says.

He and Yoshi are suddenly standing next to them. Yoshi has a bloody nose and Natsu’s
hairline is singed, there is a burn on his arm, but otherwise they seem uninjured.
“Go where?”, Zuko asks in confusion.

“We can discuss that, once we’re on the way. We need to hurry now!”

They are probably right, Zuko thinks. But he feels terrible when he only thinks about leaving
this mess behind. These people will have to deal with the consequences for sure. And all of
that, just because they were after him and Sokka. How can he run like a coward and let them
handle the aftermath on their own?

Finally, he dares to look at the terrified faces around him. There are disbelieving looks,
questioning looks as if they are not sure what to make of him, of what just happened. But
there are also grateful ones and Zuko is completely lost as to what to say. Yoshi hits him hard
against his shoulder.

“If he’s right and if you are the only hope that is left, then we must not waste any more time.
We have to go!”

Zuko gulps, but Sokka nods encouragingly at him, so he gets into motion.

He’s almost at the door, when a voice pipes up behind him.

“Prince Zuko.”

It’s Cho Lee, quiet but grateful and fortunately unharmed.

He looks at her wide-eyed and even though he’s sure to see reproach in her expression, she
lowers her head respectfully and mumbles his name again. And then, one by one, the girls
who stood behind him as he tried to protect them from Jiwaru do the same, and then
reluctantly so do the guys. Some only nod shortly at him, but everybody in the room shows
his respect and there’s a lump in his throat, that makes it hard to breathe.

One of the soldiers on the floor groans.

“We need to get out of here”, Sokka urges him gently.

Zuko nods through the haze of his mind and takes a last look at the crowd.

“Run. Get out of here, save yourselves.”

And with that, he follows Sokka and Yoshi into the night, while Natsu is right behind him.

They hurry through the darkness, Zuko has absolutely no idea where to, but he doesn’t have a
choice. He has to trust those people, who have no reason to trust him. But they do,
apparently.

At some point Zuko realizes that they are going downwards, to the sea and not long after that
a large building comes into sight. It’s the shipyard of Ember Port.

Natsu quickly opens the gate and Yoshi helps them climb into a boat, that this still on the
drydock. The mast is not finished yet. Quickly, the two boat builders set up a small sail and
Natsu hurries to get a bigger one from another boat that is tied in the water. Sokka and Yoshi
take it from him and pull it onto deck.

Zuko reaches his hand out, to help Natsu onto the boat as well, but the firebender shakes his
head.

“I can’t come with you”, he says, before he looks at Sokka. “But as you are from the Water
Tribe, I trust that you know how to sail.”

“Are you kidding? Of course I know”, Sokka protests.

Zuko throws a questioning look at Natsu. If anyone has a good reason to come with them, it’s
him to avoid the convocation to the Fire Nation Army.

“I will join the forces tomorrow. But know that there is someone in there, who you can rely
on, if need be. Yoshi and the others will know how to reach me. Good luck.”

With that, he unlocks a lever and the ship glides from the dock smoothly into the water.

While Zuko stands and watches speechless how Natsu is left behind, Sokka and Yoshi set up
the bigger sail as good as they can under the circumstances and soon Ember Port disappears
behind them and they become one with the night.

Zuko realizes that he’s shaking.

He can’t believe that this just happened. That he stood up against a commander and attacked
him. That Sokka and him basically got all those innocent involved in their drama. That Uncle
should be a leader of the White Lotus and that he’s been arrested. That the Avatar is dead.

His mind is swirling and then, the weight pressing down on it becomes too much and Zuko
passes out.

Everything is blurred. Zuko squints his eyes, but the brownish-yellow fog in front of him
won’t disappear. He groans.

He’s in that strange state between dream and consciousness and he feels a familiar presence
hovering over him, but something is different. The elder doesn’t materialize like he usually
does.

“I see, that you have followed my advice, Prince Zuko. You decided to make yourself be
seen”, the old man says. He sounds tired, exhausted even, but also proud.

“I did. Though I am not sure, if it was good timing and how much good is going to come out
of it. I think I have made so many people’s life a lot more difficult tonight.”

“For good reason”, the elder objects.

Zuko shrugs and waves a hand in front of his eyes, but the fog stays.

“I’m not sure. My uncle got arrested. They say that he is part of a secret society and involved
in a conspiracy against the Fire Lord. And that the… the Avatar is dead. It seems I joined the
fight, when it’s already lost.”

The elder hums thoughtfully.

“You have made your choice, Prince Zuko. And you should not regret it. The fight might not
be lost just yet.”

“But the Avatar-“

“Is not dead”, the old man states, sounding sure. “He is gravely injured. But not dead.”

“How would you know?”, Zuko asks and suddenly he understands. “You are a former Avatar,
aren’t you? Is that why everything is so blurred? Because he is injured?”

“Yes, I have been the Avatar once.”

Zuko frowns and recalls the man’s face. He’s clearly Fire Nation.

“You are Avatar Roku, are you not?”

“I am, my Prince.”

Roku seems pleased, that he finally understood, but Zuko is more confused than ever.

“But… how is it possible, that you can talk to me? I mean, I am clearly not the Avatar, so
how-?”

“No you’re not. But time is a funny thing and your fates are tied together. I am a part of
Avatar Aang’s past, but I am also a part of your past, Prince Zuko.”

A hand settles on his shoulder, the fog clears and when Zuko looks up, he sees Roku smiling
warmly at him.

“I am your great-grandfather.”
Please drop by the Archive and comment to let the creator know if you enjoyed their work!